The Human Body in Symbolism

THE oldest, the most profound, the most universal of all symbols is the human body. The Greeks, Persians, Egyptians, and Hindus
considered a philosophical analysis of man's triune nature to be an indispensable part of ethical and religious training. The
Mysteries of every nation taught that the laws, elements, and powers of the universe were epitomized in the human constitution;
that everything which existed outside of man had its analogue within man. The universe, being immeasurable in its immensity and
inconceivable in its profundity, was beyond mortal estimation. Even the gods themselves could comprehend but a part of the
inaccessible glory which was their source. When temporarily permeated with divine enthusiasm, man may transcend for a brief
moment the limitations of his own personality and behold in part that celestial effulgence in which all creation is bathed. But even in
his periods of greatest illumination man is incapable of imprinting upon the substance of his rational soul a perfect image of the
multiform expression of celestial activity. Recognizing the futility of attempting to cope intellectually with that which transcends the
comprehension of the rational faculties, the early philosophers turned their attention from the inconceivable Divinity to man himself,
with in the narrow confines of whose nature they found manifested all the mysteries of the external spheres. As the natural
outgrowth of this practice there was fabricated a secret theological system in which God was considered as the Grand Man and,
conversely, man as the little god. Continuing this analogy, the universe was regarded as a man and, conversely, man as a miniature
universe. The greater universe was termed the Macrocosm--the Great World or Body--and the Divine Life or spiritual entity
controlling its functions was called the Macroprosophus. Man's body, or the individual human universe, was termed the Microcosm,
and the Divine Life or spiritual entity controlling its functions was called the Microprosophus. The pagan Mysteries were primarily
concerned with instructing neophytes in the true relationship existing between the Macrocosm and the Microcosm--in other words,
between God and man. Accordingly, the key to these analogies between the organs and functions of the Microcosmic man and
those of the Macrocosmic Man constituted the most prized possession of the early initiates. In Isis Unveiled, H. P. Blavatsky
summarizes the pagan concept of man as follows: "Man is a little world--a microcosm inside the great universe. Like a fetus, he is
suspended, by all his three spirits, in the matrix of the macrocosmos; and while his terrestrial body is in constant sympathy with its
parent earth, his astral soul lives in unison with the sidereal anima mundi. He is in it, as it is in him, for the world-pervading element
fills all space, and is space itself, only shoreless and infinite. As to his third spirit, the divine, what is it but an infinitesimal ray, one of
the countless radiations proceeding directly from the Highest Cause--the Spiritual Light of the World? This is the trinity of organic
and inorganic nature--the spiritual and the physical, which are three in one, and of which Proclus says that 'The first monad is the
Eternal God; the second, eternity; the third, the paradigm, or pattern of the universe;' the three constituting the Intelligible Triad."
Long before the introduction of idolatry into religion, the early priests caused the statue of a man to be placed in the sanctuary of the
temple. This human figure symbolized the Divine Power in all its intricate manifestations. Thus the priests of antiquity accepted man
as their textbook, and through the study of him learned to understand the greater and more abstruse mysteries of the celestial
scheme of which they were a part. It is not improbable that this mysterious figure standing over the primitive altars was made in the
nature of a manikin and, like certain emblematic hands in the Mystery schools, was covered with either carved or painted
hieroglyphs. The statue may have opened, thus showing the relative positions of the organs, bones, muscles, nerves, and other
parts. After ages of research, the manikin became a mass of intricate hieroglyphs and symbolic figures. Every part had its secret
meaning. The measurements formed a basic standard by means of which it was possible to measure all parts of cosmos. It was a
glorious composite emblem of all the knowledge possessed by the sages and hierophants. Then came the age of idolatry. The
Mysteries decayed from within. The secrets were lost and none knew the identity of the mysterious man who stood over the altar. It
was remembered only that the figure was a sacred and glorious symbol of the Universal Power, and it: finally came to be looked
upon as a god--the One in whose image man was made. Having lost the knowledge of the purpose for which the manikin was
originally constructed, the priests worshiped this effigy until at last their lack of spiritual understanding brought the temple down in
ruins about their heads and the statue crumbled with the civilization that had forgotten its meaning. Proceeding from this assumption
of the first theologians that man is actually fashioned in the image of God, the initiated minds of past ages erected the stupendous
structure of theology upon the foundation of the human body. The religious world of today is almost totally ignorant of the fact that
the science of biology is the fountainhead of its doctrines and tenets. Many of the codes and laws believed by modern divines to
have been direct revelations from Divinity are in reality the fruitage of ages of patient delving into the intricacies of the human
constitution and the infinite wonders revealed by such a study. In nearly all the sacred books of the world can be traced an
anatomical analogy. This is most evident in their creation myths. Anyone familiar with embryology and obstetrics will have no
difficulty in recognizing the basis of the allegory concerning Adam and Eve and the Garden of Eden, the nine degrees of the
Eleusinian Mysteries, and the Brahmanic legend of Vishnu's incarnations. The story of the Universal Egg, the Scandinavian myth of
Ginnungagap (the dark cleft in space in which the seed of the world is sown), and the use of the fish as the emblem of the paternal
generative power--all show the true origin of theological speculation. The philosophers of antiquity realized that man himself was the
key to the riddle of life, for he was the living image of the Divine Plan, and in future ages humanity also will come to realize more
fully the solemn import of those ancient words: "The proper study of mankind is man." Both God and man have a twofold
constitution, of which the superior part is invisible and the inferior visible. In both there is also an intermediary sphere, marking the
point where these visible and invisible natures meet. As the spiritual nature of God controls His objective universal form-which is
actually a crystallized idea--so the spiritual nature of man is the invisible cause and controlling power of his visible material
personality. Thus it is evident that the spirit of man bears the same relationship to his material body that God bears to the objective
universe. The Mysteries taught that spirit, or life, was anterior to form and that what is anterior includes all that is posterior to itself.
Spirit being anterior to form, form is therefore included within the realm of spirit. It is also a popular statement or belief that man's
spirit is within his body. According to the conclusions of philosophy and theology, however, this belief is erroneous, for spirit first
circumscribes an area and then manifests within it. Philosophically speaking, form, being a part of spirit, is within spirit; but: spirit is
more than the sum of form, As the material nature of man is therefore within the sum of spirit, so the Universal Nature, including the
entire sidereal system, is within the all-pervading essence of God--the Universal Spirit. According to another concept of the ancient
wisdom, all bodies--whether spiritual or material--have three centers, called by the Greeks the upper center, the middle center, and
the lower center. An apparent ambiguity will here be noted. To diagram or symbolize adequately abstract mental verities is
impossible, for the diagrammatic representation of one aspect of metaphysical relationships may be an actual contradiction of some
other aspect. While that which is above is generally considered superior in dignity and power, in reality that which is in the center is
superior and anterior to both that which is said to be above and that which is said to be below. Therefore, it must be said that the
first--which is considered as being above--is actually in the center, while both of the others (which are said to be either above or
below) are actually beneath. This point can be further simplified if the reader will consider above as indicating degree of proximity to
source and below as indicating degree of distance from source, source being posited in the actual center and relative distance
being the various points along the radii from the center toward the circumference. In matters pertaining to philosophy and theology,
up may be considered as toward the center and down as toward the circumference. Center is spirit; circumference is matter.
Therefore, up is toward spirit along an ascending scale of spirituality; down is toward matter along an ascending scale of materiality.
The latter concept is partly expressed by the apex of a cone which, when viewed from above, is seen as a point in the exact center
of the circumference formed by the base of the cone. These three universal centers--the one above, the one below, and the link
uniting them-represent three suns or three aspects of one sun--centers of effulgence. These also have their analogues in the three
grand centers of the human body, which, like the physical universe, is a Demiurgic fabrication. "The first of these [suns]," says
Thomas Taylor, "is analogous to light when viewed subsisting in its fountain the sun; the second to the light immediately proceeding
from the sun; and the third to the splendour communicated to other natures by this light." Since the superior (or spiritual) center is in
the midst of the other two, its analogue in the physical body is the heart--the most spiritual and mysterious organ in the human body.
The second center (or the link between the superior and inferior worlds) is elevated to the position of greatest physical dignity--the
brain. The third (or lower) center is relegated to the position of least physical dignity but greatest physical importance--the
generative system. Thus the heart is symbolically the source of life; the brain the link by which, through rational intelligence, life and
form are united; and the generative system--or infernal creator--the source of that power by which physical organisms are produced.
The ideals and aspirations of the individual depend largely upon which of these three centers of power predominates in scope and
activity of expression. In the materialist the lower center is the strongest, in the intellectualist the higher center; but in the initiate the
middle center--by bathing the two extremes in a flood of spiritual effulgence--controls wholesomely both the mind and the body. As
light bears witness of life-which is its source-so the mind bears witness of the spirit, and activity in a still lower plane bears witness
of intelligence. Thus the mind bears witness of the heart, while the generative system, in turn, bears witness of the mind.
Accordingly, the spiritual nature is most commonly symbolized by a heart; the intellectual power by an opened eye, symbolizing the
pineal gland or Cyclopean eye, which is the two-faced Janus of the pagan Mysteries; and the generative system by a flower, a staff,
a cup, or a hand. While all the Mysteries recognized the heart as the center of spiritual consciousness, they often purposely ignored
this concept and used the heart in its exoteric sense as the symbol of the emotional nature, In this arrangement the generative
center represented the physical body, the heart the emotional body, and the brain the mental body. The brain represented the
superior sphere, but after the initiates had passed through the lower degrees they were instructed that the brain was the proxy of
the spiritual flame dwelling in the innermost recesses of the heart. The student of esotericism discovers ere long that the ancients
often resorted to various blinds to conceal the true interpretations of their Mysteries. The substitution of the brain for the heart was
one of these blinds. The three degrees of the ancient Mysteries were, with few exceptions, given in chambers which represented
the three great centers of the human and Universal bodies. If possible, the temple itself was constructed in the form of the human
body. The candidate entered between the feet and received the highest degree in the point corresponding to the brain. Thus the first
degree was the material mystery and its symbol was the generative system; it raised the candidate through the various degrees of
concrete thought. The second degree was given in the chamber corresponding to the heart, but represented the middle power
which was the mental link. Here the candidate was initiated into the mysteries of abstract thought and lifted as high as the mind was
capable of penetrating. He then passed into the third chamber, which, analogous to the brain, occupied the highest position in the
temple but, analogous to the heart, was of the greatest dignity. In the brain chamber the heart mystery was given. Here the initiate
for the first time truly comprehended the meaning of those immortal words: "As a man thinketh in his heart, so is he." As there are
seven hearts in the brain so there are seven brains in the heart, but this is a matter of superphysics of which little can be said at the
present time. Proclus writes on this subject in the first book of On the Theology of Plato: "Indeed, Socrates in the (First) Alcibiades
rightly observes, that the soul entering into herself will behold all other things, and deity itself. For verging to her own union, and to
the centre of all life, laying aside multitude, and the variety of the all manifold powers which she contains, she ascends to the
highest watch-tower offerings. And as in the most holy of the mysteries, they say, that the mystics at first meet with the multi form,
and many-shaped genera, which are hurled forth before the gods, but on entering the temple, unmoved, and guarded by the mystic
rites, they genuinely receive in their bosom [heart] divine illumination, and divested of their garments, as they would say, participate
of a divine nature; the same mode, as it appears to me, takes place in the speculation of wholes. For the soul when looking at things
posterior to herself, beholds the shadows and images of beings, but when she converts herself to herself she evolves her own
essence, and the reasons which she contains. And at first indeed, she only as it were beholds herself; but, when she penetrates
more profoundly into the knowledge of herself, she finds in herself both intellect, and the orders of beings. When however, she
proceeds into her interior recesses, and into the adytum as it were of the soul, she perceives with her eye closed [without the aid of
the lower mind], the genus of the gods, and the unities of beings. For all things are in us psychically, and through this we are
naturally capable of knowing all things, by exciting the powers and the images of wholes which we contain." The initiates of old
warned their disciples that an image is not a reality but merely the objectification of a subjective idea. The image, of the gods were
nor designed to be objects of worship but were to be regarded merely as emblems or reminders of invisible powers and principles.
Similarly, the body of man must not be considered as the individual but only as the house of the individual, in the same manner that
the temple was the House of God. In a state of grossness and perversion man's body is the tomb or prison of a divine principle; in a
state of unfoldment and regeneration it is the House or Sanctuary of the Deity by whose creative powers it was fashioned.
"Personality is suspended upon a thread from the nature of Being," declares the secret work. Man is essentially a permanent and
immortal principle; only his bodies pass through the cycle of birth and death. The immortal is the reality; the mortal is the unreality.
During each period of earth life, reality thus dwells in unreality, to be liberated from it temporarily by death and permanently by
illumination. While generally regarded as polytheists, the pagans gained this reputation not because they worshiped more than one
God but rather because they personified the attributes of this God, thereby creating a pantheon of posterior deities each manifesting
a part of what the One God manifested as a whole. The various pantheons of ancient religions therefore actually represent the
catalogued and personified attributes of Deity. In this respect they correspond to the hierarchies of the Hebrew Qabbalists. All the
gods and goddesses of antiquity consequently have their analogies in the human body, as have also the elements, planets, and
constellations which were assigned as proper vehicles for these celestials. Four body centers are assigned to the elements, the
seven vital organs to the planets, the twelve principal parts and members to the zodiac, the invisible parts of man's divine nature to
various supermundane deities, while the hidden God was declared to manifest through the marrow in the bones. It is difficult for
many to realize that they are actual universes; that their physical bodies are a visible nature through the structure of which countless
waves of evolving life are unfolding their latent potentialities. Yet through man's physical body not only are a mineral, a plant, and an
animal kingdom evolving, but also unknown classifications and divisions of invisible spiritual life. just as cells are infinitesimal units
in the structure of man, so man is an infinitesimal unit in the structure of the universe. A theology based upon the knowledge and
appreciation of these relationships is as profoundly just as it is profoundly true. As man's physical body has five distinct and
important extremities--two legs, two arms, and a head, of which the last governs the first four--the number 5 has been accepted as
the symbol of man. By its four corners the pyramid symbolizes the arms and legs, and by its apex the head, thus indicating that one
rational power controls four irrational corners. The hands and feet are used to represent the four elements, of which the two feet are
earth and water, and the two hands fire and air. The brain then symbolizes the sacred fifth element--æther--which controls and
unites the other four. If the feet are placed together and the arms outspread, man then symbolizes the cross with the rational
intellect as the head or upper limb. The fingers and toes also have special significance. The toes represent the Ten Commandments
of the physical law and the fingers the Ten Commandments of the spiritual law. The four fingers of each hand represent the four
elements and the three phalanges of each finger represent the divisions of the element, so that in each hand there are twelve parts
to the fingers, which are analogous to the signs of the zodiac, whereas the two phalanges and base of each thumb signify the
threefold Deity. The first phalange corresponds to the creative aspect, the second to the preservative aspect, and the base to the
generative and destructive aspect. When the hands are brought together, the result is the twenty-four Elders and the six Days of
Creation. In symbolism the body is divided vertically into halves, the right half being considered as light and the left half as
darkness. By those unacquainted with the true meanings of light and darkness the light half was denominated spiritual and the left
half material. Light is the symbol of objectivity; darkness of subjectivity. Light is a manifestation of life and is therefore posterior to
life. That which is anterior to light is darkness, in which light exists temporarily but darkness permanently. As life precedes light, its
only symbol is darkness, and darkness is considered as the veil which must eternally conceal the true nature of abstract and
undifferentiated Being. In ancient times men fought with their right arms and defended the vital centers with their left arms, on which
was carried the protecting shield. The right half of the body was regarded therefore as offensive and the left half defensive. For this
reason also the right side of the body was considered masculine and the left side feminine. Several authorities are of the opinion
that the present prevalent right-handedness of the race is the outgrowth of the custom of holding the left hand in restraint for
defensive purposes. Furthermore, as the source of Being is in the primal darkness which preceded light, so the spiritual nature of
man is in the dark part of his being, for the heart is on the left side. Among the curious misconceptions arising from the false
practice of associating darkness with evil is one by which several early nations used the right hand for all constructive labors and
the left hand for only those purposes termed unclean and unfit for the sight of the gods. For the same reason black magic was often
referred to as the left-hand path, and heaven was said to be upon the right and hell upon the left. Some philosophers further
declared that there were two methods of writing: one from left to right, which was considered the exoteric method; the other from
right to left, which was considered esoteric. The exoteric writing was that which was done out or away from the heart, while the
esoteric writing was that which--like the ancient Hebrew--was written toward the heart. The secret doctrine declares that every part
and member of the body is epitomized in the brain and, in turn, that all that is in the brain is epitomized in the heart. In symbolism
the human head is frequently used to represent intelligence and self-knowledge. As the human body in its entirety is the most
perfect known product of the earth's evolution, it was employed to represent Divinity--the highest appreciable state or condition.
Artists, attempting to portray Divinity, often show only a hand emerging from an impenetrable cloud. The cloud signifies the
Unknowable Divinity concealed from man by human limitation. The hand signifies the Divine activity, the only part of God which is
cognizable to the lower senses. The face consists of a natural trinity: the eyes representing the spiritual power which comprehends;
the nostrils representing the preservative and vivifying power; and the mouth and ears representing the material Demiurgic power of
the lower world. The first sphere is eternally existent and is creative; the second sphere pertains to the mystery of the creative
breach; and the third sphere to the creative word. By the Word of God the material universe was fabricated, and the seven creative
powers, or vowel sounds--which had been brought into existence by the speaking of the Word--became the seven Elohim or Deities
by whose power and ministration the lower world was organized. Occasionally the Deity is symbolized by an eye, an ear, a nose, or
a mouth. By the first, Divine awareness is signified; by the second, Divine interest; by the third, Divine vitality; and by the fourth,
Divine command. The ancients did not believe that spirituality made men either righteous or rational, but rather that righteousness
and rationality made men spiritual. The Mysteries taught that spiritual illumination was attained only by bringing the lower nature up
to a certain standard of efficiency and purity. The Mysteries were therefore established for the purpose of unfolding the nature of
man according to certain fixed rules which, when faithfully followed, elevated the human consciousness to a point where it was
capable of cognizing its own constitution and the true purpose of existence. This knowledge of how man's manifold constitution
could be most quickly and most completely regenerated to the point of spiritual illumination constituted the secret, or esoteric,
doctrine of antiquity. Certain apparently physical organs and centers are in reality the veils or sheaths of spiritual centers. What
these were and how they could be unfolded was never revealed to the unregenerate, for the philosophers realized that once he
understands the complete working of any system, a man may accomplish a prescribed end without being qualified to manipulate
and control the effects which he has produced. For this reason long periods of probation were imposed, so that the knowledge of
how to become as the gods might remain the sole possession of the worthy. Lest that knowledge be lost, however, it was concealed
in allegories and myths which were meaningless to the profane but self-evident to those acquainted with that theory of personal
redemption which was the foundation of philosophical theology. Christianity itself may be cited as an example. The entire New
Testament is in fact an ingeniously concealed exposition of the secret processes of human regeneration. The characters so long
considered as historical men and women are really the personification of certain processes which take place in the human body
when man begins the task of consciously liberating himself from the bondage of ignorance and death. The garments and
ornamentations supposedly worn by the gods are also keys, for in the Mysteries clothing was considered as synonymous with form.
The degree of spirituality or materiality of the organisms was signified by the quality, beauty, and value of the garments worn. Man's
physical body was looked upon as the robe of his spiritual nature; consequently, the more developed were his super-substantial
powers the more glorious his apparel. Of course, clothing was originally worn for ornamentation rather than protection, and such
practice still prevails among many primitive peoples. The Mysteries caught that man's only lasting adornments were his virtues and
worthy characteristics; that he was clothed in his own accomplishments and adorned by his attainments. Thus the white robe was
symbolic of purity, the red robe of sacrifice and love, and the blue robe of altruism and integrity. Since the body was said to be the
robe of the spirit, mental or moral deformities were depicted as deformities of the body. Considering man's body as the measuring
rule of the universe, the philosophers declared that all things resemble in constitution--if not in form--the human body. The Greeks,
for example, declared Delphi to be the navel of the earth, for the physical planet was looked upon as a gigantic human being twisted
into the form of a ball. In contradistinction to the belief of Christendom that the earth is an inanimate thing, the pagans considered
not only the earth but also all the sidereal bodies as individual creatures possessing individual intelligences. They even went so far
as to view the various kingdoms of Nature as individual entities. The animal kingdom, for example, was looked upon as one being--
a composite of all the creatures composing that kingdom. This prototypic beast was a mosaic embodiment of all animal propensities
and within its nature the entire animal world existed as the human species exists within the constitution of the prototypic Adam. In
the same manner, races, nations, tribes, religions, states, communities, and cities were viewed as composite entities, each made up
of varying numbers of individual units. Every community has an individuality which is the sum of the individual attitudes of its
inhabitants. Every religion is an individual whose body is made up of a hierarchy and vast host of individual worshipers. The
organization of any religion represents its physical body, and its individual members the cell life making up this organism.
Accordingly, religions, races, and communities--like individuals--pass through Shakespeare's Seven Ages, for the life of man is a
standard by which the perpetuity of all things is estimated. According to the secret doctrine, man, through the gradual refinement of
his vehicles and the ever-increasing sensitiveness resulting from that refinement, is gradually overcoming the limitations of matter
and is disentangling himself from his mortal coil. When humanity has completed its physical evolution, the empty shell of materiality
left behind will be used by other life waves as steppingstones to their own liberation. The trend of man's evolutionary growth is ever
toward his own essential Selfhood. At the point of deepest materialism, therefore, man is at the greatest distance from Himself.
According to the Mystery teachings, not all the spiritual nature of man incarnates in matter. The spirit of man is diagrammatically
shown as an equilateral triangle with one point downward. This lower point, which is one-third of the spiritual nature but in
comparison to the dignity of the other two is much less than a third, descends into the illusion of material existence for a brief space
of time. That which never clothes itself in the sheath of matter is the Hermetic Anthropos--the Overman-- analogous to the Cyclops
or guardian dæmon of the Greeks, the angel of Jakob Böhme, and the Oversoul of Emerson, "that Unity, that Oversoul, within which
every man's particular being is contained and made one with all other." At birth only a third part of the Divine Nature of man
temporarily dissociates itself from its own immortality and takes upon itself the dream of physical birth and existence, animating with
its own celestial enthusiasm a vehicle composed of material elements, part of and bound to the material sphere. At death this
incarnated part awakens from the dream of physical existence and reunites itself once more with its eternal condition. This
periodical descent of spirit into matter is termed the wheel of life and death, and the principles involved are treated at length by the
philosophers under the subject of metempsychosis. By initiation into the Mysteries and a certain process known as operative
theology, this law of birth and death is transcended, and during the course of physical existence that part of the spirit which is
asleep in form is awakened without the intervention of death--the inevitable Initiator--and is consciously reunited with the Anthropos,
or the overshadowing substance of itself. This is at once the primary purpose and the consummate achievement of the Mysteries:
that man shall become aware of and consciously be reunited with the divine source of himself without tasting of physical dissolution.

The Tetragrammaton, or four-lettered Name of God, is here arranged as a

tetractys within the inverted human heart. Beneath, the name Jehovah is shown
transformed into Jehoshua by the interpolation of the radiant Hebrew letter ‫סה‬,
Shin. The drawing as a whole represents the throne of God and His hierarchies
within the heart of man. In the first book of his Libri Apologetici, Jakob Böhme thus
describes the meaning of the symbol: "For we men have one book in common
which points to God. Each has it within himself, which is the priceless Name of
God. Its letters are the flames of His love, which He out of His heart in the
priceless Name of Jesus has revealed in us. Read these letters in your hearts and
spirits and you have books enough. All the writings of the children of God direct
you unto that one book, for therein lie all the treasures of wisdom. * * * This book is
Christ in you."

Upon the twelve phalanges of the fingers, appear the likenesses of the Apostles, each
bearing its own appropriate symbol. In the case of those who suffered martyrdom the
symbol signifies the instrument of death. Thus, the symbol of St. Andrew is a cross; of
St. Thomas, a javelin or a builder's square; of St. James the Less, a club; of St Philip,
a cross; of St. Bartholomew, a large knife or scimitar; of St. Matthew, a sword or spear
(sometimes a purse); of St. Simon, a club or saw; of St. Matthias, an axe; and of St.
Judas, a halbert. The Apostles whose symbols do not elate to their martyrdom are St.
Peter, who carries two crossed keys, one gold and one silver; St. James the Great,
who bears a pilgrim's staff and an escalop shell; and St. John, who holds a cup from
which the poison miraculously departed in the form of a serpent. (See Handbook of
Christian Symbolism.) The figure of Christ upon the second phalange of the thumb
does not follow the pagan system of assigning the first Person of the Creative Triad to
this Position. God the Father should occupy the second Phalange, God the Son the
first phalange, while to God the Holy Spirit is assigned the base of the thumb.--Also,
according to the Philosophic arrangement, the Virgin should occupy the base of the
thumb, which is sacred to the moon.
Johann Georg Gichtel, a profound Philosopher and mystic, the most illumined of the disciples of Jakob Böhme, secretly circulated
the above diagrams among a small group of devoted friends and students. Gichtel republished the writings of Böhme, illustrating
them with numerous remarkable figures. According to Gichtel, the diagrams above, represent the anatomy of the divine (or inner)
man, and graphically set forth its condition during its human, infernal, and divine states. The plates in the William Law edition of
Böhme's works are based apparently upon Gichtel's diagrams, which they follow in all essentials. Gichtel gives no detailed
description of his figures, and the lettering on the original diagrams here translated out of the German is the only clue to the
interpretation of the charts. The two end figures represent the obverse and reverse of the same diagram and are termed Table
Three. They are "designed to show the Condition of the whole Man, as to all his three essential Parts, Spirit, Soul, and Body, in his
Regenerated State." The third figure from the left is called the Second Table, and sets forth "the Condition of Man in his old, lapsed,
and corrupted State; without any respect to, or consideration of his renewing by regeneration." The third figure, however, does not
correspond with the First Table of William Law. The First Table presumably represents the condition of humanity before the Fall, but
the Gichtel plate pertains to the third, or regenerated, state of mankind. William Law thus describes the purpose of the diagrams,
and the symbols upon them: "These three tables are designed to represent Man in his different Threefold State: the First before his
Fall, in Purity, Dominion, and Glory: the Second after his Fall, in Pollution and Perdition: and the Third in his rising from the Fall, or
on the Way of regeneration, in Sanctification and Tendency to his last Perfection." The student of
Orientalism will immediately recognize in the symbols upon the figures the
Hindu chakras, or centers of spiritual force, the various motions and aspects
of which reveal the condition of the disciple's internal divine nature. Just as
the diagram representing the front view of man illustrates his divine principles
in their regenerated state, so the back view of the same figure sets forth the
inferior, or "night," condition of the sun. From the Sphere of the Astral Mind a
line ascends through the Sphere of reason into that of the Senses. The
Sphere of the Astral Mind and of the Senses are filled with stars to signify the
nocturnal condition of their natures. In the sphere of reason, the superior and
the inferior are reconciled, Reason in the mortal man corresponding to
Illumined Understanding in the spiritual man. A tree with its roots in the heart
rises from the Mirror of the Deity through the Sphere of the Understanding to
branch forth in the Sphere of the Senses. The roots and trunk of this tree
represent the divine nature of man and may be called his spirituality; the
branches of the tree are the separate parts of the divine constitution and may
be likened to the individuality; and the leaves--because of their ephemeral
nature--correspond to the personality, which partakes of none of the
permanence of its divine source.
 CHAKRAS

Chakra is a concept referring to wheel-like vortices which, according to traditional Indian medicine, are believed to exist in the
surface of the etheric double of man. The Chakras are said to be "force centers" or whorls of energy permeating, from a point on the
physical body, the layers of the subtle bodies in an ever-increasing fan-shaped formation. Rotating vortices of subtle matter, they
are considered the focal points for the reception and transmission of energies. Different systems posit a varying number of chakras;
the most well known system in the West is that of seven chakras. It is typical for chakras to be depicted as either flower-like or
wheel-like. In the former, "petals" are shown around the perimeter of a circle. In the latter, spokes divide the circle into segments
that make the chakra resemble a wheel (or "chakra"). Each chakra possesses a specific number of segments or petals. Texts
describing the chakras go back as far as the later Upanishads, for example the Yoga Kundalini Upanishad. The word comes from
the Sanskrit "cakra" meaning "wheel, circle", and sometimes also referring to the "wheel of life". The pronunciation of this word can
be approximated in English by 'chuhkruh', with ch as in chart and both instances - the commonly found pronunciation 'shockrah' is
incorrect. The seven main chakras are described as being aligned in an ascending column from the base of the spine to the top of
the head. Each chakra is associated with a certain color, multiple specific functions, an aspect of consciousness, a classical
element, and other distinguishing characteristics. The chakras are thought to vitalize the physical body and to be associated with
interactions of both a physical and mental nature. They are considered loci of life energy, or prana, which is thought to flow among
them along pathways called nadis. In Mysticism, a Nadi (plural: Nadis) is an energy channel in which prana energy flows and may
connect chakras. It is not accepted by mainstream science. The main nadis include Shushumna, Ida and Pingala. Nadis are thought
to carry a life force energy known as prana in Sanskrit, or qi in Chinese-based systems. They are also said to have an extrasensory
function, playing a part in empathic and instinctive responses. Nadis are sometimes viewed as extending only to the skin of the
body, but are often thought to extend to the boundary of the aura. The Ida and Pingala nadis are often seen as referring to the two
hemispheres of the brain. Pingala is the extroverted, solar nadi, and corresponds to the left hand side of the brain. Ida is the
introverted, lunar nadi, and refers to the right hand side of the brain. The two nadis are stimulated through the practice of
pranayama, which involves alternate breathing through left and right nostrils, which would alternately stimulate the left and right
sides of the brain.The word nadi comes from the Sanskrit root nad meaning "channel", "stream", or "flow". Traditional Chinese
medicine also relies on a similar model of the human body as an energy system. The New Age movement has led to an increased
interest in the West regarding chakras. Many in this movement point to a correspondence between the position and role of the
Chakras, and those of the glands in the endocrine system. Some people in New Age also claim that other chakras, besides the
above, exist - for instance, ear chakras. The chakras are described in the tantric texts the Sat-Cakra-Nirupana, and the Padaka-
Pancaka, in which they are described as emanations of consciousness from Brahman, an energy which comes down from the
spiritual and gradually crudifies, creating these distinct levels of chakras, and which eventually finds its rest in the Muladhara
chakra. Muladhara is positioned close to anus, at the perineum, and it has four petals which match the vrittis of greatest joy, natural
pleasure, delight in controlling passion, and blissfulness in concentration. In Samkhya philosophy, the concept of Muladhara is that
of moola prakriti, the metaphysical basis of material existence. Muladhara is the chakra that draws down spritual energy and causes
it to assume a physical existence. It is like the negative pole in an electrical circuit, which provides the potential for the evolution of
form. Within this chakra resides sleeps the kundalini shakti, the great spiritual potential, waiting to be aroused and brought back up
to the source from which it originated, Brahman. Muladhara is the base from which the 3 main psychic channels, nadis, ida, pingala
and sushumna, emerge.It is related to the physical processes of reproduction and excretion, and also to the various fear and guilt
complexes associated with them. All a person's Samskaras ( potential karma ), are expressed here, in a physical form. This chakra
is associated with the deities Indra, Brahma and Dakini, the element Earth and the color red. They are therefore part of an
emanationist theory, like that of the kabbalah in the west, or neo-platonism. The energy that was unleashed in creation, called the
Kundalini, lies coiled and sleeping, and it is the purpose of a tantric yogi to arouse this energy, and cause it to rise back up through
the increasingly subtler chakras, until union with god is achieved in the Sahasrara chakra at the crown of the head. Sahasrara is
positioned above the head or at the top of it and it has 1000 petals which are arranged in 20 layers each of them with 50 petals. For
a discussion about the petal count see also petal (chakra)Often referred as thousand-petaled lotus, it is said to be the most subtle
chakra in the system, relating to pure consciousness, and it is from this chakra that all the other chakras emanate. When a yogi is
able to raise his or her kundalini, energy of consciousness, up to this point, the state of samadhi, or union with god, is experienced.
Apart from this primary text from India, different western authors have tried to describe the chakras, most notably the Theosophists.
Many new age writers, such as the Danish author and musician Peter Kjaerulff in his book, The Ringbearers Diary, or Anodea
Judith in her book Wheels of Life, have written their opinions about the chakras in great detail, including the reasons for their
appearance and their functions. The seven chakras are said by some to reflect how the unified consciousness of man (the immortal
human being or the soul), is divided to manage different aspects of earthly life (body/instinct/vital energy/deeper
emotions/communication/having an overview of life/contact to God). The chakras are placed at differing levels of spiritual subtletly,
with Sahasrara at the top being concerned with pure consciousness, and Muladhara at the bottom being concerned with matter,
which is seen simply as crudified consciousness. RED: 1st Chakra: Base or Root Chakra: Kundalini: Root Chakra: Located at the
base of the spine. Earth, survival, grounding, stillness Contains the primary 8 cells that have all of the knowledge of creation and
remain the only cells in your body that do not change in your lifetime. It grounds us in the physical world. ORANGE: 2nd Chakra:
Spleen: Located just beneath the navel, and related to our sexual and reproductive capacity. Blockage manifests as emotional
problems or sexual guilt. YELLOW: 3rd Chakra: Solar Plexis: Seat of Emotions. Gives us a sense of personal power in the world.
Blockage manifests as anger or a sense of victimization. GREEN: 4th Chakra: Heart Chakra: Blockage can manifest as immune
system or heart problems, or a lack of compassion. BLUE: 5th Chakra: Throat: Tied to creativity and communication. Feels
pressure when you are not communicating your emotions properly. INDIGO: 6th Chakra: Third Eye Pineal Gland: Often connected
to the forehead. Is a physical eye at the base of the brain with the capabilities of looking upward. Clairvoyance, psychic abilities,
imagination, dreaming. PURPLE: 7th Chakra Crown: Connects you with message from higher realms. Can be experienced as a
pressure on the top of the head. spiritual connection, understanding, knowing, bliss, God. Johann Wolfgang von Goethe presented
a circular diagram in which the three primary colours of red, blue and yellow alternate with the three secondary colours of orange,
violet and green. Red occupies the uppermost place in the circle, and green the lowermost. The semi-circle from green, through
yellow to red is known as the plus side; its opposite is the minus-side (Original drawing of Goethe). Goethe sought to surpass
Newton’s system. With his insight into the sensual-moral effect of colours, Goethe comes nearer to his initial objective: namely, to
bring order to the more chaotic, aesthetic aspects of colour. He places colouration within the separate categories of «powerful»,
«gentle» and «radiant» and, accordingly, sets down his concept. 100 years after Newton, Johann Wolfgang Goethe (1749-1832)
examined the problems of colour and although his Theory of Colours was intended to attain «a more complete unity of physical
knowledge» by including all branches of the natural sciences, Goethe approached the subject primarily to gain some knowledge of
colours «from the point of view of art». In a letter to Wilhelm von Humbolt in 1798, Goethe explained that by embarking on his
History of the Theory of Colours he had also hoped to create a «History of the Human Spirit in Miniature». Goethe’s first
Contributions to Optics were produced in 1791 after experiencing the difficulties encountered by contemporary artists with
colouration and colour harmony at first hand on his journey through Italy. «Indeed, I heard tell of cold and warm colours, and colours
which enhance one another, and suchlike», but everything «turned in an odd circle … of confusion». Between 1790 and 1823,
Goethe documented the subject of colours in some 2000 pages, most of which appeared between 1808 and 1823 under the title
Theory of Colours. He evolved his system from the elementary opposition of light and dark (which was not a part of Newton’s work).
In his paper On the Order of Colours and Their Relationship to Each Another, Goethe establishes that, as totally pure colours, only
yellow and blue «can be perceived by us without being reminiscent of something else». The opposite poles are formed by the
yellow most easily compared with brightness («next to light») and the blue most related to darkness («next to blackness»), between
which all other colours can be grouped. When, in 1793, Goethe sketched his colour-circle, he did not place this basic pair of yellow
(giallo) and blue (blu) opposite each other but extended them into a triangle together with a red, which was originally described as
purple (rosso). He described «this red effect» as the «highest augmentation» of the series of colours leading from yellow to blue,
and placed green (verde), arising from the mixing of yellow and blue, opposite. The circle is completed by an orange (arancio) on
the ascending side and by a blue-red (porpora) on the descending side (often described as violet) (Original drawing of Goethe).
Goethe referred to the part of his circle running from yellow to red as the plus side and its continuation into blue as the minus side,
and arrived at the following arrangement: the yellow was associated with «effect, light, brightness, force, warmth, closeness,
repulsion»; and blue with «deprivation, shadow, darkness, weakness, cold, distance, attraction». It is suggested that Goethe’s
intention was mainly to ascertain the «sensual-moral» effect of individual colours «on the sense of the eye … and the eye’s
imparting on the mind». He understands colours mainly as «sensual qualities within the content of consciousness» and thus
transfers his analysis into the area of psychology. The colours on the plus side «induce an exciting, lively, aspiring mood». Yellow
has a «splendid and noble» effect, making a «warm and comfortable» impression. The colours on the minus side, however, «create
an unsettled, weak and yearning feeling». Blue «gives a feeling of coldness». With his insight into the sensual-moral effect of
colours, Goethe comes nearer to his initial objective: namely, to bring order to the more chaotic, aesthetic aspects of colour. He
places colouration within the separate categories of «powerful», «gentle» and «radiant», and propounds the following ideas: the
powerful effect will arise if yellow, yellow-red and purple predominate, with the gentle effect mainly being determined by blue and its
neighbours. If «all colours are in equilibrium», an harmonious colouration will arise which can produce radiance and also
pleasantness. (The philosopher Ludwig Wittgenstein, by the way, notes in his Remarks concerning colours: «I doubt that Goethe’s
remarks about the character of the colours would be much use to a decorator, let alone a painter»). Whoever should compare this
short description of Goethe’s Theory of Colours with Newton’s preferred approach will soon become aware of two completely
different attitudes to the one, single theme. These attitudes do not oppose each other, however; they complement each other —
alone, neither of the systems can cover all aspects of colour completely. Their relationship can best be described as
«complementary», implying a deeper meaning here than the term used for colours. Newton’s analysis of colours is to be seen as
complementary to Goethe’s. Neither of the theories is wrong; each independently reproduces a valid aspect of our world, and
substantiates the other. Goethe is only wrong when he maintains that Newton was misled, indeed «twice and three times over». In
order to bring life to this idea of complementarity, we can compare the English scientist’s and the German poet’s beliefs: what for
Newton is simple — pure blue, for example, being light with one wavelength («monochromatic light») — is complicated for Goethe,
since pure blue must first of all be prepared by an extravagant means and is therefore artificial. In contrast, white light is simple for
Goethe, since it exists completely naturally and without effort; Newton, on the other hand, sees in white light a mixture of all colours.
White light is not simple for Newton; it is a combination. Thus, what Goethe regards as a unity, a whole — «das Schauen» —
disintegrates with Newton (and his successors) into many parts. For Newton, the act of viewing colour commences with a reaction
in the eye which, to be understood, requires more detailed knowledge of the retina; the circuit of nerve cells; the different stages
which signals pass through on their way to the brain; and the regions in the brain which, through the generation of electrical signals,
create sight. The essential complementarity of both colour theories becomes evident when we consider the role of the subject — the
human being. While Goethe, as a matter of course, views the human being as central, Newton omits him totally. Here, two
complementary truths meet: Goethe presents the direct truth of sensuary perception as a counterbalance to the remote truth of
Newton’s science; Newton distances himself from a notion of the world («the pure human sense» as Goethe would have it). Indeed,
Goethe expressively employs such a notion to obtain clarity about the nature of colours. Something troublesome arises here,
creating a certain tension. The opposite of one deep truth (in this case from Newton) is not something which is wrong; it is another
deep truth (that of Goethe).

Los colores
La mitad de la diversión de la lectura del tarot es disfrutar del arte de las cartas, incluyendo los hermosos colores que se utilizan en
la mayoría de las cubiertas. A pesar de que es posible interpretar las cartas sin prestar atención al color, el color añade una
dimensión interesante al tarot .¿Hay mucho verde en las cartas de una lectura? Tal vez que apunta a cuestiones relacionadas con
la vida, vivir más plenamente, o pasar más tiempo al aire libre, en contacto con la naturaleza. La primera vez que me fije en los
colores del Tarot fue en una feria de tarot. Una adivinadora de una de las paradas me enseño unas cuantas tarjetas del tarot de
Marsella, y me explicó el significado de los colores primarios. Amarillo para el cuerpo ("le corps"), el rojo representaba la mente
("l'esprit") y el azul representaba el alma ("l'ame"). Desde entonces, he estado fascinada por el significado simbólico del color.
Diferentes fuentes se dan diferentes asociaciones de varios colores. He aquí el esquema que utilizo:

Secundaria y terciaria Primary Colors

Rojo (Primario) La mente y el intelecto
Escarlata (Naranja-rojo) El deseo / necesidad
Naranja (Secundario) Pasión / emoción
Melocotón (Amarillo anaranjado) Acción / movimiento
Amarillo (Primario) Body Cuerpo
Chartreuse (Verde-amarillo) Generation Generación
Verde (Secundaria) La vida / vitalidad
Aguamarina (Verde-azul) Experiencia / memoria
Azul (Primario) Espíritu / alma
Indigo (Azul-violeta) Meditación
Violeta (Secundario) Misticismo
Púrpura (Violeta-rojo) Fuerza de voluntad

Other Colors Otros colores

Negro Muerte / desconocido
Blanco Luz / inexperiencia / inocencia
Gris Indiferencia
Canela La humanidad / tradición
Oro Verdad
Plata Fe
Cobre Pragmatismo

Este esquema de interpretación del color se basa en la explicación Oswald Wirth de correspondencias de color y el tarot. Lo he
llenado un poco y añadió mi propio giro a la misma. Este es un trabajo en progreso. Los tres colores primarios (rojo, amarillo, azul)
representan los tres elementos principales de la existencia humana, la mente, cuerpo y espíritu. Los tres colores primarios se
combinan para crear los colores secundarios (naranja, verde, violeta) y los colores secundarios se pueden mezclar con los colores
primarios de nuevo para formar los colores terciarios (rojo, naranja o roja, amarilla o naranja-melocotón, amarillo-verde o
chartreuse, etc.) Estos colores del arco iris representan las relaciones entre dos miembros de la tríada mente-cuerpo-espíritu. Por
ejemplo, la intersección del cuerpo y el espíritu (amarillo y azul) se asocia con la vida o vitalidad (verde), la intersección de la mente
y el cuerpo (rojo y amarillo) se asocia con la pasión o emoción (naranja), etc Los colores terciarios puede representar a otras
transiciones mente-cuerpo-espíritu, por ejemplo, morado para fuerza de voluntad, la transición de la mística al intelecto. Todo
forma una especie de círculo que conecta estos tres elementos humanos. Sin embargo, los colores del arco iris todos los que se
forma a partir de los colores primarios, los colores primarios puede ser concebido como contener los significados y matices de
significado representado en todos los diversos colores secundarios y terciarios formados por los mismos. Así, por ejemplo, el rojo
se asocia a menudo con el deseo, la pasión y la acción. Escarlata, naranja, melocotón son simplemente variaciones, las
emanaciones de la mente, ya que interactúa con el cuerpo. Este enfoque permite la interpretación de las tarjetas que utilizan un
sistema simple de color (como el Tarot de Marsella), así como tarjetas con combinaciones de colores más complejos y variados.
La mezcla de todos los resultados de los colores en varios tonos de marrón o marrón. Así, tan y marrón representan las ideas de la
humanidad y la tradición. Negro y blanco y los colores metálicos representan conceptos más abstractos. Los colores pueden ser
nuevas mezclas y mixtos. Por ejemplo, mezclando formas rojo y blanco el color rosa. Mezcla de formas grises y beige tostado.
Aligerar los colores o convertirlos en pasteles podría tener la importancia de que sean más mundanas o transparente. colores
Oscurecimiento podría tener el significado de temple con misterio o lo desconocido, o el aumento de su fuerza, etc El mundo está
hecho de muchos colores que se mezclan unas con otras. La manera en que una etiqueta de color es a menudo subjetiva. A
menudo he tenido una discusión con alguien sobre lo que un color es: "¿Es que el color violeta" "No, es azul." ¿Cómo debemos
interpretar los significados del color es aún más subjetivo. Mira la cantidad de colores se utilizan en la vida real, y usted puede
encontrar muchas correlaciones interesantes. Por ejemplo, observe cómo naranja o rojo brillante se utilizan para las señales de
advertencia, como el amarillo es de uso frecuente (en la cinta de la policía o los equipos de construcción o postes de tráfico) para
delimitar y marcar el espacio físico, la forma común de canela o beige o grises en los edificios y de la confección (y cómo los
colores tienen el efecto de la representación de algo mediocre, o haciendo que se mezclan con el paisaje), cómo marrón se utiliza
en salas de juntas o grupos de presión para crear un ambiente conservador, etc Estudio de la cantidad de colores se utilizan en la
iglesia de vitrales ventanas o en vallas publicitarias para crear ciertos efectos psicológicos o comunicar determinados mensajes.

The Seven Bodies - As there are seven bodies, so there are also seven chakras, energy centers, and each chakra is connected in
a special way with its corresponding body. 1. Physical Body: The physical body is the anchoring point for your Higher Self to
explore the mystery of your being within physicality. It is highly susceptible to programming transmitted through touch for several
minutes after birth. It holds the memories of this and other lives. 2. Etheric or Astral Body: The majority of karma, which is a
constriction in the universal flow of energy formed by incorrect perception, is held in the astral body (only a small portion is in the
physical body). It consists of bluish lines of light. It produces the acupuncture points and the major and minor chakras by the energy
lines crossing each other. Where they cross seven times, there is an acupuncture point. Where they cross 13 times, there is a minor
chakra point. Where they cross 20 times, there is a major chakra point. This body is linear and is located an inch out from the
physical body. 3. Emotional Body: It is the auric field. Past trauma is held in the first three bodies (the physical, astral and
emotional bodies). Therefore, as we overcome our past and balance our sub-personalities, this body becomes clearer. It is a flowing
field extending out about 14 inches from the physical body. 4. Mental Body: As we balance the three minds, including the left and
right brains, the mental body ceases to block access to the higher bodies. This body is linear and is located about 14 inches out
from the physical body. 5. Spiritual Emotional Body: When able to access this body, we begin living in eternal time, which aligns
us with the intent of the Infinite. This body is a flowing field that extends about 19 inches out from the physical body 6. Spiritual
Mental Body: The information within this body contains the specifics regarding the blueprint for this lifetime. When access to this
body is achieved, we start seeing from a cosmic perspective. We begin to see the innocence and value of each life as it mirrors to
the Infinite either that which it is, or that which it is not. We see that there is no guilt so all judgment effortlessly dissolves. This body
is linear and is located about 19 inches out from the physical body. 7. Spirit Body: It is trillions of little fibers of light radiating out in
all directions from the life force center. This is a ball of white light about the size of a grapefruit. In May 2007 it was moved from
behind the belly button to the heart center in all humanity. Every living creature within the cosmos has a band of awareness among
these light fibers within our spirit body. That is why we are the microcosm. This is the body shamans use to be able to shapeshift
into animals or other forms; plus they use this body to access parallel realities. They move a point of illumination called the
assemblage point. It is located an arm’s length behind the heart, and a little bit to the right. This body is a linear field radiating out
from the center to an arm’s length from the physical body.

THE PYTHAGOREAN THEORY OF MUSIC AND COLOR

HARMONY is a state recognized by great philosophers as the immediate prerequisite of beauty. A compound is termed beautiful
only when its parts are in harmonious combination. The world is called beautiful and its Creator is designated the Good because
good perforce must act in conformity with its own nature; and good acting according to its own nature is harmony, because the good
which it accomplishes is harmonious with the good which it is. Beauty, therefore, is harmony manifesting its own intrinsic nature in
the world of form. The universe is made up of successive gradations of good, these gradations ascending from matter (which is the
least degree of good) to spirit (which is the greatest degree of good). In man, his superior nature is the summum bonum. It therefore
follows that his highest nature most readily cognizes good because the good external to him in the world is in harmonic ratio with
the good present in his soul. What man terms evil is therefore, in common with matter, merely the least degree of its own opposite.
The least degree of good presupposes likewise the least degree of harmony and beauty. Thus deformity (evil) is really the least
harmonious combination of elements naturally harmonic as individual units. Deformity is unnatural, for, the sum of all things being
the Good, it is natural that all things should partake of the Good and be arranged in combinations that are harmonious. Harmony is
the manifesting expression of the Will of the eternal Good.

THE PHILOSOPHY OF MUSIC

It is highly probable that the Greek initiates gained their knowledge of the philosophic and therapeutic aspects of music from the
Egyptians, who, in turn, considered Hermes the founder of the art. According to one legend, this god constructed the first lyre by
stretching strings across the concavity of a turtle shell. Both Isis and Osiris were patrons of music and poetry. Plato, in describing
the antiquity of these arts among the Egyptians, declared that songs and poetry had existed in Egypt for at least ten thousand
years, and that these were of such an exalted and inspiring nature that only gods or godlike men could have composed them. In the
Mysteries the lyre was regarded as the secret symbol of the human constitution, the body of the instrument representing the
physical form, the strings the nerves, and the musician the spirit. Playing upon the nerves, the spirit thus created the harmonies of
normal functioning, which, however, became discords if the nature of man were defiled. While the early Chinese, Hindus, Persians,
Egyptians, Israelites, and Greeks employed both vocal and instrumental music in their religious ceremonials, also to complement
their poetry and drama, it remained for Pythagoras to raise the art to its true dignity by demonstrating its mathematical foundation.
Although it is said that he himself was not a musician, Pythagoras is now generally credited with the discovery of the diatonic scale.
Having first learned the divine theory of music from the priests of the various Mysteries into which he had been accepted,
Pythagoras pondered for several years upon the laws governing consonance and dissonance. How he actually solved the problem
is unknown, but the following explanation has been invented. One day while meditating upon the problem of harmony, Pythagoras
chanced to pass a brazier's shop where workmen were pounding out a piece of metal upon an anvil. By noting the variances in pitch
between the sounds made by large hammers and those made by smaller implements, and carefully estimating the harmonies and
discords resulting from combinations of these sounds, he gained his first clue to the musical intervals of the diatonic scale. He
entered the shop, and after carefully examining the tools and making mental note of their weights, returned to his own house and
constructed an arm of wood so that it: extended out from the wall of his room. At regular intervals along this arm he attached four
cords, all of like composition, size, and weight. To the first of these he attached a twelve-pound weight, to the second a nine-pound
weight, to the third an eight-pound weight, and to the fourth a six-pound weight. These different weights corresponded to the sizes
of the braziers' hammers. Pythagoras thereupon discovered that the first and fourth strings when sounded together produced the
harmonic interval of the octave, for doubling the weight had the same effect as halving the string. The tension of the first string being
twice that of the fourth string, their ratio was said to be 2:1, or duple. By similar experimentation he ascertained that the first and
third string produced the harmony of the diapente, or the interval of the fifth. The tension of the first string being half again as much
as that of the third string, their ratio was said to be 3:2, or sesquialter. Likewise the second and fourth strings, having the same ratio
as the first and third strings, yielded a diapente harmony. Continuing his investigation, Pythagoras discovered that the first and
second strings produced the harmony of the diatessaron, or the interval of the third; and the tension of the first string being a third
greater than that of the second string, their ratio was said to be 4:3, or sesquitercian. The third and fourth strings, having the same
ratio as the first and second strings, produced another harmony of the diatessaron. According to Iamblichus, the second and third
strings had the ratio of 8:9, or epogdoan. The key to harmonic ratios is hidden in the famous Pythagorean tetractys, or pyramid of
dots. The tetractys is made up of the first four numbers--1, 2, 3, and 4--which in their proportions reveal the intervals of the octave,
the diapente, and the diatessaron. While the law of harmonic intervals as set forth above is true, it has been subsequently proved
that hammers striking metal in the manner

In the Pythagorean concept of the music of the spheres, the interval between the earth and the sphere of the fixed stars was
considered to be a diapason--the most perfect harmonic interval. The allowing arrangement is most generally accepted for the
musical intervals of the planets between the earth and the sphere of the fixed stars: From the sphere of the earth to the sphere of
the moon; one tone; from the sphere of the moon to that of Mercury, one half-tone; from Mercury to Venus, one-half; from Venus to
the sun, one and one-half tones; from the sun to Mars, one tone; from Mars to Jupiter, one-half tone; from Jupiter to Saturn, one-
half tone; from Saturn to the fixed stars, one-half tone. The sum of these intervals equals the six whole tones of the octave.
This diagrammatic sector represents the major gradations of energy and substance between elemental earth and absolute
unconditioned force. Beginning with the superior, the fifteen graduated spheres descend in the following order: Limitless and Eternal
Life; the superior, the middle, and the inferior Empyrean; the seven planets; and the four elements. Energy is symbolized by Fludd
as a pyramid with its base upon the concave surface of the superior Empyrean, and substance as another Pyramid with its base
upon the convex surface of the sphere (not planet) of earth. These pyramids demonstrate the relative proportions of energy and
substance entering into the composition of the fifteen planes of being. It will be noted that the ascending pyramid of substance
touches but does not pierce the fifteenth sphere--that of Limitless and Eternal Life. Likewise, the descending pyramid of energy
touches but does not pierce the first sphere--the grossest condition of substance. The plane of the sun is denominated the sphere of
equality, for here neither energy nor substance predominate. The mundane monochord consists of a hypothetical string stretched
from the base of the pyramid of energy to the base of the pyramid of substance described will not produce the various tones
ascribed to them. In all probability, therefore, Pythagoras actually worked out his theory of harmony from the monochord--a
contrivance consisting of a single string stretched between two pegs and supplied with movable frets. To Pythagoras music was one
of the dependencies of the divine science of mathematics, and its harmonies were inflexibly controlled by mathematical proportions.
The Pythagoreans averred that mathematics demonstrated the exact method by which the good established and maintained its
universe. Number therefore preceded harmony, since it was the immutable law that governs all harmonic proportions. After
discovering these harmonic ratios, Pythagoras gradually initiated his disciples into this, the supreme arcanum of his Mysteries. He
divided the multitudinous parts of creation into a vast number of planes or spheres, to each of which he assigned a tone, a harmonic
interval, a number, a name, a color, and a form. He then proceeded to prove the accuracy of his deductions by demonstrating them
upon the different planes of intelligence and substance ranging from the most abstract logical premise to the most concrete
geometrical solid. From the common agreement of these diversified methods of proof he established the indisputable existence of
certain natural laws. Having once established music as an exact science, Pythagoras applied his newly found law of harmonic
intervals to all the phenomena of Nature, even going so far as to demonstrate the harmonic relationship of the planets,
constellations, and elements to each other. A notable example of modern corroboration of ancient philosophical reaching is that of
the progression of the elements according to harmonic ratios. While making a list of the elements in the ascending order of their
atomic weights, John A. Newlands discovered at every eighth element a distinct repetition of properties. This discovery is known as
the law of octaves in modern chemistry. Since they held that harmony must be determined not by the sense perceptions but by
reason and mathematics, the Pythagoreans called themselves Canonics, as distinguished from musicians of the Harmonic School,
who asserted taste and instinct to be the true normative principles of harmony. Recognizing, however, the profound effect: of music
upon the senses and emotions, Pythagoras did not hesitate to influence the mind and body with what he termed "musical medicine."
Pythagoras evinced such a marked preference for stringed instruments that he even went so far as to warn his disciples against
allowing their ears to be defiled by the sounds of flutes or cymbals. He further declared that the soul could be purified from its
irrational influences by solemn songs sung to the accompaniment of the lyre. In his investigation of the therapeutic value of
harmonics, Pythagoras discovered that the seven modes--or keys--of the Greek system of music had the power to incite or allay the
various emotions. It is related that while observing the stars one night he encountered a young man befuddled with strong drink and
mad with jealousy who was piling faggots about his mistress' door with the intention of burning the house. The frenzy of the youth
was accentuated by a flutist a short distance away who was playing a tune in the stirring Phrygian mode. Pythagoras induced the
musician to change his air to the slow, and rhythmic Spondaic mode, whereupon the intoxicated youth immediately became
composed and, gathering up his bundles of wood, returned quietly to his own home. There is also an account of how Empedocles, a
disciple of Pythagoras, by quickly changing the mode of a musical composition he was playing, saved the life of his host, Anchitus,
when the latter was threatened with death by the sword of one whose father he had condemned to public execution. It is also known
that Esculapius, the Greek physician, cured sciatica and other diseases of the nerves by blowing a loud trumpet in the presence of
the patient. Pythagoras cured many ailments of the spirit, soul, and body by having certain specially prepared musical compositions
played in the presence of the sufferer or by personally reciting short selections from such early poets as Hesiod and Homer. In his
university at Crotona it was customary for the Pythagoreans to open and to close each day with songs--those in the morning
calculated to clear the mind from sleep and inspire it to the activities of the coming day; those in the evening of a mode soothing,
relaxing, and conducive to rest. At the vernal equinox, Pythagoras caused his disciples to gather in a circle around one of their
number who led them in song and played their accompaniment upon a lyre. The therapeutic music of Pythagoras is described by
Iamblichus thus: "And there are certain melodies devised as remedies against the passions of the soul, and also against
despondency and lamentation, which Pythagoras invented as things that afford the greatest assistance in these maladies. And
again, he employed other melodies against rage and anger, and against every aberration of the soul. There is also another kind of
modulation invented as a remedy against desires." (See The Life of Pythagoras.) It is probable that the Pythagoreans recognized a
connection between the seven Greek modes and the planets. As an example, Pliny declares that Saturn moves in the Dorian mode
and Jupiter in the Phrygian mode. It is also apparent that the temperaments are keyed to the various modes, and the passions
likewise. Thus, anger--which is a fiery passion--may be accentuated by a fiery mode or its power neutralized by a watery mode. The
far-reaching effect exercised by music upon the culture of the Greeks is thus summed up by Emil Nauman: "Plato depreciated the
notion that music was intended solely to create cheerful and agreeable emotions, maintaining rather that it should inculcate a love of
all that is noble, and hatred of all that is mean, and that nothing could more strongly influence man's innermost feelings than melody
and rhythm. Firmly convinced of this, he agreed with Damon of Athens, the musical instructor of Socrates, that the introduction of a
new and presumably enervating scale would endanger the future of a whole nation, and that it was not possible to alter a key
without shaking the very foundations of the State. Plato affirmed that music which ennobled the mind was of a far higher kind than
that which merely appealed to the senses, and he strongly insisted that it was the paramount duty of the Legislature to suppress all
music of an effeminate and lascivious character, and to encourage only s that which was pure and dignified; that bold and stirring
melodies were for men, gentle and soothing ones for women. From this it is evident that music played a considerable part in the
education of the Greek youth. The greatest care was also to be taken in the selection of instrumental music, because the absence
of words rendered its signification doubtful, and it was difficult to foresee whether it would exercise upon the people a benign or
baneful influence. Popular taste, being always tickled by sensuous and meretricious effects, was to be treated with deserved
contempt. (See The History of Music.) Even today martial music is used with telling effect in times of war, and religious music, while
no longer developed in accordance with the ancient theory, still profoundly influences the emotions of the laity.

THE MUSIC OF THE SPHERES

The most sublime but least known of all the Pythagorean speculations was that of sidereal harmonics. It was said that of all men
only Pythagoras heard the music of the spheres. Apparently the Chaldeans were the first people to conceive of the heavenly bodies
joining in a cosmic chant as they moved in stately manner across the sky. Job describes a time "when the stars of the morning sang
together," and in The Merchant of Venice the author of the Shakesperian plays

In this chart is set forth a summary of Fludd's theory of universal music. The interval between the element of earth and the highest
heaven is considered as a double octave, thus showing the two extremes of existence to be in disdiapason harmony. It is signifies
that the highest heaven, the sun, and the earth have the same time, the difference being in pitch. The sun is the lower octave of the
highest heaven and the earth the lower octave of the sun. The lower octave (Γ to G) comprises that part of the universe in which
substance predominate over energy. Its harmonies, therefore, are more gross than those of the higher octave (G to g) wherein
energy predominates over substance. "If struck in the more spiritual part," writes Fludd, "the monochord will give eternal life; if in the
more material part, transitory life." It will be noted that certain elements, planets, and celestial spheres sustain a harmonic ratio to
each other, Fludd advanced this as a key to the sympathies and antipathies existing between the various departments of Nature
writes: "There's not the smallest orb which thou behold'st but in his motion like an angel sings." So little remains, however, of the
Pythagorean system of celestial music that it is only possible to approximate his actual theory. Pythagoras conceived the universe
to be an immense monochord, with its single string connected at its upper end to absolute spirit and at its lower end to absolute
matter--in other words, a cord stretched between heaven and earth. Counting inward from the circumference of the heavens,
Pythagoras, according to some authorities, divided the universe into nine parts; according to others, into twelve parts. The
twelvefold system was as follows: The first division was called the empyrean, or the sphere of the fixed stars, and was the dwelling
place of the immortals. The second to twelfth divisions were (in order) the spheres of Saturn, Jupiter, Mars, the sun, Venus,
Mercury, and the moon, and fire, air, water, and earth. This arrangement of the seven planets (the sun and moon being regarded as
planets in the old astronomy) is identical with the candlestick symbolism of the Jews--the sun in the center as the main stem with
three planets on either side of it. The names given by the Pythagoreans to the various notes of the diatonic scale were, according to
Macrobius, derived from an estimation of the velocity and magnitude of the planetary bodies. Each of these gigantic spheres as it
rushed endlessly through space was believed to sound a certain tone caused by its continuous displacement of the æthereal
diffusion. As these tones were a manifestation of divine order and motion, it must necessarily follow that they partook of the
harmony of their own source. "The assertion that the planets in their revolutions round the earth uttered certain sounds differing
according to their respective 'magnitude, celerity and local distance,' was commonly made by the Greeks. Thus Saturn, the farthest
planet, was said to give the gravest note, while the Moon, which is the nearest, gave the sharpest. 'These sounds of the seven
planets, and the sphere of the fixed stars, together with that above us [Antichthon], are the nine Muses, and their joint symphony is
called Mnemosyne.'" (See The Canon.)This quotation contains an obscure reference to the ninefold division of the universe
previously mentioned. The Greek initiates also recognized a fundamental relationship between the individual heavens or spheres of
the seven planets, and the seven sacred vowels. The first heaven uttered the sound of the sacred vowel Α (Alpha); the second
heaven, the sacred vowel Ε (Epsilon); the third, Η (Eta); the fourth, Ι (Iota); the fifth, Ο (Omicron); the sixth, Υ (Upsilon); and the
seventh heaven, the sacred vowel Ω (Omega). When these seven heavens sing together they produce a perfect harmony which
ascends as an everlasting praise to the throne of the Creator. (See Irenæus' Against Heresies.) Although not so stated, it is
probable that the planetary heavens are to be considered as ascending in the Pythagorean order, beginning with the sphere of the
moon, which would be the first heaven. Many early instruments had seven Strings, and it is generally conceded that Pythagoras
was the one who added the eighth string to the lyre of Terpander. The seven strings were always related both to their
correspondences in the human body and to the planets. The names of God were also conceived to be formed from combinations of
the seven planetary harmonies. The Egyptians confined their sacred songs to the seven primary sounds, forbidding any others to be
uttered in their temples. One of their hymns contained the following invocation: "The seven sounding tones praise Thee, the Great
God, the ceaseless working Father of the whole universe." In another the Deity describes Himself thus: "I am the great
indestructible lyre of the whole world, attuning the songs of the heavens. (See Nauman's History of Music.) The Pythagoreans
believed that everything which existed had a voice and that all creatures were eternally singing the praise of the Creator. Man fails
to hear these divine melodies because his soul is enmeshed in the illusion of material existence. When he liberates himself from the
bondage of the lower world with its sense limitations, the music of the spheres will again be audible as it was in the Golden Age.
Harmony recognizes harmony, and when the human soul regains its true estate it will not only hear the celestial choir but also join
with it in an everlasting anthem of praise to that Eternal Good controlling the infinite number of parts and conditions of Being. The
Greek Mysteries included in their doctrines a magnificent concept of the relationship existing between music and form. The
elements of architecture, for example, were considered as comparable to musical modes and notes, or as having a musical
counterpart. Consequently when a building was erected in which a number of these elements were combined, the structure was
then likened to a musical chord, which was harmonic only when it fully satisfied the mathematical requirements of harmonic
intervals. The realization of this analogy between sound and form led Goethe to declare that "architecture is crystallized music." In
constructing their temples of initiation, the early priests frequently demonstrated their superior knowledge of the principles
underlying the phenomena known as vibration. A considerable part of the Mystery rituals consisted of invocations and intonements,
for which purpose special sound chambers were constructed. A word whispered in one of these apartments was so intensified that
the reverberations made the entire building sway and be filled with a deafening roar. The very wood and stone used in the erection
of these sacred buildings eventually became so thoroughly permeated with the sound vibrations of the religious ceremonies that
when struck they would reproduce the same tones thus repeatedly impressed into their substances by the rituals. Every element in
Nature has its individual keynote. If these elements are combined in a composite structure the result is a chord that, if sounded, will
disintegrate the compound into its integral parts. Likewise each individual has a keynote that, if sounded, will destroy him. The
allegory of the walls of Jericho falling when the trumpets of Israel were sounded is undoubtedly intended to set forth the arcane
significance of individual keynote or vibration.

THE PHILOSOPHY OF COLOR

"Light," writes Edwin D. Babbitt, "reveals the glories of the external world and yet is the most glorious of them all. It gives beauty,
reveals beauty and is itself most beautiful. It is the analyzer, the truth-teller and the exposer of shams, for it shows things as they
are. Its infinite streams measure off the universe and flow into our telescopes from stars which are quintillions of miles distant. On
the other hand it descends to objects inconceivably small, and reveals through the microscope objects fifty millions of times less
than can be seen by the naked eye. Like all other fine forces, its movement is wonderfully soft, yet penetrating and powerful.
Without its vivifying influence, vegetable, animal, and human life must immediately perish from the earth, and general ruin take
place. We shall do well, then, to consider this potential and beautiful principle of light and its component colors, for the more deeply
we penetrate into its inner laws, the more will it present itself as a marvelous storehouse of power to vitalize, heal, refine, and
delight mankind." (See The Principles of Light and Color.) Since light is the basic physical manifestation of life, bathing all creation in
its radiance, it is highly important to realize, in part at least, the subtle nature of this divine substance. That which is called light is
actually a rate of vibration causing certain reactions upon the optic nerve. Few realize how they are walled in by the limitations

In this diagram two interpenetrating pyramids are again employed, one of which represents fire and the other earth. It is
demonstrated according to the law of elemental harmony that fire does not enter into the composition of earth nor earth into the
composition of fire. The figures on the chart disclose the harmonic relationships existing between the four primary elements
according to both Fludd and the Pythagoreans. Earth consists of four parts of its own nature; water of three parts of earth and one
part of fire. The sphere of equality is a hypothetical point where there is an equilibrium of two parts of earth and two parts of fire. Air
is composed of three parts of fire and one part of earth; fire, of four parts of its own nature. Thus earth and water bear to each other
the ratio of 4 to 3, or the diatessaron harmony, and water and the sphere of equality the ratio of 3 to 2, or the diapente harmony.
Fire and air also bear to each other the ratio of 4 to 3, or the diatessaron harmony, and air and the sphere of equality the ratio of 3
to 2, or the diapente harmony. As the sum of a diatessaron and a diapente equals a diapason, or octave, it is evident that both the
sphere of fire and the sphere of earth are in diapason harmony with the sphere of equality, and also that fire and earth are in
disdiapason harmony with each other of the sense perceptions. Not only is there a great deal more to light than anyone has ever
seen but there are also unknown forms of light which no optical equipment will ever register. There are unnumbered colors which
cannot be seen, as well as sounds which cannot be heard, odors which cannot be smelt, flavors which cannot be tasted, and
substances which cannot be felt. Man is thus surrounded by a supersensible universe of which he knows nothing because the
centers of sense perception within himself have not been developed sufficiently to respond to the subtler rates of vibration of which
that universe is composed. Among both civilized and savage peoples color has been accepted as a natural language in which to
couch their religious and philosophical doctrines. The ancient city of Ecbatana as described by Herodotus, its seven walls colored
according to the seven planets, revealed the knowledge of this subject possessed by the Persian Magi. The famous zikkurat or
astronomical tower of the god Nebo at Borsippa ascended in seven great steps or stages, each step being painted in the key color
of one of the planetary bodies. (See Lenormant's Chaldean Magic.) It is thus evident that the Babylonians were familiar with the
concept of the spectrum in its relation to the seven Creative Gods or Powers. In India, one of the Mogul emperors caused a fountain
to be made with seven levels. The water pouring down the sides through specially arranged channels changed color as it
descended, passing sequentially through all shades of the spectrum. In Tibet, color is employed by the native artists to express
various moods. L. Austine Waddell, writing of Northern Buddhist art, notes that in Tibetan mythology "White and yellow complexions
usually typify mild moods, while the red, blue, and black belong to fierce forms, though sometimes light blue, as indicating the sky,
means merely celestial. Generally the gods are pictured white, goblins red, and devils black, like their European relative." (See The
Buddhism of Tibet.) In Meno, Plato, speaking through Socrates, describes color as "an effluence of form, commensurate with sight,
and sensible." In Theætetus he discourses more at length on the subject thus: "Let us carry out the principle which has just been
affirmed, that nothing is self-existent, and then we shall see that every color, white, black, and every other color, arises out of the
eye meeting the appropriate motion, and that what we term the substance of each color is neither the active nor the passive
element, but something which passes between them, and is peculiar to each percipient; are you certain that the several colors
appear to every animal--say a dog--as they appear to you?" In the Pythagorean tetractys--the supreme symbol of universal forces
and processes--are set forth the theories of the Greeks concerning color and music. The first three dots represent the threefold
White Light, which is the Godhead containing potentially all sound and color. The remaining seven dots are the colors of the
spectrum and the notes of the musical scale. The colors and tones are the active creative powers which, emanating from the First
Cause, establish the universe. The seven are divided into two groups, one containing three powers and the other four a relationship
also shown in the tetractys. The higher group--that of three--becomes the spiritual nature of the created universe; the lower group--
that of four--manifests as the irrational sphere, or inferior world. In the Mysteries the seven Logi, or Creative Lords, are shown as
streams of force issuing from the mouth of the Eternal One. This signifies the spectrum being extracted from the white light of the
Supreme Deity. The seven Creators, or Fabricators, of the inferior spheres were called by the Jews the Elohim. By the Egyptians
they were referred to as the Builders (sometimes as the Governors) and are depicted with great knives in their hands with which
they carved the universe from its primordial substance. Worship of the planets is based upon their acceptation as the cosmic
embodiments of the seven creative attributes of God. The Lords of the planets were described as dwelling within the body of the
sun, for the true nature of the sun, being analogous to the white light, contains the seeds of all the tone and color potencies which it
manifests. There are numerous arbitrary arrangements setting forth the mutual relationships of the planets, the colors, and the
musical notes. The most satisfactory system is that based upon the law of the octave. The sense of hearing has a much wider
scope than that of sight, for whereas the ear can register from nine to eleven octaves of sound the eye is restricted to the cognition
of but seven fundamental color tones, or one tone short of the octave. Red, when posited as the lowest color tone in the scale of
chromatics, thus corresponds to do, the first note of the musical scale. Continuing the analogy, orange corresponds to re, yellow to
mi, green to fa, blue to sol, indigo to la, and violet to si (ti). The eighth color tone necessary to complete the scale should be the
higher octave of red, the first color tone. The accuracy of the above arrangement is attested by two striking facts: (1) the three
fundamental notes of the musical scale--the first, the third, and the fifth--correspond with the three primary colors--red, yellow, and
blue; (2) the seventh, and least perfect, note of the musical scale corresponds with purple, the least perfect tone of the color scale.
In The Principles of Light and Color, Edwin D. Babbitt confirms the correspondence of the color and musical scales: "As C is at the
bottom of the musical scale and made with the coarsest waves of air, so is red at the bottom of the chromatic scale and made with
the coarsest waves of luminous ether. As the musical note B [the seventh note of the scale] requires 45 vibrations of air every time
the note C at the lower end of the scale requires 24, or but little over half as many, so does extreme violet require about 300 trillions
of vibrations of ether in a second, while extreme red requires only about 450 trillions, which also are but little more than half as
many. When one musical octave is finished another one commences and progresses with just twice as many vibrations as were
used in the first octave, and so the same notes are repeated on a finer scale. In the same way when the scale of colors visible to the
ordinary eye is completed in the violet, another octave of finer invisible colors, with just twice as many vibrations, will commence
and progress on precisely the same law." When the colors are related to the twelve signs of the zodiac, they are arranged as the
spokes of a wheel. To Aries is assigned pure red; to Taurus, red-orange; to Gemini, pure orange; to Cancer, orange-yellow; to Leo,
pure yellow; to Virgo, yellow-green; to Libra, pure green; to Scorpio, green-blue; to Sagittarius, pure blue; to Capricorn, blue-violet;
to Aquarius, pure violet; and to Pisces, violet-red. In expounding the Eastern system of esoteric philosophy, H. P, Blavatsky relates
the colors to the septenary constitution of man and the seven states of matter as follows:

COLOR PRINCIPLES OF MAN STATES OF MATTER

Violet Chaya, or Etheric Double Ether
Indigo Higher Manas, or Spiritual Intelligence Critical State called Air
Blue Auric Envelope Steam or Vapor
Green Lower Manas, or Animal Soul Critical State
Yellow Buddhi, or Spiritual Soul Water
Orange Prana, or Life Principle Critical State
Red Kama Rupa, or Seat of Animal Life Ice

This arrangement of the colors of the spectrum and the musical notes of the octave necessitates a different grouping of the planets
in order to preserve their proper tone and color analogies. Thus do becomes Mars; re, the sun; mi, Mercury; fa, Saturn; sol, Jupiter;
la, Venus; si (ti) the moon. (See The E. S. Instructions.)
In this diagram Fludd has divided each of the four Primary elements into three subdivisions. The first division of each element is the
grossest, partaking somewhat of the substance directly inferior to itself (except in the case of the earth, which has no state inferior
to itself). The second division consists of the element in its relatively pure state, while the third division is that condition wherein the
element partakes somewhat of the substance immediately superior to itself. For example the lowest division of the element of water
is sedimentary, as it contains earth substance in solution; the second division represents water in its most common state--salty--as
in the case of the ocean; and the third division is water in its purest state--free from salt. The harmonic interval assigned to the
lowest division of each element is one tone, to the central division also a tone, but to the higher division a half-tone because it
partakes of the division immediately above it. Fludd emphasizes the fact that as the elements ascend in series of two and a half
tones, the diatessaron is the dominating harmonic interval of the elements.

SOLFEGGIO SAGRADO Y EL CIRCULO PERFECTO DEL SONIDO

Las frecuencias del Antiguo Solfeggio Sagrado de los sonidos armónicos fueron la base de la música original utilizada en los
antiguos cantos gregorianos. Esta escala musical se ha perdido desde hace siglos ya que se sustituyó gradualmente hasta
convertirse en la escala musical común actual. Se dice que estas frecuencias fueron las responsables de la caída de los muros de
Jericó. Se cree que estas notas tienen la capacidad de afectar a la materia y la conciencia (Cimática, se detalla a continuación de
este artículo). Esta escala puede ayudarnos a profundizar en el propósito de la música y acelerar el proceso de curación y
crecimiento espiritual, desbloquear los secretos del sonido y aprender la forma de utilizar la música para evolucionar la conciencia.
La luz, la materia y el sonido se componen de diversas velocidades de vibración y son el resultado de la octava a la que resuena.
Actualmente hay muy poca información confiable acerca del Solfeggio Sagrado, ya que hay confusión entre el nombre antiguo y la
frecuencia con respecto a las notas de nuestro sistema musical estándar y son pocos los que comparten sus avances. La
frecuencia 528 Hz está relacionada y vibra con el Chacra del Corazón, corresponde en el espectro electromagnético del color al
VERDE AMARILLO, es el centro del arco iris. La frecuencia 528 Hz es de la que más se habla por estar relacionada con el AMOR,
es usada por los biogenetistas para la reparación del ADN. En un entorno espiritual está relacionada con la Creación de Milagros.
Ha sido estudiada por varios científicos de reputación mundial como el Dr. MASARU EMOTO, el Dr. Joseph Puleo, Michael Walton
entre otros. En el apartado de esta misma página con el título ‘…Otras meditaciones’ puedes encontrar vídeos con estos sonidos
para que puedas sentir las distintas frecuencia y experimentes sus sensaciones, es recomendable escucharlas con auriculares
pues resulta mucho más efectivo y si estás acostado o en una posición cómoda, pues mas podrás centrarte en sus efectos y
percibir donde están afectando (en que puntos de tu cuerpo tienes mayores sensaciones) ahí será donde tengas que trabajar con
esa frecuencia en particular centrando toda tu atención, o sea escucharla únicamente por el mayor tiempo posible, ojalá por una
hora. Es recomendable escuchar estos sonidos cuando no estés realizando operaciones que requieran de atención o alerta como
conducir, caminar en la calle, operación de maquinaria o cualquier otra actividad relacionada, en otras palabras haz uso de éstas
en meditación, relajación y procesos terapéuticos y de armonización. Las frecuencias son: 174 Hz, 285 Hz, 396 Hz, 417 Hz, 528
Hz, 639 Hz, 741 Hz, 852 Hz, 963 Hz. Todas éstas frecuencias generan una resonancia que sincroniza las células del cuerpo para
diferentes aplicaciones de Armonización y Sanación. Los cuencos tibetanos generan un efecto Psico Acústico muy poderos que
promueve la integración de los hemisferios cerebrales entre otros beneficios. La vibración ya era conocida por las antiguas
culturas como Egipcia y Griega de donde se dió a conocer por medio del gran sabio Maestro Hermes Trimegistro en sus
enseñanzas del Kybalión sobre los 7 principios de verdad del Universo, en el tercer principio dice: “Nada permanece inmóvil, todo
está en movimiento, todo vibra”. Este principio encierra la verdad y explica las diferencias entre las diversas manifestaciones de la
materia, de las fuerzas, de la mente y aún del mismísimo espíritu, las que no son sino el resultado de varios estados vibratorios.
Desde el Todo, que es puro espíritu, hasta la mas grosera forma de materia, todo está en contínua vibración. ¿y qué es la
vibración? La etimología de la palabra proviene del griego “energas” que significa “activo” es decir que la energía o vibración
implica actividad o movimiento. Desde el punto de vista oriental es admitido como un principio, desde la mas remota antigüedad,
denominándola además como PRANA cuyas manifestaciones energéticas pasan a ser subproductos de ese esencial y
omnipresente Prana que todo lo interpernetra. Desde el punto de vista científico es el movimiento interno que tiene cada ser o
cuerpo que ocurre por el movimiento del electrón alrededor del átomo, todo cuerpo lo contiene, desde el corpúsculo y la célula,
hasta el astro y los universos, todo está en vibración constante. La vibración de todo cuerpo puede ser captada y en especial la
humana, la de las plantas, piedras y animales mediante el AURA, que es un CAMPO ELECTROMAGNETICO que rodea a cada
ser y está compuesto por numerosas líneas de fuerza, crece y decrece, emite y recibe ondas de todo lo que existe y como todo lo
que existe, afectándonos, causando sensaciones y emociones… Su sustancia es de la naturaleza de la luz, es decir a la vez que
corpurcular y ondulatoria. Su volumen varia, así como también su color. Una vibración es una onda en un segundo y la cantidad de
vibraciones en un segundo es la frecuencia. Una frecuencia es una estado de vibración. Toda vibración es una pulsación de onda,
que tiende a repetirse en círculos, por ejemplo el día y la noche, que comúnmente llamamos día, es un ciclo y también es una
frecuencia. Los ciclos naturales son pulsaciones de ondas rítmicas que se manifiestan con una frecuencia regular, como son las
estaciones del año, por ejemplo, las fases lunares, las pulsaciones del corazón… y si continuamos nos damos cuenta de que
nuestras vidas son una frecuencia en constante dinámica cíclica. Ahora, si hay algo que debe caracterizar tu Nueva Conciencia, si
hay algo que debe favorecer el que ‘te des cuenta’ de que todo se trata de algo más de lo que nos dijeron los modelos educativos
anteriores, si hay algo que te debe llevar al siguiente nivel es la verdad de que todo es cuestión de vibración. TODO. Ahora
veamos que ventaja te da el tener este conocimiento. Debes comprender o asimilar, que hasta un pensamiento es algo que está
vibrando. Si todo pensamiento vibra, todo pensamiento emite una señal, y así, cada pensamiento atrae otra señal de regreso que
encaja perfecto con la señal emitida. En otras palabras, tus pensamientos al vibrar emiten una frecuencia vibratoria que sintoniza
con la misma frecuencia pero en el exterior, esta es la forma en que atraes las cosas a tu vida. La manera mas sencilla de hacer
que armonicen tus frecuencias vibratorias con las de tus deseos, es que ‘imagines’ que ya lo tienes, que al imaginarlo ‘sientas’ la
maravilla de gozar aquello que deseabas, creer que ya lo tienes en tu experiencia de vida, dirigir tus pensamientos al disfrute como
de ya tener aquello que deseas… con la práctica de esta poderosísima recomendación porpia de la Nueva Conciencia, te
mantendrás en la frecuencia vibratoria que necesitas para permitir así que aquello que deseas se manifieste en tu experiencia de
vida. Los estados de ánimo vibran y lanzan al espacio vibraciones en sonidos y en colores. Todos los estados mentales se lanan al
exterior del cuerpo que los crea, van golpeando cuerpos afines como hacen los instrumentos musicales y estas vibraciones afectan
en bien y en mail a otras mentes, aumentando los estados emocionales y mentales que están a tono con ellas. Cuando nuestro
cuerpo recibe la cantidad adecuada de energía y en la vibración determinada, disfrutamos de una buena salud. Por el contrario, si
ese nivel de energía y su vibración decaen, nos enfermamos en incluso morimos. Está mas que comprobado que nuestros
pensamientos inciden sobre este nivel de energía y vibración y son capaces de acelerar o detener su frecuencia y es por esto que
cuanto mas nos acercamos a las vibraciones elevadas (Amor) mejor nos sentimos y disponemos de una mayor cantidad de
energía. Entonces, nos queda claro que todo se trata de frecuencia y vibraciones o mejor dicho vibrar en la frecuencia correcta,
hay que despertar a una nueva Conciencia y entender que todo se inicia contigo y como elijas sentirte: Si quieres recibir algo
bueno, primero has de elegir vibrar a esa frecuencia alta y veloz, para que luego por lógica, por ley, lo atraigas al sintonizar con lo
deseado. No funciona de otra forma. Mantener la energía vital alta debería ser entonces la prioridad de todo ser humano. Si
realmente somos consecuentes en amarnos y apoyarnos a nosotros mismos, deberíamos convertirnos en los ‘guardianes de
nuestra propia frecuencia energética’. Para esto es importante saber la forma de impedir que nuestro nivel de energía vital
descienda y qué técnicas podemos emplear para incrementar la energía, cuando nos encontremos ‘en la penumbra’ o en la
‘oscuridad’.

1. Pensar, sentir y actuar desde el Amor.

2. Dormir y tomarnos el tiempo de descanso adecuado para la recuperación mental.
3. La Meditación.
4. Contacto consciente con la naturaleza o visualizaciones que lleven la mente a descansar en la contemplación de la naturaleza.
5. Relajación.
6. La gratitud, gozar de lo que ya se tiene.
7. El ejercicio que hace segregar endorfinas y quema adrenalina. Pone a circular la energía.
8. Cantar y bailar.
9. Estar atentos a la información que nos llega del exterior (lecturas, películas, tv, música, del entorno en general, incluidas la
personas) y ser selectivos, deben enfocar armonía y bienestar…
10. Dedicar tiempo a aquellas actividades con lo que se disfruta… (pintar, cuidar el jardín…)

Tú elijes como escribir tu vida, es tu opción Aquí y Ahora. Y por supuesto estamos aquí para disfrutar… estamos aquí para ser
felices. Se dice que la Terapia vibracional será la medicina de la Nueva Era, aún cuando el creer esta afirmación no tendría porque
quitarle crédito a otras medicinas llamadas complementarias. A través de lo que hemos anteriormente reconocido ¿Es que existe
algo que no vibre?, ¿hay algo que sea estático?. Todo es energía y toda energía tiene una onda vibratoria, ya sea luz, sonido,
ondas electromagnéticas, o cromáticas; congelada o cristalizada, la energía vibra; lo único que cambia es la forma con la que se
manifiesta debido al tipo de onda vibratoria. Partiendo de esta base, es evidente que el cuerpo humano es así mismo energía en
movimiento, las diferentes ondas de vibración, producen en el, percepciones y sensaciones. Las células y los órganos del cuerpo
están continuamente vibrando a determinadas frecuencias. El sonido es el elemento empleado en esta terapia vibracional. Se
utilizan distintos instrumentos musicales como cuencos, diapasones, gong, campanas realizados con distintos metales, y la voz
humana. Es, entonces una terapia complementaria que utiliza el sonido y la música para actuar benéficamente sobre los planos
físico, emocional, mental y espiritual. Cuando un órgano, estructura o tejido está sano, su vibración está en armonía con el resto
del cuerpo. Cuando aparecen trastornos del estado de salud, estas frecuencias se alteran y se rompe la armonía. Utilizando el
fenómeno de resonancia acústica es posible modificar estos patrones frecuenciales alterados, estimulando con sonido o música
apropiados. Desde que el físico alemán Hans Jenny, publicó sus descubrimientos basados en la investigación de los efectos de
ondas de sonido sobre diferentes materias, y comprobando la variación de la organización de sus partículas que formaban
diferentes figuras geométricas, la ciencia del sonido ha probado fehacientemente, que cualquier sonido cercano al organismo
humano, originará un cambio físico en el interior del organismo y sus campos electromagnéticos Estos sonidos perfectamente
afinados rodean el cuerpo de la persona a tratar, y su frecuencia vibratoria afecta a nivel celular liberando patrones energéticos
negativos encapsulados en el cuerpo y la mente. Actúa sobre las ondas cerebrales y todo el organismo entra en resonancia,
produciendo una profunda relajación, reduciendo los ritmos cardiacos y respiratorios, haciendo que se produzcan endorfinas, que
inhiben el dolor y producen una sensación de bienestar. Por otra parte, la mayoría de las personas no emite ciertas frecuencias
sonoras en su voz. Esta carencia se relaciona con tensión física o emocional, y enfermedades crónicas o potenciales. Cuando se
le proporcionan las frecuencias faltantes, el cuerpo es sutilmente afinado recuperando sus ritmos naturales y su armonía. La
música y el canto son sumamente curativos. Se ha demostrado con la experiencia y la practica la correspondencia entre las notas
musicales, el color, las frecuencias planetarias, los pesos atómicos de los elementos y el sistema energético humano. Dentro de la
terapia de sonido hay algunos instrumentos que cobran un valor incalculable por su alta vibración. Y aquí le mostraremos los más
importantes, o mejor dicho aquellos que ya conocemos o con los que hemos trabajado, a fin de facilitar la mayor información
posible para aquellas personas interesadas en experimentar esta terapia que esta teniendo un gran alcance de difusión en estos
momentos. Si bien es cierto que estos instrumentales son utilizados terapéuticamente también tienen unos efectos a nivel espiritual
o místico.La moderna Biología comienza reconocer que muchas sustancias y tejidos del cuerpo humano, tienen las mismas
propiedades que los cristales líquidos. El medico e investigador americano Ryerson asegura que, existen en el cuerpo físico y en
los cuerpos sutiles varias estructuras cristalinas similares a cuarzo que amplifican el resultado positivo de las terapias
víbracionales. Las sales celulares, los tejidos grasos, la linfa, los glóbulos rojos y blancos y la glándula pineal, son estructuras
cristalinas que forman un sistema completo en el organismo, de manera que podríamos decir del ser humano que es un “cristal
vivo”. Nuestro ADN se estructura en una doble espiral similar a la del cristal de cuarzo. Hay cuatro moléculas de sílice en cada una
de nuestras muelas, y también está presente en la estructura cristalocoloidal liquida del cerebro. La sílice, que es cuarzo (óxido de
silicio), abunda en los huesos, la sangre, el cabello, la piel, las uñas, los dientes.

LOS CUENCOS DE CUARZO: La glándula pineal cuyas calcificaciones lo convierten en un auténtico cristal, es una de las más
beneficiadas terapéuticamente hablando ya que aprovecha el canal que une entre el bulbo raquídeo y el cóccix favoreciendo
prácticas tales como la meditación. De hecho, se ha demostrado que esta glándula tiene un papel relevante como “reloj biológico”
para distinguir el día y la noche, propiedad que le acercaría aún más al cristal de cuarzo que se emplea mucho en la industria
relojera sin olvidar que el corazón de nuestro querido ordenador (microprocesador) es un chip de puro cuarzo. La acción curativa
de los cuencos se debe a la resonancia entre su estructura de cristal y la propia red cristalina del organismo humano, aunque los
cuencos, generan un patrón de onda sinusoidal que resuena con las partículas con las que entra en contacto, ya sea de cuerpo
humano o cualquier otra materia. El efecto curativo del sonido generado por los cuencos de cuarzo sobre el cuerpo, se produce al
entrar en resonancia ambos sistemas cristalinos. El sonido producido influye profundamente a los hemisferios cerebrales. De
hecho se pueden combinar determinados sonidos, llamados bineurales, para lograr su armonización que repercute en la columna y
se expande a las células, líquidos y órganos. Jeffrey Thompson -director del Centro de Investigaciones Neuroacústicas en el
Instituto de Ciencias Humanas de California-, afirma: “Dado que el sonido viaja cinco veces mejor por el agua que por el aire la
estimulación en el cuerpo de la frecuencia sonora es una forma muy eficaz de estimulación corporal integral, sobre todo a nivel
celular. El estímulo directo del tejido celular vivo, utilizando la vibración de la frecuencia de sonido, ha mostrado un marcado
metabolismo celular y con ello la posible movilización de una respuesta celular de curación. El sonido que transmiten los cuencos
de cuarzo es tan puro que la mera acción de hacerlos sonar se transforma en un acto sagrado. Este sonido, “cuasi divino”, se
expande a su alrededor y viaja por el espacio alcanzando los confines últimos de la Tierra al interferir con otras ondas de sonido
que encuentra en su camino. De ese modo sana a las personas y sana el ambiente. En todo caso, el terapeuta que emplea este
instrumento tiene una gran responsabilidad y debe situarse en un estado de conciencia positivo asentado en el chacra corazón
para que la energía emitida y amplificada sea lo más pura posible. El científico norteamericano Marcel Vogel encontraría además
que el electromagnetismo del pensamiento humano encaja con la matriz formada en la estructura molecular del cuarzo y eso
permite su programación por el propio pensamiento (lo sorprendente es que ya en los puranas -antiguos textos vedas de la India-
se decía que el cristal de cuarzo puede amplificar los pensamientos hasta 15.000 veces). Los cuencos de cuarzo, pues, contienen
un poder que va mucho más allá de la mera musicalidad y que requiere tanto de nuestra apertura consciente para ser percibido
como de la correcta disposición e intención para ser utilizado. De hecho, producen una onda sinusoidal pura y crean un sonido
multidireccional que se expande hasta un kilómetro de distancia y puede durar varios minutos antes de extinguirse. Y su sonido
envuelve el cuerpo como una ola proporcionando una experiencia similar a un masaje enormemente sutil o a una profunda y
serena meditación. Los cuencos de cuarzo emiten e inducen un modelo de onda alfa que es el que emite el cerebro en los estados
meditativos y de profunda calma. Y se ha podido comprobar que en esos estados hay un aumento significativo de la producción de
linfocitos T, responsables del sistema inmunitario. El sonido de los cuencos, entonces vemos, afecta de manera global al individuo.
Primero equilibra su cuerpo energético y los chakras (centros de energía) y luego limpia el campo áurico. Además, la vibración
repercute en la columna que actúa como vehículo de resonancia y se extiende a través del sistema nervioso a nuestras células,
tejidos y órganos. Esa es la razón de que la vibración producida por los cuencos tenga la capacidad de disolver bloqueos en el
cuerpo físico y sutil así como de que se utilice en casos de contracturas musculares, roturas y otros problemas óseos. La vibración
de los cuencos resuena y armoniza la estructura cristalina presente también en nuestro esqueleto.

FRECUENCIA SOLFEGGIO: “Es una técnica que en el tiempo prácticamente se ha perdido, frecuencias que fueron dadas, de
donde tenemos conocimiento, en los cantos gregorianos y producían un efecto muy especial tanto en los que cantaban como los
que asistían a las misas, un efecto que incluso llegó a preocupar tanto a las jerarquías eclesiásticas que en el tiempo
prácticamente se han perdido.” Tales como el gran himno a San Juan Bautista, así como otros himno se creía que cuando se
cantaban estos cantos se impartía una bendición y gracia especiales que ayudaban al desenvolvimiento de los rituales cristianos.
Las frecuencias contenidas en estos cantos fueron redescubiertas por Dr. Joseph Puleocomo y se describe en el libro de Leonard
Horowitz. Es una bendición para toda la humanidad el trabajo que han elaborado estas dos personas al devolvernos el tesoro de
estas frecuencias. “Estas seis frecuencias que vienen del himno a San Juan Bautista, en el cual en cada una de las primeras
sílabas de cada palabra con la que comenzaba este himno, (los cantores) le daban la entonación que después fueron llamadas las
frecuencias de solfeggios. Estas primeras silabas tenían la característica de que cada una de ellas estaba en un tono superior a la
que le precedía y además terminando en vocal con lo cual daba la posibilidad de ser cantada muy bien. La doble característica que
tiene el haber cogido la música y haberla estructurado, en cierta medida nos dio la consecuencia de que por un lado nos
separáramos de esta música, la llamada Frecuencia del Solfeggios, que estaba constituida de una manera tal que se conectaba
muy bien con todo lo que era la parte espiritual.” Los nombres de las notas musicales se derivan del poema, UT queant laxis del
monje benedictino friulano Pablo el Diácono, como decíamos específicamente de las sílabas iniciales del Himno a San Juan
Bautista.Las frases de este himno, en latín, son así:

UT queant laxis UT: para que

Resonare fibris qüeant resonare: puedan cantar
Mira gestorum mira gestorum: de los milagros
Famuli tuorum famuli tuorum: los siervos tuyos
Solve polluti laxis fibris: a pleno pulmón
Labii reatum Sancte Johannes: San Juan
Sancte Ioannes solve reatum: disuelve los pecados
polluti labii: labios impuros

De allí se tomaron los nombres de la escala musical, y posteriormente se transformo el UT en Do y se le agregó el Si como 7 nota:
Los monjes de la antigüedad cantaban “a capella” este poema sagrado:

1- UT- queant laxis

2- RE- sonare fibris
3- MI- ra gestorum
4- FA- muli tuorum
5- SOL- ve polluti
6- LA- O biireatum
7- SI- Sancte Iohannes

“El canto Gregoriano manejaba estas frecuencias, y por ello estos coros realizaron sanaciones milagrosas entre los monjes y los
feligreses que los escuchaban. Era una música que liberaba algo dentro del cuerpo; incluso dentro de la secuencia que mas
adelante se ha descubierto con respecto a la estructura del universo, se habla que estas seis frecuencias están aparejadas con lo
que es la secuencia primordial de emanación, como estructura geométrica para la creación de todo el universo, o sea estamos
hablando de algo de significación increíble.” “Hoy se afina la nota La a 440 HZ ciclos por segundo y en aquel momento se estaba
trabajando a 415 poco a poco se fue subiendo a 430 y hasta que llegamos al día de hoy a 440, pero lamentablemente aquí nos
íbamos separando de la frecuencia original, esta frecuencia original que no es originalmente este UT que inicialmente era de 396
HZ realmente no era el Do como se planteaba, se le puso este nombre pero el Do real que se trabaja hoy en día esta mas cerca de
528 que es el Mi, esta es la nota de la transformación incluso la usan lo ingenieros de hoy día los ingenieros genetistas,
bioquímicos para reparar las estructuras del ADN que están rotas, o sea a través de la radiónica prácticamente exponiendo la
estructura del ADN. Estos sonidos que vemos que pueden reestructurar, entonces estamos hablando de algo realmente que es la
vida, la vida nuestra y la que existe no solamente en nuestro planeta sino en este universo.” “La música no ha sido hecha como lo
entendemos hoy como si fuera música simplemente para los oído, sino que estaba hecha para se entendida por el oído interno,
para el alma y es lo que realmente estamos entendiendo gracias a Dios, con este acercamiento de las frecuencia del solfeggio que
además tienen unos dibujos fantásticos según han sido medidas con el método del famoso Doctor Japonés Masaru Emoto. El Dr.
Emoto examino cristales de agua con el entendimiento de que el amor y la gratitud tienen un poderoso impacto en la apariencia de
las moléculas del agua. Como sabemos, el agua opera conscientemente, respondiendo rápidamente a la oración para purificarse, y
como nosotros estamos hechos mayormente de agua, nuestros cuerpos también resonarán en armonía con la frecuencia
solfeggio, vibrando con AMOR y purificación.” ”Realmente estamos hablando de esas seis frecuencias no estamos hablando de
más frecuencias aunque se ha hecho un estudio por el cual se puede llegar por simpatía, a otras 3 frecuencias más. Haciendo las
permutaciones correspondientes nos damos cuenta que la suma de estos dígitos siempre nos da una cifra 3, 6 y 9 y en estas cifras
que ya grandes místicos y científicos incluido Nicolás Tesla, que llegó a afirmar que cuando tengamos conocimiento de lo que
significan realmente el significado de los números 3, 6 y 9 tendríamos la llave del universo, o sea estamos hablando de algo que se
complementa entre la geometría sagrada o sea esa estructura tetraédrica, de la estrella tetraédrica que genera todo un patrón
increíble que es el patrón en el cual va asociado la emanación de la creación junto con las frecuencias, nos da un elemento
realmente poderosísimo no solamente de creación sino también de estabilizarse uno mismo al estar expuesto a estas frecuencias
ya sea por sonidos que escuchamos o cantarlo nosotros mismos, una vez que tengamos la frecuencia como para poder
reproducirla estamos haciendo vibrar nuestro cuerpo a un nivel increiblemente elevado.” Entonces vemos la relación de las
Frecuencias Solfeggios con los distintos puntos de los chakras y para que se utilizan.

UT: 396 Hz – Frecuencia para liberar el miedo y la culpabilidad

RE: 417 Hz – Frecuencia para deshacer las situaciones y facilitar el cambio
MI: 528 Hz – Frecuencia para la transformación y los milagros.

“Para trabajar verdaderamente cada una de las frecuencias, y lo que nos podría producir en las distintas partes del cuerpo como
así con los chakras, cuando interactúa la frecuencia respecto a ellos, al mismo tiempo recordemos que el cuerpo tiene su propia
resultante vibracional o sea que estamos hablando de un encuentro entre todo lo que somos con respecto a algo que viene a
balancear a equilibrar y es la palabra clave en este sistema, el balance, el equilibrio para mi entender, estamos viviendo en un
sistema totalmente desbalanceado, desequilibrado, es una cosa realmente seria porque las construcciones que hacemos, la vida
que llevamos están totalmente desbalanceadas están totalmente fuera de código y se ven los resultados las persona padeciendo
enfermedades depresiones alteraciones, que realmente no vendrían a lo que uno tiene que realmente vivir en esta experiencia,
que seria realmente disfrutar del camino.”

Reparación del ADN

FA: 639 Hz – Frecuencia para la conexión y las relaciones
SOL: 741 Hz – Frecuencia para el despertar de la intuición
LA: 852 Hz – Frecuencia para volver al orden espiritual
Tenemos a nuestra disposición una herramienta maravillosa, la cual podemos utilizar para nuestro propio crecimiento, sanación,
armonización; de nosotros depende el utilizarla. Aprovechemos entonces, la oportunidad que nos entrega este conocimiento; a lo
mejor es el momento que volvamos a las prácticas de sanación que tenían nuestros ancestros y dejar la angustia y la vida llena de
stress, de la violencia, del engaño y la frustración y podamos sentarnos a escuchar el ritmo de nuestro corazón, acompasándolo a
la vibración de instrumentos o sonidos mencionado, o de los instrumentos indicados, o simplemente ¡cantar y cantar!, pero una
cosa si es cierta: la paz es un camino que se hace dando el primer paso, y como siempre digo TU DECIDES.

The Law of Three: There are ideas which could stop all quarrels; such an idea is the law of three. ~ P. D. Ouspensky When I
worked at a psychiatric clinic as a young man, I was asked this question by a friend: If you could explain one fourth way idea to your
colleagues at the clinic, which idea would it be? He was very surprised by my answer. I said that if the doctors and the nurses at the
clinic truly understood the law of three, it would have the potential to change our whole approach. In a nutshell what the law of three
means is that every action requires three forces. When three forces are present, things happen, actions are actualized. But without
three forces—with one or two forces—nothing happens. There are different names for each force. The first force is called the active
or positive or motivating force. The second force is called the negative or passive or denying force. The third force is called the
neutralizing or facilitating or invisible force. All esoteric laws, like the law of three, work both on the scale of our inner world and on
the scale of the world around us, but it is often true that a law will be easier to observe in one or the other. I have personally found
that the law of three is easiest to observe in my interactions with other people, so that’s what I’ll talk about here. It’s generally not
hard to observe the first and second force in an interaction. Let’s say that you want to go out to a restaurant or to see friends, and
your wife (or your husband) doesn’t want to go out. You want to go out and you don’t want to go alone, but your spouse wants to
stay home. You are the positive force, you want to act, but your spouse is the passive or negative force. She (or he) resists you. In
this example what the law of three means is that if you do nothing but try to motivate the other person to act, you will only increase
their resistance. No amount of first force can overcome second force. What is needed is a third force. In this case the third force can
come from you or from the outside. Let’s say that your spouse wanted to stay home to watch a show or to do some research on the
internet, and it happens that the internet goes down that night night. Their plan is ruined, and that might be enough to neutralize
their denying force. In other words, they may now be willing to go out. The action becomes possible because their denying force
was neutralized by what happened. What is more likely is that you will have to provide a third force yourself. You will need to think
about the conflict in terms of neutralizing their denying force, not in terms of overcoming their denying force. Perhaps you will offer
to do something for them in exchange—accompany them somewhere that they want to go in the next week or make them breakfast
the next morning. The point in this example is that if you want a result, you have to stop playing a motivating force and start playing
a facilitating force. Let’s take another example. Let’s say you’re sick and you need to go to the doctor, but you don’t have the money
so you do nothing for a number of days. The first or motivating force is being sick. The denying force is having no money. You go
round and round in your mind about what to do, then a friend or a family member offers to give you the money. That is the third or
facilitating force. Using this same example let’s say that money is not an issue. Let’s say that you mistrust doctors, that you’ve been
sick like this before and have gone to a doctor and gotten antibiotics, and that it didn’t help. Again the motivating force is being sick
or needing help, but this time the denying force is a lack of knowledge about what will help to make you better. In this case maybe a
friend tells you about some herbs or supplements that have helped him in the past or about an acupuncturist. This new knowledge
of a different approach neutralizes your apathy and allows you to take action and find a treatment. The third force is sometimes
called the invisible force because we are all third force blind; that is, we tend to focus on the first and second force and miss the
necessity for a third force. It is how we think: this is what I want and this is what is keeping me from getting it. This type of thinking
was very prevalent at the clinic where I worked. Aims were set for the patients and obstacles were discussed. We often treated
depressed patients by motivating them. If they were apathetic, we told them that life was worth the trouble, that it was interesting or
fun. We motivated them to act by overwhelming their negative and passive view of the world. The problem with this approach was
that, in almost all cases, the patients never learned to motivate themselves, so that as soon as the stimulus that we provided was
removed, they fell back into their old habits. If we had been more intelligent in our approach, we would have played a third force, not
a first force, and tried to find a way to neutralize the denying force they felt in their lives outside the clinic. Let’s take one more
example: you have an old car, it runs okay, but you’ve been thinking it’s time to get a new one. There are advantages on both sides.
The positive force in this decision is having a more dependable and perhaps more fuel-efficient car. The negative force is not
wanting to have additional debt. You may go for months in a kind of indecision about what to do. But eventually something will
happen. Maybe you will lose your job, and so you will definitely decide to keep the old car and fix it up as you can. Maybe the old
car will break down and you will decide that it’s not worth fixing and will buy a new one. Maybe you will find a great deal on a nearly
new car and decide to buy that. The point of all these examples is that before the third force arrives, nothing happens. Again:
without three forces—with one or two forces—no action or movement is possible. The first two forces, motivation and resistance,
simply circle around each other. They do not move toward an action or a conclusion. You need to teach yourself to see the law of
three. This type of knowledge is not innate or instinctive, but once it’s pointed out, and you begin to see it, you will wonder how you
lived without it.
The Law of Seven: While the nuclear bomb was being developed in the United States during the Second World War, there were a
few scientists who theorized that once you started the nuclear chain reaction that caused the bomb to explode, that there would be
no way to stop it, that it would destroy all the matter in the universe. It, of course, says something about man’s destructive nature
that, in light of this theory, he would still test such a device, but that’s not what I want talk about here. The point I want to make is
that what the scientists who formulated this theory didn’t understand was the law of seven (also called the law of octaves). They
didn’t understand that nothing continues forever. The law of seven can be observed everywhere in the natural world and in
everything we do internally and externally. If we understood the law of octaves, we could see more clearly how the universe unfolds,
or how a tree grows, or how learning requires special efforts at certain, very specific, points. The law of octaves explains many
phenomena in our lives which are incomprehensible. ~ George Gurdjieff. The law of seven is said to be the basis for the seven note
musical octave. The idea is that in nature, and in the universe at large, nothing continues forever in a direct line. Everything must
deviate at definite intervals. If you take the standard seven note octave, plus the first note to a new octave, you get eight notes: do,
re, mi, fa, sol, la, si, and do. What the law of seven says is that within these eight notes there are two definite intervals, one between
mi and fa, and one between si and the new do. The intervals are called the mi/fa interval and the si/do interval. On an energetic
level what this means is that the vibrations, which are increasing (or decreasing) at a consistent rate naturally slow down at these
two intervals. Octaves can be ascending, where the vibrations increase, or descending, where the vibrations decrease. In an
ascending octave the notes run forward, so that the first interval occurs in the middle at the mi/fa, and the second interval occurs at
the end at the si/do. In a descending octave the notes run backward: do, si, la, sol, fa, mi, re, and do, so that the first interval falls at
very beginning and the second interval happens toward the middle. Reading a book (or reading this article) can be considered a
simple example of an ascending octave. Often what happens is that we begin with emotion. We are inspired by the subject or what
we believe we are going to learn, but then about half way through the emotion drops off. Suddenly we don’t understand why we
began reading the book in the first place or why we want to learn what the book teaches. This is the feeling of a mi/fa interval, a kind
of emotional confusion about what we are doing and why we are doing it. At this point it is very easy for the octave to become
something different, to change direction, or to deviate. In this example maybe the book will be set aside, and a new book will be
started. The second book will be new octave, with new inspirations and emotions, but again, the same thing will happen near the
middle of the book; again the emotion will drop off and we will feel confused about our motivation. In order to move on, to complete
the octave—in this case to continue reading the book—a certain effort is required. An effort to bridge the interval. That effort may
take many different forms. It may be quite simple; you may simply use your will to read on, knowing that if you do this, your feelings
of emotional motivation will eventually return. You may have an external force motivating you. Maybe you need to learn the material
in the book in order to pass a test, and maybe passing the test will allow you find a better job or allow you to make more money.
The point is that some kind of effort needs to be made to keep the octave from deviating. Once this effort is made and a new note is
sounded, then the emotion returns, and it’s possible for the octave to continue for a time. The second interval in an ascending
octave happens right at the end, when you are nearly finished and ready to move on. The feeling of the si/do interval is: I just want
this to be finished. Again the emotion drops off. You’re ready to move on, but you’re still not quite finished with what you are doing.
A second effort or shock is now needed to complete the book or whatever you happening to be doing. In descending octaves the
first interval comes at the beginning. In other words the octave starts with a change of direction. The intervals in descending octaves
are not bridged, or if they are bridged, they are bridged mechanically. The octave happens automatically, usually changing direction
at each interval. Many natural processes, things that just happen, like decay, are descending octaves. The detonation of a nuclear
bomb is good example of descending octave. When you see films of nuclear devices being detonated, you see that there are two
very definite intervals where the force of the explosion drops off. Since it is a descending octave, the first interval appears at the
beginning, at the point right after the so called mushroom cloud. The second major interval appears at about half the distance from
the point of detonation and the outer ring of the destruction. The law of seven is a little more difficult to observe than the law of
three. The law of seven requires observation of a process that unfolds over a period of time. And it must also be noted that there are
octaves within octaves. If we go back to our example of reading a book, we can say that reading a book in its entirety is a single
octave, but we can also say that each chapter is an octave, or that each section is an octave. And all of these different octaves have
intervals. But the shorter the octave is, the less severe the interval, which means that the interval will be easier to bridge. Like
everything else our inner work—our efforts to remember ourselves, and to be present, and to transform suffering—are subject to the
law of octaves. What this means it that the law of seven can become a tool that can help you understand how to keep your efforts
moving forward; that is, toward more and more presence. LyreThe reason I wanted to introduce the idea of octaves is that it
demonstrates again the necessity for effort in your inner work. What the law of octaves teaches us about being present, for
instance, is that there are times when you are not going to understand why you want to be present, or why you want to have the
experience of higher consciousness. Another way of looking at this is that you will not always feel emotional about being present. It
is a law that you will be able to be present for a time and then an interval will come. Nothing can continue at its present rate of
vibration forever, including your attempts to be present. Something will always happen. Maybe you will simply forget about it, or
maybe you will become identified. Something will happen to break the chain. But if you can observe this moment, you have an
opportunity: you can use your intelligence and your experience to make a special effort to continue to be present. And this type of
effort, where there is no motivation, has a greater possibility to produce consciousness than the efforts you make when you are
motivated. This is so because, in the moment when you bridge this interval, there is no momentum, and so it becomes necessary
for you to work directly from will.
Our Place in the Universe: Esoteric teachings generally study both man and the universe. One reason for this is that some laws
are more easily understood by looking outside of us, and other laws are more easily understood by studying our inner world.
Esotericism also teaches us about the universe because without knowledge of the universe and its laws man cannot understand his
place in the world. Contemporary science for the most part sees man as the pinnacle of the created universe. This is so because
science generally only studies one particular dimension of the universe: the dimension that we naturally perceive, that is, three
dimensions of space and one dimension of time, sometimes referred to as the space-time continuum. This severely restricts
scientific study because the universe is not limited to these dimensions, and because scientific proofs of higher worlds are
impossible for the simple reason that scientific proofs require physical evidence, and the laws that determine higher worlds are not
dependent on the set of laws that determine the physical world. It is possible for us to perceive other dimensions, but this can only
happen when higher states of consciousness function in us. Science has no field that studies man from the point of view of what he
may become. Even modern psychology, which should study this, has become sidetracked in a detailed examination of abnormal
behavior. It is a curious fact that modern psychological theory defines a normal psychology by a lack of mental disorders. In other
words it has no solid grasp of what constitutes normality in man. In contemporary physics there is a controversy about the different
sets of laws for the incredibly small (quantum physics) and the very large (the physics of relativity). The controversy is that the laws
that determine the action of subatomic particles are incompatible with the laws that we use to determine the movement of planets,
stars, and galaxies, and even the expansion of the universe itself. In other words we are using two different sets of laws to measure
the very big and the very small, and the laws that determine the very small don’t work on the level of the very big and vice versa.
This is a problem only because some physicists think that there should be one set of laws that refer to all levels. This theory is
sometimes referred to as a theory of everything or unification. Einstein is said to have been preoccupied with this problem for the
latter part of his life, and some contemporary physicists feel that they have found a solution to this problem in a complex set of
equations called string theory. This theory cannot be proved, and even to imagine it has its difficulties. For string theory to make
sense, the universe should have nine spacial dimensions and one time dimension, for a total of ten dimensions. ~ Brian Greene
Esoteric theory takes a different approach. It says that different scales don’t have different sets of laws, but that different scales
have fewer or more laws depending on the vibration of the energy or matter. The slower the vibration, the more laws a particular
scale is under. Light, for instance, is under fewer laws than cellular matter, and cellular matter is under fewer laws than the world of
minerals and rocks. Another way of thinking about this is that there is only one set of laws in the universe, but your place in the
universe, the position or state from where you observe phenomenon, determines how many laws affect you. I will not go into great
detail about this because what is important in this discussion is to understand a few basic principles. The first is that the universe is
made of many different layers or worlds, and that the way we distinguish a world is by its vibration and by the number of laws that
function in that world. The more laws that function the lower the world. The highest worlds have the fewest laws and give the most
freedom. Think about this quite simply. In our day to day world, you could say that if you live in a country, you will under a certain
number of laws by virtue of being a citizen of that country. The laws apply to you simply because you are a citizen. Now imagine
that while you are living in that country, you get a job at a big corporation. Now you are under the laws of the country and all the
rules that regulate what you can and can’t do in order to keep your job at this company. Now let’s add to that that while you’re
working at this job, you get sick. So now you are under the laws of the country, the rules of the corporation, and the restrictions that
your doctor puts you under so that you can get better. This just an analogy, but it should give you an idea about how being in a
lower world adds laws, or weight, to your experience. The laws to which man is subject can only be studied by struggling with them,
by trying to get free from them. ~ G. I. Gurdjieff. There is a lot of talk in modern spiritual literature about becoming free, but how to
become free is seldom spoken about. But, in fact, freedom in an esoteric sense means changing your place. It means being under
fewer laws. And to change your place means to work: to work on self-remembering, to try to be present, and the transform suffering
and negative emotions. Negative emotions and identification and imagination are a few of the mechanical laws that are keeping us
where we are. Another basic idea here is that the laws that refer directly to your level are more pertinent and more influential than
the laws that come from higher worlds. Again this can be taken quite simply. Let’s say you buy a new car. Somebody had to design
that car, and that design is important to the way the car rides, how many miles per gallon of gasoline it gets, and how much
maintenance it needs over the years. But the laws that concerned the designer, don’t generally concern you as you go about using
the car. The designer doesn’t tell you how to drive the car. He doesn’t say, for instance, that you can’t drive the car on Sundays, or
that you can have male passengers and not female passengers, or that you must wash the car every week. He doesn’t interfere on
that level. And you don’t spend your time thinking about why he designed the car the way he did. In other words you don’t generally
concern yourself with the physics or the dynamics that went into designing the car. For you the car is a way of getting from one
place to another, or of transporting goods. The laws that concern you have to do with your day to day activities—like getting to work
on time, or getting your groceries from the store to your house, or whether or not the car needs gas. These are the laws that are
most influential to you. If you have no money for gas, it doesn’t matter how well the car is designed—it won’t be of any use to you.
The main point to understand about the esoteric view of the universe is that our place or our state determines how we experience
it. A lower place or a lower state means more restrictions or more laws and higher place or state means fewer laws and more
freedom. When we talk about freedom, we’re speaking about the work an individual does to become free of unnecessary laws. In
order to understand this, it is first necessary to see man as a micro cosmos. Man is a micro cosmos because, like the universe, he
has within him layers of realities. What this means is that man’s inner life contains the possible experience of many different worlds.
This is what makes man different from other animals. We have a greater built-in capacity to perceive more worlds or different
scales. Oddly this works both ways for man; compared to animals like cats, dogs, and cows, man has the capacity to perceive, or to
live in, higher and lower worlds. Man’s capability for compassion, love, empathy, and self-sacrifice demonstrate his capacity to act
from a higher world, and his capability for abnormal cruelty and greed demonstrate his capacity to act from a lower world. Animals
don’t have the possibility to experience the top and bottom levels that make up the complexities of man’s psychology. Personality,
essence, and higher centers can be seen as three different inner worlds, or realities, in man. Personality is under more laws than
essence, and essence is under more laws than higher centers. Personality is heavy with laws, and higher centers feel free because
they are under fewer laws. This can be taken very simply. There are many experiences in personality that are considered quite
normal, like greed, worry, fear, and selfishness. In personality these weaknesses or actions are the law. People who live in
personality are even proud of weaknesses like vanity, or dominance, or the expression of certain types of negative emotions, all of
which are quite unnecessary, and all of which keep us in a lower part of ourselves. Essence is already more free. Think of a child
before the age of five. Think of how children are free from worry and embarrassment. This is essence. The world is seen more
directly because essence is free from the dark glass, or the laws, of personality. From essence to higher centers we automatically
lose all physical laws, laws connected to the body, like having to eat and taking care of our health. Higher centers exists outside of
these laws, which in itself is very liberating. The worlds of personality, essence, and higher centers are also expressed outside of
us. The world of essence is much of what we think of as natural; trees, plants, soil, vegetables, grains. Animals function primarily
from essence. It’s refreshing to walk in the woods or in a garden because nature represents essence and being surrounded by
nature tends to bring out essence in us. In the same way a city will tend to bring out personality. Much of what is built by man is an
expression of his personality, that is, his vanities, fears, ideas, and desires. Flowers, because they are the sex organs of plants, are
a mechanical expression of the higher emotional center. In the same way we can say that sex, for humans, functions with the
energy of the higher emotional center. Fire, the stars, and light are also external expressions of the this world. Art can express
different worlds depending of the being of the artist. An interesting point here is that it is the being of the artist, not his talent, that
determines whether he expresses the world of essence, personality, or higher centers. Talent gives an artist a greater capacity to
communicate his experience, but it doesn’t determine the level of experience he will choose to depict. For example music that
expresses positive emotions like compassion or love–for instance the music of Bach–is an expression of his experience of higher
centers. Sculpture and painting can depict the world or energy of higher centers, as does, for instance, many of the portraits of
Rembrandt or Leonardo or the best of ancient Greek sculpture. Portraits can express all three worlds, depending on the artist and
the subject. An artist may know higher consciousness first hand, but may choose to depict the personality of his subject, as
Rembrandt sometimes did. On the other hand most landscape paintings express essence. That the artist chooses nature as his
subject probably tells us that he wanted to express that world. The impressionists, for instance, often capture the world of essence.
Paintings of ideas, as well as many abstract paintings, express the personality of the artist. Music, when it aims to communicate
anger or bitterness, also expresses the personality of the artist. This doesn’t mean that it’s bad art; it simply means that the painting
or the composition works on the level of personality, which means that it will likely only affect the personality of the people who look
at it or listen to it. In order to communicate the experience of higher centers or essence, the artist needs to create from essence or
higher centers. The main idea that I want to communicate here is that to function from a higher level of consciousness means that
you function from a different world and that this world is under fewer laws, which is what real freedom means. So here is another
way to understand being present: it is an attempt to be under fewer laws. You begin to free yourself from a whole world of
weaknesses and vices that are connected to regretting the past and worrying about the future.

THE LIFE PATH NUMBER: The Life Path is the sum of the birth date. This number represents who you are at birth and the native
traits that you will carry with you through life. The most important number that will be discussed here is your Life Path number. The
Life Path describes the nature of this journey through life.
The Life Path number is established from the date of birth. First, add the Month, day, and year together to arrive at a total. Next,
reduce this four digit number to a single digit.
Example: If a person was born on October 23, 1972 (10-23-1972*), add the month 10 to the day 23 plus the the year 1972 arriving
at a total of 2005. Then add the digits in 2005 arriving at the Life Path number 7. The "master numbers, " 11, 22, and 33, have
been incorporated within the corresponding single digit number readings. See addition comments about master numbers. If you
choose to consider the master numbers, you can stop reducing the compound numbers when you arrive at the master numbers, 11
or 22. Example: Bill Gates, born 10-28-1955, has a birth date that adds up to 1993. 1993 reduces to 22, so he would a good
example of the 22/4. *Be sure to add the full year, not just the last two digits, i.e. 1969, not 69.
1-You entered this plane with skills allowing you to become a leader type rather easily. Your nature is charged with individualistic
desires, a demand for independence, and the need for personal attainment. Many of our military generals, corporate leaders, and
political leaders are men and women having the Life Path 1. When you display positive 1 traits your mind is capable of significant
creative inspiration, and it possesses the enthusiasm and drive to accomplish a great deal. You are very good at getting the ball
rolling; initiating new projects is your forte. You are at your best when confronted with obstacles and challenges, as you combat
these with strength and daring. This is both the physical and inner varieties of strength. With this strength comes utter determination
and the capability to lead. As a natural leader you have a flair for taking charge of any situation. You have a tendency to do this,
even if, at times, it is not appropriate for you to do so. Highly original, you may have talents as an inventor or innovator of some sort.
In any work that you choose, your independent attitude can show through. You have very strong personal needs and desires, and
you feel it is always necessary to follow your own convictions. You tire of routine and highly detailed tasks rather quickly. You are
ambitious and assertive in promoting yourself. Although you may hide the fact for social reasons, you can be self-centered and
demand to have your way in many circumstances. That said, for the most part, you are considered very good company, friendly,
good-natured, and a wonderful conversationalist. People like you and are drawn to you. It is a good thing they are, because you are
very sensitive to disapproval and you don't handle it very well. There are several ways that the negative side of the 1 can show up.
The 1 always has the potential for greatness as a leader, but they may fail as a follower. Unfortunately, sometimes you have to
follow for a while before you are allowed to lead and this can be a difficult time. When the 1 Life Path person is not fully developed
and expressing the negative side of this number, the demeanor may appear very dependent rather than independent, particularly in
the early years. If you are expressing this negative trait of the number 1, you are likely to be very dissatisfied with your
circumstances, and long for self-sufficiency. This might be defined as the weak or dependent side of the negative 1 Life Path. On
the strong side of this negative curve, the 1 energy can become too self-serving, selfish and egotistical. Avoid being too bossy and
demanding.

2-The Life Path 2 suggests that you entered this plane with a spiritual quality in your makeup allowing you to be one of the
peacemakers in society. Your strengths come from an ability to listen and absorb. You are a fixer, a mediator, and a very diplomatic
type of person using persuasive skills rather than forcefulness to make your way in the world. When you embrace and exhibit the
strenghth of your spiritual side, you are intuitive, avant-garde, idealistic, and visionary. These extremes make you interesting with
much to offer society. You have the potential to be a deep-thinker, and no doubt interested in understanding many of life's mysteries
and more intriguing facets. If you are living with the positive attributes of the number 2 Life Path, you are apt to have the most
delicate ability to be balanced and fair. You clearly see the full spectrum of viewpoints in any argument or situation, and because of
this, people may seek you out to be a mediator. In this role you are able to settle disputes with the most unbiased flair. There is
sincere concern for others; you think the best of people, and want the best for them. You are honest and open in thought, word and
deed. You excel in any form of group activity where your expertise in handling and blending people can be used effectively.
Manners and tact mark your way with others, and you are not one to dominate a group or situation. You are the master of
compromise and of maintaining harmony in your environment. As the ultimate team member, you never demand praise or
recognition. In many ways, you are a creature of habit and routine, and you like your path and pattern well worn and familiar. Your
ability to analyze and render accurate judgments is a wonderful natural trait you bring to the business world. You strive for complete
accuracy and even perfection in your work. Perhaps you are not a leader, but you are a visionary and a very talented idea person.
On the negative side of the 2, nervous energy is a trait often observed in the 2. Because of this, you may be seen as an extremist
who is sometimes the zealot in expressing likes and dislikes. Nervous tension can bring the normally easygoing 2 into a state of
emotional outrage, which to those around you, may seem so out of character. Indeed, the 2 can sometimes become oversensitive.
In some instances, the strength of the 2 can also become its weakness. You may find it hard to decide what to do at times. Twos
often struggle against indecisiveness. Making decisions and getting your life in gear, so to speak, may be a challenge. There is a
tendency for the many 2s to harbor feelings of uneasiness, and dissatisfaction with accomplishments and personal progress in life.
The biggest obstacle and difficulty you may face is that of passivity and a state of apathy and lethargy. The negative 2 can be very
pessimistic. When this sets in to any degree, you are able to accomplishes very little. If living on the negative side of the 2, you may
lack common sense, and you are quite often unable to distinguish between fantasy and reality. Even the more positive individuals
with the 2 Life Path will prefer a more amiable and less competitive environment, often shunning the business world. You can best
serve society in endeavors utilizing your skills of counseling and guidance. Much of your idealism is people oriented and quite
humanitarian in nature. You expect a great deal of yourself.

3-The Life Path 3 indicates that you entered this plane with a strong sense of creativity and with wonderful communication skills.
Achievement for you most likely comes through engaging your ingenious expression. A truly gifted 3 possesses the most
exceptional innovative skills, normally in the verbal realm, writing, speaking, acting, or similar endeavors. Here we are apt to find the
entertainers of the world, bright, effervescent, sparkling people with very optimistic attitudes. The bright side of this path stresses
harmony, beauty and pleasures; of sharing your inventive talents with the world. Capturing your capability in creative self-
expression is the highest level of attainment for this life path. Life is generally lived to the fullest, often without much worry about
tomorrow. You are not very good at handling money because of a general lack of concern about it. You spend it when you have it
and don't when you don't. The 3 loves connecting with people. The characteristics of the 3 are warmth and friendliness, a good
conversationalist, social and open. A good talker both from the standpoint of being a delight to listen to, but even more importantly,
one who has the ability to listen to others. Accordingly, the life path 3 produces individuals who are always a welcome addition to
any social situation and know how to make others feel at home. The approach to life tends to be exceedingly positive. Your
disposition is almost surely sunny and openhearted. A happy and often inspired person, you are constantly seeking and needing the
stimuli of similar people. There is a remote side to your 3 Life Path, as well. This comes as a surprise to the native and to those who
think they are well acquainted. The 3 is actually a very sensitive soul. When hurt, you can easily retreat to a shell of morose silence
for extended periods. Nonetheless, the 3 eventually copes with all of the many setbacks that occur in life and readily bounces back
for more. It is usually easy for you to deal with problems because you can freely admit the existence of problems without letting
them get you down for too long. Because of your own sensitivity to hurt, you have a caring disposition and seem to be very
conscious of other people's feelings and emotions. In romance, the 3 is a very ardent and loyal lover. Affairs that don't go well can
leave scares that seem to linger. Emotional experiences of all sorts tend to deeply touch the 3 and the drama may take some time
to play out. Regrettably, the giving disposition of the 3 often attracts demanding partners. As with most of life's issues for the 3 Life
Path, balance in relationships is illusive. Your big test with a 3 Life Path is controlling your highs and lows. You won't survive very
well in any routine environment or when you are placed under dominating management. Slow thinking and overly contemplative
people tend to frustrate you, and you don't function too well with this type whether you are working for, with, or under them. Your
exuberant nature can take you far, especially if you are ever able to focus your energies and talents. For the few living on the
negative side of this Life Path, a 3 may be so delighted with the joy of living that the life becomes frivolous and superficial. You may
scatter your abilities and express little sense of purpose. The 3 can be an enigma, for no apparent reason you may become moody
and tend to retreat. Escapist tendencies are not uncommon with the 3 life path, and you find it very hard to settle into one place or
one position. Guard against being critical of others, impatient, intolerant, or overly optimistic.

4-The Life Path 4 suggests that you entered this plane with a natural genius for planning, fixing, building, and somehow, with
practical application and cerebral excellence, making things work. You are one of the most trustworthy, practical, and down-to-earth
of individuals; the cornerstone members of society. Indeed, as a Life Path 4, you are a builder of society. The cream of the crop in
this Life Path can be a master builder in society. if you are among these highly talented people, you have an idealistic nature which
is grounded in practical terms, allowing you to conceive grandiose, far-reaching schemes and carry them through to the end. If you
desire and are willing to work for it, you can achieve enormous success, prestige, and fame. Obviously, everyone with a 4 Life Path
does not become famous. All with this Life Path have the ability to take orders and to carry them out with dedication and
perseverance and many 4s live and work happily in this context. But so often, the 4 Life Path is the entrepreneur and manager in
the community. In either role, you always demand as much from yourself as you do from others, and sometimes a lot more. You
have the kind of will power that is often mistaken for sheer stubbornness. You don't think of yourself as dogged, but your honest
beliefs and that ever direct speech makes you come across as completely unremitting. Once a decision is made, it will be followed
through to the conclusion, right, wrong, or indifferent. You are very set in your ways and determined to handle things the way you
are so certain that they should be handled. Your tenacity of purpose and ability to get the job done borders on obsession. You are a
wonderful manager with a great sense of how to get the job done. You are an excellent organizer and planner because of your
innate ability to view things in a very common sense and practical way. This stems from a strong desire to be a perfectionist in your
labor. Planning is necessary to avoid errors. It's very likely that a 4 Life Path person invented the to-do list, because it is the rare Life
Path 4 who doesn't have one by her side at all times. Your life is programed in an orderly fashion permitting you to catalog and
manage the flow of ideas and activities that fill your day. Indeed, you seem to function best when you are under the gun and facing
a tough set of problems. Loyal and devoted, you make the best of your marriage, and you are always the good provider. Friends
may be few in number, but you are very close to them and once friendships are made, they often last a lifetime. The number 4 is
solidly associated with the element of earth from which it gains its strength and utter sense of reality. You are one of the most
dependable people you know. If patience and determination can ever win, you are sure to achieve great success in life. Often, you
are called on to take care of others; to finish what they have started. It may not seem fair and probably isn't, but it may be the key to
your accomplishment and reputation. The negative side of the 4 can prove dogmatic to an excess, narrow-minded, and repressive.
A lot of skin-deep people turn you off, and you lack the tact to keep your feelings from being totally clear to all around. Additionally,
the negative 4 has a bad tendency to get caught up in the daily routine of affairs, missing the big picture and major opportunities
that come along once in a while.

5
The Life Path 5 suggests that you entered this plane with a highly progressive mindset, with the attitude and skills to make the world
a better place. The key word for your Life Path is freedom. In the pursuit of freedom, you are naturally versatile, adventurous, and
advanced in your thinking. You are one of those people who is always striving to find answers to the many questions that life poses.
The byword for the positive Life Path 5 is constant change and improvement. You want to be totally unrestrained, as this is the
number most often associated with the productive use of freedom.

You may be one of the most compassionate of people as the 5 is surely the most freedom-loving and compassionate Life Path.
Your love of freedom extends to humanity at large, and concern for your fellow man, his freedom and his welfare, may be foremost
in your mind. A great Life Path 5 American President, Abraham Lincoln, issued the Emancipation Proclamation, and ended slavery
in America. As the ultimate progressive thinker type, your potential in government, the law, and other positions of authority is
unlimited.

You are a good communicator, and you know how to motivate people around you. This may be your strongest and most valuable
trait. Because of this skill, and your amazing wit, you are a truly natural born salesman. This ability to sell and motivate extends to
any sort of physical product all the way through to whatever ideas or concepts you may embrace.

You abhor routine and boring work, and you are not very good at staying with everyday tasks that must be finished on time. On the
average, the number 5 personality is rather happy-go-lucky; living for today, and not worrying too much about tomorrow. It is also
important for you to find a job that provides thought-provoking tasks rather than routine and redundant responsibilities. You do best
dealing with people, but the important thing is that you have the flexibility to express yourself at all times. You have an innate ability
to think through complex matters and analyze them quickly, but then be off to something new.

A love of adventure may dominate your life. This may take the form of mental or physical manifestation, but in either case, you thrill
to the chance for exploration and blazing new trails. Surely you belong to a group considered the most worldly and traveled. Clearly
you are not one to pass up a good venture. You have quite a lot of the risk-taker in your makeup. If you aren't putting your money at
stake, you are surely open to a wide variety of risks in your everyday life. Taking the conservative approach is just not in your
nature.

In romance, you hate to be tied down and restricted. This doesn't necessarily mean that you are unfaithful or promiscuous, but it
does mean that a good partner for you needs to understand your nature. A relationship based on jealousy and having tight reigns is
not going to work at all for you. A partner who understands your need to be free and trusted will find you trustworthy, even if you
aren't constantly available and totally dutiful. It is important for you to mix with people of a like mind, and to try to avoid those that
are too serious and demanding.

If you are living on the negative side of the Life Path 5, you are apt to be multitalented, but suffering from some lack of direction, and
there is confusion surrounding your ambition. Restless, discontent, and impulsive, you may bounce from one job to the next without
accomplishing much at all. A negative Life Path 5 can become very irresponsible in tasks and decisions concerning the home and
business life. The total pursuit of sensation and adventure can result in your becoming self-indulgent and totally unaware of the
feelings of those around you.

6
The Life Path 6 suggests that you entered this plane with tools to become the ultimate nurturer, and a beacon for truth, justice,
righteousness, and domesticity. Your paternal, or maternal, as the case may be, instincts with a 6 Life Path exceed all others by a
considerable margin. Whether in the home or in the work place, you are the predominant caretaker and family head. While the 6
may assume significant responsibilities in the community, the life revolves around the immediate home and family, for this is the
most domestic of numbers. Conservative principles and convictions are deeply ingrained and define your character.

You are idealistic and must feel useful to be happy. The main contribution you make is that of advice, service, and ever present
support. You are a humanitarian of the first order. It is your role to serve others, and you start in the home environment. You are
very human and realistic about life, and you feel that the most important thing in your life is the home, the family and the friends.

This is the Life Path related to leadership by example and assumption of responsibility, thus, it is your obligation to pick up the
burden and always be ready to help. If you are like the majority with Life Path 6, you are one who will willingly carry far more than
your fair share of any load, and you are always there when needed. In doing so, you take ownership and often become an authority
over the situation.

In romance, the 6 is loyal and devoted. Aa caretaker type, you are apt to attract partners who are somewhat weaker and more
needy than yourself; someone you can care for and protect. The main ingredient that must prevail in the relationship is complete
harmony. You don't function well in stressful relationships that become challenges for you to control. It is the same with friends, you
are loyal and trustworthy. But there is a tendency for you to become dominating and controlling.

It's likely you feel compelled to function with strength and compassion. You are a sympathetic and kind person, generous with
personal and material resources. Wisdom, balance, and understanding are the cornerstones of your life, and these define your
approach to life in general. Your extraordinary wisdom and the ability to understand the problems of others is apt to commence from
an early age. This allows you to easily span the generation gap and assume an important role in life early on.

The number 6 Life Path actually produces few negative examples, but there are some pitfalls peculiar to the path. You may have a
tendency to become overwhelmed by responsibilities and a slave to others, especially members of you own family or close friends.
It's easy for you to fall into a pattern of being too critical of others; you also have a tendency to become too hard on yourself. The
misuse of this Life Path produce tendencies for you to engage in exaggeration, over-expansiveness, and self-righteousness.
Modesty and humility may not flow easily. Imposing one's views in an interfering or meddling way must be an issue of concern.

The natural burdens of this number are heavy, and on rare occasions, responsibility is abdicated by persons with this Life Path 6.
This rejection of responsibility will make you feel very guilty and uneasy, and it will have very damaging effects upon your
relationships with others.

7
The Life Path 7 suggests that you entered this plane with a gift for investigation, analysis, and keen observation. You are a thinker
of the first order. You evaluate situations very quickly, and with amazing accuracy. As a result, you are thorough and complete in
your work, the perfectionist who expects everyone else to meet a high standard of performance, too.

A Life Path 7 person is a peaceful and affectionate soul. But you guard your connection to people carefully. It's easy for you to
detect deception and recognize insincere people, and you avoid them. You aren't one to have a wide circle of friends, but once you
accept someone as a friend, it's for life. It's as if you must get to know someone a lot better before you allow the wall surrounding
you to be penetrated. Chances are you are a very charming and refined individual with great poise and a quick wit. Nonetheless,
there is an exclusiveness about you. You probably aren't a very social person. Your reserve is often taken to be aloofness, but
actually, it's not that at all. It is merely a cover up for your basic feeling of insecurity. There's no rush, It takes time for you to warm
up to new friends. Clubs and organizations hold little interest for you; you are not a joiner.

You actually like being alone and away from the hustle and bustle of modern life. In many ways, you would have fit in better in much
earlier times when the pace of life was less hectic. You need a good deal of quiet time to be with your own inner thoughts and
dreams. You dislike crowds, noise, distractions, and confusion.

The overwhelming strength of the number 7 is reflected in the depth of thinking that is shown; you will garner knowledge from
practically every source that you find. Intellectual, scientific, and studious, you don't accept a premise until you have dissected the
subject and arrived at your own independent conclusion.

This is a very spiritual number and it often denotes a sort of spiritual wisdom that becomes apparent at a fairly early age. A built in
inner guide providing a strong sense of intuition may set you up as being a law unto yourself. Whatever spiritual position you take,
whether traditional or bizarre, you will cling to it with fervor. Once you have decided an issue, it is almost impossible to get you to
revisit the question. Adaptability is not your style, and change for you is a rarity.

You rely heavily on your experiences and your intuition, rather than accepting advice from someone. Your hunches usually prove to
be very accurate, and knowing this, you follow the directions they seem to guide.

In the most negative use of the 7 energies, you can become very pessimistic, lackadaisical, quarrelsome, and secretive. A Life Path
7 individual who is not living life fully and gaining through experiences, is a hard person to live with because of a serious lack of
consideration for others. There is such a negative attitude. Indeed, operating on the negative side of the 7 can produce a very
selfish and spoiled individual and living with one can be a challenge. This may be why some 7s actually prefer living alone. If you
have any of the negative traits they are very difficult to get rid of because you tend to feel that the world really does owe you a living
or that in some way you are not being fairly treated.

Fortunately, the negative 7 is not the typical 7, at least not without some mitigating positive traits. This number is one that seems to
have some major shifts from highs to lows. Stability in feelings may be elusive for you.
 8
The Life Path 8 suggests that you entered this plane armed to lead, direct, organize and govern. You are very ambitious and goal-
oriented. You will want to use your ambitions, your organizational ability, and your efficient approach to carve a satisfying niche for
yourself. If you are a positive 8 you are endowed with tremendous potential for conceiving far-reaching schemes and ideas, and
also possessing the tenacity and independence to follow them through to completion. In short, you were born to be an executive.

You know how to manage yourself and your environment. Your ability to judge the character and potential of the people around you
is an asset used to your advantage. A large part of your success in life comes from how hard you work. This Life Path is the most
prone to producing workaholics. But your ability to spot good people and engage them in your endeavors is a special trait not to be
overlooked. There is an inspirational quality in your makeup which allows you to become a great leader. You are practical and
steady in your pursuit of major objectives, and you have the courage of your convictions when it comes to taking the necessary
chances to get ahead.

With the Life Path of the number 8 you are focused on learning the satisfactions to be found in the material world. The Life Path 8
produces many powerful, confident and materially successful people. Most of your concerns involve money and learning of the
power that comes with its proper manipulation.

This Life Path is perhaps the one that is the most concerned with and desirous of status as an ultimate measure of success. You
want to be recognized for your hard work and achievements. The attainment of honors and acceptance into the club of executive
leadership is all important. For this, you may find yourself very well suited to compete in the business world or in the political arena.

In relationships, you are frank, honest, and steadfast. You may be very much in love, but watch that you are not too busy and
preoccupied to show it. Being the lavish provider is not always an adequate substitute for showing your devotion and affection in
more personal ways. You have a great need for close personal relationships to mitigate and somehow soften your nature. You must
find the time for love and keep it as an important project in your life.

The negative 8 can be dictatorial and often suppresses the enthusiasm and efforts of fellow member of the environment. Often, the
strength of their own personality excludes close feelings for other people with whom they come in contact. Material gains and
rewards often become issues of utmost importance, even to the neglect of family, home and peace of mind. Dedication to success
can become an obsession. Emotional feelings are often suppressed by the negative 8, resulting in isolation and loneliness. All Life
Path 8 people must avoid discounting the opinions of others.
9
The Life Path 9 suggests that you entered this plane with an abundance of dramatic feelings coupled with a strong sense of
compassion and generosity. The key to the nature of a Life Path number 9 person is found in their humanitarian attitude. Even the
very average of those with life path 9 possess extremely compassionate tendencies.

Usually this number produces an individual that is very trustworthy and honorable, and one unlikely to harbor any sort of prejudice.
Obviously, this is a rather tall order, but you are, in fact, a person that feels very deeply for individuals less fortunate than yourself,
and if you are in a position to help, you certainly will. The 9, being the highest of the single digit numbers, holds an elevated position
in terms of responsibilities to mankind.

Material gains are not overly important, although the quality of some life path 9 people is such that they are materially rewarded in
very significant ways. In this, however, the 9 Life Path is not apt to get rich since they are very generous, sometimes to a fault, and
usually have an easy come, easy go attitude about money. The rare 9 life path has a totally selfless attitude, giving up of material
possessions for the common good.

The 9 Life Path indicates you have a commanding presence. You have the ability to make friends very easily, as people are
attracted to your magnetic, open personality. The term "hail-fellow" may have been coined to describe a 9 Life Path, as you may
indeed be one of those who is generally upbeat and heartily friendly and congenial. You meet people easily and are quickly
befriended because of your openness and amiable demeanor. Your genial ways often put you in the lead in whatever field of
endeavor you pursue.

Relationships can be difficult for you because it is hard to strike a balance that will work effectively. If your partner is one sharing
your giving attitudes, the relationship will be happy and lasting. On the other hand, if you choose a partner whose focus is on
material issues, problems will arise quickly.
You tend to be quite sensitive, as you see the world with much feeling. The number 9's very deep understanding of life is sometimes
manifested in the artistic and literary fields. If drama and acting is not your forte, it will surely be an area of great interest and
potential. Likewise, you may be able to express your deep emotional feelings through painting, writing, music, or other art forms.

The purpose of life for those with a 9 life path is often of a philosophical nature. Judges, spiritual leaders, healers and educators
frequently have much 9 energy. The number is less inclined to the competitive business environment and may find this a struggle.

As do all the life path numbers, the 9 has its negative side. Because of the demanding nature of the truly positive 9, many tend to
fail in this category. It is not uncommon for persons with the 9 life path to fight the realities and challenges of purpose imposed here
because selflessness is not an easy trait. You may have difficulty believing that giving and a lack of personal ambition can be
satisfying. It must be realized and accepted that little long-term satisfaction and happiness is to be gained by rejecting the natural
humanitarian inclinations of this path.
THE DESTINY NUMBER

A number derived from all of the letters in your FULL BIRTH NAME make up what is called the Expression or Destiny number.
Although this number is called both of these names, throughout this website it will be referred to as the Destiny number. Destiny is a
very descriptive word for the meaning of this important core element. This is the number that describes the tasks that you must
achieve in this lifetime using the name that was given to you by your parents. This name, the complete birth name, symbolizes the
opportunities you have at your disposal. This is sometimes referred to as your potential or destiny. Living up to attributes of this
number may not be easy, but it is your goal in the here and now. It is your life's purpose, spiritual mission, and your field of
opportunity. Unlike the Life Path number which reads as you are, the Destiny number more correctly reads as you MUST or what
you can aspire to become.

1
The number 1 Destiny suggests that the direction of growth in your lifetime will be toward gaining greater independence and
establishing yourself as a leader. A name producing a 1 Destiny may help you gain the talents to become a skilled executive with
keen administrative capabilities, or perhaps a sales executive, or promoter. You have within you what it takes to become an original
person with a creative approach to problem solving, and a penchant for initiating action.

Unless you Life Path shows that you won't need the help, someone may have to follow behind you to handle the details, but you
know how to get things going and make things happen. As you develop, you will have little need for much supervision, preferring to
act on your own with little restraint.

Progressing through life, you will become one who seeks to expand and broaden opportunities to find new careers and new
inventions. You must develop skills in innovation and ingenuity. You have a good mind and the ability to use it for your
advancement. Because of these factors, you have much potential for achievement and financial rewards. Frequently, this Destiny
belongs to one running a business or striving to achieve a level of accomplishment on ones talents and efforts.

As you mature, you must become increasingly ambitious and determined. Self-confident and self-reliant must be yours, as you
develop a strong unyielding will and the courage of your convictions.

The 1 Destiny presents a tendency for you to fear the routine and being in a rut. You often jump the gun because you are afraid of
being left behind. The negative attributes of the 1 Destiny include one becoming egotistic and developing a self-centered approach
to life. This is an aggressive number and if it is overemphasized it is very hard to live with. You do not have to be overly aggressive
to fulfill your destiny. You do not have to dominate and destroy in order to lead and manage.

2
The number 2 Destiny suggests that the direction of growth in your lifetime will be toward gaining an understanding of people and a
greater spiritual sense of the world around you. A name producing a 2 Destiny gives you the tools to work very well with other
people. Your destiny will be, in part, in the role of the mediator and the peacemaker. As you grow in this direction, you become
sensitive to the feelings of others, you become diplomatic in handling complicated situations.

The spiritual potential for the 2 Destiny, and perhaps particularly so for the master number 11/2, is very high. You have the capacity
to be inspirational, and the ability to lead merely by your own example. An inborn inner strength and awareness can make you an
excellent teacher, social worker, philosopher, or advisor. No matter what area of work you pursue, you are very aware and sensitive
to the highest sense of your environment. Your intuition is very strong; in fact, many psychic people and those involved in occult
studies have the number 11/2 Destiny. Indeed, the 2 has a spiritual connection not found in other numbers.

In many ways you are dependent on others and seem to function best in a partnership or in some form of group activity. As you
mature, modesty will run deeper in your nature, and you must work comfortably without recognition of your accomplishments.
Often, others will get credit for your ideas, and this must be of little real concern to you as you skill as a team play progresses.
Cooperative, courteous, and considerate, you have the capacity to become an outstanding facilitator. You will have the capacity to
organize and handle people, just as you will handle detail, rarely overlook anything.

As you fulfill your destiny, tactful and friendly behavior will increase your popularity, and nearly everyone will like you. Perhaps this
is also because you are more content working with your ideals, rather than dollars and cents. The positive aspect of the number 2
Destiny is an always idealistic attitude. This is even more accentuated in the master number 11/2.

The negative 2 personality can be oversensitive and easily hurt. Too much of this number in your makeup can make you very shy
and uncertain. Sometimes the excessive 2 energies makes one apathetic and somewhat indifferent to the job at hand; the ability to
handle details is hampered in these cases.

Some 2s, and especially the 11/2s, struggle with a continuous sense of nervous tension; you may be too sensitive and
temperamental. You tend to dream a lot and may be more of a dreamer than a doer. Fantasy and reality sometimes become
intermingled and you are sometimes very impractical. You tend to want to spread the illumination of your knowledge to others
irrespective of their desire or need.

3
The number 3 Destiny suggests that the direction of growth in your lifetime will be toward a more creative and inspirational nature.
This path also leads to establishing yourself as an inspiration person spreading optimism and cheerfulness wherever you reside or
travel. The byword for the 3 Destiny is embracing the joy of living and helping others to do the same.

A large part of your mission in life centers around raising the spirits of your fellow man. This might be on a everyday small scale
basis, or it might be by being on stage as an entertainer. Obviously, for most, the first more likely, but, this Destiny does incline you
along a variety of lines that may include writing, speaking, singing, acting or teaching. For some the interest in and appreciation of
the arts is there, but the creative pursuit of these interests might not arrive.

You also have the destiny to sell yourself or sell just about any product that comes along. You may indeed be a natural salesman as
the 3 traits are always welcome in sales and public relations. You are imaginative in your presentation and a pleasure to be around.

As you mature you must become an optimistic person that seems ever enthusiastic about life and living. You are friendly, loving and
social, and people like you because you are charming and such a good conversationalist. You must develop an ability to
communicate effectively in order to inspire others. It is your role in life to inspire and motivate.

Friends are extremely important to the 3 Destiny, and you must develop the ability to be a true friend. Through this talent you will
achieve success. Opportunities open for you as you become increasingly social.

The negative side of number 3 Destiny is superficiality. You may tend to scatter your forces and simply be too easygoing. It is
advisable for the negative 3 to avoid dwelling on trivial matters, especially gossip.

4
The number 4 Destiny suggests that the direction of growth in your lifetime will be toward a greater sense of order, service, and
management skills. As you develop, you must adopt an approach that is more practical, down-to-earth, and thorough. You must be
willing to work those long, hard hours to push a project through to completion.

A increase in your patience with detail allows you to become expert in fields such as building, engineering, and all forms of
craftsmanship. You may accumulate abilities to write and teach, leaning toward the more technical and detailed. In the arts, music
will likely be your choice. Artistic talents may also appear in such fields as horticulture and floral arrangement. Many skilled
physicians and especially surgeons have the 4 Destiny. Indeed, you may enjoy success in any number of professions in which
planning, organization, regulation, and dogged follow through are valued.
All with Destiny 4, and especially the master number 22/4, are potentially equipped to handle large scale undertakings in the
material world. Often the reference to "master builder" is used in with regard to the 22/4, however, this trait is a potentiality in every
4, and does frequently occur.

The Destiny 4 produces a very moral character and you must choose your friends from those living up to your high standards. It will
be difficult to hide your disappointment in those who fail to meet this ideal. You will be happiest mixing with associates and friends
who are, like yourself, practical, moral, and doing good works for others.

The negative side of 4 often produces dominant and bossy individuals. If there is too much 4 energies present in your makeup, you
may express some of the negative attitudes of the number 4. The obligations that you face may tend to create frustration and
feelings of limitation or restriction. All 4s, and particularly the 22/4 may accentuate unorthodox methods to the point of eccentricity.
This negative manifestation of the 4 Destiny can also be very dominating and overbearing. Avoid becoming too rigid, stubborn,
dogmatic, and fixed in your opinions. You may have a tendency to develop and hold very strong likes and dislikes, and some of
these may border on the classification of prejudice.

5
The number 5 Destiny suggests that the direction of growth in your lifetime will be toward becoming a harbinger of change, freedom,
and progressive thought and action. The number 5 Destiny potentially endows you with the wonderful characteristic of multi-talents
and versatility. You must develop in ways allowing you to do so many things well. The tone of the number 5 is the constructive use
of freedom, and in your drive to attain this freedom, you must be the master of adaptability and change.

As you mature, you must become good at presenting ideas and knowing how to approach people to get what you want. Naturally,
this will give you an edge in any sort of selling game and spells easy success when it comes to working with people in most jobs.
Whatever you do, you have the capacity to be clever, analytical, and a very quick thinker.

You must learn to accept changes as they come along and avoid clinging to the outdated. Avoid rebellion, and focus on
enlightenment and progression thinking that will benefit mankind. You life is broadened by gaining an understanding and an
appreciation of all kinds of people.

The Destiny 5 will be welcome in many varied professional environments. The public sector is a natural for you because you must
administer to all peoples. The media, advertising, promotion, publicity, all types of selling, and entertainment are all potential fields
that may interest you. Settling on a single career may not be in the cards for you, as you are in a continuous state of flux brought by
constantly changing interests.

If there is too much of the 5 energy in your makeup or if you develop negatively, the negative side of the number may appear. Your
restless and impatient attitude may keep you from staying with any project for too long. Sometimes you can be erratic and scatter
yourself and your energies. You have a hard time keeping regular office hours and maintaining any sort of a routine. As clever as
you are, you may have a tendency to make the same mistakes over and over again. Much of your response to such errors is glib
reaction rather that thoughtful application.

6
The number 6 Destiny suggests that the direction of growth in your lifetime will be toward a greater sense of responsibility, love, and
balance. Development in life must make you more helpful, conscientious, and capable of rectifying and balancing any sort of
inharmonious situation. You must be a person very much inclined to give help and comfort to those in need. You have a natural
penchant for working with the old, the young, the sick, or the underprivileged.

As the saying goes, charity begins at home, and the home is where you must be a special person. The qualities of the 6 make the
finest and most concerned parent, and one who is often deeply involved in domestic activities. Openness and honesty is apparent in
your approach to all relationships, particularly close family relationship. A happy home life is the goal of Destiny 6, and if you live up
to the promises of this number, you will reap this reward most likely with some degree of luxury and grace.

Although you may have considerable creative and artistic talents, the chances are that you will devote yourself to an occupation that
shows concern for the betterment of the home and of the community at large. The destiny of the 6 is often a career in medicine,
welfare work, education, dealing in the arts, furniture, decorating, landscaping, home construction, religious endeavors, or scientific
fields.
The positive side of the number 6 suggests that you are very loving, friendly, and appreciative of others. You have a depth of
understanding that produces much sympathetic, kindness, and generosity.

If there is an excess of the number 6 in your makeup, you may exhibit some of the negative traits associated with this number. This
can include stubbornness, self-righteousness, or dominance. There may be a tendency for you to be too exacting and demanding of
yourself, too. In this regard, you may at times sacrifice yourself (or your loved ones) for the welfare of others. Many with the Destiny
of the number 6 worry much too much. In some cases, the over zealous 6 has difficulty distinguishing helping from interfering.

7
The number 7 Destiny suggests that the direction of growth in your lifetime will be toward thought, analysis, and the development of
a mind skilled at searching out the truth. You must become accomplished at analyzing, judging and discriminating, so that little
escapes your observation and deep understanding. In this you will become increasingly introspective, and value seclusiveness and
solitude.

You are the type of person that can really get involved in a search for wisdom or hidden truths, and you must become an authority
on whatever it is your are focusing on. This can easily be of a technical or scientific nature, or it may be religious or occult, it matters
very little, you pursue knowledge with the same sort of vigor. You can make a very fine teacher, or because of a natural inclination
toward the spiritual, you may become deeply emerged in religious affairs or even psychic explorations. You have excellent
capabilities to study and learn really deep and difficult subjects, and to search for hidden fundamentals.

You tend to operate on a rather different wavelength, and many of your friends may not really know you very well. At full maturity
you are likely to be a very peaceful and poised individual. You really like to work alone, at your own pace and in your own way. You
neither show or understand emotions very well.

The positive aspects of the 7 Destiny are that you must be a true perfectionist in a very positive sense of the word. You are very
logical, and usually employ a quite rational approach to most things you do. You can be so rational at times that you almost seem to
lack emotion, and when you are faced with an emotional situation, you may have a bit of a problem coping with it.

If there is an over supply of the number 7 in your makeup, the negative aspects of the number may be apparent. The chief negative
of 7 relates to the limited degree of trust that you may have in people. A tendency to be highly introverted can make you a bit on the
self-centered side, certainly very much self-contained. Because of this, you are not very adaptable, and you may tend to be overly
critical and intolerant.

8
The number 8 Destiny suggests that the direction of growth in your lifetime will be a move up the ladder of attainment in the material
world, to achieve financial security, and status amongst your peers. The positive 8 Destiny produces individuals that are very
ambitious and goal-oriented. If you are expressing the positive qualities of 8, you are an outstanding manager because you can
plan, initiate, and complete projects; you are very dependable and determined.

The 8 Destiny makes you well-equipped to develop and grow in a managerial sense.
You have outstanding potential for organizational and administrative responsibilities.

You have the potential for considerable achievement in business or other powerful positions such as government leadership roles.
You have the skill and abilities to establish or operate a business with great efficiency.

You can expect to receive the financial and material rewards. You have good judgment when it comes to money and commercial
matters, and you understand how to build and accumulate material wealth.

Much of your success must come due to your ability to judge character. With the number 8 Destiny, you must exercise sound
judgment in most of your affairs; you must be realistic and practical in your approach to business matters.

No one has any more energy that a person with the 8 Destiny who has a plan laid and is starting to work. No one has any more self-
confidence, either.

If you have too much of the 8 energy in your makeup, you may express some of the negative attitudes. A negative 8 can be very
rigid and stubborn. Ambition sometimes has a way of becoming over-ambition, and you may express an unreasonable impatience
with the lack of progress. If your negative side is showing, you may be too exacting, both of yourself and of others. Sometimes this
can even becomes a case of intolerance. The Destiny 8 is on a quest for status and power. Neither of these drives are inherently
negative unless they are taken to an extreme. You must avoid the tendency to strain after money, material matters, status, or
power, to the detriment of the other important factors in your life.

9
The number 9 Destiny suggests that the direction of growth in your lifetime will be in benevolent activities, in compassion, and in
worldly understanding. You are living up to and growing toward your Destiny when you follow your feelings and sense of
compassion, and allow yourself to be sensitive to the needs of others.

You must be willing to help others as you were intended to be the "big brother or big sister" type. You must work well with people,
for you have the potential to inspire.

Creative ability, imagination and artistic talent (often latent) of the highest order are present in this Destiny. Career fields in which
you can excel are many and include advisory roles, medicine, legal fields, artistic fields, diplomacy, and religion.

Friendships, affection, and love are extremely important. Your personal ambitions must be maintained in a very positive perspective,
never losing sight of an interest in people, and preserving a sympathetic, tolerant, broad-minded and compassionate point of view. If
you are able to achieve the potential of your natural Destiny in this life, you are capable of much human understanding and have a
lot to give to others.

Undeveloped or ignored, the negative side of the 9 Destiny can be very selfish and self-centered. If you do not actively involve
yourself with work that benefits others, you may tend to express just the opposite characteristics. It is your role to be very involved
with other people and their needs, but it may be difficult for you achieve this role. Aloofness, lack of involvement, and a lack of
sensitivity mark the low road of this Destiny.

MASTER NUMBERS

If your date of birth or the letters in your names adds up to one of the master numbers, 11 or 22, or 33 for that matter, I urge you
contain your pride and excitement. Be humble and focus on the ultimate single digit number. Make sure you understand the basis of
your nature and that you are indeed living your life on its positive side.

LOS NÚMEROS EN EL APOCALIPSIS

El uno | El dos | El tres | El cuatro | El cinco | El seis | El siete | El ocho | El diez | El doce | El cuarenta y dos |
El simbolismo de los números en la Biblia es uno de los aspectos más fascinantes del estudio de las Escrituras. Sin embargo, pasa
inadvertido para muchos. Desde tiempos muy antiguos, las personas instruidas han hallado gran deleite en el estudio de los
números. Las supersticiones y filosofías del antiguo mundo pagano están relacionadas con extrañas fantasías y extravagantes
especulaciones en cuanto a su uso. Muchas de sus declaraciones en cuanto a los significados de los números eran
completamente falsas. En cambio, la numerología bíblica nos proporciona una gran ayuda en los descubrimientos de las glorias
morales, dispensacionales y proféticas. No hay lugar para la especulación en el uso que el Espíritu Santo hace de los números.
Una vez habló Dios; dos veces he oído esto: que de Dios es el poder, y tuya, oh Señor, es la misericordia; porque tú pagas a cada
uno conforme a su obra (Salmo 62:11, 12). Ellicott observa que este es el modo habitual hebreo de enfatizar una declaración
numérica. Va aumentando en intensidad natural sobre la estructura misma del versículo, hasta llegar a su punto culminante. La
unión del poder y el amor queda comprobada ante el poeta por la mención hecha en la última cláusula acerca de la misericordia y
la justicia. Salomón también usa la culminación numérica cuando enumera las seis cosas que Dios aborrece y la séptima que
abomina su alma (Proverbios 6:16-19). Limitándonos únicamente al libro de Apocalipsis, busquemos el significado literal y
simbólico de los números empleados por Juan para expresar muchas facetas de la verdad.
1. El uno
Existe un acuerdo universal sobre el significado de este número. En todos los idiomas es el símbolo de la unidad, y en las
Escrituras es considerado como el signo de la unidad divina y su supremacía absoluta:
"No tendrás dioses ajenos delante de mí" (Éxodo 20:3). Esta orden da a entender que en Dios hay una suficiencia absoluta y una
independencia que no necesita de nadie más. En Efesios 4:3-6, el apóstol Pablo describe un círculo completo, que consta de siete
unidades distintas: un cuerpo, un espíritu, una esperanza, un Señor, una fe, un bautismo, un Dios.
El tres es el signo de la manifestación divina, y el siete es símbolo de perfección espiritual. Las primeras tres unidades son
manifestaciones internas de Dios; mientras que las tres siguientes son sus manifestaciones externas. La unidad y la supremacía de
la divinidad de todas es afirmada por Dios, quien es "sobre todo", "por todo" y "en todo".
Bullinger, en su obra erudita Numbers in Scripture (Los números en la Biblia) dice: "Como número cardinal, el uno denota unidad;
como ordinal, denota primacía. La unidad es indivisible, y no está constituida por otros números. Por lo tanto, el uno es
independiente de todos los demás. El uno excluye toda diferencia, porque no hay segundo con el cual entre en armonía o en
conflicto.. . El primero es el único. No puede haber dos primeros."
La unidad de los atributos gubernamentales de Dios se puede ver en los querubines de oro, que eran de un mismo tamaño y de
una misma hechura (1 Reyes 6:25). ¿No necesita la Iglesia profesante recordar el significado de este número divino? ¿No es
verdad que se está apartando gradualmente del sacrificio único de Cristo y del altar único, su unidad en la adoración?
Entre las referencias al número uno en el Apocalipsis, mencionamos a continuación las siguientes frases sobresalientes:
• "Uno semejante al hijo del hombre" (1:13).
• "Por una hora recibirán autoridad con la bestia" (17:12).
•"Tienen un mismo propósito" (17:13).
•"En una hora vino tu juicio" (18:10).
• "En una hora han sido consumidos" (18:17).
• "En una hora ha sido desolada" (18:19).
Parece como si la "una hora" de los tres pasajes últimos no se limitara a una hora de sesenta minutos exactos. Es probable que el
repetido clamor mencionado aquí sea el mismo período designado como un "breve tiempo" o "un día" (17:10; 18:8). La brevedad
de dicho período indica lo terrible y repentino del juicio de Dios.
La expresión "un mismo propósito" se refiere a la unidad de los reyes que estarán en sujeción a la autoridad y voluntad de la
bestia.
Cada una de las doce puertas estaba hecha de una perla (21:21). Aunque cada perla era distinta, había unidad en la variedad:
unidad, pero no uniformidad.
2. El dos
Mientras que el número uno afirma que no hay otro, el dos indica que sí lo hay. Es un número que tiene un doble colorido, de
acuerdo con su contexto. Un escritor sugiere que esa cifra puede significar responsabilidad, debilidad o gracia. Dos pueden ser uno
en compañerismo y en testimonio, aunque sean diferentes en personalidad. Nos sentimos tentados a prestarles más atención a los
pares que se hallan en las Escrituras, a partir de las dos tablas de piedra del pacto (Deuteronomio 4:13) y de esta manera probar
que en la mayoría de referencias a este número existe la expresión de un testimonio amplio y competente.
Considere el ministerio de los dos profetas (Elías y Eliseo) y los dos soldados (Josué y Caleb), quienes son reconocidos como
fieles testigos de la verdad de la Palabra de Dios. En los días de la gran Tribulación, darán testimonio de los derechos reales y
sacerdotales de Cristo un par de valientes mensajeros que son descritos como:
•"Dos testigos" (11:3).
•"Dos olivos" (11:4).
• "Dos candeleros" (11:4).
•"Dos profetas" (11:10).
Los dos corazones de estos aguerridos heraldos laten como uno solo en su testimonio total por la causa de Cristo. Cuando dos
seres humanos se unen en santo matrimonio, hablamos de ellos como una sola carne. Los dos testigos martirizados serán uno en
su testimonio, en los malos tratos en la muerte, la resurrección y la ascensión.
3. El tres
Este número tiene una asociación sagrada, porque representa la Trinidad: Padre, Hijo y Espíritu Santo (Mateo 28:19). Pablo usa la
frase estas tres cuando se refiere a las virtudes cristianas: la fe, la esperanza y el amor (1 Corintios 13:13). El número tres, que
aparece con tanta frecuencia en las Escrituras, ofrece al expositor de la Biblia una inmensa riqueza de material para usarlo en el
pulpito o en el aula. Aquí, por ejemplo, se dan algunos de sus usos, para despertar el apetito de los estudiosos:
• Tres hombres se le aparecieron a Abraham (Génesis 18:2).
• Tres ciudades de refugio (Deuteronomio 4:41).
• Tres veces al año (Deuteronomio 16:16).
• Triple bendición sacerdotal (Números 6:24-26).
• Triple clamor del serafín (Isaías 6:3).
• Tres llamamientos a la tierra (Jeremías 22:29).
• Tres veces al día oraba Daniel (Daniel 6:13).
• Tres veces negó Pedro a Cristo (Marcos 14:72).
• Tres medidas de harina (Mateo 13:33).
• Tres días y tres noches (Mateo 12:40).
• Tres veces vio Pedro la visión (Hechos 10:16).
 • Tres veces rogó Pablo al Señor con respecto al aguijón en su carne (2Corintios 12:18).
La tríada es una parte muy importante de las Escrituras y dondequiera que se encuentre puede ser considerada como símbolo
numérico de lo divino (como en el caso del frecuente saludo de Pablo: gracia, misericordia y paz). Con este número también se
enfatizan el testimonio divino y la perfección divina. Sin embargo, hay algunos pasajes en los cuales el número tres puede ser
considerado como el símbolo de la resurrección moral, física y espiritual, como en:
• El tercer día de la creación
• El tercer día en la resurrección de Cristo.
Puesto que se necesitan las tres dimensiones — largo, ancho y alto— para formar un objeto sólido, el número tres puede ser
considerado como el símbolo del cubo, y por lo tanto, representativo de todo lo sólido, real, substancial, completo y entero. En total
hay cuatro números perfectos que sugieren la idea de algo acabado y completo en las Escrituras:
• El tres, que representa la perfección divina.
• El siete, que representa la perfección espiritual.
• El diez, que representa la perfección en el orden.
• El doce, que representa la perfección en el gobierno.
La sección introductoria del Apocalipsis, la Revelación de Jesucristo, está señalada especialmente por este gran sello divino del
tres que se halla estampado en ella.
Esta revelación es
• dada por Dios
• enviadapor Dios
• declarada por Dios (1:1).
Juan dio testimonio de
• la divina Palabra de Dios
• el divino testimonio (el testimonio de Jesucristo)
• la divina visión (todo lo que vio — 1:2).
La bienaventuranza es para
• el lector
• el oyente
• el que guarda las cosas escritas (1:3).
El ser divino,
• el que era
•el que es
•el que ha de .venir (1:4, 8).
El Señor que vendrá se presenta como
• elprofeta divino (el testigo fiel)
• elsacerdote divino (el primogénito de entre los muertos)
• elrey divino (el soberano de los reyes — 1:5).
El pueblo de Dios es
•amado
• lavado
•coronado (1:5, 6).
Cristo es representado como el
•divinamenteeterno
•divinamentevivo
• divinamentepoderoso (1:17, 18).
La revelación divina fue triple:
• las cosas que te visto
• las cosas que son
• las cosas que serán después (1:19).
4. El cuatro
Debido a que los acontecimientos mundiales son tan prominentes en el Apocalipsis, el número cuatro se usa unas treinta veces. Al
contemplar el mundo o la escena completa de la creación, cuando se tienen en perspectiva lo largo y lo ancho, el cuatro es el
número que se usa para describirlo, ya que este número está relacionado con la tierra, con sus cuatro puntos cardinales y sus
cuatro estaciones. En cuanto a los que moran en la tierra, éstos han formado parte de las cuatro monarquías que describió Daniel.
La plenitud de las bendiciones materiales en la tierra se describe de esta cuádruple forma:
• en vez de bronce traerá oro,
• y por hierro plata,
 • y por madera bronce,
•y en lugar de piedras hierro (Isaías 60:17).
Si el tres es la marca de Dios, el cuatro es la marca del mundo, el cual está constituido en cuatro divisiones: naciones, tribus,
pueblos y lenguas (7:9). El cuatro es la señal del hombre y la creación material. Hay un antiguo proverbio judío que indica que hay
cuatro cosas que ocupan el primer lugar en el mundo:
• el hombre entre las criaturas,
• el águila entre las aves,
• el buey entre el ganado,
•el león entre las bestias (Compare con Apocalipsis 4:7, 8.)

5. El cinco
Aunque no se usa con la frecuencia con que se usan otros números, el cinco tiene su propio significado. Hay varios casos en los
cuales se hace un contraste entre la debilidad y la fuerza usando el número cinco: David usó cinco piedras lisas para vencer al
gigante Goliat; cinco perseguirán a cien; cinco panes para alimentar a cinco mil. Sin embargo, otros pasajes como Números 5:7 y
Mateo 25:2, implican la idea de la responsabilidad humana. El número cinco y sus múltiplos ocupan un lugar prominente en las
medidas y la distribución de aquellas partes del tabernáculo y el templo que expresan responsabilidad humana y testimonio ante
los hombres. Hay cinco grandes misterios:
• el misterio de Dios
• el misterio del Hijo
•el misterio del Espíritu
• el misterio de la creación
• el misterio de la redención en la cruz
6. El seis
El hombre fue creado en el sexto día de la creación, por lo tanto está sellado con el número seis. Seis días son dados al hombre
para que trabaje y seis es el número estampado en todas las cosas que están conectadas con las actividades humanas. Las
frecuentes referencias a seis días de trabajo muestran lo incompleto de la obra humana, que jamás podrá alcanzar un resultado
pleno y definitivo. El trono de Salomón tenía seis gradas (1 Reyes 10:19) y, debido a la imperfección de su gobierno, su reino fue
dividido. Su gloria era imperfecta. El sexto mandamiento está relacionado con el asesinato, el peor pecado del hombre contra el
hombre.
Puesto que seis es siete menos uno, y el siete es el número de la perfección, el seis tiene que ver con el hombre, e implica la idea
de su imperfección. Este es el número del hombre sin Dios. Las seis tinajas de piedra llenas de agua (Juan 2:6) hablaban de la
imperfección del hombre y la incapacidad de sus normas para producir bendición. De manera que el seis indica la limitación del
hombre: lo mejor que él puede hacer sin Dios.
7. El siete
El constante uso en las Escrituras del número siete, demanda un estudio cuidadoso de parte de todos los amantes de la Palabra
de Dios. El papel tan importante que este número desempeña en el Apocalipsis se comprueba con el hecho de que Juan lo usa no
menos de cincuenta veces en sus veintidós capítulos. El siete tiene gran significado; se usa en la Biblia con referencia a lo
completo y lo perfecto, más que cualquier otro número simbólico. El siete también aparece en varios múltiplos, como en "setenta
veces siete". En la creación. Dios reposó de su obra el día séptimo: el sábado o día de reposo.
Como se indicó anteriormente, la palabra siete viene en hebreo de una raíz que significa "estar completo, satisfecho, tener
suficiente" y da la idea de perfección o plenitud, ya sea de lo bueno o de lo malo. Pablo enumera siete dones y siete unidades
asociadas con la verdadera iglesia (Romanos 12:6-8; Efesios 4:4-6). Había siete fiestas de Jehová (Levítico 23). Además de los
sietes ya señalados, queremos presentar una lista de perfecciones que aparecen en el libro y están asociadas con el número siete.
• Los siete espíritus de Dios — las perfecciones de la divinidad.
• Los siete candeleros de oro — la perfección de la luz y la verdad y del testimonio dado por Cristo.
• Las siete estrellas — la perfección en el gobierno y la supervisión.
• Las siete lámparas — la perfección en la iluminación del Espíritu.
• Los siete sellos — la perfección de seguridad y autoridad.
• Los siete cuernos — la perfección del poder divino.
• Los siete ojos — la perfección del discernimiento.
• Las siete trompetas — la perfección de jurisdicción.
• Los siete truenos — la perfección del juicio.
• Las siete plagas — la perfección de la ira divina.
• Las siete copas — la perfección de la destrucción.
• Los siete montes — la perfección del poder terrenal.
• Los siete reyes — la perfección de la realeza terrenal.
8. El ocho
El origen de este número sugiere en hebreo la idea de superabundancia. Viene de una raíz que significa "engordar",
"sobreabundar". De esta forma da la idea de "fertilidad superabundante" o "satisfacción". Debido a que Cristo se levantó de entre
los muertos el primer día de la semana, que es también el octavo, este número representa la resurrección. El ocho también es
símbolo de la eternidad y de una nueva época. Vea Génesis 21:4; Levítico 14:23; 1 Pedro 3:20; 2 Pedro 2:5.
9. El diez
El cinco indica nuestra responsabilidad hacia los hombres, y dos veces cinco mide nuestra responsabilidad hacia Dios, como se
comprueba por el uso del diez en muchas partes del tabernáculo. La misma idea existe en los diez mandamientos. Las caídas de
Israel en el desierto se dice que fueron diez. Este fue el número de veces que el pueblo tentó a Dios (Números 14:22, 23). Faraón
endureció su corazón diez veces y experimentó el juicio de las diez plagas.
Puesto que es uno de los números perfectos de las Escrituras, el diez significa la perfección del orden divino: no falta nada; el cielo
está completo y terminado. Así en los diez mandamientos encontramos la revelación completa de las exigencias de Dios sobre el
hombre. En lo que respecta a nuestro físico, ¡qué bien nos sentimos con diez dedos en las manos y diez en los pies!
Cuando hablamos acerca de las siete iglesias, presentamos la sugerencia de que los "diez días" de extrema tribulación de los que
se le habla a la iglesia de Esmirna, tenían relación con los diez períodos de persecución sufridos bajo diez emperadores romanos.
El significado inmediato de esta frase, sin embargo, es que el Señor sabía cuánto era lo más que sus santos podían soportar y de
acuerdo con eso limitó la duración de sus sufrimientos. "Con medida lo castigarás en sus vástagos. Él los remueve con su recio
viento en el día del aire solano" (Isaías 27:8).
10. El doce
Este número, o sus afines, aparece más de cuatrocientas veces en toda la Biblia. Dios lo escogió para expresar la administración
perfecta del gobierno divino en el mundo, Israel y la Iglesia (Mateo 19:28; Apocalipsis 21:12-21). A la edad de doce años, Jesús
anunció públicamente su relación celestial y su misión en un mundo necesitado (Lucas 2:42). Doce legiones de ángeles eran señal
de la perfección de los poderes angélicos (Mateo 26:53). En el Antiguo Testamento también encontrará el lector mucho material
para meditar sobre el frecuente uso del número doce:
• Las doce tribus de Israel.
• Los doce panes de la proposición (Levítico 24:5).
• Las doce Fuentes de agua (Éxodo 15:27).
• Las doce piedras preciosas del pectoral (Éxodo 28:21).
• Los doce patriarcas (Hechos 7:8).
• Las doce piedras (Josué 4:8, 9).
• Los doce bueyes (1 Reyes 7:25).
• Las doce puertas (Ezequiel 48:31-34).
Este número, que aparece unas veinte veces en el Apocalipsis, tiene que ver con el gobierno patriarcal, el apostólico y el nacional.
Así hallamos:
• Las doce estrellas (12:1).
• Los doce ángeles (21:12), que representan a la jerarquía del cielo.
• Las doce tribus (21:12), que representan a Israel como nación.
• Los doce fundamentos (21:14), que representan la fe.
• Los doce apóstoles (21:14), que representan a la Iglesia de Cristo.
• Los doce Frutos (22:2), que representan la bondadosa provisión del cielo.
• Las doce puertas (21:12, 21), que representan la libertad para entrar.
• Las doce perlas (21:21), que representan la gloria de la ciudad.
Entre los múltiplos del número doce tenemos:
• Doce mil estadios (21:16), las dimensiones de la nueva ciudad.
• Doce mil sellados (7:5-8): 12.000 de cada tribu; 144.000 en total.
Mucho de lo que se relaciona con Israel está indicado por medio de este número: los 144.000 señalados (7:4; 14:1) es un número
constituido por doce veces doce mil, y sugiere la perfección y la plenitud del propósito de Dios con relación a su pueblo.
• Veinticuatro es dos veces doce y significa la plenitud de autoridad y representación.
• Los veinticuatro ancianos (4:4, etc.), son los representantes de la luz y la gracia.
• Los veinticuatro tronos (4:4; 11:16) representan el lugar de poder y de juicio.
11. El cuarenta y dos
Seis veces siete es un número de significado profetice que lleva la idea de limitación.
• Hollarán la ciudad cuarenta y dos meses (11:2).
• Autoridad por cuarenta y dos meses (13:5).
Este período que representa 2.260 días, tres años y medio, o tiempos (dos años), tiempo (un año) y medio tiempo (seis meses),
está asociado con el anticristo y el tiempo de la congoja de Jacob. Esta es la segunda mitad de la semana de Daniel (Daniel 9:24,
27). La duración de la persecución de Israel ha sido fijada. Bullinger hace notar: El cuarenta y dos debe tener alguna conexión con
la perfección espiritual, porque es un múltiplo de siete. Pero es el producto de multiplicarlo por seis. Por lo tanto, como el seis es el
número de la oposición del hombre a Dios, el cuarenta y dos cobra un significado muy importante en lo concerniente al resultado
final de la oposición del hombre hacia Dios.

Los Símbolos en el Apocalipsis - En nuestro estudio del Apocalipsis hemos tratado de explicar muchos de los símbolos que se
usan en este libro. En esta sección queremos indicar el valor del simbolismo y dar algunos principios que orienten en cuanto a su
interpretación. También queremos presentar una clasificación de los numerosos símbolos usados por Juan. Nunca debemos
olvidar que la Biblia fue escrita en el Oriente, donde el lenguaje es más colorido y pintoresco que en el occidente. Esta es la razón
del uso de símbolos, tipos y metáforas. Puesto que la Biblia es un libro inspirado por Dios y sus escritores fueron dirigidos por el
Espíritu de verdad, tuvieron su asistencia al escoger el simbolismo y el estilo que usaron. Debido a que es infinito, Dios tuvo que
recurrir a un lenguaje que nosotros pudiéramos entender. Esta es la razón para el amplio y variado uso de ilustraciones tomadas
del mundo que nos rodea para iluminar y reforzar las verdades divinas. Por ejemplo, Dios que es "inmortal, invisible y el único
sabio," parece estar fuera del ámbito de nuestra comprensión y nuestro entendimiento. Nuestra mente, débil y deficiente, no puede
penetrar tal sublimidad. Pero cuando utiliza los símbolos para decirnos todo lo que El es en sí, entonces nuestro corazón es
bendecido y nuestra mente recibe iluminación. ¡Cuan cerca de nosotros sentimos a Dios cuando nos dice que El es "sol y escudo"!
(Salmo 84:11.) No podríamos vivir sin la luz, el calor y la energía del sol. La tierra depende en gran manera de esta fuente celestial
de energía. De la misma manera, nosotros vivimos, nos movemos y somos en Dios. Así como no podemos vivir sin los beneficios
del sol, tampoco podemos subsistir ni somos nada sin Dios. Para el salmista el escudo significaba una sola cosa: defensa o
protección en la guerra. Cuando el escudo se interpone entre el luchador y el enemigo, lo defiende del filo de la espada y las
puntas de las flechas. En verdad, Dios es el escudo de su propio pueblo; se coloca entre él y el enemigo de su alma. Con mucha
frecuencia, es presentado en las Escrituras como la defensa de aquellos que confían en El. Israel estaba seguro de que Jehová
estaba alrededor de él, como las montañas rodean a Jerusalén. Los símbolos son ventanas que dan luz; sugieren las verdades y
las ideas de acuerdo con su relación o asociación. La palabra símbolo viene de dos palabras griegas: Syn, que significa "con", y
ballein, que significa "lanzar," y en combinación sugieren "lanzar juntos". A menudo los símbolos son una señal visible de una
cualidad o idea invisible. Por ejemplo, el león es símbolo de coraje; la paloma, de paz; el cordero, de humildad. Los símbolos
representan personas, cosas y atributos, gracias a algún rasgo de parecido entre el símbolo y el objeto simbolizado. No siempre es
fácil determinar la diferencia entre lo literal y lo Figurado. El Espíritu Santo, sin embargo, proporciona el entendimiento espiritual
necesario para interpretar como es debido este bello y expresivo lenguaje simbólico de la Biblia. Un principio muy seguro que debe
ser observado, es tomarlo todo literalmente, a menos que se indique lo contrario en el texto. Las langostas tenían en sus cabezas
como coronas de oro (9:7). No eran coronas verdaderas, sino que sólo tenían la semejanza de coronas. Otra cosa que debemos
tener presente en la interpretación de un símbolo es averiguar cuál es su uso a través de las Escrituras y luego comparar los
pasajes entre sí para determinar su pleno significado. Si tomamos como ejemplo una figura usada con mucha frecuencia, como el
fuego, descubriremos que representa a Dios, a Cristo, al Espíritu, a la Palabra, a la autoridad profética, al juicio, etc. Al agrupar los
símbolos del Apocalipsis, tomando en cuenta que hay casi trescientas citas del Antiguo Testamento en él, nos damos cuenta de
que las raíces de este último libro de la Biblia se hunden en el pasado y de que el pasado puede ayudar a interpretar el presente y
el futuro.
1. Símbolos procedentes de la creación animal
a. El águila — Las invasiones repentinas hechas por los reyes (Ezequiel 17:2-7). También es tipo de Cristo (4:7). Representa
seguridad, bondad y cuidado para con Israel (12:14).
b. Las aves — Agentes veloces para hacer bien o mal (18:2). A veces representan la maldad espiritual.
c. El becerro — Símbolo de vigor, juventud y actividad (Salmo 29:6; Oseas 14:2). Es un tipo de Jesús, quien sirvió tanto a Dios
como al hombre (4:7).
d. La bestia — Del griego zeríon, "bestia salvaje". Este término aparece unas treinta y cinco veces (6:8; 11:7, etc.). Se aplica a los
poderes imperiales que actúan sin sometimiento a Dios (Daniel 4:16).
e. El caballo — Los caballos están relacionados con guerras y conquistas (6:1-8; 19:19). Tipifican el poder y la fuerza (Salmo
66:12; Oseas 1:7).
f El cordero — Este es un animal manso, frágil y apacible (Isaías 11:6; Lucas 10:3). Es mencionado cerca de treinta veces,
principalmente refiriéndose a Cristo (5:6, etc.).
g. El dragón — El cruel poder de Egipto (Ezequiel 29:3). El dragón es tipo del poder de Satanás (12:7; 13:2-4; 20:2).
h. Las langostas — Tipifican a los enemigos destructores permitidos por Dios (Isaías 33:4). Son usados como agentes para la
ejecución de los tormentos sobre los impíos (9:3, 7).
i. El león — Símbolo de gobernantes, justos o injustos (5:5; 13:2; 1 Pedro 5:8); la grandeza imperial de Babilonia (Daniel 7:4).
j. El leopardo — Símbolo de ferocidad, violencia, tenacidad y venganza (Jeremías 5:6; Daniel 7:6). Este animal representa al último
tirano cruel de la tierra (13:2).
 k. El oso — Una criatura de pelo largo y tosco (13:2). Vea Proverbios 17:12. Es un enemigo fuerte y destructor; el imperio persa
(Daniel 7:5).
l. Las ovejas — Tipo del pueblo de Dios. Se usan en relación con Cristo en el Salmo 79:13 e Isaías 53:6, 7. Se mencionan también
entre las mercaderías codiciables destruidas en Babilonia (18:13).
m. El perro — Esta es una expresión de fuerte repulsión (Mateo 15:27; Filipenses 3:2). Los perros representan a los perdidos,
quienes carecen de sentimientos y de conciencia (Salmo 22:16; Apocalipsis 22:15).
n. La rana — Los egipcios fueron castigados con una plaga de ranas porque creían que los reptiles eran inspirados por los dioses
(Éxodo 8:2). Las ranas son tipo de los espíritus inmundos (16:13).
o. Los seres vivientes — Del griego zóon. Aparece dieciocho veces en el Apocalipsis (4:6-9, etc.) para referirse a seres angélicos
de alto rango.
p. La serpiente — En hebreo, de una palabra que significa "siseo, silbido". Es griego de una raíz que significa "astucia", "ardid".
Simboliza el artificio y la astucia satánicas y la sabiduría meramente humana (19:9; 20:2, 3).
2. Símbolos procedentes de los colores
a. El amarillo — Este color representa la palidez del rostro, como en Isaías 29:22 y Jeremías 30:6. Es símbolo de la muerte y de
los "ayes" futuros (6:8).
b. El blanco — Este color es mencionado diecisiete veces en el Apocalipsis. Se aplica a Cristo y a los santos. El blanco es símbolo
de justicia y de victoria (19:14).
c. El negro — Usado para el luto y la lamentación personales y nacionales (Jeremías 4:28). Símbolo del hambre y la miseria bajo
el hombre de pecado (6:5, 12).
d. El púrpura — El color de la realeza y las riquezas (Éxodo 25:4, Lucas 16:19; Juan 19:2). En la vestimenta de la gran ramera es
símbolo del cristianismo apóstata.
e. El rojo — El color de la sangre representa la furia con la que se llevarán a cabo las terribles guerras que ensangrentarán a la
humanidad. Este es también el color correspondiente a Satanás (12:3; 17:4).
3. Símbolos tomados del reino mineral
a. El bronce (cobre) — Soporta la prueba de fuego, por lo que simboliza la resistencia (Deuteronomio 33:26) y la fuerza.
Representa el juicio sobre el pecado (Números 21:4-9; Apocalipsis 1:15).
b. El hierro — Da la idea de fuerza y poder irresistibles (Salmo 2:9; Daniel 7:7). El hierro es símbolo de una conciencia y de un
poder endurecidos y difíciles de quebrantar (2:27; 9:9; 12:5).
c. El oro — El más precioso de los metales. Se relaciona especialmente con la deidad. El oro también simboliza la riqueza y el
reinado (4:4; 9:7; 18:9-12).
d. Las piedras preciosas — Se encuentran entre los minerales de la tierra. Las piedras preciosas y las perlas adornan la ciudad
eterna (12:11; 19:21). A menudo se usan para referirse al pueblo de Dios, su tesoro especial (17:4; 18:12; Malaquías 3:17).
e. La plata — Este material era utilizado en el dinero de redención (Éxodo 30:12-16; Levítico 5:15). La plata aparece entre las
cosas corruptoras e idolátricas que Babilonia perdió a causa del juicio (9:20; 18:12).
4. Símbolos tomados de las luminarias
a. El candelero — Símbolo de la Biblia, del conocimiento y de la salvación (Salmo 119:105; Isaías 62:1). Representa el testimonio
y el mensaje proclamados (1:12-20; 2:1, 5; 11:4).
b. Las estrellas — Las luminarias menores simbolizan los gobiernos subordinados (Daniel 8:10-12). Tipifican a los seres
celestiales, buenos y malos (1:16-20; 3:1; 22:16).
c. La luna — Refleja la luz del sol. Se habla de luna nueva en el Salmo 81:3 y en Ezequiel 46:1. Simboliza el testimonio del pueblo
de Dios (Cantares 6:10; Apocalipsis 6:12; 8:12; 12:1; 21:23).
d. El relámpago — Símbolo de la obediencia relacionada con el poder judicial de Dios (Ezequiel 1:13, 14; Nahúm 2:4). Simboliza
también la majestad de Dios (Daniel 10:6), la venganza y la ira divina (4:5; 8:5; 11:9; 16:18).
e. El sol — La supremacía en el cielo. El término hebreo equivalente significa "brillante" (Malaquías 4:2; Hechos 26:13; 1 Corintios
15:41).
5. Símbolos tomados del cuerpo humano
a. La boca — Parte del cuerpo relacionada con la respiración, con el habla y con la alimentación (Job 33:2; Éxodo 4:11). Se usa
con referencia a Cristo, a los santos, al anticristo y Satanás (1:16; 3:16; 9:17; 12:15; 14:5).
b. El cabello — Los nazareos tenían el cabello largo (Jueces 16:17). El cabello corto era distintivo de energía y dignidad
masculinas (Números 6:18; 1 Corintios 11:14). Simboliza la humanidad glorificada de Cristo y su edad incalculable (1:14).
c. El corazón — Es el asiento de los sentimientos, los afectos, la pureza (Salmo 40:8-12; 1 Timoteo 1:5). Dios puede escudriñar las
motivaciones, los deseos y las emociones (2:23; 17:17; 18:7).
d. La mano —La mano derecha implica posición y prestigio. Las manos representan el trabajo. Son símbolos de posición, fuerza,
acción y servicio (1:16; 9:20; 10:5; 14:9, 14).
e. La mente — La parte perceptiva y pensante de la conciencia (Ezequiel 11:5). Es símbolo de unidad de decisión (17:13) y de
sabiduría celestial (17:9).
 f. Los ojos — Las ventanas del alma. Representan el conocimiento y la comprensión (Números 10:31; Salmo 123:2). Es símbolo
de la dirección, la percepción y la inteligencia divinas (1:14; 4:6, 8; 21:4).
g. El pecho — El término hebreo significa "parte firme". Es representativo de salud física, vigor, fuerza (Job 21:24). El pecho tipifica
el afecto de Cristo y nuestro amor por El (1:13; 15:6).
h. Los pies — Nos permiten detenernos, caminar, correr. La expresión "bajo los pies" significa sujeción (Efesios 1:22). Simboliza el
caminar como Cristo y el carácter y la conducta cristianas (Efesios 6:15; Juan 13:1-10; Apocalipsis 1:15, 17; 3:9; 11:11; 12:1; 13:2).
i. El rostro — Indicador de carácter o expresión (Génesis 3:19; Proverbios 21:29). Simboliza la gloria, la inteligencia y la
omnisciencia reflejadas (1:16; 4:7; 21:4).
j. La voz — Se encuentra cuarenta y seis veces en Apocalipsis. Es una de las grandes maravillas del cuerpo. Representa
principalmente las amonestaciones divinas (4:5; 8:13; etc.).
6. Símbolos tomados de la naturaleza
a. El ajenjo —- Una planta que representa la amargura y la depresión (Jeremías 9:15; Lamentaciones 3:15; Amos 5:7). Es símbolo
de la maldición divina que provoca la amargura de los enemigos (8:11).
b. Los árboles — Hay tantas aplicaciones y significados como de veces se mencionan en la Biblia. Son símbolo de sustento eterno
(2:7; 7:1, 3; 8:7; 22:2, 14).
c. La cebada — La harina de cebada hecha pan (Jueces 7:13; Números 5:15; Ezequiel 13:19). Es símbolo de pobreza, humillación
y escasez (6:6).
d. Los frutos — Las cosas materiales que anhela el alma (18:14). Son símbolos de riqueza, ganancias y bendiciones celestiales
(Salmos 21:10).
e. La harina — La palabra hebrea viene del verbo "moler". La harina es molida y pulverizada (Números 28:20) y tipifica a Cristo en
sus sufrimientos (Números 28:28). Se encuentra entre las mercaderías que Babilonia pierde en el juicio (Apocalipsis 18:13).
f. La hierba — En hebreo, "heno verde". Simboliza la fragilidad de la carne (Salmo 90:5; Isaías 40:6-8). Es símbolo del juicio como
parte integrante de la vida (8:7; 9:4).
g. La higuera — Es símbolo de la vida nacional y política de Israel (Mateo 21:19-21; 24:32, 33). Simboliza también la seguridad, la
prosperidad y la paz (Zacarías 3:10; Apocalipsis 6:13).
h. La madera — La provisión abundante de la naturaleza. Observe alrededor de usted los usos de la madera. Es símbolo de
idolatría y juicio (9:20; 18:12).
i. Los olivos — Tipo de Israel (Salmo 52:8; Romanos 11). Vea también Jueces 9:8, 9 y Jeremías 11:16. Describen los frutos y el
testimonio de los testigos (11:4).
j. Los olores — La fragancia de la adoración ofrecida a Dios (Levítico 26:31; Filipenses 4:18). Simbolizan el perfume de las
oraciones que ascienden hacia Dios (5:8; 18:13).
k. Las palmas — En hebreo su nombre significa "erecta". Símbolo del florecimiento de los justos (Salmo 92:12; Cantares 7:7, 8).
l. El trigo — Es una figura usada para representar a Cristo, la Palabra de Dios y la profesión de los santos (Jeremías 23:28; Mateo
13:24-30). Este artículo de primera necesidad para la vida estaba asociado con el juicio (6:6; 18:13).
m. Las uvas — Sangre, o fruto de la vid (Génesis 49:11); representa a Israel (Jeremías 2:21). Simboliza el juicio de los apóstatas
(14:18). n. El vino — En hebreo, "exprimido". En Apocalipsis el vino es símbolo del juicio divino (14:8, 10; 16:19; 19:15).
7. Símbolos tomados de las fuerzas de la naturaleza
a. El abismo —Hebreo, "prisión". Se usa en relación con el seol, o lugar a donde van los espíritus (Isaías 14:15; 24:22). Es símbolo
de la morada de los malos espíritus y de la prisión de Satanás por mil años (9:1, 2; 20:1).
b. Las aguas — El término aparece unas dieciocho veces en el Apocalipsis. Se usa para referirse a las influencias buenas y malas
(Salmo 1:3). Es símbolo de bendición y también de las naciones agitadas satánicamente (8:11; 16:4, 5; 17:15; 21:6; 22:1).
c. El arco iris — En hebreo, "arco en las nubes" (Génesis 9:3). Está entre el cielo y la tierra. Es símbolo de gracia y misericordia y
representa la fidelidad de un Dios que guarda su pacto (4:3; 10:1).
d. Los cielos — Palabra que aparece cincuenta y siete veces en el Apocalipsis. Tiene un triple significado: el cielo atmosférico, el
cielo de los astros y el cielo espiritual. Es símbolo de Fuente de autoridad y de luz (6:13; 8:10; etc.).
e. El diluvio — En hebreo, "inundación". Se asocia con el juicio de Dios en la época de Noé (Génesis 6:17). Es símbolo del odio de
Satanás contra Israel (12:15, 16).
f. El granizo — Azote usado para describir el poder de Dios en su actuación como Juez (Isaías 30:30). Símbolo de la destrucción
de las obras de los malvados (8:7; 11:9; 16:21).
g. El lago — La frase "lago de fuego" aparece cinco veces en el Apocalipsis. Vea también Números 16:32-34; Isaías 5:14. Es
símbolo de la inmersión en una agonía interminable (19:20; 20:10, 15).
h. El mar — Se hace mención del mar unas veinticinco veces en el Apocalipsis. Se usa literal y simbólicamente. Es símbolo de
transparencia celestial y también de pueblos en estado de confusión (4:6; 5:13; 8:8; 21:1).
i. La montaña — Representa estabilidad y grandeza política y moral (Daniel 2:35; Salmo 125:1, 2). Simboliza el derrocamiento de
la prominencia nacional (6:14, 16; 8:8; 14:1; 17:9; 21:10).
 j. Las nubes — Debido a su naturaleza transitoria, las nubes representan los movimientos divinos (Salmos 18:11; 104:3). También
simbolizan la presencia divina, la majestad y la gloria encubierta de Dios (1:7; 10:1; 11:12; 14:14-16).
k. El río — Símbolo de dones y bendiciones espirituales (Salmo 36:8; Juan 7:38, 39). Simboliza el refrigerio eterno de los santos
(8:10; 9:14; 16:4; 22:1).
l. Los terremotos — En hebreo, "vibración". Representan las calamidades y tragedias repentinas (1 Reyes 19:11). El terremoto
simboliza la convulsión y el trastorno en el orden establecido en la tierra (6:12; 11:13; 16:18).
m. El trueno — En hebreo, "choque". Es evidencia de poder divino (1 Samuel 2:10). Es símbolo de la voz de Dios en el juicio.
Aparece diez veces en el Apocalipsis (4:5; 6:1; 14:2; etc.).
nEl viento — Usado para representar el poder invisible y grandioso de Dios (Isaías 11:15; Juan 3:8; Hechos 2:2). El viento
simboliza las operaciones divinas, invisibles pero poderosas (6:13; 7:1).
8. Símbolos tomados de Personalidades
a. El anciano — Este término se usa en total unas doce veces en el Apocalipsis. Se aplica a los líderes y supervisores, tanto judíos
como cristianos. Es símbolo de edad, experiencia v sabiduría (1 Pedro 5:1-3) y de los santos del cielo en su carácter de sacerdocio
real (4:4; etc.).
b. El hijo varón — Una frase usada para indicar el sexo de un niño (Levítico 12:2; Job 3:3; Isaías 66:7). Representa a Cristo como
el hijo nacido de María (12:5, 13).
c. El juez — Administrador de justicia y de veredictos (1 Reyes 3:9). Representa los justos juicios que vendrán sobre santos y
pecadores (16:10; 18:8; 19:2, 11; 20:13).
d. El profeta — Los profetas presentan los mensajes y las advertencias de Dios. Este término se usa doce veces en el Apocalipsis,
tanto para designar a los verdaderos profetas como a los falsos (2:20; 10:7; 16:13; 20:10).
e. La ramera — En griego, pome, de donde viene la palabra pornografía. Simboliza la corrupción religiosa y el adulterio espiritual
(17:1-16; 19:2; 21:8).
f.El rey — En hebreo, "gobernante". Se usa veintiún veces (como "reino", seis veces). Poseedor del poder supremo y la autoridad
(1 Timoteo 1:17). Este título es símbolo de la dignidad de Cristo y de sus santos (1:5, 6; 17:14; 19:16).
g. Elsacerdote — En el orden sacerdotal de Aarón sólo habían varones; esto es tipo de Cristo (Hebreos 3:1). Todos los redimidos,
hombres y mujeres, están incluidos en el sacerdocio real de los creyentes (1:6; 5:10; 20:6).
9. Símbolos tomados de los objetos inanimados
a. La coraza — Usada para la defensa (Éxodo 25:7; Isaías 59:17;
Efesios 6:14). Simboliza la protección y la seguridad para el corazón y la conciencia (1 Tesalonicenses 5:8; Apocalipsis 9:17).
bLos cuernos — Representaban el poder y la gloria de los reyes (Salmo 75:10; 132:17; 1 Samuel 2:1). También simboliza el poder
y la autoridad del hombre de pecado (5:6; 13:1; 17:12, 16).
c. La espada — Representa la autoridad y el poder de los magistrados (Romanos 13:4). Es símbolo de la Palabra de Dios, del
juicio administrado por Cristo y también de la guerra (1:16; 2:12, 16; 6:8; 19:15-21).
d. Los libros — Representan un relato o un registro escrito o impreso. Aparece el término unas veintiocho veces en Apocalipsis. En
los libros mencionados se incluyen registros de hechos, decisiones y recompensas (1:11; 10:2; 17:8; 20:12; 22:18).
e. El lino fino — En hebreo, "cardado, blanqueado, torcido" (Génesis 41:42). Simboliza la justicia de Cristo y la pureza nuestra. /.
Las llaves — Las llaves sugieren el derecho a ejercer autoridad y simbolizan la posesión de conocimiento (Isaías 22:22; Mateo
16:19; 18:18). Simbolizan además conocimiento, autoridad y gobierno divinos (1:18; 3:7; 9:1; 20:1).
g. Las puertas — En hebreo, "aperturas". Una puerta abierta denota seguridad y acceso (Isaías 60:11). Las puertas no sólo son
símbolo de gobierno (Génesis 19:1), sino también de entrada libre en la ciudad (21:12-14).
h. El sello En hebreo, procede del verbo "cerrar". Casi siempre se usa para referirse a una transacción consumada (Ester 8:8;
Efesios 1:13). El sello es símbolo de seguridad, conservación y juicio (5:1-10; 6:1-17; 7:2; 9:4).
i. El tabernáculo — Una estructura temporal (2 Corintios 5:1, 4; 2 Pedro 1:14) y la morada corporal de Jesús (Juan 1:14).
Representa el lugar donde Dios hace sentir su presencia (13:6; 15:5; 21:3).
j. El Templo — Morada permanente, separada para la adoración (1 Reyes 6:1-14; Salmo 68:29). Este término aparece dieciséis
veces en el Apocalipsis. Simboliza la habitación eterna de Dios en medio de su pueblo (3:12; 7:15; 11:19; 21:22).
k. La trompeta — Las trompetas se usaban por múltiples razones en las actividades y reuniones públicas (Isaías 27:13; Zacarías
9:14). La trompeta es símbolo del rapto de la Iglesia y del juicio (1 Tesalonicenses4:16; Apocalipsis 1:10; 8:2; 9:14).

The 3 6 9 Fundament - “If you only knew the magnificence of the 3, 6 and 9, then you would have the key to the universe.”-
Unknown Author, commonly attributed to Nikola Tesla. Since always these numbers have presented some mystery attached, an
unexplainable order pattern. Why Nikola Tesla did everything in 3’s? Some say he was insane and had an obsessive compulsive
disorder, or was he just on to something most of us are unaware? Only a few master minds have tried to uncover this enigma,
Marko Rodin with the Rodin Coil and Vortex based Mathematics, and John Ernst Worrell Keely the discoverer of Sympathetic
Vibratory Physics, who wrote: “thirds, sixths, and ninths, were extraordinarily powerful” and “molecular dissociation or disintegration
of both simple and compound elements, whether gaseous or solid, a stream of vibratory antagonistic thirds, sixths, or ninths, on
their chord mass will compel progressive subdivisions. In the disintegration of water the instrument is set on thirds, sixths, and
ninths, to get the best effects.” The magic begins with the 3, the base of Creation, the Source, the feminine, the primal syntropy. As
Buckminster Fuller referred “the triangle as the most basic unit of all structure, and the tetrahedron as the most basic system of
energy dynamics.” According to Nassim Haramein and the Resonance Academy “trianguled Planck oscillators make the fabric of
space and time, or the information of the spacememory structure driving the evolution of our universal dynamics.” The number three
throughout history, ancient civilizations and practically all cultures, religions, spirituality and even science, plays a major role. It
signifies unity, perfection, creation, the bases and even the cosmos. For example, our three main organs which represent the
maintenance of life: the heart, lungs and brain. The Tripod of Life or the Borromean rings represent in the ancient knowledge of
Sacred Geometry, the energy form of the second day of creation, and the core of the Seed of Life, from the Flower of Life, believed
to contain the patterns of creation, the forms of space and time. It is also believed that just by looking at these sacred patterns one
can heal and expand consciousness. In fact, when overlapping three third dimensional rings into the Tripod of Lifeshape, energy is
generated and emitted. This energy can enhance creativity and widen our consciousness level. The Rule of Three is also a principle
which emphasizes the power of the number and its effectiveness. Based on the latin principle “omne trium perfectum”, everything
that comes in threes is perfect and complete. This is used today in many areas from writing techniques, to photography, films and
advertising. The number six in relation to the first number (3), is its double and eternal companion, marking the beginning of the
universal duality, the law of Genders, the feminine and male energies as parts of the whole, the Yin/Yang, and Vesica Piscis. It is
with the 6 that expansion begins and entropy creates all we can observe. It is the male aspect of energy and overall creation and
one of the fundamentals of the universal consciousness in manifestation. The number nine is the climax, the jewel of the threes, the
three times three, the Mathematical Finger Print of God. Its significance is divine, representing both the singularity, the initial point of
the whole, and the vacuum, everything and nothing. Represents the Seed of Life formed by eight spheres, the symbol of fertility and
creation, the blue print of the universe and life. “The number nine is the missing particle in the universe known as Dark Matter.” –
Marko Rodin Although, the 9 represents the Whole, the Spirit, the 3 + 6, our entire universe manifested oscillates between 3’s and
6’s. The number three when doubled is six, but surprisingly the double of six is twelve (12, 1+2=3) which lead us back to three
again. This pattern continuous with the double of twelve being twenty four (24, 2+4=6) and so on. If the 3 6 9 are directly related to
the pattern and form of Creation, both physical and energetically, then by logic each represent a specific stage in Creation, by sets
of three’s and nine (3×3) as the equivalent of stage completion. If we continue in sets of three, it keeps leading us to the same order
over and over, endlessly: 12 (3), 15 (6), 18 (9), 21 (3), 24 (6), 27 (9), 30 (3), 33 (6), 36 (9)…. This order pattern is also found in the
“angel numbers”: 111 (3), 222 (6), 333 (9), 444 (12-3), 555 (15-6), 666 (18-9), 777 (21-3), 888 (24-6) and 999 (27-9). The same also
repeats on the ancient healing frequencies, the sounds of creation, the Solfeggio frequencies: 174 Hz (12-3), 285 Hz (15-6), 396 Hz
(18-9), 417 Hz (12-3), 528 Hz (15-6), 639 Hz (18-9), 741 Hz (12-3), 852 Hz (15-6) and 963 Hz (18-9). Is it possible that all clues are
trying to tell us something about this code, regarding its importance as life and evolution base? Another extremely interesting fact is
how these numbers can also represent shapes, specific sacred geometry shapes, such as the double Torus and the Golden Ratio,
spirals To have this knowledge is to master life and our everyday creation as a conscious singularity, a part of something that
transcends our minds. And yet, here we have the keys to create in harmony with the universe, and become something we could
only dream off, solve the mystery of our existence and purpose, be One with the Source, in body, mind and spirit.

23

1 23 is one of the most commonly cited prime numbers - a number that can only be divided by itself and one. Twenty three is the
lowest prime that consists of consecutive digits. Primes have been described as the "atoms " of mathematics - the building blocks of
the world of numbers. An American businessman has put up a US$1m (£500,000) prize for the first mathematician to find a pattern
in primes - a problem known as the Riemann hypothesis.

2 The number has been the subject of not one but two films: the 1998 German movie, 23, and The Number 23, starring Jim Carrey,
released (naturally) today. Each has a main character obsessed with the number.

3 John Forbes Nash, the Nobel Prize-winning economist who was the subject of the film, A Beautiful Mind, starring Russell Crowe,
was obsessed with 23. It featured prominently in his battle with mental illness. His breakdown began when he claimed that a
photograph of Pope John XXIII on the cover of Life magazine was in fact him, the proof being that 23 was his favourite number.
Nash published 23 scientific articles.
4 More freaky numerical coincidences: Charles Darwin's Origin of Species was published in 1859 - 1+8+5+9 = 23. Two divided by
three makes 0.666 recurring (allegedly - actually it makes 0.6666666667). The Hiroshima bomb was dropped at 8.15am - 8+15= 23.

5 23rdians are a group of people who subscribe to the mystical power of 23 and see it in multiple combinations throughout daily life.

6 The Ancient Chinese believed numbers conveyed sexuality - evens for feminine and odds for masculine. They considered prime
numbers to be the most masculine, conferring special status on 23 which is made up of two consecutive prime numbers and the
only even prime number - two.

7 In the disaster movie, Airport, the bomber has seat 23. The number of crosses on Calvary at the end of the Monty Python film,
The Life of Brian, is 23. In Die Hard With A Vengeance, a train derails in subway station 23. The lead characters in the Coen
brothers' film The Big Lebowski always used Lane 23 at the bowling alley. In the television series Lost, one of the combination of six
numbers that haunt the characters and they have to input to a computer to avoid an unknown fate is 23.

8 The terrorist attacks on America on 11 September 2001 have been held up as one of the most portentous examples of the
disturbing power of 23. The figures in the date (9+11+2+0+0+1) add up to 23. The independent US commission which investigated
the attacks found the date had been chosen randomly by the hijackers and had originally been planned for later in the year.
Alternative explanations for the date included the taking over of Palestine by Britain in 1922 and the fact that 911 is the US
emergency code.

9 Few hold 23 in more esteem than the followers of Discordianism, a self-declared religion based on the premise that discord and
chaos are the building blocks of life. For Discordianists, 23 is the Holy Number and a tribute to the goddess Eris, who surveys a
world of chaos. The mantra invoked by Discordianists for the Holy Number is "Invert The Pyramid" . If you invert the sentence one
letter at a time - eg "dinvert the pyramid", "id invert the pyram" etc - it takes 22 chants, finished by the line "The Pyramid Inverts" to
make 23. The last line is called "the final energy releaser". Discordianism is described by some followers as "a joke disguised as a
religion disguised as a joke".

10 Sport stars have developed a particular affinity (and aversion) to 23. Michael Jordan, the American basketball player, wore the
number throughout his career and inspired many copy cat fans of wardrobe vigintitriplicity. Best known is former England captain
David Beckham, who swapped his number seven Manchester United jersey for number 23 when he joined Real Madrid. Beckham,
who said it was in deference to Jordan, is expected to continue wearing 23 when he joins LA Galaxy this summer. But the number is
not always a harbinger of sporting good fortune. Manchester City have not assigned the squad number 23 to any player since 2003
after the last incumbent, Marc Vivien Foe, collapsed and died while playing for the Cameroon on 26 June 2003. Marcus Trescothick,
the England cricket players, wears number 23 and was Australian bowler Shane Warne's 600th test wicket. Warne also wears 23.

11 The Bible does not let 23 pass without conferring upon it some significance, at least to students of the Book. Although the Old
Testament is unspecific, it is widely held that Adam and Eve had 23 daughters. The 23rd verse of the first chapter of Genesis brings
the act of creation to a close while the 23rd chapter of the book of Genesis deals entirely with death, namely that of Abraham's wife,
Sarah. The most famous and most quoted of the Psalms is number 23: "The Lord is my shepherd; I shall not want. He maketh me
to lie down in green pastures: He leadeth me beside the still waters."

12 Each parent contributes 23 chromosomes to the start of human life. The nuclei of cells in human bodies have 46 chromosomes
made out of 23 pairs. Egg and sperm cells in humans have 23 chromosomes which fuse and divide to create an embryo.

13 The most detailed account of the assassination of Julius Caesar, written by Nicolaus of Damascus, claims numerous enemies
stabbed the Roman emperor 23 times. The wounds ranged from superficial to mortal.

14 William Shakespeare was born in Stratford Upon Avon on 23 April 1564. He died 52 years later on his birthday, 23 April 1616.
Kurt Cobain, the god of grunge, was born in 1967 and died in 1994 - 1+9+6+7= 23, 1+9+9+4 = 23.

15 In the science fantasy saga, Star Wars Episode IV: A New Hope, Luke Skywalker, Han Solo and Chewbacca sneak into
detention block AA23 to rescue Princess Leia. The rescue attempt is botched and Leia escapes only by dodging Stormtroopers'
laserfire. A police robot called 23 is included in Star Wars director George Lucas' first film, THX 1138.

16 The Knights Templar, the order of soldier monks who eventually fell foul of the Vatican and have been the subject of conspiracy
theories about the Holy Grail, had 23 Grand Masters.
17 The first morse code transmission - "What hath God wrought?" - was from the Bible passage Numbers 23:23. In telegraphers
code 23 means " break the line".

18 The Birthday Paradox states that a group of 23 randomly-selected people is the smallest number where there will be a
probability higher than 50 per cent that two people will share the same birthday.

19 The author William Burroughs was obsessed with 23. While living in Tangiers, he met a Captain Clark who ran a ferry between
Spain and Morocco. One day, Clark told Burroughs that he had been doing the route for 23 years without incident. Later that day,
the ferry sank, killing the captain. While Burroughs was thinking about the incident, a radio bulletin announced the crash of a Flight
23 on the New York-Miami route. The pilot was another Captain Clark. The events prompted an obsession which saw Burroughs
record every occurrence of the number 23 for the rest of his life.

20 The disbanded pop act KLF are one of several musical sources of 23-related lore. The two men behind KLF - Bill Drummond and
Jimmy Cauty - were once known as the Justified Ancients of Mu Mu, which has 23 letters and comes from the novels of Robert
Anton Wilson, another 23 obsessive. A police car used for the video of the KLF's number one, "Doctorin' The Tardis" , had 23
painted on the roof, their final performance lasted 23 minutes and they incinerated £1m on a remote Scottish island on 23 August
1994. Psychic TV, another cult act, released 23 live albums on the 23rd day of 23 consecutive months.

21 "W" is the 23rd letter of the Latin alphabet. It has two points down and three points up. White supremacists use 23 to represent "
W" as a mark of racial superiority.

22 "23 skidoo" is an American catchphrase from the early 20th century meaning to make a sharp exit. It was used as the title of a
poem by the occultist Aleister Crowley, another 23 aficionado. But some believe its origins lie in Charles Dickens' Tale of Two
Cities, where the old woman counting the daily victims of the guillotine calls "23" as the hero is beheaded in the last chapter.

23 The average human physical biorhythm is 23 days.

Colour is a fundamental element of masonic symbolism. It appears in the descriptions of aprons, sashes and other items of regalia,
in the furnishings and wall-hangings of the lodge room for each degree or ceremony, in the robes worn in certain degrees, and in
many other masonic accoutrements. The colours specified in each case appear to have no rational justification. As A.E. Waite
wrote: "There is no recognized scheme or science of colors in Masonry. Here and there in our rituals we find an 'explanation' for the
use of a certain colour, but this usually turns out to be merely a peg on which to hang a homiletic lecture about it, having little if any
connection with the origins of its use." This paper seeks to find some rationale behind the selection of colours as masonic symbols,
restricting our examination to the Craft degrees, and those of the Ancient and Accepted (Scottish) Rite, with occasional reference to
the Royal Arch. It was early recognized that colours have a strong influence on the mind and therefore can be employed for certain
moral or aesthetic ends, through symbolical, allegorical and mystical allusions. Newton wrote of 'the sensual and moral effects of
colour,' where sensual must be understood as 'transmitted by the senses.' Goethe, too, wrote extensively on colour (over 2,000
pages! ). Blue, then, is the Craft colour par excellence, used in aprons, collars, and elsewhere. Let us quote Bro. Chetwode
Crawley. "The ordinary prosaic enquirer will see in the selection of blue as the distinctive colour of Freemasonry only the natural
sequence of the legend of King Solomon's Temple. For the Jews had been Divinely commanded to wear...a 'riband of blue'
(Numbers 15:38).' A modern translation of that verse in Numbers is: 'You are to take tassels on the comers of your garments with a
blue cord on each tassel.' The biblical text, then, refers to blue cords to be incorporated in the tassels worn by pious Jews, while
Bro. Chetwode Crawley is speaking of blue ribbons which somehow became the embellishments of aprons, sashes and collars.
Another suggested source of the colour men-tioned by Bro. Chetwode Crawley could be its association with St. Mary, mother of
Jesus, 'so prominent a figure in the pre-Reformation invo-cations of the Old Charges, drawing in her train the red ensign of St.
George of Cappadocia, her steward and our Patron Saint.' Blue and red, the heraldic azure and gules are sometimes associated
with the chevron of the Arms of the Masons' Company. White, the original colour of the masonic apron, was always considered an
emblem of purity and innocence, exemplified in images such as the white lily or fallen snow. Plato asserts that white is par
excellence the colour of the gods. In the Bible, Daniel sees God as a very old man, dressed in robes white as snow (Daniel 7:9). In
the New Testament Jesus is transfigured on Mount Tabor before Peter, James and John, when his clothes became 'daz-zling white,
whiter than anyone in the world could bleach them' (Mark 9:3). Officiating priests of many religions wore and still wear white
garments. In ancient Jerusalem both the priests and the Levites who performed the Temple rites assumed white clothing. Among
Romans, the unblemished character of a person aspiring to public office was indicated by a toga whitened with chalk. This is the
origin of the word 'candidate,' from candidatus 'dressed in white.' Verdicts at trials were decid-ed by small stones (calculi) thrown
into an urn: white to absolve, black to condemn. White signifies beginnings, virtualities, the white page facing the writer, 'the space
where the possible may become reality.' White is therefore understandably the colour of initiation. It is a symbol of perfection, as
represented by the swan in the legend of Lohengrin. In this aspect it is related to light or sky blue, which in Hebrew is tchelet and
may be connected semantically with tichla (perfection, completeness) and tach-lit (completeness, purpose). (See also the obser-
vations on the symbolism of blue.) Among the Celts the sacred colours of white, blue and green were understood to stand for light,
truth and hope. Druids were robed in white. White is also connected with the idea of death and resurrection. Shrouds are white;
spirits are represented as wearing white veils. White, rather than black, is sometimes the colour of mourning, among the ancient
kings of France, for instance, and in Japan. White, finally, can signify joy. Leukos (Greek) means both white and cheerful; as does
candidus in Latin. The Romans marked festive days with lime and unlucky days with charcoal. Blue is the colour of the canopy of
heaven: azure, cerulean or sky blue. 'Universally, it denotes immortality, eternity, chastity, fidelity; pale blue, in particular, represents
prudence and goodness.' In the Royal Arch, the Third Principal is told that it is an emblem of benefi-cence and charity. In biblical
times, blue was closely related to purple. Generations of scholars have puzzled over the correct meaning of tchelet (light blue) and
argaman (purple), usually mentioned together, without reaching satisfactory conclu-sions. Only recently has the problem been final-
ly solved in the course of far-reaching research into the dyestuffs and dyeing methods used by the ancient Phoenicians and
Hebrews. Both colours, it turns out, were produced with dyeing materials extracted from murex, a shellfish abun-dant on the coast
of Lebanon. The tchelet was obtained from a short-variety (murex trunculus); the argaman came from two kinds: the single-spined
murex brandaris and, to a lesser extent, the Red-mouth (thais haemastoma). Some historians have concluded that, in the Middle
Ages in Europe, blue was low in popular esteem. The favourite colour was then red because the dyers could achieve strong shades
of it which brought to mind the prestigious purple of the ancient world. Towards the end of that period, blue gradually became
recognized as a princely colour, the 'Royal Blue' which dis-placed red at court, red then being used by the lower classes and so
regarded as vulgar. Blue and gold (or yellow) then became the colours of choice for shields, banners and livery. It may not be by
chance, therefore, that the Master was said to be clothed in 'yellow jacket and blue breeches,' in the famous metaphor first used in
an exposure, 'The Mystery of Free-Masonry,' which appeared in The Daily Journal in 1730. The traditional explanations of the
phrase relate it to the compasses, the arms of gold, gilt or brass and the points of steel or iron. (Steel can certainly appear blue; iron
can not!) Blue was used royally in France noticeably as the background to the fleur-de-lys. It became associated with terms of
prestige such as blue blood, cordon bleu (originally the sash of the Order of the Holy Spirit), blue riband (of the Atlantic) and blue
chip. Purple is a symbol of imperial royalty and rich-ness but can also relate to penitence and the solemnity of Lent and Advent in
the seasons of the Christian church. Although described (in the Royal Arch, for instance) as 'an emblem of union, being com-posed
of blue and crimson,' I believe this to be a somewhat contrived explanation. But an interest-ing fact, which appears to have escaped
most writers on this subject, is that in the Cabbala, the Hebrew word for purple, argaman, is a mnemon-ic, representing the initials
of the names of the five principal angels in Jewish esoterism. Red or crimson, the colour of fire and heat, is traditionally associated
with war and the mili-tary. In Rome the paludamentum, the robe wom by generals, was red. The colour of blood is nat-urally
connected with the idea of sacrifice, strug-gle and heroism. It also signifies charity, devo-tion, abnegation--perhaps recalling the
pelican that feeds its progeny with its own blood. In Hebrew, the name of the first man, Adam, is akin to red, blood and earth. This
connection with earth may explain, perhaps, the connection of red with the passions, carnal love, the cosmet-ics used by women to
attract their lovers. It is the colour of youth. Generally, it represents expan-sive force and vitality. It is the emblem of faith and
fortitude and, in the Royal Arch, of fervency and zeal. It has also a darker side, connected with the flames of hell, the appearance of
demons, the apoplectic face of rage. Scarlet was the distinctive colour of the Order of the Golden Fleece, established in 1429 by
Philip the Good, Duke of Burgundy (1419-67). Not only was the mantle scarlet, but also the robe and a special hat--the chaperon--
with hanging streamers. Green has been directly associated with the ideas of resurrection and immortality...The aca-cia (the
masonic evergreen) has been suggested as a symbol of a moral life or rebirth, and also of immortality. To the ancient Egyptians,
green was the symbol of hope. The Grand Lodge of Scotland has adopted green as its emblematic colour, and, in varying shades, it
is incorporated in the dress and fur-nishings of degrees and Orders beyond the Craft in English, Irish and Scottish Freemasonry.
Yellow is rarely seen in lodge, except perhaps on the Continent. It is an ambivalent colour, rep-resenting both the best and the
worst, the colour of brass and honey, but also the colour of sulphur and cowardice. Yellow is the perfection of the Golden Age, the
priceless quality of the Golden Fleece and the golden apples of the Hesperides. It is also the colour of the patch imposed on the
Jews as a badge of infamy. In the sixteenth cen-tury, the door of a traitor's home was painted yellow. A 'jaundiced view' expresses
hostility, but the most memorable symbolism of yellow is that it reminds us of the sun and of gold. The three fundamental colours
found in all civ-ilizations, down to the Middle Ages in Europe, are white, red and black. These, too, may be regarded as the principal
colours of Freemasonry: the white of the Craft degrees, the red of the Royal Arch and of certain of the degrees of the Ancient and
Accepted (Scottish) Rite, and the black of some of its others, and of the Knights of Malta. The other colours of the rainbow find
limited uses; they serve only to frame or line the white lambskin upon which so many aprons are based, or for sashes and other
items of regalia. Traditionally, black is the colour of darkness, death, the underworld although it was not introduced for mouming
until about the middle of the fourteenth century, such use becoming habitual only in the sixteenth. The 'black humour' of melancholy
(atara hilis) the black crow of ill omen, the black mass, black market, 'black days': all refer to negative aspects. The Black Stone at
Mecca is believed by Muslims to have been at one time white; the sins of man caused the transformation. Black has also a positive
aspect, that of gravity and sobriety; the Reformation in Europe frowned upon colourful clothing. Formal dress for day and evening
wear continues to be black. It is associated with the outlaw and the banners of pirates and anarchists, but also with rebirth and
transformation. In the French and Scottish Rites, the lodge in the third degree is decorated in black and is strewn with white or silver
tears, representing the sorrow caused by the death of Hiram Abif.

La mayor parte de la música de todo el mundo se ha ajustado a 440 Hertz desde que la Organización Internacional de
Normalización (ISO) lo aprobó en 1953. Los últimos descubrimientos de la naturaleza oscilatoria/vibratoria indican que este tono
estándar de concierto internacional contemporáneo puede generar un efecto no saludable o comportamiento antisocial en la
conciencia de los seres humanos. A=432Hz, conocido como como el A4 de verdi es una afinación alternativa que es
matematicamente consistente en el universo. La música basada en 432 Hz transmite energía de sanación beneficiosa, ya que es
un tono puro fundamental de matemáticas de la naturaleza. Hay una teoría de que el cambio de 432Hz a 440Hz fue dictada por el
ministro de propaganda nazi, Josep Goebels. Lo utilizó para hacer que las personas pensaran y sintieran de cierta manera, y para
hacer de ellos prisioneros de una cierta conciencia. Luego, alrededor de 1940, Los Estados Unidos presento 440Hz en todo el
mundo, y finalmente en 1953 se convirtió en el estándar ISO16. 440Hz es la frecuencia antinatural de afinación estandar, eliminada
de la simetría de las vibraciones sagradas y matices que ha declarado la guerra a la mente subconsciente del hombre occidental.
En un documento titulado Control de Culto Musical, el Dr. Leonard Horowits escribe: "La industria de la música cuenta con esta
frecuencia impuesta que está pastoreando a las poblaciones hacia una mayor agresividad, agitación psicosocial, y angustia
emocional que predispone a la gente a la enfermedad fisica." Solo tienes que ir a la calle y echar un viztazo alrededor. ¿Que ves?
Niños de la escuela, adultos jóvenes en su camino al trabajo, una mujer que empuja a su bebé en un cochecito, un hombre que
paseaba a su perro - ¿Y que tienen en común? ¡Pods o reproducciones de MP3 Ingenioso, ¿Verdad? "SI USTED QUIERE
ENCONTRAR LOS SECRETOS DEL UNIVERSO, PIENSE EN TÉRMINOS DE ENERGÍA, FRECUENCIA Y VIBRACIÓN." Los
poderes están bajando exitosamente las vibraciones, no sólo la generación joven, sino el resto de nosotros también. Estas
frecuencias destructivas arrastran los pensamientos hacía la interrupción, la discordia y la desunión. Además, también estimulan el
órgano controlador del cuerpo - el cerebro - en resonancia inarmonica, lo que finalmente genera emfermedad y guerra.

ALQUIMIA - Nada más fácil, en apariencia, que definir la alquimia. Es, se dice corrientemente, el arte de la transmutación de los
metales, seudociencia de la Edad Media, cuyo fin era la fabricación del oro. Y muchos completan esta definición con una condena
desdeñosa y categórica exclamando con el químico Fourcroy: "La alquimia ha ocupado a muchos locos, ha arruinado a una
multitud de codiciosos e insensatos y embaucado a otra multitud aún más grande de crédulos1." Sin embargo, al estudiar la
cuestión con menos ligereza, se observa que tras el término alquimia se oculta una realidad histórica extremadamente compleja.
"La historia de la alquimia -escribe Berthelot- es muy oscura. Es una ciencia sin raíz aparente, que se manifiesta de pronto en el
momento de la caída del Imperio Romano y que se desarrolla durante toda la Edad Media, entre misterios y símbolos, sin salir del
estado de doctrina oculta y perseguida; en ella los sabios y los filósofos se mezclan y confunden con los alucinados, los magos y
los charlatanes y, a veces, hasta con malvados, estafadores, envenenadores y falsificadores de moneda." El problema dista
mucho de estar claro y, si numerosos trabajos eruditos han sido consagrados a la Alquimia, ésta no permanece menos
profundamente desacreditada a los ojos de la mayoría del gran público, que habitualmente no hace diferencias entre "alquimista",
"hechicero" y "charlatán". La alquimia habría sido una especie de arte más o menos mágico, consistente en la ingeniosa
combinación de pases mágicos, retortas e invocaciones al Diablo, con el fin de obtener oro, o simular su obtención ante los ojos de
papanatas maravillados... Si la alquimia no hubiera sido nada más que eso durante todo el largo período que fue cultivada, no
merecería, por cierto, haber sido estudiada por tantos sabios e historiadores modernos, en primer término el gran químico
Berthelot. Pero, cuando se sabe diferenciar a los verdaderos alquimistas de los estafadores y charlatanes que pretenden ser
adeptos del arte sagrado se observa que la alquimia, lejos de reducirse a la simple fabricación de oro, era en realidad algo más
noble y complejo. Así, un estudio imparcial aunque rápido de la antigua "ciencia de Hermes" es del más alto interés. Es una
exploración verdaderamente apasionante de los tiempos pasados, a la cual invitamos al lector. ¿QUE ES LA ALQUIMIA?
Volvamos a la definición corriente de la alquimia: "El arte de hacer oro". El alquimista era un "hacedor de oro", alguien que
procuraba enriquecerse al menor costo posible y, muy a menudo, a expensas ajenas... Sin embargo, este prejuicio es un grave
error. Las tentativas experimentales de los verdaderos alquimistas para transmutar los metales eran emprendidas no para
enriquecerse sino con el propósito de aportar una prueba material a su sistema "en interés de la ciencia", como se diría hoy. De
ahí, las múltiples precauciones empleadas por los adeptos para ocultar sus secretos a los ojos de los profanos; de ahí su desdén
por aquellos a quienes llaman "sopladores", es decir, simples fabricantes de oro, los que buscaban empíricamente la Piedra
filosofal y que, ignorantes de las teorías iniciales ensayaban al azar los procedimientos más heteróclitos y concluían a veces su
carrera como estafadores o monederos falsos. ETIMOLOGIA. Pero ¿qué era entonces la alquimia propiamente dicha?
Interroguemos primero a la etimología de la palabra. Esta es árabe en su forma (el-Kimyâ), pero griega en su raíz. Kimyâ deriva,
sin duda, de Khem ("el país negro"), nombre que designaba a Egipto en la antigüedad. La palabra misma, nos aporta útiles
informes en cuanto a la patria de origen, real o simbólica, del arte sacro. CARACTERES GENERALES. En lo relativo a su
fisonomía general, la alquimia presenta todas las características de un arte oculto, escondido, reservado a ciertos iniciados, y que
no debe ser comunicado al vulgo. Es en esto donde desde el principio difiere fundamentalmente de la ciencia moderna. La alquimia
se trasmite por tradición oral o escrita; en secreto, de maestro a discípulo. Se basa en las revelaciones y en los viejos secretos
trasmitidos por una literatura emblemática. El alquimista nada tiene que descubrir; sólo reencontrar un secreto. Por eso la alquimia
ha permanecido tan semejante a sí misma durante largos siglos: si su simbolismo y algunos de sus desarrollos pudieron exhibir
variadas formas durante la Edad Media y hasta el siglo XVI, sus teorías básicas sobre la constitución de la materia no cambiaron.
La alquimia es un arte oculto, decíamos; también un arte maldito, condenado por teólogos (y antes que ellos, por el Derecho
Romano tardío), y que se desarrolló al margen de los cánones oficiales del saber y a veces contra ellos. Necesitamos considerar
ahora la alquimia tal como la definían los mismos alquimistas. LA FILOSOFIA HERMETICA. Los alquimistas se adjudicaban de
buen grado el título de filósofos, y lo eran en efecto en un género particular, toda vez que se consideraban depositarios de la
Ciencia por excelencia, constituida por los principios de todas las demás, que explica la naturaleza, el origen y la razón de ser de
todo lo que existe, que narra el origen y el destino del universo entero. Esta doctrina secreta era la madre de todas las ciencias, la
más antigua, la que estudiaba el mundo y su historia y que, según la tradición, había sido revelada a los hombres por el dios
Hermes (el Thoth egipcio), origen del nombre de filosofía hermética dado a esta doctrina. Pero es abusiva la confusión de esta
doctrina y las operaciones propiamente dichas. La alquimia fue ante todo una práctica y, por lo tanto, la aplicación de la filosofía
hermética. LAS TEORIAS ALQUIMICAS. La alquimia en el sentido estricto del término era un arte práctico, una técnica, pero como
tal se apoyaba sobre un conjunto de teorías relativas a la constitución de la materia, a la formación de las sustancias inanimadas y
vivas, etc., teorías que constituían los postulados de donde partía el alquimista. LA ALQUIMIA PRACTICA; SUS FINES. La
alquimia práctica, aplicación directa de la alquimia teórica, era la búsqueda de la Piedra filosofal. Presentaba dos aspectos
principales complementarios: la transmutación de los metales, que era la Gran Obra en el sentido estricto del término, y la Medicina
universal. Eran éstos los dos poderes esenciales de la Piedra. Los alquimistas suponían que los metales eran vivos y que en
estado de pureza debían presentarse con la forma del oro, metal perfecto. De ahí la definición más corriente de la alquimia. "La
alquimia es la ciencia que enseña a preparar cierta medicina o elixir que al ser proyectado sobre los metales imperfectos les
comunica la perfección en ese mismo momento2". Pero licuando la Piedra se obtenía el elixir de larga vida, que debía asegurar a
su poseedor la prolongación de la vida hasta la casi perpetuidad de la existencia, y a la vez la Panacea, remedio milagroso que
restauraba la fuerza y la salud del organismo. Tal era la Medicina universal: se procuraba encontrar lo que hoy se llamaría un
"regenerador celular". La Piedra filosofal debía igualmente comunicar a su poseedor toda clase de poderes maravillosos: volverse
invisible, mandar a las potencias celestes, desplazarse a voluntad en el espacio, etcétera. Pero esos poderes mágicos serán
mencionados sobre todo en la literatura alquímica solamente al fin de la Edad Media, lo mismo que los otros problemas que hasta
el Renacimiento vinieron a injertarse en el de la Piedra: el alkaest (descubrir un "disolvente universal", capaz de desintegrar todos
los cuerpos), el homunculus (fabricar artificialmente un hombre), etcétera. LA ALQUIMIA MISTICA. Es una muy distinta concepción
de la alquimia; según algunos autores, y en particular los pensadores de la francmasonería, la alquimia era una Mística. La
terminología alquímica tenía, en realidad, un sentido figurado y significaba el oro espiritual. El propósito del alquimista no era la
búsqueda del oro material: era la purificación del alma, las metamorfosis progresivas del espíritu. Los "metales viles" eran los
deseos y las pasiones terrenales, todo lo que entorpece el desarrollo del ser humano auténtico. La Piedra filosofal era el hombre
transformado por la transmutación mística. La transmutación del plomo en oro era la elevación del individuo hacia lo Bello, la
Verdad, el Bien, la realización del arquetipo que cada ser humano lleva dentro de sí. El hombre era la materia misma de la Gran
Obra, y así se explica este pasaje de los Siete capítulos de Hermes. "La Obra está contigo y reside en ti de tal modo que, al hallarla
en ti mismo donde está siempre, la tienes constantemente, cualquiera fuere el lugar donde te hallares, en la tierra o en el mar." EL
"ARS MAGNA". Pero la concepción más grandiosa de la alquimia es el Ars magna ("Gran Arte"), llamada a veces arte regia: en
Europa se la encuentra principalmente desarrollada entre los autores del siglo XV y posteriores. He aquí la definición que le da uno
de sus intérpretes modernos, A. Savoret: "La alquimia verdadera, la alquimia tradicional, es el conocimiento de las leyes de la vida
en el hombre y en la naturaleza, y la reconstrucción del proceso mediante el cual esta vida, adulterada aquí abajo por la caída de
Adán, ha perdido y puede recobrar su pureza, su esplendor, su plenitud y sus prerrogativas primordiales: lo que en el hombre
moral se llama redención o regeneración, perennidad en el hombre físico, purificación y perfección en la naturaleza; en fin, en el
reino mineral propiamente dicho, refinamiento y transmutación. El fin de la alquimia se apoyaba así en la comprobación de una
caída, de una decadencia, de una degradación de los seres de la naturaleza. La suprema Gran Obra (Obra Mística, Vía del
Absoluto, Obra del Fénix) era la reintegración al hombre de su dignidad primordial. La Piedra filosofal daba al adepto la excelencia
iluminativa física y moral, la felicidad perfecta, la influencia sin límites sobre el universo, la comunión con la Causa Primera.
Encontrar la Piedra filosofal era descubrir lo Absoluto, la verdadera razón de ser de todas las existencias, poseer el Conocimiento
perfecto (gnosis). La ascesis y la práctica se asocian estrechamente en esta alquimia trascendente: Capaz de inventar, entre los
órdenes diversos del ser, correspondencias fantásticas -escribe A.-M. Schmidt-, impone a sus sectarios una ascesis sujeta a reglas
precisas. Mientras en el Huevo filosófico, globo de cristal cuidadosamente cerrado, vigilan la cocción y la metamorfosis del
compost, mezcla secreta de la cual, como de un embrión prisionero del útero, nacerá la Piedra filosofal, deben pasar por las
gradaciones lentas de un proceso de purificación. Profesan la creencia de que para realizar la Gran Obra, regeneración de la
materia, deben procurar la regeneración de su alma... Así como, en su vaso sellado, la materia muere y resucita perfecta, de igual
modo ellos anhelan que su alma, al caer en la muerte mística, renazca para llevar en Dios una existencia extasiada. Se jactan de
ceñirse en todo al ejemplo de Cristo que, para vencerla, hubo de sufrir o, más bien, aceptar el golpe de la muerte. Así, para ellos, la
imitación de Cristo es no solamente un método de vida espiritual, sino hasta un medio de regular el curso de las operaciones
materiales de las cuales provendrá el Magisterio." El adepto resulta así capaz de realizar la Obra física, la regeneración del
cosmos. La transmutación, después de operarse en el secreto del alma humana, debe manifestarse en el mundo material. La
Piedra filosofal, materia animada más perfecta que todos los seres, semejante a la materia prima de la Creación cuando el Caos
hubo sido animado por el Fuego divino, extiende su acción a todos los reinos: animal, vegetal y mineral. El alquimista, en
conocimiento de las leyes que según él han presidido la formación de los seres, puede reproducir los cuerpos que tenemos a la
vista: "Lo que la naturaleza hizo al principio, decían los alquimistas, podemos hacerlo remontando el procedimiento que ella ha
seguido; lo que ella quizás hace todavía, con ayuda de los siglos, en sus soledades subterráneas, podemos hacérselo terminar en
un instante ayudándola y poniéndola en mejores circunstancias" (Hoefer). Pero el adepto busca también el descubrimiento y la
fijación de un fermento misterioso, que es precisamente la Piedra, y que no sólo permite retardar casi indefinidamente la
desintegración de los cuerpos, sino también asegura el progreso rápido de los seres hacia el estado superior, regenerando todos
los seres imperfectos, cambiando los metales "leprosos" en oro y devolviendo la salud a los enfermos. El alquimista se transforma
en un verdadero superhombre, regenerador del mundo. Resulta, así, mucho más difícil dar una respuesta precisa a la pregunta:
¿qué es la alquimia? Esa palabra abarca diferentes dominios, que pueden ser agrupados en cinco aspectos principales:
1. Una doctrina secreta, la filosofía hermética.
2. Teorías que se podrían calificar de "científicas" sobre la constitución de la materia.
3. Un arte práctico cuyos fines principales son la transmutación de los metales y la medicina universal.
4. Una mística.
5. El Ars Magna, curiosa alianza de misticismo, aspiraciones religiosas, teosofía y procedimientos prácticos, especie de síntesis de
los aspectos precedentes.
Hubo tantos alquimistas como categorías precedentemente distinguidas: unos interesados casi exclusivamente en la transmutación
de metales en oro (crisopea) o en plata (argiropea), otros en la medicina; unos, ante todo prácticos; otros, especulativos que
trataban de disimular sus doctrinas heterodoxas tras el velo de alegorías y de símbolos; algunos fueron sobre todo místicos. Pero
los maestros del "arte regia"3 han cultivado simultáneamente todos los aspectos posibles. Exteriormente la alquimia ha
evolucionado mucho a través del tiempo; en Occidente no adquiere su fisonomía definitiva hasta la Edad Media y a veces hasta el
siglo XVI.
El estudio de la alquimia no es, pues, tan fácil como algunos podrían creer, tanto más cuanto que es difícil, hasta para un
historiador sensato, abandonar el punto de vista de la ciencia contemporánea para buscar, detrás de un lenguaje especial de
extraño porte, conceptos que a primera vista parecen insólitos y extravagantes al hombre moderno.
LA FILOSOFIA HERMETICA
I. GENERALIDADES: Hemos visto que los alquimistas se asignan de buen grado el epíteto de "filósofos", y que muchos de ellos
pretenden aportar un conocimiento profundo de la naturaleza: la filosofía hermética. FORMACION Y CARACTERES GENERALES.
Es una doctrina o mejor, un conjunto de doctrinas perpetuado en el decurso de la Edad Media por obra de múltiples influencias.
Esta filosofía hermética ha acarreado los restos de todas las doctrinas teosóficas de fines de la Antigüedad, que fueron combatidas
por la Iglesia con encarnizamiento pero que no dejaron de marchar subterráneamente durante muchos siglos: hermetismo
propiamente dicho, gnosis diversas, paganismo místico, religiones de misterios, neoplatonismo... Más tarde la filosofía hermética
recurrió a la Cábala judía, aunque sin llegar a confundirse con ella. Lo más extraño es que este conjunto de doctrinas diversas se
presente como un coherente sistema tradicional no carente de grandeza. Doctrina secreta, oculta a la vista del profano tras el velo
de alegorías y de símbolos, trasmitida por tradición oral y por iniciación, trató de estabilizarse, sobre todo a partir del siglo XV, en
un sistema coordinado. Pese a las divergencias entre los autores, las ideas principales persisten invariables desde los libros de
conjuros de la Edad Media (y los tratados antiguos...) hasta los voluminosos tratados de Paracelso y de Fludd. EL UNIVERSO.
Como lo hace notar precisamente Lambert, "el campo de estudio del alquimista no va más allá del sistema o, más bien, del
universo solar; esto debe tenerse presente. En los tratados de alquimia se habla a veces de constelaciones, pero éstas sólo sirven
para definir la posición de los planetas del universo solar en el cielo". Se encuentra, sin embargo, entre los adeptos todo un sistema
del mundo: en el centro, la Tierra; luego, los círculos de los siete planetas y el círculo de las estrellas fijas; después el Empíreo, el
reino de los espíritus puros, y por fin, fuera del conjunto del universo, Dios mismo, creador de ese Todo que él "envuelve" en cierto
modo, que "circunscribe todo sin estar él mismo circunscripto" (ver fig. 1). Aparecen en esta concepción las líneas generales de la
cosmología gnóstica.4
 fig. 1. Concepción gnóstica del universo (según Leisegang).

DIOS Y EL MUNDO. Los textos herméticos insisten ora sobre la inmanencia de la Divinidad en el mundo, ora sobre su
trascendencia respecto del universo. De hecho Dios no es independiente del mundo y tiende a menudo a abismarse en él. Los
autores emplean sin violencia la expresión "naturaleza naturante" (Natura naturans) para designar la Divinidad. (Esta expresión no
ha sido inventada por Spinoza: mucho antes se la encuentra en Robert Fludd y en Giordano Bruno, quienes la tomaron de los
hermetistas medievales.) Por extensión todo ser en el mundo, todo lo que existe, es una parte de Dios. Más aún: la historia del
mundo es también la historia de Dios; sin la creación, Dios se reduciría a una simple posibilidad indiferenciada; si Dios es visible en
el universo, es porque se ha expresado por su intermedio (cf. más adelante, § 2). LA UNIDAD COSMICA. Hay así un solo Ser que
se nos presenta con formas infinitamente variadas. Y la Piedra filosofal se constituye en el símbolo mismo de esta unidad cósmica.
"La Piedra de los filósofos también es llamada vegetal, animal mineral, porque de ella misma, en sustancia y en ser, los vegetales,
los animales y los minerales han nacido5." La teoría de la unidad de la materia es como el leit motiv de todos los autores
herméticos: "Uno es el Todo, por él el Todo, para él el Todo, y en él el Todo" escribe Zósimo, y en la faz final de su Testamentum
el pseudo Lulio inscribió la siguiente fórmula: Omnia in Unum ("Todo en Uno"). Tras la diversidad de accidentes con que las cosas
se revisten, se esconde una esencia común a todos los seres de la naturaleza. Esta concepción es retomada por Jacob Boehme,
quien escribe en su De Signatura Rerum: "Cuando hablo del Azufre, del Mercurio y de la Sal, sólo entiendo una cosa única,
espiritual o corporal; todas las criaturas son esa cosa única, pero las propiedades las diferencian. Cuando hablo de un hombre, de
un animal, de una planta o de un ser cualquiera, todo ello es la misma cosa única. Todo lo que es corporal es una misma esencia,
plantas, árboles y animales; pero cada uno difiere según que, al principio, el Verbo fiat le haya impreso una cualidad." (Este es el
fundamento de la doctrina de las "Signaturas" ampliamente desarrollada por Paracelso.) LA VIDA DEL COSMOS. Se concibe el
mundo como un vasto organismo. Todo es animado, vivo: la idea de la unidad de la materia y del vínculo íntimo entre lo que existe
se acompaña de un vitalismo generalizado. "El mundo -decía ya el neoplatónico Jámblico-, es un animal vivo cuyas partes,
cualquiera sea su separación, están ligadas entre sí de modo conveniente." Todo lo que existe vive y posee un alma; la vida
evoluciona, y se transforma sin solución de continuidad, desde la piedra hasta Dios. "La Naturaleza, incluido el Universo, es una, y
su origen sólo puede ser la eterna Unidad. Es un vasto organismo en el cual las cosas naturales se armonizan y simpatizan
recíprocamente6." La muerte, nos lo dice el mismo Paracelso en su De Natura Rerum, no es más que la disociación de los seres y
su "retorno al cuerpo de su Madre". Además, todo está poblado de espíritus, desde ángeles hasta demonios, comprendidos los
"espíritus elementales" de los cuales Paracelso ha trazado una lista detallada: las "salamandras", espíritus del fuego; los "silfos",
genios del aire y de las tempestades; las "ondinas", espíritus de las aguas; los "gnomos", potencias terrestres, guardianes de
cavernas y tesoros... LA TEOLOGIA SOLAR. En el cosmos, el centro de la energía no es otro que el Sol, productor incesante de la
fuerza universal, designado por diversos nombres: Telesma ("Tabla de Esmeralda"), Archeo (Paracelso, van Helmont), Alma del
Mundo (Fludd)... Por su coagulación, esta luz formó los cuerpos y los materiales de que se compone el universo sideral. El Sol
mantiene los seres en existencia; su energía anima al mundo y al hombre. De ahí el carácter divino atribuido al Sol, fuente de toda
vida: la energía una, emanada del Sol, vivifica constantemente los seres del universo. Los adeptos reencuentran así el antiguo
culto solar: el astro del día se hace tabernáculo de la Divinidad, expresión visible del Verbo divino. EL DUALISMO SEXUAL. Una
de las teorías que más escandalizaron a los teólogos es la del dualismo sexual, ampliamente desarrollado por los autores
herméticos: todas las oposiciones, todas las simpatías y antipatías verificables en el mundo provienen de la oposición de dos
principios complementarios: uno activo y masculino, otro pasivo y femenino. Reaparecen aquí antiguas concepciones milenarias:
Dios era hermafrodita antes de la Creación; luego se dividió en dos seres opuestos de cuya cópula nació el mundo (cf. más
adelante, § 2). El Sol es masculino; la Tierra, femenina. El principio femenino se encarna más particularmente en la Luna. Es la
Madre, la diosa siempre fecundada pero siempre virgen, representada por una mujer coronada de estrellas que lleva en su cuerpo
el cuarto creciente. La unión del hombre y la mujer, la oposición del principio generador y del principio fecundado, constituye la
explicación última. De ahí toda una serie de símbolos tomados del lenguaje sexual y expresados en formas muy variadas.

fig. 2. Sello de Salomón.

De esto los alquimistas deducen toda una teoría sobre la génesis de los metales (cf. más adelante), de donde provienen los
calificativos de padre y de madre de los metales, dados al Azufre y al Mercurio, principios activo y pasivo, respectivamente.
Separados en el seno de la Tierra y atraídos incesantemente uno hacia el otro, los dos principios se combinan en diversas
proporciones para formar metales y minerales por influencia del fuego central. Y, según la expresión de Alberto Magno en su
Compuesto de los compuestos, "la diferencia sola de cocimiento y de digestión produce la variedad en la especie metálica".
LOS CUATRO ELEMENTOS. Los alquimistas retoman la vieja teoría griega de los cuatro elementos (tetrasomía). Para evitar
equívocos, conviene insistir sobre el siguiente punto: los cuatro elementos (Agua, Tierra, Aire, Fuego) no designan las realidades
concretas cuyos nombres llevan. Son estados, modalidades de la materia. "Los cuatro elementos responden, en efecto, a los
estados generales y apariencias de la materia. La Tierra es el símbolo y el soporte del estado sólido. El Agua, símbolo y soporte de
la liquidez. El Aire, de la volatilidad. El Fuego, más sutil todavía, responde al mismo tiempo a la noción sustancial del fluido etéreo,
soporte simbólico de la luz, del calor, la electricidad, y a la noción fenomenológica del movimiento de las últimas partículas de los
cuerpos12." Los alquimistas distinguen dos elementos visibles: la Tierra y el Agua, continentes de dos elementos invisibles, el
Fuego y el Aire; y hacen corresponder estos cuatro elementos con las cuatro cualidades tradicionales: cálido, frío, húmedo y seco
(fig. 3). En correspondencia con la Sal, se suele describir un quinto elemento, el Éter o Quintaesencia, especie de mediador entre
los cuerpos y la fuerza vivificante que los penetra. Concepción utilizada con frecuencia es el llamado ciclo de Platón: hay cambio
periódico continuo entre los elementos (el Fuego se condensa en Aire; el Aire se cambia en Agua; el Agua, solidificada se
transforma en Tierra; la Tierra se trueca en Fuego; luego la transformación se reproduce en sentido inverso).
 fig. 3. Los cuatro elementos.

Por otra parte, los alquimistas se empeñan en relacionar la clasificación Azufre-Sal-Mercurio con la teoría de los cuatro elementos;
de ahí este cuadro.

En fin, la génesis de los cuatro elementos preocupa mucho a los adeptos, lo que motiva múltiples interpretaciones de la "Tabla de
Esmeralda". He aquí al respecto, una tentativa de elucidar un pasaje oscuro de dicho escrito, suministrada por uno de los
intérpretes modernos de las doctrinas alquímicas, el doctor Lambert: "Parece, en nuestra opinión, fácil de interpretar ese pasaje si
se lo relaciona con la emanación primordial o Telesma, que, proveniente del Sol, pasa por los cuatro estados de materia de que
hemos hablado: el fuego, el aire, el agua y la tierra. El Sol es el padre de ese Telesma y lo emite en estado de fuego... 'El Viento lo
ha llevado en su vientre', dicho de otro modo ese Telesma, al abandonar el estado de fuego, pasa al de aire simbolizado por el
viento. 'La Luna es su madre': aquí se trata, verosímilmente, del pasaje al estado de agua. 'La Tierra es su nodriza'; es decir que
ese Telesma recibe su materialización última en sustancia sólida, representada por la tierra" (fig. 4).

fig. 4. Los cuatro elementos según R. Lulio.

LOS SIETE METALES. Los alquimistas distinguían siete metales, dos de ellos perfectos, es decir, inalterables: el oro y la plata,
simbolizados por el Sol y la Luna; y cinco imperfectos, simbolizados por los planetas y representados por los signos de estos
últimos.13

fig. 5. Metales y correspondencias planetarias.

Cada metal está así en relación con un planeta, lo que entraña un vínculo entre la alquimia y la astrología. Los adeptos estudian
así las influencias planetarias sobre la formación de metales en el seno de la Tierra. Ya el filósofo neoplatónico Proclo, escribía: "El
oro natural, la plata y cada uno de los metales, como las otras sustancias, han sido engendrados en la tierra por influencia de las
divinidades celestes y de sus efluvios. El Sol produce el oro; la Luna, la plata; Saturno, el Plomo, y Marte, el hierro14". Los metales
son considerados seres vivos: "El bronce, como el hombre, tiene un cuerpo y un alma. El alma es el vapor que se eleva en el curso
de la destilación y de la sublimación; el cuerpo es lo que queda en la retorta; ... reunidos el cuerpo y el alma, resucitan los cuerpos
muertos" (Turba). Y los alquimistas desarrollan todo un conjunto de curiosas teorías sobre el origen de los metales, del cual
daremos lo esencial: los metales, dicen, como todos los seres creados, tienen el mismo origen: la materia prima; "los metales son
todos semejantes en su esencia, solamente se diferencian en su forma15". El oro es la perfección del reino metálico, el fin
constante de la naturaleza. Pero ese fin es postergado por múltiples accidentes y vicisitudes que originan la aparición de metales
inferiores: El oro, fin viviente de la perfección metálica, se forma en las entrañas de la Tierra a partir de una materia prima que
maduran los astros; pero hay metales "enfermos", es decir, metales viles. Pese a todo, los metales tienden activamente a la
perfección mediante el ciclo hierro cobre plomo estaño mercurio plata oro; la transmutación se opera así gradualmente en el
transcurso de los siglos en las entrañas de la Tierra. Algunos autores, como Glauber en su libro Opus minerale (La obra mineral,
Amsterdam, 1651), llegan a una concepción cíclica de aquélla: una vez alcanzado el estado de oro, los metales recorren el ciclo en
sentido inverso, en una progresiva imperfección hasta llegar al hierro, para recuperar gradualmente su perfección y así
indefinidamente; hay en esto como un remoto presentimiento de los conceptos modernos sobre la radioactividad y la transmutación
espontánea de los cuerpos. Las doctrinas alquímicas sobre los metales fueron violentamente combatidas desde el siglo XVI. Así
Tomás Erasto, uno de los más virulentos adversarios de Paracelso, niega la posibilidad de la transmutación metálica cuando afirma
que cada metal, en su propia forma, es incapaz de transformarse en otro metal. Las críticas dirigidas a la doctrina de la
transmutación fueron, por otra parte, formuladas desde el principio no en nombre de la experiencia, sino de la religión, que
declaraba los poderes del hombre limitados e incapaces de modificar la esencia de los cuerpos naturales. ALQUIMIA Y QUIMICA.
Suele vincularse la alquimia con la química moderna y, en efecto, fácil es hallar en los adeptos el presentimiento de ciertas teorías
contemporáneas: la unidad de la materia, la posibilidad de transmutar los elementos, etcétera. Se les debe también el
descubrimiento de muchos cuerpos nuevos: el ácido sulfúrico, el antimonio, etcétera, y la invención de procedimientos técnicos
bastante perfeccionados. Pero, en realidad, se trata de dos concepciones del saber diametralmente opuestas: "Nuestras ciencias
modernas -escribe el doctor Sauné- proceden ante todo por análisis; nosotros dividimos todo el estudio en muchos dominios
distintos, en el interior de los cuales todo resulta simple; al mismo tiempo que se acrecientan las adquisiciones de las ciencias, se
ve multiplicada la cantidad de tales dominios tanto como la de los términos empleados. Por el contrario, los alquimistas suponían
un paralelismo perfecto entre todas las manifestaciones naturales y hasta sobrenaturales. Las mismas palabras sirven para
órdenes de fenómenos muy diferentes". Aun si, al considerar la alquimia, se hace abstracción de sus aspectos filosóficos y
místicos, no deja de existir un abismo entre los fines de los alquimistas y los del químico moderno: en el plano material, el propósito
del adepto es purificar las sustancias materiales, combinarlas y exaltar sus cualidades para llevarlas a una etapa más avanzada de
evolución. Por lo demás, su dominio primordial no consiste en las sustancias materiales propiamente dichas, sino en las energías
latentes que ellas encierran. Por actuación de las fuerzas espirituales, el alquimista puede sublimar elementos materiales en
elementos invisibles y materializar sustancias invisibles; de ahí la posibilidad de lo que se ha llamado las palingénesis: según
Paracelso, si un objeto pierde su sustancia material, su forma invisible permanece en la naturaleza y, si se llega a revestir esa
forma de materia visible, se le permite reaparecer (así es cómo los alquimistas mencionados por Kircher en su Mundus
subterraneus pretendían reconstituir una flor a partir de sus cenizas). "La química vulgar -dice Pernety en sus Fables grecques et
égyptiennes dévoilées- es el arte de destruir los compuestos que la naturaleza ha formado; y la química hermética es el arte de
trabajar con la naturaleza para perfeccionarla." Y F. Hartmann nos dice: "Es un error confundir la alquimia y la química. La química
moderna es una ciencia que se ocupa únicamente en las formas exteriores en que se manifiesta el elemento de la materia. Jamás
produce algo nuevo. Se puede mezclar, componer y descomponer, dos o muchos cuerpos químicos infinidad de veces, y hacerlos
reaparecer en formas distintas, pero al fin de cuentas no habrá aumento de sustancia ni nada más que la combinación de
sustancias empleadas al comienzo. La alquimia nada mezcla ni compone; hace que lo que existía ya en estado latente crezca y se
vuelva activo. En consecuencia, la alquimia es más comparable a la botánica o a la agricultura que a la química. Y, de hecho, el
crecimiento de una planta, de un árbol o de un animal es un proceso alquímico que se propaga en el laboratorio alquímico de la
Naturaleza, y es ejecutado por el Gran Alquimista, el poder activo de Dios sobre la Naturaleza." En último análisis, lo que diferencia
la química de la alquimia es el vitalismo de esta última. La química lleva las manifestaciones orgánicas hacia las reacciones
químicas, mientras la alquimia asimila las manifestaciones del mundo inanimado a los fenómenos biológicos. De ahí surgen
fórmulas como la de Paracelso en su Archidoxum magicum: "Nadie puede demostrar que los metales estén muertos y privados de
vida... En cambio, yo lo afirmo audazmente, los metales y las piedras, lo mismo que las raíces, las hierbas y todos los frutos, son
ricos de su propia vida." Comenzamos ahora a familiarizarnos con los fines perseguidos por los adeptos y vamos a poder
considerar la alquimia práctica, la Gran Obra propiamente dicha.

Newton was wrong, Goethe was right. Tom Brown Shows us the truth about Light

Friends, avoid the darkened chamber,

Where one pinches off the light,
Which must bow in lamentation
While distortions mock our sight.
Over-credulous believers
Through the years there’ve been enough;
In the noggins of your teachers
Reign illusions, specter-stuff.
–Goethe

When we open our eyes and view our surroundings this is possible because of a phenomenon we term “light.” What is the origin
and cause of this “light” so necessary for optical perception of the objective world? Battles have raged over this question. It has
been claimed to have been answered many times over the centuries, but has it truly been answered? Is light a particle, a wave, a
Janus-headed aberration mixing the two and confusing the mind, or is the expression of a cosmic force which the gravity-bound
viewpoint of modern science is unable to understand in its entirety due to definable yet immeasurable aspects? At the root of all this
is the question of the formation of colors. Modern science claims that color is a mere rate of vibration impinging upon our eye, that it
is but an illusion… But there are flaws in this view, serious flaws which anyone of average intelligence can see for themselves if
they but look. Modern conceptions of color formation generally derive from the basic experiment of Sir Isaac Newton where he
closed himself into a dark room and allowed in only the tiniest slit of light. This slit of light was directed to pass through a prism and
onto a white surface. The result was the spectrum of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet. Newton concluded from
this single experiment that the colors of this spectrum are “hidden” or “contained” in light and can be extracted with the prism.
Newton declared that as a result of his experiments he discovered that “white” light contains all colors and black is the absence of
all colors. Certain pigment mixing experiments may mislead one to consider this viewpoint, but a full analysis of prismatic
experiments will quash this error in thinking. The linear mode of thought arising along with the Newtonian concept of the spectrum
has given rise to modern conceptions of the “electromagnetic spectrum”. This grand spectrum is one in which all energies, be they
light, sound, diverse electrical waves, etc., are claimed to line up like well-trained soldiers marching in perfect order, from zero to
infinity, in hierarchy of what is alleged to be their true nature—their vibratory rate. While there can be no doubt that the
electromagnetic spectrum has a specific, engineerable reality, whose conception has provided us the many volition-saving products
of technology, we should not jump to the conclusion that it is an all-encompassing reality until we take all experimental
considerations into account.

Universal Approach - While Newton followed the analytical, scientific methods in his path of discovery, the great poet Goethe took a
more universal approach. Rather than simply studying light and color by shutting himself into a dark room and reproducing the
experiments of Newton, which of course he did very methodically to assess the results firsthand, he chose to discern the nature of
color in its full glory and expression in the manifest world. Goethe accepted that Newton’s experiment showed scientific truths, but
he was not so rash as to leap to the same hasty conclusions. He could clearly see that Newton was in error in his deduction of the
red-orange-yellow-blue-indigo-violet (ROYGBIV) spectrum as a primary attribute of light alone. Goethe clearly saw that the
ROYGBIV spectrum was a manufactured product of a specific arrangement of slit and prism, a secondary effect of the process of
color formation. In Newton’s theory of gravity the most important question goes unasked: that of how the falling apple got up in the
tree in the first place, what made it grow through various formative stages into its fruiting stage—all the time growing in the opposite
direction to the force of gravity? In this same manner the larger part of color formation theory—that gleaned from observing and
understanding the essence of light and color in Nature—was lost from this gravity-bound viewpoint. Now, let us consider that
glamorous, classic experiment of Sir Isaac Newton. He is isolated from the natural field of light in his darkened room, with his
apparatus allowing in only a small beam of light which is directed through a tiny aperture which then permits a smaller slit of light
through, then on through a prism onto a white surface (actually Newton ran the light through a circular hole, but we will consider the
more common slit-form of the experiment). The concept of the “ROYGBIV spectrum as the absolute structure of the components of
white light” comes from this setup (just think of it … studying light in the dark!). Now let us take over the experiment and widen this
slit: green disappears, with the white of the projection surface taking its place. We see two bands of colors, red-yellow and blue-
violet, facing each other as polarities across a white middle. Bring the slit together again and green again reappears when yellow
and blue intermingle. Forgetting for the moment all sorts of theories, examination of the observable phenomena shows that color
formation consists of border effects between light and dark areas. The red is over the shadow, or black portion of the projection and
the yellow is in the illuminated, or white portion. Blue appears on the white and violet on the black. The results of this experiment
can be more easily observed by looking through a prism at diagrams which illustrate the borders in various arrangements. Let us
continue our experiment by reversing the borders across which our experimental light is travelling. Rather than running the light
through a slit, let us run it around an object whose width can be easily manipulated. If we are looking through the prism at a card let
us look at several dark lines of varying width on a white background. What we now see is another spectrum: yellow, red, magenta,
violet, and blue (YRMVB). If we widen the object or line magenta disappears and we have darkness separating our two polarities,
yellow-red and violet-blue, red and violet over the dark side of the slit, and yellow and blue over the illuminated side. View chart
through a prism to see the various color phenomena appearing at the borders between light and dark.. If all the colors of the
Newtonian spectrum are contained in light, then shouldn’t all the colors of this second, or Goethean spectrum be contained in
darkness? The actions of infrared and ultraviolet rays which are below and above the Newtonian spectrum are well known and
studied, but what appears above and below the Goethean spectrum? Research carried on by Professor August Kirschmann has
shown that “a broad zone distinguished by the absence of ultra-violet rays extends into the colorless light adjacent to the yellow.
Adjoining the blue there would probably also turn out to be a zone with the absence of infra-red rays. To the theories of present day
physics this is a mystery, since according to these theories ultra-violet as well as infra-red rays must be present in the colorless
zones, just as in any white light.” We must also question the wavelength theory of light. It no doubt has an engineerable reality
attached to it, but how does magenta fit in? It doesn’t, even though green and magenta can be clearly discerned as being formed
from the two color poles. All prismatic colors are not allowed into the “electromagnetic” spectrum, and thus magenta must have no
wavelength. It is considered to be a secondary mixture, unlike it’s polar opposite, green. How is the wavelength deduced? By use of
diffraction gratings and similar objects which manufacture colors along borders. Thus it may be considered that the wavelengths
have a certain reality, but that it is a secondary activity related to the interaction of the materials used in its production, and thus may
not be a primary attribute. Thinking along these lines gives rise to grave concerns with the present conception of the linear
electromagnetic spectrum. This is not to say that the experiments giving rise to this conception are incorrect, rather, their
interpretation has produced a comprehension of only part of our functioning reality, and with the attitude that this is the whole story
on the energies of the universe. Goethe combined the two projectable spectrums together to create a color circle (Fig. 3 in the
above chart) which takes in the true structure of prismatic colors. Let us start travelling his circle at red, then follow around to
orange, yellow, green, blue, purple and then back to red. To fully understand this diagram we must define the colors as Goethe
used them in this circle: “red” is what we shall term magenta, it is the central prismatic color in the dark slit experiment, Goethe also
termed it pur-pur, peach-blossom, or pure-red; “orange is what is red”; yellow, green and blue are as they are, and “purple” is violet.
Goethe had clear reasons for these designations. It is outside the scope of this present article to explore them or the full range of
experiments available along these lines. We shall suffice here to organize the basic structure of color phenomena. There are many
color circles presented by proponents of various theories of light and color, and these cover a wide range from various
interpretations of Newton’s spectrum through to industrial pigment grading charts. Goethe’s color circle is based on actual prismatic
phenomena. This color circle is expressed around the six pointed star, the ancient designate of the maxim “as above, so below”.
Goethe felt that green was actually the lowest among the “living” colors (white, black and grey being “dead”). As a mixture of what
he considered the two true colors, yellow and blue, it was closest to the grey, created by mixing black and white. He said, “Green
reminds us of a molecular mixture”, and he saw green as the dissolving of light via the mixture of yellow and blue. On the other
hand he called magenta “pure red” and considered it the ascent of color towards its highest point, “The path to culmination in pure
red appears more dynamic; the appearance of green has more of an atomistic nature.” It is clear that Goethe considered green and
magenta to be polar opposites. For reasons now becoming clear the light slit (ROYGBIV) spectrum will be forthwith designated as
the “physical” spectrum, and the dark slit (YRMVB) spectrum as the “etheric”. It will be discerned that this true structure of color has
a direct and profound relationship with the structure and function of the human body.
Let There Be Light… An interesting and important researcher in color theory was Dinshah Pestanji Ghadiali. Known as “Dinshah”, in
the 1920s he introduced his color healing system known as Spectro-Chrome. While Dinshah was an ardent disciple and tireless
defender of Newton and his theory of color, it is apparent from the study of Dinshah’s conception of the structure of color that his
system is quite useful for understanding the Goethean color circle. In fact, the prismatic colors around the six-sided star as
presented by Goethe are the fundamental structure of the Dinshah Spectro-Chrome system as seen in the chart at right.. Dinshah’s
research was based on the works of Newton and Edwin Babbitt. Curiously, Goethe’s color theory never gets even the slightest
mention in a shelf full of books and magazines written by Dinshah. Dinshah’s yogic sensitivity combined with his scientific research
provided him with indications that this color structure is directly related to the function and structure of the human body. Red he saw
as being directly relating to the function of the liver and the red blood cells. Violet relates to the spleen. The “white” blood cells,
Dinshah claimed, are really “violet” in nature. To green Dinshah gave the role of governing the head and its functions. This triangle
of liver, spleen and head relates directly to the red, violet, green triangle. Green is also the dominant physical color and is used to
stabilize physical functions of the body. To the Yellow-Blue-Magenta triangle Dinshah related the functions and flows of the body.
Yellow acts as a motor stimulant for muscles. Blue, a motor depressant. Magenta rules the energetic flows and was used for
balancing the sexual energies and the heart. We can see in this structure a direct correlation to Goethe’s idea of green being
“atomistic” and magenta being the higher, upward striving side of the color circle. Dinshah stated his belief that green and magenta
were “the same color”, but that they rotated in opposite directions during their oscillations in the ether. In effect he agreed with the
wavelength theory, but felt that magenta had the same wavelength as green. To get the 12 colors used in Dinshah’s Spectro-
Chrome therapeutic system five glass slides were used: Red, Yellow, Green, Blue and Violet, all “tuned” for each individual color
treatment machine to produce the proper full color circle. They were thus called “attuned color waves” and they were mixed as
follows. Red + Yellow = Orange; Yellow + Green = Lemon; Green + Blue = Turquoise; Blue + Violet = Indigo; Red + Blue = Scarlet;
Red + Violet = Magenta; Violet + Yellow = Purple. What Dinshah considered to be the etheric colors are italicized. The operation of
the Spectro-Chrome system was simple, but precise and profound. Specific colored lights were projected upon a person, either on
the whole of the body or on specific parts. Long standing, or sluggish conditions, such as tumors, were seen to be on the ultra-
green, that is from green to violet. Infra-green colors, those from red to green, were used to “normalize” these conditions. For
recent, sudden, or red conditions, such as burns, bruises, etc., one would normalize using the ultra-green colors. For conditions
relating to the circulatory and sexual functions of the body one would use the etheric colors between red and violet: scarlet,
magenta and violet. Color, consciously or unconsciously, is a profound alterant on our human physical, mental and spiritual states,
the fundamental functions of those curious beings who stand fully upright between the lightness of heaven and the darkness of
earth, and are structured and sustained by that interaction.

Skyward
Should your glance on mornings lovely
Lift to drink the heaven’s blue,
Or when sun, veiled by sirocco,
Royal red sinks out of view—
Give to Nature praise and honor,
Blithe of heart and sound of eye,
Knowing for the world of color
Where its broad foundations lie.
–Goethe

Let us observe the sky. During a cloudless day we see two distinct atmospheric colors, yellow and blue, which we now know
Goethe considered as the only true colors. The yellow is the dot of the sun and the blue is the dome of the atmosphere. The red-
yellow pole of color formation is observed as the sun moves from overhead towards the horizon, it progressively darkens through
orange-gold-red colors of diverse variance, until it disappears beneath the horizon. As the sun sinks the blue sky turns darker
towards the black sky of night, lit only by the stars. Mountain climbers and jet pilots have reported seeing the sky turn to violet at
high altitudes. We can see that this is the blue-violet pole. In terms of propagation the yellow light of the sun can be seen as a radial
transmission wave, or rays, directly connecting the atmosphere with the solar body itself. This red-yellow pole is a longitudinal,
instant direct connection. At night the longitudinal beam of stars can be seen. It is possible, given this line of thought, to conceive of
the probability that the starlight we see is an instant transmission, a direct “real-time” connection to the star we are viewing. The
domed blue sky can be attributed to the luminescence of the atmosphere by the solar wind—that energetic stream which the sun
continually feeds into space. The solar wind takes approximately eight minutes to travel to Earth from the Sun, though some atomic
particles carried by it may take longer. It cannot travel the distance to other star systems and this is why we see only the longitudinal
rays of stars at night. We could see them during the day if it were not for the blue sky. Actually, a transverse light filter may be
manufactured by digging a deep well and climbing down to the bottom. One may use this device to view stars during the day.
Viewing distant objects through a tube produces a similar, but less profound effect, the objects appear more clearly. As the solar
energy cannot be separated from the life force, we look to Wilhelm Reich’s observations of atmospheric orgone for help in
understanding the structure of this blue atmosphere. Reich discovered, learned to isolate and scientifically study the life energy
which he termed “orgone”. Its observable form is that of a pulsing vesicle which has specific properties. Reich reported that among
the observed optical properties, the orgone was bluish and that it moves through the atmosphere in a “corkscrew” pattern. We can
see this as a progressive, life-positive, transverse wave. Once one begins to “read” the clouds, they will notice this corkscrew
pattern as a regular function of cloud formation. Its signature manifests in diverse metamorphosis, but once recognized, it will be
readily noticed.

From the Ethers

The glow retreats, done is the day of toil;
it yonder hastes, new fields of life exploring;
Ah, that no wing can lift me from the soil,
upon its track to follow, follow soaring…
–Goethe

These words running through the young Nikola Tesla’s mind released from within his imagination the discovery of the rotating
electric field, the result of which is the polyphase AC current in use worldwide today. Through this signal instance one can see that
Goethe’s works have transformed our world. However, the potential within them for far greater things will be appreciated by those
with the eyes to see. Carrying with him the profound poetic vision of the 19th century natural scientists, Tesla went on to far greater
inventions, inventions whose understanding is not possible with modern conceptions of the physical nature of the universe. He
speaks of wireless power extracted from the luminiferous ether and delivered freely to anywhere on earth; of transmitting and
recording thought through electrical analogs of the optic structure. There is good reason to believe that Tesla had working models of
these fantastic devices. Rudolf Steiner, editor of Goethe’s scientific archives at Weimar following his university years, was a prolific
writer and lecturer. Among his thousands of lectures, ranging from simple means whereby one may attain stages of higher
consciousness on through medicine, anthropology, philosophy, history, he gave three full scientific courses, Warmth, Light and
Astronomy. Steiner was no stranger to Goethe’s color theories or to the science of electricity. Steiner attributed all energetic
activities to the “sensible”, the “supersensible”, and the “subsensible” realms. The sensible is what we directly perceive with our
physical senses. The supersensible is that which is above the normal range of our senses. In order to “see” into that realm one’s
senses must be in an aware and open state, which allows a higher consciousness to function. That which is below our senses, the
“subsensible”, is beneath matter and is studied through the dissection and dissolution of material substance. This is most especially
the case of the products of material dissolution, the protons, neutrons, electrons and related cloud chamber patterns claimed to be
particles. We need meters and machines to “sense” this realm. While light has the eye to perceive it, no organ has developed in the
human body for the perception of electricity and thus it is subsensible. Electricity and electrons are very real, our electronic
technologies depend on their reality for operation. However, we must understand their true place in the structure of the universe if
we wish to progress in our knowledge. According to Steiner the supersensible realm contains four ethers, Life, Tone, Light and
Warmth, which are reflected in the four sensible states of matter, solid, liquid, gaseous and plasmic. Steiner stated his impression
that electricity is the fallen Light Ether. It is an interesting thought, for which I have not as yet found any correlation in his scientific
works. However, our knowledge is always progressing with further research and we shall see a relationship emerge from
acknowledging certain polarities discovered in electrical waves. In order to progress in our understanding of the relationship
between light and electricity we must interject some basic concepts on projective geometry. Projective geometry was considered by
Steiner to be the truly universal geometry, of which the Cartesian system is but a subset. Relegated to pure inertial matter, the
Cartesian x,y,z coordinate system fails in interpretation of the geometry of living systems. In projective geometry the point and the
plane are the same object at different perspectives. This is quite easy to perceive with the use of the imagination: envisage a minute
point, plastic in nature; this point begins to expand until we see it as a ball; we can put our arms around this ball as it continues to
expand like a balloon being filled with air; as our the ball expands our arms move wider and wider apart, until when the ball is
expanded to infinity our arms are stretching straight out at our sides. We are here against a plane, and can see that the plane is a
sphere expanded to infinity. If we take our plane at infinity and progressively reduce it, it becomes again a sphere and finally a point.
Further study will indicate that the polarity of point and plane are mediated by the line, or ray. Back to our model, where we may
continue reducing on past the observable point to a sphere expanding towards the infinite plane on the interior of the point. This
reverse situation is in the realm of counterspace. Steiner considered the etheric energies to be operating in this inner space.
Modern science, of course, tries to penetrate the inner realm of matter, but does so in a crude and destructive manner, destroying
what it looks into, and mistaking the particles of decay for the “building blocks”.

Electricity- Electricity has always been recognized as operating with inherent polarities. We know of positive and negative electricity,
obtained through friction against glass and resin and related substances. The polarity of the colors of the electric fields surrounding
the anodes and cathodes in vacuum tubes are well known, they are respectively reddish, with radial forms, and bluish, with planar
(sphere at infinity) forms. These colors and shapes are directly related to atmospheric color, but in relationship to electrical power
usage we must turn to certain modern researches to observe the full range of polarities inherent in transmitted electrical waves. The
researches of Eric Dollard have provided us with an understanding of the basic nature of electrical propagation. Dollard has
demonstrated, through experimentation with discharges from inductors and capacitors, that the realm of electricity contains many
polar phenomena. In experiments in Borderland Labs, circa 1988, the polarities of magnetism and dielectricity, and their geometric
relationships in transverse and longitudinal waves, were clearly demonstrated (see references 7,8,9). Dollard demonstrated the
inverse relationship between the coil, or magnetic inductor, and the condenser, or dielectric inductor, and their usage in propagation
of the electrical polarities. The coil, or magnetic inductor, is used for the storage and return of magnetic energy in electrical circuits.
This energy is stored in space, being the magnetic field around the inductor. The coil is spatially open, and this space is used for the
storage and return of the magnetic energy. The discharge from a magnetic coil, being electromagnetic in nature, is taken as the
magnetic pole in our developing picture. This pole propagates as red/yellow discharges, suggesting a relationship with natural color
formation. When the magnetic pole predominates, as in electromagnetism, the propagation has been shown to be a retarded
transverse wave, slower than the speed of light. Eric’s engineering mathematics, solidly based on a thorough study of the works of
Tesla, Steinmetz and Heaviside, describes the transverse electromagnetic wave (TEM) to be like a sail against the wind, which
allows us to easily picture its retarded propagation characteristics. As all electricity is considered to be “electromagnetic” in nature, it
is easy to see why people have trouble understanding the reality behind Tesla’s work. Electromagnetism is only one side of
electrical phenomena, just as Newton’s spectrum is only one side of color phenomena. But let us move on to learn of the “other
side” of electricity, which has really been right in front of us all along. The condenser, capacitor, or dielectric inductor, is used for the
storage and return of dielectric energy in electrical circuits. Dielectric energy commonly manifests as “static” electricity, though it is
anything but static. The condenser is spatially closed and the dielectric energy is stored in counterspace, that is within the
component, which consists of insulating materials that are generally considered as not allowing electricity to pass. The dielectric
manifestation of electricity is taken as the electric pole, which propagates as blue/violet sparks when discharged from a condenser.
Orgone accumulators are a type of capacitor and the blue optical properties of orgone may be seen when using one. This indicates
a strong relationship between dielectricity and orgone. The electrical pole is dominant in the transmission of Longitudinal Magneto-
Dielectric (LMD) Waves which have been measured at speeds well above the speed of light. This is the form of electricity Tesla was
propagating from his Magnifying Transmitter. The LMD wave is totally misunderstood in modern electrical theory, and is functionally
a direct connection between transmitter and receiver, which renders them as one unit. This LMD propagation can be best
understood from the perspective of projective geometry. Let us take the earth as an electrical plane at infinity, which it is as far as
electrical and geological engineering generally consider it. What Tesla did with his Magnifying Transmitter was to change the
electrical perspective from the plane to the point! Thus during the operation of the Tesla Magnifying Transmitter the earth became a
single point electrode which could be tapped at any point as though it were the output terminal of the transmitter. In projective
geometry the line mediates between point and plane and in our example the LMD wave appears to manifest as a direct line
between transmitter and receiver. Let us picture this line as a solid rod. If one pushes the rod longitudinally, the opposing end reacts
instantly, there is no time lag. On the other hand, the TEM wave can be pictured using a piece of rope that is given a sharp shake,
the wave can then be seen travelling down the length, loosing energy as it goes, taking its time to reach the end. When the
magnetic and dielectric inductors, now pictured as polar in function, are combined in parallel, upon electrical stimulation there is
created an oscillating circuit (OC). Depending upon the specific engineering of the OC it can produce predominantly TEM or LMD
waves. Oscillating circuitry allows us communication via radio waves of diverse sorts. There is an interesting analogy of oscillating
circuits to the human structure: The inductor is like our coiled intestines representing the metabolic pole of the body and the
capacitor relates to the plates of the skull, connected with the nerve polarity in the body. In the body the nerve and metabolic poles
interact to allow the rhythmic system to function, allowing us to communicate using our breath.

Analog computers- To fully understand the polarities inherent in electrical propagation we turn to the use of analog computers in the
study of electrical propagation. These computers are demonstrated, with measuring equipment, in reference 8. At left is a schematic
of an assembly of two capacitors and two inductors forming an element of an analog computer used to study the characteristics of
TEM and LMD waves. The transverse and longitudinal components move at 90o to each other, that is the transverse along the
transmission line, and the longitudinal at 90o to it. This can be understood more clearly from the following diagrams: At right is an
analog computer of a classic transmission line for use in determining the characteristics of TEM waves. The power source is at left.
Magnetic distribution, as measured by a pickup coil, is highest at left and lowest at right. Dielectric distribution, as measured by a
unique multipactor-photomultiplier detector, is lowest at left and highest at right. The magnetic and dielectric components are in
space opposition. Finger testing shows that the coils are hot on the left where magnetism is highest and cool on the right where it is
lowest, and the capacitors are cool on the left where dielectricity is lowest and warm on the right where it is highest. This type of
circuit produces weak oscillations and has slower than light propagation characteristics. The TEM wave can be seen as an
unnatural form of electrical propagation. We can relate this to the concept of Newton’s apple falling. At left we have an analog
computer of the longitudinal magneto-dielectric component of an electric wave which travels at 90o to the TEM component. This
configuration is used for determining the character of LMD waves. Source, again, is at left. Magnetic distribution measures low at
the left and rises towards the right. Dielectric distribution measures low at the left and high at the right. The components are in
space conjunction, in contradiction to the Law of Electromagnetic Induction which says these components must be in quadrature
relationship in space and time! Finger testing shows coils cool on the left rising to hot on the right in direct relation to the quantity of
magnetism distributed through the circuit, and capacitors are cool on the left and hot on the right, again in direct relationship to the
distribution of dielectricity in the circuit. This circuit produces strong, sharp oscillations (high “Q”). This is the natural form of
electricity, as Tesla well knew, and propagates faster than light. We can relate this to the growth of the tree which produced
Newton’s apple. To Steiner a tree’s growth-producing etheric energies would exist in counterspace. To Dollard the LMD wave
propagates in counterspace. In living systems such as plants, this counterspatial energy can be understood to partake of the
shaping of the plants. Interestingly enough, Dollard’s Tesla apparatus was capable of emitting discharges (or possibly implosive
charges as the equipment indicated current flowing to ground during discharge) which looked uncannily like plants. Pictured at left is
a free air discharge and at right is a discharge burned into wood. Changing the pulse rate and bandwidth Dollard could produce
discharges that varied from scrawny desert bushes to lush foliage. This is the living, ignored side of electricity so absent from our
modern textbooks, just as the etheric spectrum is absent. A magnetic or dielectric discharge at the same frequency each has its
own peculiar characteristics. Which is to be placed in the linear electromagnetic spectrum? Or are we ready to rethink our basic
concepts? We can see from these observations that electricity and light are directly related as inverse functions of color formation
and wave propagation phenomena. We thus build a picture in our imagination of electricity being the fallen Light Ether. One piece
that doesn’t fit exactly is the previously mentioned vacuum tube anode/cathode color scheme which has the same color/propagation
characteristics as atmospheric color—there is no reversal in that instance. This may be due to the nature of electricity operating
within the vacuum tube, and this possibility is being considered. In a vacuum tube driven Tesla Magnifying Transmitter we would get
LMD waves propagating from it, but internal to some tubes we could get opposing color/propagation effects, so a logic develops as
we look into this question. This chart summarizes and attempts to map the salient polarities of the generalized color/propagation
characteristics of atmospheric light and electrical waves & discharges into geometric form for further study. The in vacuo
cathode/anode propagation forms are in brackets to separate them from the general picture until we understand that situation
better. Much further research and thought needs to be directed into this area, and these color/electricity relationships should be
taken as a preliminary excursion into an exciting new area of research. This information is presented as a guidepost and
cornerstone for others to build upon, and may very well be updated through alteration or refinement as research continues. The
crude and improper concepts of electricity and color formation which the modern world view has shackled our civilization with must
be overcome. In order to progress to higher, more refined levels in the generation of power to sustain our civilization’s endeavors it
is fundamental that all energies are properly understood and defined. The only way to do this is to observe the totality of
phenomena with our full range of human capabilities, and work upwards from there. This will elevate the characteristics of our
endeavors towards those which are most life-positive and fruitful.

Goza de la compañía de los locos, pues de cuerdo dan muy pocos alegría. EL SIGLO DE ORO EN ESPAÑA Leer o contar
historias de locos era una forma de entretenimiento muy usual en la España de los Siglos XVI y XVII. Por ello, cuentos orales,
libros de caballerías, novelas y, sobre todo, los pequeños y variados volúmenes de literatura miscelánea que recogía dichos y
hechos memorables están llenos de los mas sorprendentes, tristes y graciosos casos de locura. La mayoría de los españoles del
momento se contentaban con leer u oír esos cuentecillos de hombres sin seso de que tanto gustaban y que andaban mezclados en
su imaginación con las mas increíbles historias de gigantes y de enanos, de ancianos longevos y de niños precoces, de mujeres
fuertes y de caballeros cobardes, de partos monstruosos y de hermanos idénticos, de hermafroditas y de barbudas, de herencias
no pensadas y de muertes desastradas, hasta completar un catalogo de maravillas sin fin que era el reino de los prodigios,
alimentado por una insaciable fascinación general por la sorpresa que provocaba lo que era distinto, lo que rompía el orden natural
de las cosas. Solo los reyes y los grandes nobles podían permitirse entretenerse manteniendo en sus casas los mas diversos,
extraños e infelices individuos, pero su afición por ellos, mezcla de rechazo y fascinación, era compartida por todos en aquella
época. Los hombres de placer, los bufones, los enanos, eran descomunales, estaban en la tierra de nadie, que se situaba mas allá
del orden y las reglas. Jugar con los loquillos y enanos fue una diversión muy habitual en palacio, al menos así se desprende de
las cuentas de los tesoreros reales en los que menudean las libranzas ordenando que se les haga entrega de diversas cantidades
ganadas a los dados, en rifas, a los bolos, a los trucos, a los naipes. No es fácil encontrar un denominador común a todos los
integrantes de esta variopinta cohorte de personajes que formaron la gente de placer de palacio: en principio, la deformidad,
mental o física, parecería el triste rasgo diferenciador en torno al cual todos ellos se habían unido, sino fuera por la existencia de
locos por artificio, que estaban mas cerca de los graciosos profesionales que de las personas que realmente habían perdido el
juicio. El primer requisito para pasar a formar parte de la colección de prodigios era la ingrata fortuna de poseer algún rasgo que
hiciera absolutamente distinto al que lo tuviera, convirtiéndolo en un ser fuera de lo común, inusual, no visto y, por lo tanto, mas
apreciado, habida cuenta de cuales eran los particulares gustos de una época fascinada por lo que debería repelerle, deseosa de
tener lo que le aterraba, seducida por era su misma negación. El examen de prodigio para palacio debía buscar seres imposibles
en el mundo cortesano (en teoría elegante y circunspecto). Seres que por su imperfección fueran la excepción que resaltara la
dignitas que debía imperar en la corte real, ultimo y perfecto circulo de una sociedad que se imaginaba a si misma bien ordenada y
armónicamente construida. Sin embargo, todos ellos, locos reales o fingidos, y deformes físicos, estaban unidos por la función que
desempeñaban en palacio y que no era otra que la de provocar la risa y ser objeto de las pullas de los cortesanos. Para los
placenteros que poblaban el palacio ser burlado de nombre y de obra era una realidad mas que cotidiana, incluso un ingrediente de
su particular oficio de hazmerreír, de provocar la risa ajena a costa del ridículo propio. Y la burla, tantas veces repetida, partía ya
de la costumbre de llamarlos con nombres de bestezuelas: gorrión, golondrina, liebre, pulga, rana, mosca, etc., hasta llegar al
infamante apelativo de sabandijas del Arca de Noé que, por antonomasia, solía dárseles. Este era el animalillo imperfecto de los
que se crían de la putrefacción y humedad de la tierra, pero también aquella "persona pequeña, despreciable por su forma,
acciones o estado" que termino por identificar a la gente de placer que entretenían a reyes y nobles de las cortes. El referirse a
alguien con un nombre de animal era reducirlo a la brutalidad propia de las bestias, seres imperfectos que se encontraban en un
lugar inferior al hombre racional dentro de la gran cadena que, según la cosmovision de la Alta Edad Moderna, daba orden y
jerarquía a todos los seres de la creación. La cadena se extendía desde el pie del trono de Dios hasta el ultimo de los objetos
inanimados. Cada partícula de la creación era un eslabón de la cadena, y cada eslabón, salvo los de los extremos, era
simultáneamente mayor y menor que los demás, no podía haber interrupciones. Sin solución de continuidad la creación pasaba de
un eslabón a otro de la cadena de los seres, mediante formas de transición: en el caso de racionales y brutos, el mejor de los
animales anticipaba al hombre, el mas desvalido de los humanos recordaba a las bestias. Esta diferencia que llevaba aparejado
teñirse del valor de lo extraordinario podía ser física y consistir de una anormalidad del cuerpo: gigantismo, obesidad, enanismo, o
bien, una apariencia que, sin ser deformidad, fuera contraria a los estereotipos habituales: mujeres barbudas, niñas encrespadas.
También podía diferenciarse por la falta de algo considerado esencial en el hombre: el juicio o la inteligencia, lo que lleno el palacio
de locos, aunque los dementes admitidos en la corte nunca debían estar afectados por los violentos ataques que se llamaban
furias. Los locos palaciegos se atreven, incluso, a remedar las voces y los gestos de cualquiera, llegando a fingirse clérigos o
aristócratas. Como en un juego de espejos, estos seres descomunales, faltos o excesivos, afirman en los otros la normalidad que
su cuerpo o su mente están negando. Con su descompostura son, involuntariamente, símbolos, emblemas de la perfección de que
carecen y que, sin embargo adorna a reyes, nobles y cortesanos que, a su lado, parecen aun mas majestuosos y pulidos. En
principio, la indignitas de los truhanes en palacio era triple: de origen, de oficio y de conducta. Todos ellos son denominados gente
baja, es decir no hidalga, y muchos tienen una clara ascendencia de cristianos nuevos (judíos conversos). Locos y enanos estaban
rodeados de un halo de ambigüedad. En principio esto parece relacionarse con la tradicional equiparación de lo femenino con el
desvarío o la debilidad y lo masculino con el sano juicio, de forma y modo que, como el buey era un toro bobo (según se creía), no
extrañaba que también un hombre sin seso fuera capón. El oficio de buen humor o de graciosos era el atributo de truhanes y
chocarreros, personas que con sus graciosos gestos y palabras de burla y risa y desmanes, decían dar regocijo a las personas con
quienes trataban y conversaban. Eran también conocidos por bufón, nombre con el que se llamaba al que fingía ser loco en
palacio. No se desviven por la honra, ni por el dinero, ni van a la guerra, ni son vasallos, ni pagan tributos ni pleitean. Tantas eran
las ventajas de la locura, que daba sustento a los truhanes para su simulación. La prodigalidad y la locura eran dos nociones que
habían quedado unidas ya en el Derecho Común, en concreto en un titulo del Digesto, que trata del curador que ha de ser
nombrado por tutelar los bienes de un prodigo, porque el despilfarrador, como en el caso de los locos, "no es capaz de llevar
cuenta del tiempo y limite de sus gastos". En las Siete Partidas, Ley XIII, Titulo XVI, Partida VI, se ordena a los locos o
desmemoriados se les ponga curador como a los menores. En la dádiva reciproca que era intercambiada entre amo y hombre de
placer, este ponía toda la diversión de que era capaz, no solo la adulación, y aquel la recompensa, que podía consistir en regalos,
la merced de alguna ración (pensión por alimentos) y, mas generalmente, alguna prenda de vestido o tela para cortarlas. Nada hay
de sorprendente en esta manera de remuneración, pues era una forma muy extendida de pagar los servicios de los criados, incluso
habría que decir que era la formula tradicional. En el dar placer, siempre se asocio a juglares y cortesanas. En el refranero popular
se refleja la comparación de los truhanes y las meretrices: "A la puta y al juglar, a la vejez les viene el mal" (posiblemente en
alusión a la sífilis), y que se repite en el apelativo de juglar que se da a la mujer que "por dar gusto hizo plato a si misma a todo
apetito". Parece que la costumbre de mantener locos en palacio se remontaba a la necesidad de tenerlos recluidos en fortalezas o
castillos antes de que empezaran a surgir las primeras fundaciones dedicadas especialmente a su custodia. Aunque esto fuera así
en un principio, su cotidiana presencia en la corte no tuvo que ver con su cuidado o vigilancia, sino que fue consecuencia de la
"fama de la locura" y de la aureola mítica con que esta fue rodeada por el mundo bajomedieval y el humanista. En teoría, la
edificante causa de este "elogio de la locura" puesto en practica, no fue otra cosa que suponer que el rey oiría la verdad a través
de los locos, cuya inocencia, a veces inspirada por Dios, los habría hecho inmunes a cualquier tipo de intereses particulares sin
que por ello estuvieran reducidos al estado de los necios, estos si desterrados de palacio. Verdades de loco, espinosas como
erizos de castañas, ásperas como almendras amargas, pero quien los come halla una dulzura amarga una amargura dulce. La
relación de las comidas con la diversión era todo un tópico, que "a descansar de racionales van los hombres a los convites". El por
que de que las risas fueran tan frecuentes, e incluso recomendadas por benéficas al comer, se explica en el Tratado del Alma de
Luis Vives: "por la alegría y la delectación se dilata el corazón, con cuyo movimiento se extiende el rostro y en parte contigua a la
boca que llamamos laringe, de donde viene la risa. Además, internamente, esta se origina en el diafragma, donde se halla en
asiento principal de la hilaridad, como se observa en el cosquilleo de los sobacos, donde va a parar". La risa es la huella de la
alegría y el gozo y "estos limpian la sangre con su calor, afirman la salud y provocan un color resplandeciente y agradable. Según
dice el Rey Sabio: Un corazón alegre sirve de medicina, un espíritu triste desea los huesos". El humanista español Vives (1492-
1540), pide que los locos sean tratados con caridad y que se les alimente e instruya bien. (La locura a través de los tiempos) Platon
distinguía cuatro almas: 1º. el principio inmortal del animal mortal, ajeno al cuerpo, pero que ordena su estructura, encerrado en el
cráneo; 2º. el alma de las pasiones, situada en el tórax, por encima del diafragma, pero que se podía comunicar con el alma
inmortal por el istmo del cuello; 3º. el alma de la nutrición, situado por debajo del diafragma, inaccesible al razonamiento; 4º. El
alma de la conjunción carnal, situado por debajo del ombligo. A esta teoria se opone la de Aristoteles, que admite la existencia de
una sola alma localizada en el corazon y da el nombre de facultades del alma a las partes separadas o almas de Platon. De estos
conceptos surgen indiscutiblemente interpretaciones de la locura, pero los primeros documentos psiquiatricos se encuentran en las
obras de Hipocrates. La mania, la phrenitis y la afeccion melancolica, resumen todos los conocimientos psicopaticos de Hipocrates,
auqneu tambien hay referencias al delirio, que divide en delirio alegre y delirio serio, vinculados casi exclusivamente a los estados
febriles. Los autores hipocraticos agregarona estas entidades nosologicas otros dos grandos sindromes cerebrales: la epilepsia, o
enfermedad sagrada, y la aplopejia, que no separaban de las enfermedades mentales, porque "la mania se presenta algunas
veces en la apoplejia y la melancolia y la epilepsia presentan causas comunes". La etiologia de las enfermedades, en general, se
vincula a la influencia telurica (estaciones, clima, temperatura), al regimen de vida, a la alimentacion. Asimismo, las enfermedades
mentales se vinculan a las estaciones: la mania, melancilia y epilepsia, aparecen en primavera y en otono, mientras que la phrenitis
predomina en el invierno. Surge la teoria humoral, que admite cuatro humores en el cuerpo del hombre: la sangre, la pituita, la bilis
amarilla y la bilis negra. Cuando estos elementos se encuentran en una exacta proporcion de clase, fuerza y cantidad, y su mezcla
es perfecta, existe la salud, pero cuando se pierde ese equilibrio o uno de esos humores no se combina con los otros, aparece la
enfermedad. Celso, al clasificar las enfermedades mentales, toma de Hipocrates nada mas que la patogenia de la melancolia.
Procede con espiritu practico y aplica el criterio clinico. Por eso distingue la phrenitis del delirio febril, y las alucinaciones son el
sintoma basico de su tercer especie de locura. Areteo de Cappadoce ha sido considerado como el primer autor psiquiatrico. Tomo
la teoria humoral de Hipocrates, a quien cita, y sus conceptos son resultado directo de la gran cantidad de alienados que observo.
Sus ideas sobre la mania y la melancolia son originales y aceptadas por todos los psiquiatras hasta el siglo XVIII. Galeno,
influenciado por Aristoteles e inspirado por Platon, al estudiar a Hipocrates, supo aumentar el prestigio de la obra de este. Los
arabes fueron compiladores de esta obra, y sus libros sirvieron para las primeras traducciones latinas. Paracelso, en el siglo XVI
(1526-1541), preconiza la medicacion quimica y atrae la atencion sobre ella. Pretende, asimismo, dar una explicacion quimica de la
vida. Vesalio, en su tratado de anatomia publicado en 1543, refuta las ideas de Galeno e inicia una corriente fecunda de
observacion. Ambrosio Pare hizo una exposicion detallada y clara de la doctrina humoral de Hipocrates, distinguiendo: 1º. el
hombre sanguineo, en el que predomina ese humor, es moderado, rojo, alegre y agradable; 2º. El hombre flematico, cachaciento,
perezoso y gordo; 3º. El hombre colerico, de color cetrino, cuerpo delgado y debil, muy velludo, rapido y vigilante; 4º. El hombre
melancolico, de rostro obscuro, con mirada inconstante, triste, tiene suenos espantosos, que impresionan a causa de los vapores
fuliginosos del humor melancolico que suben al cerebro. Thomas Willis domino la neuropsiquiatria durante el siglo XVII, y
aconsejaba la hospitalizacion para proteger a la sociedad. A estos conocimientos, a la clasificacion clasica y racional de los
antiguos, se unio el peso de la supersiticion, agregando la etiologia demoniaca de la locura. La existencia de alienados en
promiscuo y peligroso contacto con la sociedad, impedia su estudio metodico y serio. Por regla general, iban a parar a las carceles,
o eran victimas de las mortales condenas de la Inquisicion. (Beltran) En la teoría de los humores y de los elementos, que era
predominante en los siglos XVI y XVII, la alegría se relacionaba con el humor sanguíneo y el elemento aéreo con los que compartía
las cualidades de humedad y calor. La tristeza en cambio, concordaba con la melancolía y la tierra y, como ellas, los tristes están
fríos y secos. Por ultimo se suponía que el pesado oficio real llevaba aparejada la melancolía, según Aristóteles, el estado egregio
por excelencia que gozaban y sufrían "todos los hombres extraordinarios que se destacan en la filosofía, la política, la poesía y las
artes". La expresión de la alegría que era la risa se necesitaba para hacer mas ligero el peso que debían soportar los melancólicos
reyes. La patología "clásica" de los griegos, la de Hipocrates y Galeano, consistia en la teoría humoral, o sea, de los cuatro
humores. El cuerpo esta compuesto de cuatro jugos o "humores": sangre, bilis amarilla, bilis negra y flema, que corresponden
respectivamente a los cuatro elementos: aire, fuego, tierra y agua. Cada humor es combinación de dos de las cuatro cualidades:
cálido, húmedo, seco, frío. En cada uno de los cuatro temperamentos (sanguíneo, colérico, bilioso y flemático) predomina uno de
los humores. Todas las enfermedades resultan de una perturbación en el equilibrio humoral, por el exceso o la corrupción de uno
de los humores. La melancolía, por ejemplo, es una enfermedad producida por la hipotética "bilis negra". (Breve Historia de la
Psiquiatría) La correspondencia completa que se establecía entre los cuatro humores hipocráticos era el siguiente: El verde era un
color por lo general asociado a la indumentaria típica de la alegría y la locura. Dar vestidos era una forma muy tradicional y nada
sorprendente de remunerar a los criados y entre ellos a los hombres de placer. Color de la alegría, de la juventud y de la locura, el
verde era color bufonesco por excelencia. Aparece por todas partes: en medias, ligas, toquillas de sombrero, mangas, jubones,
ropillas, calzones, etc. En el uso del gorro de cuernos, típico de la iconografía bufonesca, se encuentra una alusión a la debilidad
del hombre que ha sido burlado por su mujer o que ha consentido su propio engaño. Una forma habitual de reclutar a estos
inspirados locos para palacio era traerlos de las instituciones que para su reclusión se habían fundado en hospitales de algunas
ciudades españolas, aunque los enfermos mentales solían ser confinados en cárceles comunes, y visitarlos parece haber sido una
parada obligada para muchos viajeros de toda Europa y en donde, a cambio de una generosa limosna. llevaban dementes para
diversión de reyes y nobles. Debe tenerse en cuenta que la muy empírica medicina de la Edad Media y comienzos de la Edad
Moderna estuvo indisolublemente ligada a la religión, particularmente a la católica. Poca gente mas que los sacerdotes sabían leer
como para tener acceso a las fuentes que almacenaban los precarios conocimientos de la época. Por otra parte, era tarea
especifica de los religiosos cuidar de enfermos, vagabundos y menesterosos como expresión tangible de la caridad cristiana y
deber irrenunciable de su ministerio. (Salud Publica) El Renacimiento es época de profundas contradicciones. Junto a la
despiadada persecución de psicópatas tildados de hechiceros, observamos por todas partes señales de una profunda compasión
hacia los desdichados enfermos. Esto se manifiesta en el establecimiento de numerosas instituciones para enfermos mentales,
particularmente en España, que por entonces vivía su "edad de oro" en el orden de la medicina y de la civilización en general, y
donde mas vigorosamente influyo el ejemplo árabe. Instituciones de este tipo se crearon en Sevilla, Zaragoza y Valencia. Es
también característico que en el recién conquistado México, pocas décadas después (1567), el viejo penitente, ex soldado y
conquistador Bernardino Alvarez, haya abierto asimismo una de esas instituciones (San Hipolito), la primera de su especie en el
continente americano. La misma piadosa comprensión hacia los enfermos mentales se manifiesta además con gran vigor en los
escritos del humanista español Juan Luis Vives (1492-1520). (Breve Historia de la Psiquiatría) Es por España, el mas islamizado
país de Europa, por donde penetran las tradiciones de asistencia hospitalaria. El ardor de las ordenes monárquicas, la caridad de
los nobles y de los ricos burgueses, los legados de particulares que habían hecho voto de pobreza, produjeron una súbita floración
de instituciones caritativas. Los religiosos de la Orden de la Merced, fundada en el año 1218 para el rescate de cristianos cautivos
de los moros, crearon en el año 1409, a imagen de los establecimientos especiales que habían visto en Oriente, el Hospital de
Valencia. Probablemente la orden hospitalaria mas activa es la que funda el joven Juan Ciudad Huarte, convertido después de una
vida errante y libertina. Se lanza al estudio de los caracteres y después, preso el mismo de molestias físicas, decide vivir entre
locos y ser tratado como ellos. Conocido bajo el nombre de San Juan de Dios da su nombre, en el año 1539, a una orden religiosa
hospitalaria que incluso llegaría a conocerse en América: los Hermanos de San Juan de Dios, llamados también Hermanos de la
Caridad. Fundan asilos en Granada, Córdoba y en Roma. En Barcelona, un Hospital fundado en 1229 concede, desde 1412, asilo
a los alienados. En 1425 Alfonso V favorece la fundación del asilo de Zaragoza, donde son tratados con bastante atención los
enfermos mentales. Se les envía a trabajar los campos y se les procuran ciertas distracciones. En 1436 en Sevilla y en Valladolid,
en 1456 en Palma de Mallorca y en 1483 en Toledo, donde un nuncio apostólico cede su propia mansión, los enfermos son
socorridos en establecimientos hospitalarios por los eclesiásticos. Los locos, que hasta entonces habían vagado por los campos,
que habían estado recogidos en algunos monasterios o vivían y morían fuera de las murallas de la ciudad, comenzaron a recibir
atención. En el año 1566 Felipe II los hace ingresar en el Hospital de Madrid. La Casa dels Fols de Valencia, fundada por Gilabert
Jofre, será elegido por Lope de Vega como escenario de dos de sus obras mas conocidas: Los locos de Valencia y El Peregrino en
su Patria, donde la fundación valenciana es alabada por "la mayor comodidad de limpieza, aseo y cuidado de aquellos a quien les
falta (el seso)". La desnudez era considerada característica de la locura furiosa. Si rasgarse las ropas y despojarse de ellas es
signo del que ha perdido el juicio, el vestirse lo es de que ha sido recuperada la razón. En las instituciones en que estaban
recluidos, los locos iban en camisa y si se curaban les eran devueltas sus prendas. Cervantes, en el Quijote, menciona el caso de
un loco al que se da por curado en el Hospital de los Inocentes, diciendo que "el se vio vestido de cuerdo y desnudo de loco" al
habérsele devuelto sus prendas. Parece ser que el remedio que se utilizaba con los locos furiosos eran narcóticos, aunque a veces
su exceso provocara la muerte. No hay por que ir a buscar locos y truhanes lejos de la corte: esta los producía por si sola y en gran
numero, incluyendo monarcas, nobles y sirvientes. Antes que ello ocurriera, los monarcas de la Casa de Austria hubieran podido
apelar a mas de una de sus herencias familiares para explicar su afición por rodearse de ellos. Juan I de Castilla (Juana la Loca)
atacada de locura melancólica. De Felipe III se cuenta que era enfermizo y melancólico. Carlos II (1661-1700), conocido como el
Hechizado, era débil, enfermizo y retrasado mental. Con frecuencia era atacado por violentas fiebres que lo postraban en cama;
apenas subía a un carruaje, los vómitos lo obligaban a desistir del viaje, y cuando estaba al aire libre le supuraban los ojos. El
apelativo que le diera el pueblo se debía a su lamentable estado físico el cual era atribuido a influencias diabólicas. Cristóbal de
Vega, médico de cámara del Infante Don Carlos, hijo de Felipe II, puede pasar por el primer psiquiatra español. En sus obras,
publicadas en 1576, se encuentra una minuciosa descripción de la melancolía y de ciertas afecciones maníacas. La época, el
espíritu colectivo y el pensamiento social de toda la Europa de los siglos XVI, XVII y XVIII, estaban dominados, en mayor o menor
grado, por la superstición. Una lamentable intransigencia caracterizo los actos de gobierno, inspirado y a veces suplantado por el
Tribunal de la Inquisición. Esa fe deformada, que llego a convertirse en superstición intransigente, fue invadiendo todos los
aspectos de la cultura de la época, hasta infiltrarse en el criterio medico, influyendo poderosamente en los problemas psiquiátricos.
La creencia en el diablo sirvió de base a esa influencia supersticiosa en la patología mental, y así se formó el grupo de las
demonopatias. Las enfermedades fueron consideradas exclusivamente como pruebas o castigos enviados por Dios. Y como las
enfermedades nerviosas y mentales se presentaban con caracteres tan extraordinarios y fantásticos para el pueblo atemorizado
por la superstición, se penso que eran el resultado de una influencia diabólica. Los mismos enfermos aportaron a este concepto
falsos elementos de juicio que lo robustecían. En su delirio exteriorizaban la gravitación que sobre su mentalidad habían tenido las
ideas colectivas, la superstición y el fanatismo. Atribuían sus padecimientos al diablo, que, algunas veces, actuaba a su alrededor,
y otras, se encontraba dentro de su cuerpo. En el primer caso se trataba de una obsesión, en el segundo de una posesión. Los
alucinados afirmaban que uno o varios diablos los amenazaban desde afuera, les hablaban, los perseguían. Este síndrome
constituía la demonopatia externa, de obsesión. Otros enfermos habían sido "poseídos" por el diablo que, alojado en sus cuerpos,
los convertía en esclavos de su voluntad, quitándoles el control de sus pensamientos. El que habla, grita y piensa es el demonio. El
enfermo no puede impedirlo. Este síndrome constituía la demonopatia interna, de posesión. El tratamiento de estos enfermos era
una consecuencia directa de la superstición. Como se les tenia por inocentes víctimas de una irrupción diabólica, se intentaba
curarlos con exorcismos y con el auxilio de los sacramentos, suplantando la medicina con el dogma. En enero de 1481 el Santo
Oficio se instala en Sevilla. En 1483: Córdoba, Jaén, Toledo y Villarreal. En 1485: Valladolid, Calahorra, Murcia, Cuenca, Zaragoza
y Valencia. En 1487: Barcelona y Mallorca. Su campo de acción es la defensa de la fe católica, la caza de los herejes, la
extirpación del error; le echan la culpa primero a los judaizantes, después, en el siglo XVI, se apuntara a las sectas seudo-misticas,
a los protestantes y, nuevamente, a los judaizantes. De forma accesoria, la Inquisición reprimirá también la homosexualidad (el
vicio que no tiene nombre, el pecado nefando), la bigamia, los excesos de los sacerdotes, la brujería. Los procedimientos de la
Inquisición pueden durar meses o, incluso, años. Las penas que pronuncia pueden ir desde la simple abjuración hasta la muerte en
la hoguera pasando por la penitencia, la cárcel, las galeras, la flagelación, el exilio. Todas estas penas van acompañadas por la
confiscación de los bienes. (La España de los Reyes Católicos) Treinta muchachas perecieron en las llamas en Calahorra en el
año 1507. Hacia el año 1530, en España, cierto numero de mujeres esparcieron el rumor de que para ellas era suficiente frotarse
la piel con excrementos de reptiles o de cuervos para que les fuese otorgada la facultad de elevarse en el aire. Aseguraban que a
la noche realizaban estragos abominables entre los animales domésticos y hacían perecer a los niños. Ciento cincuenta de ellas
fueron azotadas en Estella y las demás quemadas en Zaragoza. Los Sanjuanistas - La Primera Orden, Cronológicamente
hablando, es la Orden Militar de San Juan de Jerusalem o de Caballeros Hospitalarios. Ya en 1048, medio siglo antes de la
primera cruzada, unos mercaderes de Amalfi habian fundado en Jerusalem un hospital bajo la advocación de San Juan Bautista
para recoger a los peregrinos que se enfermaban. Esta institucion de caridad prosperó sobre todo desde que llegaron los cruzados
de Godofredo de Boullion, el cual hizo grandes grandes donaciones al hosptal, y muchos de sus caballeros se afiliaron a la
hermandad hospitalaria, gracias a la cual pudo esta fundar filiales en Italia Y Francia. Estos hospitalarios tomaron forma de
congregación religiosa bajo la Regla de San Agustin, con aprobación de Pascual II, en 1113. Entró a gobernarla el caballero
frances Raimundo de Puy quien, hacia 1137, la transformo en Orden Militar, comprometiendose sus integrantes a empuñar las
armas en defensa de la religión. El mismo Raimundo de Puy redactó la nueva regla, confirmada por Lucio III en 1184. Al tomar
caracter militar, no hicieron otra cosa sino imitar a los Templarios, fundados poco antes. Los Sacerdotes atendían al culto divino y a
la atención de los enfermos en los hospitales, mientras los Caballeros se batían bravamente con los Turcos por la conquista y
defensa de Tierra Santa . Al caer en 1291 San Juan de Acre, la última Plaza Fuerte de Palestina, el Gran Maestre, Juan de Villiers,
gravemente herido, se retiró con los suyos a la isla de Chipre. Desde allí, el Gran Maestre Fulco de Villaret atacó a Rodas y la
conquistó en 1310. Se les dió entonces el nombre de Caballeros de Rodas. El hecho de no haber abandonado nunca su carácter
de hospitalarios, conforme a su cuarto voto de consagrarse en favor de los pobres y en defensa de la fé, les atrajo mucha simpatía.
Los Teutónicos - Esta orden tuvo su origen durante la Tercera Cruzada. Un grupo de peregrinos de Bremen y Lubeck instalaron
un hospital en el campamento militar que sitiaba a San Juan de Acre para atender a los soldados y peregrinos enfermos de habla
alemana. En la esperanza de reconquistar pronto la ciudad de Jerusalén y de establecerse allí, se llamó "Hospital de Nuestra
Señora de los Alemanes de Jerusalén". En 1191, Clemente III aprobó aquella asociación sobre la base de las reglas de los
Sanjuanistas, a los que se parecían en gran manera. Llevaban capa blanca, como los templarios pero con una cruz negra. Desde
1198 se enfatizó su carácter militar, quedándole subordinado el hospitalario. Una de sus campañas militares más brillantes fue la
del asedio de Damieta en 1219. El Gran Maestre de la Orden Teutónica, Hermann de Salza, fue elevado por Federico II a la
dignidad de Príncipe del Imperio. Poco después el Gran Maestre, juzgando quizás, que Tierra Santa, tarde o temprano, estaba
destinada a ceder ante el Islam, lanzo su Orden a la conquista de la Prusia pagana, empresa que demandaría mas de cincuenta
años, y acabaría con la conversión de los Prusianos al Cristianismo. Esta Orden conocería un tristísimo fin. En 1525, su Gran
Maestre, Alberto de Branderburgo, se hizo Luterano, convirtiéndose el gran territorio por el gobernado en un Ducado laico y
protestante. Así terminó la historia de dicha Orden, si bien una rama católica perduró en Mergentheim y luego en Austria, y otra
protestante en los Países Bajos.

Man does not Live by bread alone but by the Will and Word of the Divine. After being baptized by the Holy Spirit (in far east
traditions Kundalini, Supramental Grace Light, Chi) Jesus was directed to fast and meditate in the desert for 40 days and 40 nights
in order to know Hunger (The Devil). Satan (Hunger) mocked Jesus and urged him to prove his Divinity by turning rocks into bread.
In reply He quoted the Old Testament, citing the case of the Israelites wandering in the desert for 40 years, humbled and purified by
Hunger "so that they might learn that man does not live by bread alone but by every Word that proceeds from the mouth of God".
What is Hunger? We commonly know it as a craving, desire or need for digestible food substances. We give Thanks once in a while
for the temporary and partial satisfaction that we experience upon eating. But Hunger for food and Hunger for possessions, power,
status, recognition, love or any perceived lack are all the exact same Hunger. The illusion that we are satisfied and fulfilled only by
the acquisition and consumption of externalities is Hunger. The Truth, hidden and obscured by Hunger, is that ONLY the Grace
Light of the Divine fulfills. And this truth encompasses not only the less tangible emotionally based wants, but the physical cravings
for digestible food substances as well. We are NOT sustained exclusively nor even primarily by the ingestion of food but by the Will
of the Divine. FOOD IS A SUPPLEMENT to the Word of God. Where our capacity to accept and channel Divine Will through our
bodies is lacking, food satisfies the deficit. We are now coming to Know that our power and sustenance can be entirely received
from Divine Source directly in a Life that is lived in full Surrender and alignment to Divine Will.

No solo de pan vive el hombre sino por la palabra y voluntad divina. Después de ser bautizado por el espíritu santo, a Jesús le fue
ordenado practicar el ayuno y meditar en el desierto por 40 días y 40 noches para conocer el hambre (satán), quien se burló de él e
y lo tentó a probar su divinidad convirtiendo rocas en pan. Como respuesta Jesús cito el antiguo testamento hablando del caso de
los israelitas que caminaron en el desierto por 40 años, doblegados y purificados por el hambre … “para que así aprendieran que
no solo de pan vive el hombre sino por la gracia de cada palabra que sale dela boca de dios”. ¿pero que es el hambre? Nosotros la
asociamos regularmente con la compulsión, el deseo intenso o la necesidad de sustancias alimenticias digeribles. Damos gracias
de vez en cuando por la temporal y parcial satisfacción que experimentamos al comer, pero el hambre de comida, por posesiones,
poder, estatus, reconocimiento, amor o cualquier falta percibida; son exactamente la misma hambre

How Plasma, Ether, Electric Universe Theory & Schumann Resonance Relate to Healing
Plasma - Before we begin a discussion about plasma, the fourth state of matter, it is important that we understand exactly what
plasma is. Usually when I start to talk to people about plasma, I have to say, “It’s not blood plasma, it’s the other plasma,” and then I
am usually met with a blank stare. The fact of the matter is that the majority of people have no idea what plasma is, which is a
curious fact when one considers that plasma comprises as much as 99.99 percent of our universe. The reason why most people do
not know about plasma is because they are not educated about it in school. Like me, most people are only taught about solids,
liquids, and gases. And while education has changed a bit in recent years, most NASA press releases—the way many of us seem
to learn about space phenomena—refer to the stuff that is technically plasma as “hot gas” most of the time. It’s a shame, really, that
more people don’t know about plasma, because plasma is actually quite a fascinating and even exciting concept. Here are a few
definitions:

• Plasma (physical chemistry): a fourth state of matter distinct from solids or liquids or gases and present in stars and fusion
reactors. A gas becomes a plasma when it is heated until the atoms lose all their electrons, leaving a highly electrified collection of
nuclei and free electrons. (WordNet Search)
• Plasma consists of a gas heated to sufficiently high temperatures such that the atoms ionize. The properties of the gas are
controlled by electromagnetic forces among constituent ions and electrons, which results in a different type of behavior. Plasma is
often considered the fourth state of matter (besides solids, liquids, and gases). Most of the matter in the universe is in the plasma
state. (Solar Physics Glossary)

So, then, plasma is a gas that conducts electrical current. It is different from regular gas in that the electrons have been separated
from their nuclei, leaving a “soup” of negative electrons and positive ions. Generally, it is referred to as the fourth state of matter,
although many sources point out that it should technically be called the first state of matter, as it is what the other three states arise
from (or technically, condense from). What are some examples of plasma? Well, our sun for one, as well as all the stars in the sky,
and all the space between those stars as well. Here on Earth, we see plasma in the form of lightning strikes, northern lights, and
daily in the form of fluorescent lightbulbs, neon signs, and plasma TVs. Who knew that plasma was so abundant and ubiquitous?
Another place we see plasma is in the fascinating pictures of nebulas that the Hubble telescope is sending back from space
(although, again, these are usually described as “hot gas”). Plasma is also used in business, industry, and health care. Most people
have heard of a plasma cutter or an arc welder. These technologies make use of hot plasma. Nonthermal or cold plasma is used as
a sterilizing agent in the food industry and also in the medical profession, as it has been discovered that it can sterilize hospital and
food production equipment quickly and inexpensively. It can also be used to speed wound healing. Plasma is actually quite a growth
industry at the moment, full of promising developments.

Properties of Plasma - Many researchers who have studied plasma have remarked on its “almost lifelike” qualities. Plasma
spontaneously forms filaments, cells, and sheaths. These helical, twisting filaments in space are called Birkeland currents, named
after Norwegian researcher Kristian Birkeland. He demonstrated that electric currents flow along filaments shaped by current-
induced magnetic fields. As plasma filaments come together by means of long-range attraction, they rotate around one another.
This creates a short-range repulsive magnetic force that holds the filaments apart so that they are insulated from one another and
thus maintain their identity. They rotate faster and faster as they draw together, forming a helical structure. These twisting helical
structures carry electrical currents over vast distances, connecting stars and interstellar space, somewhat like electrical wires.
Plasma forms cells of different voltages, temperatures, density, and chemical properties, and separates these cells by means of
what is called a double layer (DL) sheath. This double layer consists of a positively charged layer separated from a negative layer
by a small, electrically charged space. This sheath provides the cell with protection against its environment. For example, the sun’s
heliosphere is bounded by a DL. When a foreign object is inserted into plasma, the plasma will immediately form a sheath around it.
It is this tendency to -isolate any -intruders that may have led American chemist and physicist Irving Langmuir, who coined the
name plasma in 1927, to name it as such after blood plasma, which has the same tendency. This quality makes plasma difficult to
measure because it will isolate any recording devices.

Plasma is recognized as having three modes of operation:

1. Dark current mode, or low current. This mode does not usually emit light. Ionospheres (plasma sheaths) of planets and
interstellar space are examples.
2. Normal glow mode, a stronger electric current. In this mode the entire plasma glows. Neon signs, auroras, comet tails, and the
sun’s corona are examples.
3. Arc mode, a very strong current. This mode forms very bright twisting filaments. Electric welders, lightning, sparks, and the sun’s
photosphere are all examples. In general, the stronger the current, the brighter the plasma.

Plasma research has been conducted over the last century by a variety of researchers, and more recently important work has been
done on plasma by American physicist Anthony Peratt, who created some interesting computer simulations that show how electrical
Birkeland currents can give rise to galaxies. He, along with author-
scientists Wallace Thornhill and Donald Scott, are key players in
plasma research today. In fact, these scientists are proponents of a whole new way of looking at the cosmos, called the Electric
Universe theory, which states that electricity, not gravity, is the key defining force in the universe.

The Electric Universe Theory - From the smallest particle to the largest galactic formation, a web of electrical circuitry connects and
unifies all of nature, organizing galaxies, energizing stars, giving birth to planets and, on our own world, controlling weather and
animating biological organisms. There are no isolated islands in an electric universe. —David Talbott and Wal Thornhill,

Thunderbolts of the Gods The most profound concept I have ever come across in any of the research I have done in my entire life
is the emerging cosmological theory called the Electric Universe (EU) theory, which is an outgrowth of plasma cosmology. Put
simply, EU says that electricity, not gravity, is the dominant force in space. Up until this point, astrophysicists insisted that charge
separation cannot happen in space, and they therefore dismissed the electric force as an impossibility. However, information sent to
us by space probes and the Hubble and other telescopes has demonstrated the truth of this charge separation. It would now seem
there can no longer be any denial of electricity as a force—as perhaps the defining force—in space. EU is a radical departure from
our current cosmological model. In EU, there is no need for black holes, dark energy, dark matter, or other strange things we cannot
see. What many people do not realize about these phenomena is that they are all mathematical constructs, not observed realities.
These imagined entities have been conjured up to explain how the insufficient gravity in galaxies can account for them hanging
together. But according to EU, all observable phenomena in space can be easily described and predicted because plasma is
scalable—meaning the plasma created in a lab behaves in much the same way as the plasma we see in space. Gravity has been
perceived as the dominant force in the universe for over 300 years; the entire scientific revolution was built on this cosmology. It
should come as no surprise that the academic world is not taking too kindly to these revelations about EU, and that the theory is
shunned in many academic circles. Despite academia’s skepticism, it has been said that EU is a revelation on par with the work of
Copernicus and Galileo or the quantum physicists at the early part of the last century. Just as Bohm, Bohr, Einstein, and others
created a revolution in thinking by redefining our perception of the micro—the quantum world—Peratt, Thornhill, and Scott are
creating a revolution in thinking by redefining our perception of the macro, the universe. It is paradigm shattering in a very powerful
way because it is a retelling of our cosmological story. The cosmological story is the most important story in a culture. It forms the
backdrop that every other story is written against. All human dramas play out on a stage, with the cosmos as the overarching,
defining pattern. Our current cosmology goes something like this: 13.7 billion Earth years ago, there was a point that was “infinitely
hot and infinitely dense,” which exploded and has been expanding ever since, which it will keep doing until, according to the second
law of thermodynamics, it will all spread out, dissipate, and end. Galaxies are held together by gravity, black holes in the middle that
“devour” light, and mysterious dark energy pushing them together from the outside. Everything else is mysterious dark matter. In
this dark and mysterious universe, life is random, chaotic, and pointless. Everything is machinelike and separate from everything
else. You and I really can’t understand any of it because our cosmologists define most of what is going on in space—in terms of
how old it is and how fast it is expanding—with complex mathematical formulas. Many reports from NASA speak of scientists being
puzzled or confused about the phenomena they are witnessing in space. It’s a hostile, dangerous, and confusing territory. But that
isn’t how EU sees it at all. In EU everything hangs together; everything makes sense. The Electric Universe theory both explains
and consistently predicts space phenomenon based on the predictable behavior of electromagnetic plasma. One of the things I say
in my lectures is that the best self-help book I ever read isn’t even a self-help book: it’s THE ELECTRIC SKY, by Donald Scott,
which clearly and concisely lays out EU theory in such a way that anyone can understand it. Here was what I had been looking for
all along without even realizing it—a cosmology of connectivity, of light, instead of separation and darkness. I suddenly saw, and
felt, how I was connected to the rest of the universe, and this revelation of connection was nothing short of a love affair. My husband
was right—I had fallen in love with plasma. Our sun, instead of being an isolated thermonuclear furnace of hydrogen gas fusing into
helium gas (a self-sufficient individual, burning itself out), is an electric dynamo, powered by galactic Birkeland currents and
connected through this web of electricity to every other electrically powered star in the universe. This explains why stars and
galaxies form in strings, along these massive intergalactic power wires, not so very different from Christmas lights on a string. It is
the large-scale filamentary structure predicted in the 1960s by Hannes Alfvén, Swedish electrical engineer, plasma physicist, and
recipient of the 1970 Nobel Prize in physics, which was verified by galactic observation since the ’80s. It is also an image that is
often shown next to artists’ renditions of the neural web of circuitry of our brains. The solar wind, which really isn’t a wind at all but
an electrical current, delivers a flow of electrical energy to Earth, which is also an electrically charged body. Earth has a plasma DL
sheath that serves as a buffer for this flow of electromagnetic energy; this is called the magnetosphere. When the electric discharge
from the sun is high, we see the auroras form at the poles. The electricity discharges its buildup in lightning strikes and also travels
across and under the surface of the Earth and the oceans in telluric currents. These natural earth-bound electrical currents have
been mapped, and these maps are owned and used by oil and gas companies, allegedly to find deposits. Apparently they were also
used to power the early telegraph system in the United States. When I first learned about telluric currents, I couldn’t help but wonder
if they were the same thing as dragon lines, the filamentary Earth currents of chi described in Chinese Feng Shui, or the ley lines of
Neolithic Europe—which, as I understand are “tamed” dragon lines, straightened and utilized by our ancestors in much the same
way we may straighten a river and turn it into a canal—same phenomenon, -different name. I started to wonder if diffuse plasma
and chi were the same thing, and if the human energy field was just a sort of a plasma bubble with a double layer sheath at the
outer boundary.

Bioplasma - Following this line of inquiry, I was able to come across other information that likened the human energy field to
plasma, calling it bioplasma, or the fifth state of matter. The following paragraph appears in numerous sites on the Internet (but I
was unable to find any references to the original work of Inyushin): Since the 1950s, Dr. Victor Inyushin at Kazakh University in
Russia has also done extensive research in HEF (Human Energy Field). He suggests the existence of a bioplasmic energy field
composed of ions, free protons, and free electrons. He suggests that the bioplasmic energy field is a fifth state of matter. (The four
states are solids, liquids, gases, and plasma.) Inyushin’s work shows that the bioplasmic particles are constantly renewed by
chemical processes in the cells and are in constant motion. There is a balance of positive and negative particles within the
bioplasma that is relatively stable. A severe shift in this balance causes a change in the health of the patients or organism. Barbara
Brennan, a former NASA physicist and a world-renowned energy healer, also refers to the human energy field as a bioplasma; she
sees physical trauma as “frozen” or stuck energy within this bioplasmic medium. Ampère’s circuital law states that wherever there is
an electric current, there is a magnetic field. According to research by Rollin McCraty, et. al.: Compared to the electromagnetic field
produced by the brain, the electoral component of the heart’s field is about 60 times greater in amplitude, and permeates every cell
in the body. The magnetic component is approximately 5000 times stronger than the brain’s field and can be detected several feet
away from the body with sensitive magnetometers. The SQUID, or superconducting quantum interference device, is an extremely
sensitive magnetometer capable of measuring the biomagnetic field produced by a single heartbeat, muscle twitch, or pattern of
neural activity in the brain. This instrument is now being used at universities and medical research centers around the world in order
to better understand the role of the biomagnetic fields in the diagnosis and treatment of medical conditions.

Here is what the HeartMath Institute has to say about the electromagnetic field of the heart: The electrical energy produced by the
heart radiates outside the body into space. The heart’s field is not static. It changes, depending on what we are feeling. For
example, when we are feeling emotions like anger or frustration, the frequencies in the field become chaotic and disordered. On the
other hand when we are experiencing emotions like compassion, care, appreciation or love, the frequencies in the field become
more ordered and coherent. In a sense, through the electromagnetic field created by the heart, we are literally broadcasting our
emotions like radio waves. Photography PrintsThis notion is slightly different from the one generally associated with the human
energy field, which shows bodies of different densities and properties, as seen in figure 5.2 (on page 92). The rings are referred to
as koshas, or sheaths, again stemming from the Vedic tradition. Both perspectives describe the field as toroidal (doughnut-shaped).
The torus (or toroid) is a shape that repeats throughout nature as in the toroidal nature of the plasmaspheres of Earth, the sun, and
a photon. When one considers that the human body carries an electrical charge and also has a north and south pole, the larger
toroidal -representation in figure 5.3 (page 92) seems plausible. Remember that plasma is described as forming twisting filaments,
cells, and sheaths. The DL sheaths are formed at the outer boundaries of the plasma field and have a higher electrical charge than
the ambient plasma within the boundary defined by the sheath. It would make sense that since the human body also has an
electromagnetic charge, it would repeat this -pattern, since life expresses itself in fractals—in short, “as above so below.” When
plasma in arc mode (like lightning or a plasma welder) travels across distances in space, it forms the twisting Birkeland currents
mentioned earlier, which spiral around one another. This vortex or spiraling action expresses itself in life-forms on many different
levels; it therefore makes sense that it is also present in the subtle body. Vedic literature describes the two serpentine channels that
begin at the base of the spine and spiral up to the crown of the head, creating chakras, or vortexes of energy, at each crossing
point. These images bring to mind two other common images, the caduceus (figure 5.4) and the DNA double helix (figure 5.5). The
caduceus is an esoteric symbol that various texts describe as originating in ancient Egypt. It features two snakes, representing the
two etheric channels that comprise kundalini energy running up through the body, connecting the lower physical and the upper
spiritual realms of the body. The Ida is the left, female channel, or yin energy, and the Pingala is the right, male channel, or yang
energy. The central channel or staff is the shushumna, which runs along the -spinal column. When the mind is quiet, the
shushumna becomes active, uniting the inner self with the cosmos. The wings of the caduceus represent the air element associated
with the upper, spiritual self, the exploration of which comes with the balance of the channels, and the staff itself is made of metal,
which represents the element of earth. Other sources describe the caduceus as arising from later Greek mythology and associated
with the god Hermes (or Mercury, as rendered by the Romans). In this form the caduceus has been recognized as a symbol of the
marketplace. Thus it would seem that the Greeks and Romans took an esoteric image that originally expressed the primal aspects
of the masculine and feminine energies as related to the upper spiritual energies and applied it to commerce, as opposed to one’s
inner elemental experience. The idea of the marketplace taking the place of the cosmos and our own inner riches is true particularly
in our modern world. Perhaps ironically, this esoteric symbol has been adopted by our mainstream Western medical system and
appears as a logo for many health care practitioners and companies, including the American Medical Association. We have been
conditioned to think of ourselves as chemical and mechanical beings, but we are also extremely electrical. Most people think of the
nervous system when they think of electricity in the body, but it has been determined that collagen, the connective tissue that is
present everywhere in our bodies, is also a conductor, that our blood carries a charge, that our bones conduct electricity, that our
heart is an electrically driven oscillator, and that our brain waves are electrical frequencies.

The Schumann Resonance - Curiously, human brain waves can function in the same wavelength as a frequency that is generated
in the cavity between Earth and its ionosphere by all the lightning strikes going on all over the world in any given moment, which
averages approximately two hundred storms producing fifty strikes per second. This frequency, a 7.83-Hz standing wave and its
higher harmonics, which are present as a continual electromagnetic pulse in our environment, is called the Schumann resonance. It
is sometimes referred to as the “Earth’s heartbeat.” This ambient frequency is received by our pineal gland, which is composed of
about 30 percent magnetite, a type of iron oxide with natural magnetic properties, and appears to be important for governing a
variety of functions, including melatonin production and the regulation of the endocrine (hormonal) system. When astronauts first
started going up into space outside of Earth’s atmosphere, they reported getting “space sickness” from pineal malfunctioning, which
seemed to be a consequence of not being exposed to this continual background governing frequency. When Schumann resonance
generators were placed aboard spacecraft, this issue became mitigated. Interestingly 7.83 Hz is also a brainwave frequency
associated with meditative and creative states and is often recorded in shamans and healers. Brainwave states are generally
divided up into four categories: delta (0–4 Hz), associated with deep sleep, renewal, and healing; theta (4–7 Hz), associated with
insight, intuition, and awareness; alpha (7–13 Hz) associated with calm, relaxed alertness; and beta (13–40 Hz), associated with
nervousness, irritability, anger, and the like. The brainwave activity of most modern humans is in the beta range. It would appear
that when our brainwaves are in sync with the Schumann resonance (in the alpha state) we are in an optimum frame of mind. We
tend to think of lightning as a cloud-to-ground phenomenon, however, it has been discovered that it is actually an ionosphere-to-
ground phenomenon. Various electrical phenomenon, called elves, jets, and sprites, have been observed and photographed
between the tops of clouds and the upper atmosphere while lightning strikes are happening below cloud level. Since the ionosphere
is in constant electrical contact with the sun through the solar wind, and the sun is in constant electrical contact with the rest of
space through the connective Birkeland currents, we are, through the electrical activity in our own brains and bodies, literally
resonating with the rest of the electrical universe, especially when we are tuned into the 7- to 8-Hz wavelength. This is also the
frequency that has been measured coming out of the hands of chi gong healers when doing healing sessions—meaning they are
truly channeling universal electromagnetic energy.

Creating a New Cosmology - We are electromagnetic beings, bathed in an electromagnetically connected reality—all really is One
in this very simple way—but we have been disconnected from this awareness and trapped in a paradigm that only teaches us about
solids, liquids, and gases. In this old model we live in Newton’s gravity-driven, billiard-ball universe, spinning meaninglessly through
a cold and disconnected vacuum of space. Despite the comment by 1918 Nobel Prize–winner Max Planck, that “we have now
discovered that there is no such thing as matter, it is all just different rates of vibration designed by an unseen intelligence,” we still
live as though we are in the world of the discrete, disconnected particle, the self-sufficient individual, in which mind and body, man
and nature are separate. I propose that the reason why the current reigning paradigm hasn’t really shifted out of this illusion of
separation is because we have only part of the story—the micro part. Quantum theory tells us that everything is connected at the
scale of the very small. But Electric Universe theory describes a vibrating, connected macro, and in doing so it changes the
cosmological story of the last 300 years. When our cosmology changes, everything else changes, because everything refers back
to cosmology. People yearn for a sense of connection. This sense of connection, of an underlying current of interrelationship is
essentially what we know as spirituality, Oneness. The cosmology of the scientific revolution has been one of separation, of
spiritlessness. EU shows us how we are all connected via plasma. But there is yet another, deeper connecting layer: aether.

Aether - According to the general theory of relativity space is endowed with physical qualities; in this sense, therefore, there exists
an aether. According to the general theory of relativity, space without aether is unthinkable. —Albert Einstein

Let’s look at the dictionary definition of the word aether:

1. Any of a class of organic compounds in which two hydrocarbon groups are linked by an oxygen atom
2. A volatile, highly flammable liquid, C2H5OC2H5, derived from the distillation of ethyl alcohol with sulfuric acid and used as a
reagent and solvent. It was formerly used as an anesthetic. Also called diethyl ether, ethyl ether
3. The regions of space beyond Earth’s atmosphere; the heavens
4. The element believed in ancient and medieval civilizations to fill all space above the sphere of the moon and to compose the
stars and planets
5. Physics: An all-pervading, infinitely elastic, massless medium formerly postulated as the medium of propagation of
electromagnetic waves

So, we are not talking about definitions 1 and 2, but rather what is alluded to in definitions 3 through 5. Note that in definition 5, this
all-pervading, infinitely elastic, massless medium was formerly postulated as being the medium of propagation of electromagnetic
waves. So, from this we may deduce that aether is an all-pervasive medium that is everywhere in the universe all at once. Aether
was once understood as being the medium through which starlight propagated, but this meaning was removed from science in the
early 1900s and replaced with the vacuum theory, allegedly in support of Einstein’s theory of relativity. The textbook explanation for
why the concept of aether was removed from science refers to an experiment conducted in the late 1800s called the Michaelson-
Morley experiment, whose null outcome allegedly demonstrated that aether, as it had previously been conceived, did not really
exist. The story about the people and the experiments concerning this subject is a fascinating one, but I won’t go into it in detail
here. Suffice to say that the general supposition, when it comes to Einstein and aether, was that he at first believed it did not exist,
but by 1922 had come to the opposite conclusion that there had to be an aetheric medium in space. Despite the fact that Einstein
recanted his earlier assertion that aether did not exist, by then the concept had fallen out of fashion, and it has remained in disfavor
up through our present time. But the need of late to have some kind of explanation for this subtle, all-pervasive energetic field has
reasserted itself, and so over the last century this medium has been reintroduced with a variety of new names: the zero-point field,
the source field, the quantum potential, the field, even the Higgs field, whose definition, “an invisible energy field that exists
throughout the universe,” sounds an awful lot like the definition of aether.

The Self-aware Universe - Now, if you think back to my earlier description of subtle energy in the first chapter, you will see that it
appears that when we talk about aether, we are talking about the same thing. But wasn’t I just wondering a few pages back whether
plasma and chi are the same thing? Now am I suggesting that aether and chi are the same thing? Good question—I’ll do my best to
explain it as I have come to understand it. Because of the structure of our language, we tend to think of stuff in our environment as
“things,” but if you think back to what Max Planck said about everything being vibrations of different frequencies, “things” are really
more like processes. Notably, the Hopi and other languages contain no nouns, but rather refer to everything as if it were a process
that is happening instead of a thing that is. Matter and energy in our environment are constantly transforming. Frequency states shift
along a continuum, a spectrum in which there are no real divisions. Sunlight gets absorbed by trees and they become bigger trees;
water evaporates and becomes water vapor; stars explode and become star dust. There are different key thresholds where one
state of matter becomes another—for example, the liquid of water becoming the solid of ice—but ultimately there is simply a single
spectrum of electromagnetic frequencies that vary, from the very high and fast to the very low and slow. In the continuum of all of
matter, we have aether, the highest and finest and most basic state of matter, which spins itself through torsion spirals into
concentrations called plasma. This in turn condenses into gases, liquids, and solids, ultimately forming the stuff we see around us. It
would appear that subtle energy exists in a great number of degrees of density or texture, ranging from very subtle to more coarse
or tangible. From what I can tell, everything from the finest aether to a diffuse plasma can be called subtle energy. And all of it is
potentially consciousness. Here is why: To hang together as a cohesive unit, which it is, the universe must have some degree of
self-awareness—it must be conscious of itself, and it must be instantaneously conscious, with no lag time in the signaling, meaning
the information transfer in this medium must be faster than the speed of light. And this medium, the aetheric medium that exists
everywhere throughout the universe, serves as the medium through which the universe is self-aware. This concept of the self-aware
universe can also be seen in the concept we call gravity—all of the universe must have instantaneous awareness of itself
everywhere at once, or else how could it remain in relationship with the degree of order that it has? I was thinking one morning
about how universal self-awareness is a property of aether, which is present everywhere all at once, and had read that gravity was
also described as having these same traits, and I suddenly wondered how gravity and aether were related. I did an Internet search
of “gravity is a property of aether” and found that there are people who espouse the theory that rather than being a force that pulls
us down, gravity is in fact a force that pushes us down: it is the force of the all-pervasive yet subtle aetheric field that is pushing from
all around into the center of the Earth. This made me think about neutrinos and how they are described as massless high-frequency
particles that very weakly interact with matter, and how they are pushing in on the surface of Earth from all directions. Could what
science calls neutrinos be the same thing as aether, I wondered? So I searched that, too. And I found that Wal Thornhill, one of the
leading thinkers in the Electric Universe theory, says exactly that. Now remember, I am not saying that any of this is definitely so.
I’m not an expert; I’m a student, a person asking questions. I’m simply sharing with you some of the answers I have come up with
and showing you how they could fit together. I absolutely encourage you to do your own investigation and form your own opinions
about the material I am presenting here. Okay, let’s keep looking at the properties ascribed to aether, because this is important.
Remember that there are many different names for this particular phenomenon, but since aether was the original name, it is the one
I choose to use. Aether is described as operating holographically, meaning the whole is present in every part. It is aether’s
holographic nature that allows for instantaneous communication without regard for time or distance—meaning that aether is the
medium of consciousness, the carrier wave of it, so to speak. As the nonlocal interconnective medium that unifies us all in real time,
aether is the missing link in so-called paranormal phenomena such as remote viewing, distance healing, synchronicities (i.e.,
meaningful coincidences), and telepathy. According to physicist Paul LaViolette, author of SECRETS OF ANTI-GRAVITY
PROPULSION, the hidden “aether physics” explains how UFOs are able to navigate in the rapid zig-zag and up-and-down fashion
that has routinely been witnessed. LaViolette, who has done extensive research into these subjects, asserts that the awareness of
aether has been intentionally suppressed for a number of reasons, national security being one of these. The scientist Nikola Tesla
(1856–1943), who invented AC power and many other things besides, figured out a way to harness and transmit the energy of the
aether. We do not learn about Tesla and all his amazing contributions to science in our educational system. It is not “conspiracy
theory” to take note of this, but rather an awareness of simple economics: Tesla wanted to transmit free energy for everyone, and
his financier, seeing the implications of this, pulled the plug on his advanced technologies. He was then subsequently written out of
our official history, while aether was written out of official science. Aether is also described as moving in torsions or spirals, and as
such it is called the torsion field, or torsion waves. We see how nature repeatedly coalesces in these spiral patterns; from galaxies
to snail shells to weather patterns, the proportions of the Phi spiral repeat on every level of creation. The Phi spiral and
corresponding Golden Mean rectangle (1:1.618) are proportions that repeat themselves fractally throughout nature (see figure 5.6,
the golden ratio). The spiral is not the only pattern characteristic of aether. The five Platonic solids (see figure 5.7) are also part of
the underlying geometry of creation that arises in aether. These solids were first described by Plato as being the only forms that fit
perfectly within a sphere, -connected by identically shaped surfaces, edge lengths, and angles—an identical view in all directions.
The Greeks taught that these five solids were the core patterns of physical creation. Four of the solids were seen as the archetypal
patterns behind the four elements—earth, air, fire, and water, what we know as the four states of matter. The fifth was held to be the
pattern behind the life force itself—the Greeks’ aether. This fifth solid, the dodecahedron, was in fact kept a closely guarded secret
in the Greek school of Pythagoras, and even Plato spoke little of it. They feared that this pattern could cause tremendous
destruction if misused. (Looking at that shape makes me think of the Pentagon!) These patterns, like the spiral, also appear
throughout nature, especially at the atomic level in chemistry. And the shape that is not shown, the sphere within which all of these
forms can nest, is yet another one of the fundamental forms of aether. When one combines a sphere with a spiral, one gets the
torus, another fundamental pattern within aether. In the esoteric tradition it is said that the human body has an aetheric template, a
subtle-energy matrix in vortex/torus form that channels and stabilizes the aetheric energies, making them more dense and charged,
and eventually responsible for creating the physical body. The aetheric template comes first, followed by the body. It is the human
mind that creates the shape or structure of the torus for the length of a lifetime. When the mind withdraws at death, the toroidal
construct, the underlying pattern that is giving rise to order, ceases to exist, and the physical body falls apart. Although the torus
shape of the aura has a boundary—the double-layer sheath of plasma cosmology—it sits in the universal aetheric field, which is
unlimited, or infinite. This is also the reason why we are all connected, at all times, with everything else in the universe. So if we
insert aether and plasma into our cosmological framework, we suddenly have a dimension beyond the material world that we are
accustomed to. The presence of aether, with its holographic, everywhere-at-onceness, is a simple and plausible explanation for
things like telepathy, distance healing, distance viewing, and all the other paranormal practices that are dismissed as impossible by
the aetherless conventional paradigm (no need to call it what Einstein termed “spooky action at a distance”). Our consciousness,
being ultimately nonlocal and part of this holographic soup, is free to wander at will, to connect instantaneously to other minds, even
at great distances. Especially for people whose brainwaves are in the Schumann range, synchronistic events become the norm, as
these persons allow themselves to be guided by Thoreau’s subtle magnetism. With regard to healing, in aetheric or spiritually based
healing practices, one can directly alter this aetheric body and create physical changes in the physical body. That is because if one
can manipulate the aether and the plasma, one can manipulate the physical. The so-called biofield therapies work precisely on this
premise, as we shall soon discover. Excerpted from TUNING THE HUMAN BIOFIELD by Eileen Day McKusick.
What we discovered was:

1- The Chakra system is an imposed system that is NOT our natural state. It is a system to compartmentalize our energy for easy
access to outsiders and energy vampires. This system has been in place for several Millennia and no one seems to question it, they
have just (as I previously did) accepted it…(especially in the New Age Community.)

2- The chakras or "Cones" were placed there so that specific energies could be accessed. This easy access is ideal to control and
manipulate our energy fields and minds. They were put there by ET's that view us as their personal energy source and property.

3- Our original state was to have energy that emits from our "Core" or Sun/Star in the Chest / Solar-Plexus area. Each individual has
a slightly different wiring system that runs their energy which is custom designed to them. Personally, I have a triple helix energy
system that runs up and down the center of my body and get's its source from the "Star/Sun" in the center. This triple helix has all
the colors and more. When I need a certain energy, instead of accessing one isolated "chakra" energy like the heart or throat, it
accesses them all and puts the appropriate balance of energies into what ever is needed (ie throat or voice energy) to handle what
is required. This is a much more efficient and synergistic approach to accessing and moving energy. I have only been researching
this for 2 months but I have not seen anyone else that had this triple helix so it might be unique to me. Most of the other FW-Indigo
Knights that I have scanned have the intense Sun/Star light in their core and it emanates slightly differently than everyone else, like
a snow flake. Sometimes the energy can pulse, sometimes it can spiral, sometimes it blasts, it just depends on what is needed or
what is requested of it.

NOTE! -The Core/Heart-Sun/Star is the Center of a Triad…it is the Authentic Trinity! It has 2 counterparts: The Head =
Brain/Pineal/Hypothalamus at one end, and The Loins = Creative Power Energy Centers on the other end. These three control
centers, if working in harmony, without interference, can direct you into Super Consciousness! ...And THIS my friend, is a huge
threat to the tyrannical overlords control program here in Dysfunction-Junction!

4- Our Core or Sun/Star is where our Higher Selves reside…and therefore the statement "God is inside of us, God is within" is
literally true. Searching for a God outside of yourself will cause serious challenges. For instance; when you go to a new age
meditation class, one of the first things they teach you is to "open your crown and bring the white or golden light down through your
body, lighting up each chakra, and then ground into the earth. This may feel good momentarily, but think about what it is that you
just did. If your "God" is inside of you, and you bring an "outside energy source" into your body and bypass your own "God" and
ignore what was there to begin with……… continue to ignore it and bring in outside energy sources to take its place, what is it going
to do? Well, remember the old "use it or lose it" philosophy? Yes, the "Core or God Sun/Star" will start to go dormant and just sit
there until you decide to take your will back and use it again. Which energy would you rather be operating from and have command
of, your own personal custom designed Authentic Source …or bring in some nebulous energy that could be infiltrated and run that
through your body and all your electromagnetic systems? I checked everyone in the group for what percentage they were using this
system. Most of the group used their chakras very little, only about 2-5% of the time. When I came to one of the Indigos who is a
yoga instructor and had an African Shamanist approach to healing, I checked his chakras and found that they were totally shut
down. When I told him this he said he was glad that I said that because he knew he did NOT use them and he had his own internal
system of energy he ran. He said this validated to him that my scanning was accurate. After we got more clarity on this covert
operation that had been duping us for centuries, we decided to take our power back and do something that felt right …..but was
extremely radical. We all got into a "Star Meditation formation" (i.e. an Aulmauracite rock between the first and second toe on each
foot, one in each hand and one at the top of the head as we spread our arms and legs out so we looked like the Di Vinci Man. I put
on a meditation CD by Constance Demby – "Novus Magnificat, Through the Stargate," and cranked the volume up. Each one of us
got in our Kryahgenetics egg for added stability and protection and then, in our own way, shut down our chakra systems and
eliminated the chakras, (I know, don't gasp, read on….) and amp-up the Sun/Star at our core. When I did my own cone removal,
this is what happened: I held my rocks, took a deep breath and got into the music. Then I heard a voice say, "Well, you finally
figured it out, you have finally COME HOME!" I was kind of embarrassed that it took me so long to "Get It" and it made me laugh
inside because it now seemed like such a "No Brainer!" I first shut my chakras down (front and back) and then put a dissolver on all
the chakra cones including the ones on all my outer bodies and watched them fade into nothingness. Then I put an amplifier on my
Sun/Star and felt it get bigger and bigger and emanate brighter and brighter inside. I felt so safe, so secure, so powerful and so "self
contained" it was one of the most exhilarating and liberating experiences I have ever had!
"How many bodies do I have?" This is a question one of my clients asked me and it kind of took me off guard. Then he said, “…You
know, like the physical body, spiritual body, astral body, etc.” That made a lot of sense to me so I scanned him and came up with
just -2- bodies, the physical and spiritual body, as he had inadvertently gotten rid of his astral body when he removed his chakras…
(Don’t gasp, I will explain later about the astral body.) Then he asked, “Well, what about my mental and emotional body, what
happened to them??? I was like, “Sheeesh, I don’t know, I will have to ask Hal and get back to you on that one.”

There are actually only 2 bodies we are supposed to have that are our natural authentic state. The Physical Body & The Spiritual
Body. (NOTE: The Etheric Body is just another name for the Spiritual Body or “Soul” - Genetic imprints/data and past
lives/existences are all collected, encoded and imbedded in the spirit body or soul. - Here are the 3 aspects that make up the Spirit
Body/Soul.)

*The Mental/Intellectual Aspect- Resides/operates from the head where the Brain/Mind Star is on this picture. The mental aspect
interfaces with all the brain/mind functions and helps integrate left and right brain so that neither is dominant and they work in
synergism with each other. You can see how this is supported when you look at the picture at the bottom and understand how the
spiritual body moves the energy from left to right & right to left as it rotates.

*The Emotional/Intuitive Aspect- is in the middle where the Heart/Core Star or “soul” resides. This aspect if functioning properly is
the master “center” and is bigger than the other two. Its job is to manage not just itself, the Heart/Soul and its Emotions/Intuition, but
it has the innate intelligence /wisdom to initiate and continue the interfacing of all three aspects and keep them in good working
order.

*The Creative/Sexual Aspect - is at the bottom where the Loin/Star sits. This aspect is extremely important, way more than the
obvious, “sexuality” …as without creative energy, we would wither and become extinct, both as a body and a species. Creativity is
how we get ourselves out of messes and is the catalyst for growth and evolution. The energy from this Loin Star-creative aspect is
what can help us rebuild after devastation both inside and outside the body. It is also what ignites passion and when combined with
the energies of the Core Star-emotional/intuitive center/aspect and the head-mental aspect there are no limits to what we can
create, re-create and regenerate!

How the System Works

What we have here in this picture, is a physical body with its spiritual Soul trio or trinity that is ultimately supposed to work together
in harmony, and if/when it does, and if/when it travels through the system/tracks fast enough, it can elevate you and literally blast
you into “super consciousness!”

When this system is turned on, it either goes clockwise or counter clockwise …which is mostly found in Indigos. It also has the
ability if necessary, for the systems energy/direction to “switch” and go the other direction. The whole system freezes for a
millisecond and reverses direction without a glitch…somehow bypassing the law of inertia (the law that says things keep moving
forward even if the driving force has stopped…like when you stop quickly at a stop light and your head keeps moving forward.) This
has to do with magnetics and quantum physics …and somehow it is important to be able to reverse in this manner.

When this Infinity Star System is turned on, the energy in the figure -8- is like a racetrack and needs to travel at a minimum of 3
cycles per second to stay alive…(If you go less than 1.5 cycles per second you will expire, as there will not be enough
electromagnetic energy to hold the body and soul together.) Each cycle creates a vibration that permeates the entire physical and
energetic system…the more cycles per second, the higher the vibration

NOTE: With each new level you jump to, you are breaking an M-field and it is easier to do it again. Also, the more cycles per second
you engage, the more “your authentic self” is revealed.

At 11 cycles per second- you become more sovereign and self-aware and new psychic abilities are triggered. More soul memories
awaken. You are more impermeable to outside interference. You start seeing the matrix for what it is, and have the ability to get
some immunities to the corruption virus here. You are more capable of helping to clean up and fix the distortions here. Your
capacity to put your benevolent intentions in place for the good of all life forms here and see it manifest, also increases.

AT 22 cycles per second- Everything you had at 11 CPS but amped up and doubled. Your ability to create and manipulate the
matrix is easier. You get more immunities to the Matrix Corruption Virus.
At 33 cycles per second- Everything you had at 22 CPS. It’s now easier to stay at 22 CPS and anchor there and not slip back into
11. Your X-men abilities are more evident and you have better command over your physical & spiritual body… and the matrix.

At 44 Cycles per second- Everything you had at 33 CPS. You have even more “super powers” and you’re nearly immune to the
Matrix Corruption Virus.

At 55 cycles per second- you are blasting into super consciousness and vibrate so fast you disappear At this point you have the
ability to navigate through dimensions at will and return, raising and lowering your body’s vibration from non-physical back into
physical or solid if you choose. From now on you will never be the same…you know too much to ever be the same. You have
shattered the matrix. You now have full recall of who you are, where you have been, and why you are here. You are in position of
absolute power and the dark lords running this planet cannot touch you anymore. You can do as YOU please, not as they tell you!

*Now, one more VERY important aspect of this new Infinity Star System… besides the energy rotating around the figure 8 track,
THE TRACK ALSO SPINS! It spins at the rate that energy goes around the track, minus 1. So if your energy is moving around the
track at 11 CPS, the spin is at 10 CPS. As you view and study this picture, your mind will see the blueprint and start to remember
and engage with it… you are taking your first step in activating your Super Consciousness!

NOTE: You probably won’t “feel” the energy moving around like this, but what you WILL feel is your Heart Core Star expanding,
your head clearing and your creativity increasing!

Problems With The System - As you might have guessed, there is a ton of interference with you activating this potential “Super
Conscious” system. (The good news is that you have gotten this far and there are others reading this who are making haste to
activate their Super Conscious System too…there is definitely strength in numbers!) A major trap is that outside forces try to get us
to use either the Loins-Creative/Sexual aspect or the head- Mental/Intellectual aspect and jump over/ bypass or even shut down the
Heart/Core-star! This is the BIG coup to attempt to dominate and be in charge or control the rest of the entire being, because
without the integration of the Heart/Core-Star energy, information gets out of balance and misinterpreted… and that’s where things
could really get messed up. This is how the Porn Vibration tries to take over and control you and can literally destroy your life and
those around you via addiction to distorted sex. Bypassing the CoreStar/Heart is also how the Altered Ego messes with your head
and lies about who/what you are and who/what others are. Another challenge is that there are a variety of implanted residue and
booby traps that the chakras and kundalini snake deliberately leave behind which need to be removed in order for this new system
to run at optimal. One of those booby traps is to make the loop at the CoreStar junction get entangled and stuck! Another one is that
they left barbs on this “track” kind of like a row of tacks that are used at road blocks so cars won’t pass by. Another is an energetic
glue like substance that gets the energy ‘stuck” and sluggish and makes it slow down and even get too hot! Keep your eyes open
for any slime they left behind and do a thorough clean out of residue when you remove the chakras and kundalini.

Implanted Interference: Insulators - Plates – Crust. As you have probably noticed, BIG problems arise when you shut down or slow
down your Heart/Core Star energy/emanations (or opportunistic exterior energies/forces attempt or succeed in doing this for/to you).
Pain from having love withdrawn which leaves you feeling sad and empty is a huge reason for a Heart/Corestar shut down. It seems
better to turn off your heart than feel the pain and suffering of a broken heart! We opt at this point to put “insulators” around our
hearts to keep us from “feeling” and to make sure we avoid love at all costs. Then there is the other type of shut down where it is
done for/to you. I have gone through some interesting experiences that were very confusing at the time, as I did NOT personally
shut down my own feelings, but never the less went through looong periods of time when I had “insulators” on and around me which
kept me from feeling the things I love… especially authentic/organic things like nature’s plants, animals and authentic humans. I felt
like I was in some kind of robot mode with no feeling and no emotion… just existing and drifting. It took some vigilant detective work
to locate these culprits and handle them so I could get myself cleared of these implanted insulators and back in order again
…connected and feeling. Also, a few years ago I felt really “disconnected” and it was very hard to think, or feel or have any amount
of creativity. I scanned myself and discovered insulator plates at my neck and across my waist! This made so much sense as that is
exactly what the blockages felt like. I of course removed them with the implant removal protocol on this website, put all the intel and
data from the experience into the Aulmauracite Rocks, and then went after the buggers that put them there and stuffed them down
the cosmic recycle bin! (Sometimes there are some useful things that come out the other end, but most of the time very little comes
out… this time there was nothing worth keeping so nothing came out the other end.)

Crust on the pineal gland? - There is much talk on the internet these days about the pineal gland…some people love it, some fear it,
and some hate it and think it should “go away!” I asked Hal and he told me that the pineal gland (as I suspected and previously felt)
is EXTREMELY important and that is why it is being hijacked! The pineal gland is the master that tells the pituitary gland what to do
(NOT the vestigial or useless organ that our scientists used to think it was) and also collaborates with the thalamus and
hypothalamus of the brain, which interfaces with the nervous system and controls all the involuntary actions and responses such as
breathing, heartbeat, blood pressure, thirst, etc. These are things in the body that are automated; we don’t have to think about them,
it just happens. Now, problems occur when these “auto responses” get improper commands such as constant fight or flight, or
raised blood pressure even after a trauma is over…which can lead to illness and even death. Much research has been done in this
area and the outcome is state of the art mind control! I have told my clients that if you can mess with or control someone’s
hypothalamus, you can control their behavior and subsequently all aspects of their life…and that is exactly what happens! I have
found countless “implants” in and around my hypothalamus and also many of my clients… especially “ET” implants. The good news
is we don’t have to put up with it and once these are removed the positive changes are drastic! When Hal said there is “crust on the
pineal” I thought he was talking about energetic crust, but upon doing some research I found that fluoride actually accumulates and
calcifies there…leaving a “crust” on the outside…just like Hal said! The implications here are enormous and you can guess that this
gland is a gateway to superconsciousness and also longevity, therefore the “Powers That Be/Were” certainly don’t want any of
THAT happening on Earth, we might get wise to them and stop letting them run our lives and our planet…and that would be the end
of them! Folks, our pineal gland is NOT a bad thing, but it has been hijacked and we need to do whatever it takes get it back! Read
up on nutritional things that help get rid of the fluoride residue/poisoning and start eating more organically. There are definite
reasons we are being poisoned and incapacitated with all the toxic chemicals in our food, water and air…BUT there are also things
we can do to override it! Don’t underestimate the power of your conscious determination and will! You can literally will the poisons in
your body to be neutralized or even will them out of existence! Really, you can!

What are things that make the CPS higher? - You probably figured out by now that the “lighter” and less uptight you are, the easier
it is for your Infinity Star System to increase in CPS. Sooooo one thing that will help is to constantly unplug from negative energies,
thoughts, and people …all the things that “bring you down” need to be disconnected. (I know, it ain’t easy …that was the plan...
make things so challenging here that it seems impossible to pull yourself out of the trap!) The good news is that you have some
tools here on this website to help you out…and you now have more puzzle pieces to make things easier to see the bigger picture!
Also the book Kryahgenetics has a chapter on unplugging that is really helpful.

You can increase CPS by:

~Engaging in intense self-love and respect, and/or love and respect for another being… which could be an animal, plant, elemental,
rock etc. and also for your spirit guides and guardians! NOTE: The Powers That Be/Were have immunities to love directed toward
them, BUT it really annoys and throws them off balance when we truly love someone or something… it’s like kryptonite to them!

~Expressing gratitude and appreciation to those who have assisted you, (especially your spirit guides and guardians) is a huge
bonus that can really put you in an altered state that is out of this world! NOTE: I was under heavy psychic attack a few weeks ago
and trying everything I could think of to get out from under its spell. I was talking to Ronnie my Ghost Buster partner on the phone
about it and all of a sudden this overwhelming love and gratitude for her came over me, and I started to cry and express it to her…
Instantly I felt the energies of the spell start to crack, crumble and dissipate! In a few minutes it was completely gone…what I
experienced was real… and it was “counter magick!”

~All the sensations of stability, inner strength, sovereignty, and personal power.

~Joy, excitement and wonderment for little things in life… it doesn’t have to take much if you’re on the lookout for it!

~Satisfaction and exhilaration from exposing corruption - Being a champion for those who are oppressed or injured (which includes
animals and nature) - A sense of fulfilling your purpose – The delight you feel when someone close to you starts to “get it’ and
wakes the heck up!

~And leaving the best for last, which is of course Laughter & Lite-ness… one of the most effective methods of elevating your CPS!

Recipe for getting to 55 CPS Super Consciousness :o)

*Ask your spirit guides and guardians to help you and cover for you if you do something unintentional/wrong.
*Remove chakras & Kundalini Snake + the plates at the neck and waist line with implant removal protocols (Aulmauracite Rock or
pendant would be of extreme assistance and value in this process!)
*Clear all residue from the chakras and kundalini snake…(make sure you get any eggs it might have laid!)
***Clear all methods of tying the junction of the -8- together and put spacers at the junction to keep it from touching or slowing down.
*Clear as many booby traps and back lash as you can think of.
*Clear crust and negative programming off of the pineal gland which has been hijacked. (Maybe also use a psychic jack hammer
and dissolver etc for this?
*Reinstall your original authentic blueprints, codes and power.
Once you are comfortable with this:
*Activate the Love and Purity from the core star.
*Activate the Clarity and Focus in the brain star.
*Activate the authentic Sueelah and Creativity from the loin star.
(Keep this up and take notes…it really helps to see your progress! :o)

So what about our Astral Body you might ask? - Well, we have been duped, and duped really bad (or good depending on who you
ask) on that one. Our astral bodies are actually “conjured bodies” that have been imposed on us and can trap us and force us into
going to the “Astral Plane” when we sleep. This realm is a vile, creepy, nasty place that you would only want to visit once for the
education of it and then get the T-shirt so you don’t have to do it again! It is the place that inspires horror movies. It is a place that
escalates anxiety, fear and dread energies into terror, which the astral beings (and others) cultivate and feast off of. It is a place
where you are more vulnerable and can be abducted easier. (Are you getting the picture here? It is easier to manipulate, use and
abuse us when we go there!). Now I can hear some of you saying… “But how do we go to other places in the cosmos when we
sleep if we don’t use our astral bodies, I thought that was how we traveled through other spirit worlds and dimensions?” (Don’t
worry, you’re not alone, I used to think that too until I started to connect the dots!). Your Spirit Body/Soul is a marvelous magickal
body that can do myriads of things we cannot even fathom here. It is your Spirit Body that does the traveling… (no need for a
cumbersome Ass-tral Body with a cord attached!) Your Spirit Body/Soul can actually bi-locate to many different places at once. It
can travel at thought speed. It can travel through time and dimensions in an instant! It usually keeps 50% of itself with the Earth
body while it goes out on its travels, BUT it can manage the body with only 5% …..how cool is that! When Amikah was alive and we
were working on some issues we were having, the subject of the astral body came up and all the creepy things associated with it
and I was getting from Hal it needed to go! So we did the implant removal protocol and got rid of the sucker! To our amazement, our
abductions decreased by 98%. For me personally, after getting rid of the astral body plus many of my other implants and forced
agreements, I have not been abducted in over 7 years! My dreams can be annoying and funky sometimes, but I never wake up from
horrible nightmares and being exhausted from being chased all night! Before I dumped my astral body, I used to wake up with all
sorts of strange anomalies. Once I had big gouges cut out of my hair… (you could see where someone had actually cut my
hair…and since my hair is quite thin, this was pretty traumatic!) Sometimes I would wake up with really sore muscles like I had been
lifting weights, and a couple of times I felt like I had bruises under my arm pits like I had been hanging on a doll stand for days.
(Amikah and I had that one at the same time…go figure.) One time all the elastic in my brand new underwear had vanished and my
underpants literally fell down when I stood up! Many, many times I found pin point punctures and scratches, on my face and arms,
some in geometrical patterns. I would also have bruises in the morning that weren’t there when I went to bed, and this one really
creeped me out …some were in the shape of finger prints on my inner thighs like someone was trying to pull them apart and I
resisted it!) Sometimes I woke up really sore, feeling like I had days of “marathon sex” (which I can definitely attest that nothing like
that was happening in my waking life at that time!) Speaking of sex…a couple of times after my first husband and I had sex, he had
long scratch marks on his “Manhood” and it freaked him out, as he said that from the looks of things, he thought I must have grown
sharp teeth inside of me! (I have to confess, I thought it was actually kind of funny as his libido was much higher than mine. He left
me alone for a while after that, till his desire and harmones overrode the trauma and fears of sharp teeth! I tried to have a good
attitude and sense of humor about it all and considered it a temporary useful side effect. ;o)

Once I dumped my dastardly "imposed" astral body using the implant removal protocols on this website almost all of this nonsense
came to an abrupt stop. Just a coincidence eah?

I used to get chased all night and wake up feeling really creepy for no reason…and that creepy, disturbing energy was really hard to
shake, sometimes it took days! Having the creeps in the morning rarely happens now and if it does I know how to clear it with the
Kryahgenetics Egg, Aulmauracite Rocks and lots of use of the “tea strainer” technique (found in the book Kryahgenetics). Ok, now
that I have spilled my guts and you have heard my “true confessions” I hope it will help you understand how all this works and now
you have information to help you remedy the situation like I did!

BREAKING FREE - First, Visualize yourself inside a Kryahgenetics Egg (or have the egg come and wrap around you. The egg can
be very large, with lots of room inside, or just big enough to go around your body. Make sure to have the DNA helix running down
the core of your body, with the star at the top and the diamond at the bottom. Take note as to what the egg looks and feels like
inside, as it may change the next time you use it.) Then take a few breaths and when you feel comfortable, tell the egg to "Turn
ON." It will immediately start sucking all the debris out of your body, and when it hits the shell it will be instantly neutralized. With
each breath, release debris and keep doing this till you feel calm and stable. (Your egg may pulse or even spin to pull the debris out
of you, but if it does, you will notice that you won’t get dizzy!) You can also use Kryahgenetics Eggs to protect pets, houses, cars,
airplanes, etc. I have put eggs around planes I was traveling in and stopped turbulence….on many, many occasions. (I know it kind
of freaked the pilot out because they forewarned the passengers of serious “bumps” and made the stewardesses stop their services
and sit town till it was over…..so I double egged the plane and it never happened!) The first time I realized you could put a
"Quarantine Egg" around something, happened several years ago when my Ghost Buster partner Ronnie and I, were invited to
check out the Amargosa Hotel and Opera House in California near Pahrump, Nevada. This hotel was out in the middle of the desert
at Death Valley Junction and the closest town was about a half hour to 45 minutes away. The buildings were extremely haunted
with a variety of very creepy energies and literally hundreds and hundreds of ghosts stuck there. I heard countless stories where
people had either seen or heard ghosts, or been the unlucky recipient of "ghost hostility." One reason for all the nasty, bizarre things
that were happening constantly was that a really foul, arrogant, tyrannical ghost was squatting there. He thoroughly enjoyed lording
over the other ghosts and making their life, or rather their "afterlife" a living Hell! This ghost was a jerk when he was living and was a
jerk after he died. It was on the full moon in May of 2002 ...the energies were perfect for what we were about to do. As I began to
open the portal across the street from the hotel, all sorts of strange things started to happen. A man appeared out of nowhere and
walked aggressively toward our circle, trying to interrupt us. When he was taken back to the hotel for a cup of coffee to keep him
from interfering, he just "disappeared." Finally I thought, "This is just going to keep up because the hostile ghost knows what we're
about to do and is not going to give up his turf without a fight!" So without thinking, I instinctively put a "Kryahgenetics Quarantine
Egg" around this intimidating, diabolic ghost, and said, "Night, Night" to him as I lowered my hand from the top to the bottom of the
egg, slowly anesthetizing him. His spirit was now in stasis, totally quarantined so he couldn't escape. As I was sedating him, he was
ranting and raving and cussing and then all of a sudden, a horrible stench manifested. It smelled like rotten egg gas or sulfur or
some such thing, and it hung around for several minutes and then dissipated when he was fully sedated. His quarantined slumber
gave us the freedom we needed to help the other trapped spirits out of the hotel and into the shimmering portal to go back home to
the Light. Many angels were there assisting us and it took about 20 minutes to get them all out. (Some of them even came back out
of the tunnel to say "thank you" ... which made our efforts totally rewarded!) Now it was time to figure out what to do with the
dictatorial ghost. I kept him in the quarantine egg, and slowly brought him out of his slumber.....and once again we could smell the
horrible stench as he woke up and realized he was still quarantined! He was really angry at being confined as he was used to being
the only one who called the shots and imprisoned others. When he saw the angels, he finally realized what was going on. This
made him furious and he was NOT going to go to the light through this portal, and no amount of angels attending the portal could
convince him otherwise. (He believed that since he was such a mean, cruel son of a gun, that the only place he would be going is to
Hell, so he was just going to park his spirit and STAY RIGHT THERE!) Well, we finally figured out what to do. Ronnie got the bright
idea to have one of the angels bring his Mother back through the tunnel and into the egg with him. This sobered him up and we
were stunned at his countenance transformation.....he started to soften up. His mother poured her heart out to him about how much
she loved him, and that he was NOT going to Hell. She said she knew he had a hard life because of how abusive his father was
when he was a child and expressed her sadness that she passed away and was not there to love and protect him. This melted his
steely cold heart. He trusted his mother enough now to take her hand. With this change of heart, the eggshell's energy fields
opened, and he walked out of the egg and down the tunnel with her. Recently I have discovered that there are implant varieties,
which are similar to parasites in the body. When you scan for parasites, (I use kinesiology and my medical intuitive skills for
scanning) these little buggers have their own consciousness, and will stop broadcasting their energy and go dormant to trick you
into thinking they're not there! Through much stealth and per-severance, I have devised a way to detect them. Since they cannot
change the past, you can go back in time and access accurate data on them. When I do this process, I ask my client's body if there
were parasites setting up housekeeping in the body yesterday or even 15 minutes ago. If there were indeed parasites there
yesterday or 15 minutes ago, it will show up in the scan. This way you can call their bluff and accurately identify their presence and
their activities. Some of these implants need special treatment and have to be dismantled in a certain order, similar to the protocol
of disarming a bomb. I find it mandatory to use Aurauralite/Aulmauracite to find the truth about the implant and how to disarm and
remove it, and the Kryahgenetics Egg to quarantine and hold it while I'm figuring out the proper removal procedure. Most of these
implants are designed to go off and debilitate you in some way when you start awakening to your spiritual path. Severe headaches
and extreme physical pain of some sort is very common. They can also disturb your thoughts and your emotions. (While I am
presently writing this, exposing their existence and designs, I am getting very dizzy, ill and foggy headed.....go figure!) When I give
Spiritual Contract readings, I find that for every contract you agreed to, you also have at least one (and usually several) implants
that are trying to keep you from fulfilling that contract. These can be negative thoughts about yourself that have been reinforced by
hurtful words, experiences and memories...(many of which are not even from this life time). This dynamic can make it really rough
because unless you have excellent past life recall, all you have are the debilitating emotions... which can make absolutely no sense.
This scenario is prime bait for Indigos getting massively sedated and medicated either by self or by "those in authority". Once an
implant has been identified and quarantined, you can use the Aurauralite/Aulmauracite rocks placed strategically to totally scramble
implants and render them useless. Then depending on what type of implant it is, you can either reprogram it, or eliminate it all
together. When this is done, there is usually an instant physical sensation, and a release/relief soon follows. Sometimes these little
buggers have other programs attached, like, satellites, repeaters, broadcasters, receivers, time-releases, pods, seeds, and new
things that may not have even been invented at the time of writing this article. When you rid yourself of implants, you also have to
go after all the attachments for 100% clearing. After this process is complete, it is extremely important to fill in the empty spaces of
what you just deleted from your body and energy fields with empowering elements/programs .....and especially a stronger
connection with your Higher Self/God-Goddess Self. I find that with Indigos, all they need is one or two "implant removal" sessions
and they can take the ball (or implant in this case) and run with it. They innately know what to do and how best to do it. I encourage
this! I tell my clients that if they get stuck though, not to hesitate to contact me for help. It is not a shameful thing to need a little help
once in a while.....in fact, some implants require someone else's assistance for full resolution.....and some implants are designed to
not allow the recipient to take them out themselves without serious repercussions. The up side to all of this "Implantation" is... that it
makes the host much tougher and wiser for the experience. You gain a more profound "intimate" understanding of these types of
sinister operations, and with this education, you activate wondrous aspects of your being that you didn't even remember existed.
Also, once these implants or programs have been removed, it seems that you are so happy to be free, that you face life with a new
zest and joy in small things many take for granted. In many instances, these implants are very much like getting your bio-computer
hacked and reprogrammed by some outside source. Now you have the education and resources to bypass any encrypted hacker
codes and gain access back to your own bio-computer and take command. I have personally set booby traps for any future hackers
that think they can sneak in and have access to my control panel! When you have discovered an implant, usually in the form of a
fear, negative condescending thought, or bold outright threat, evaluate where you feel it is coming from. Put yourself in an egg and
then place a rock on both sides of the body that you think is the center of this. (If you can't figure it out, then place a rock on your
head and sit on the other one.) Then give the rocks the command to help you "identify and quarantine this implant." Wait for it to do
this.....and then scramble it.....(once again wait for the rocks to execute your orders) then tell them to neutralize it.....(wait for them to
complete this task) .....and then give the strong command to have the rocks "Eliminate it NOW!" Breath deeply while this is being
done. When you have stabilized, you need to go and clean up anything that would re-create the implant using the same protocol. I
call this the "Peripheral Energy" and it is removed in the same manner. Use your gut instincts and intuition on this as there are no
set rules as to what happens. There have been times when we have had to reverse the order, and take out the peripheral first. After
the implant has been removed you will most likely feel some kind of shift and relief...sometimes this is a huge weight lifted and a
sense of freedom. You now need to put something in the empty space that the implant left. You can install what ever the opposite of
what was taken out is..... that is always a nice change. What ever your hearts desire you can now give the rocks the command to
reinstall...just like programming a computer. With this "new program" you also need to include "Restoring and Reinstalling your
Appropriate Original Authentic Blueprints, Codes and Power." Then embed it in to your DNA and lock it in. If you are an Indigo,
infuse with oscillating pure white and Ultra Violet Light. (If you are not an Indigo, then just use pure white light.) When this phase is
complete, you need to anchor it. One of the best methods I have found, is to place your arms across your chest like a mummy, hold
your shoulders firmly and say with conviction....."So Be It!" and squeeze tightly to lock it in your body, energy fields and soul. This
will complete the process and you will feel renewed and empowered from the very core of your being. Here is an outline of the
protocol. You may copy it and have it handy to help guide you through this process. Check this site periodically as we will be
updating this protocol when new data comes in. NOTE: Some implants are designed to need someone else to take them out and
also to detect. Do not ever feel that you have failed or that you are inadequate because you ask for help periodically. I am here to
assist. There are also other people out there that can do this, but make sure they are qualified.

Each Zodiac Signs Defense Mechanism And How They Use It (His and Hers)

24- Aries Men: Counterphobic Behavior - Simply put, counterphobic behavior means you do exactly what scares you. The reason is
to prove that you’re not actually frightened by it. As a defense mechanism, a counterphobic behavior is a person’s own attempts at
getting over the very thing they are fearful of, in order to relieve some of the tension that object or situation may bring into their lives.
Aries men do not like to show fear. They’re bold, brave, and a bit impulsive. They don’t like to feel limited by anything, so if there is
something in their life that is causing unwanted tension they will do anything to dissolve it. This is especially true if they feel that the
tension is based on a weakness of theirs. Aries men will want to overcome this weakness, especially if it is based on a fear of theirs,
and so they will turn to counterphobic behavior as a defense mechanism in order to resolve such a problem.

23- Aries Women: Impulsivity: When used as a defense, impulsivity is closely associated with the defense of undoing. Whereas
undoing is an apologetic action for a prior action, impulsivity is an action that is based on an unpleasant feeling. If something is
creating stress or any other negative emotion, a person lacking impulse control may act out without fully thinking through the
consequences. An example could be a person who rushes to date someone new immediately after a breakup in order to relieve the
negative feelings from the end of one relationship. Aries women are likely to use impulsivity as a defense mechanism. By nature
Aries tend to be impulsive, so when faced with unpleasant emotions they reach for the first chance to relieve it. Aries women will act
on the urge to do something as long as it offers the chance to relieve tension, finding another action or object to replace the one
causing stress in their lives.

22 – Taurus Men: Denial: Denial is perhaps one of the most common, or at the very least one of the best-known defense
mechanisms. When a person is in denial they will ignore reality for what it is, perhaps turning a blind eye to a well-known truth.
Denial is used as a way to suppress negative feelings, conflicts, or stressors. The idea behind denying a situation is if it is not
thought about then the person does not have to deal with the suffering through the stress of the situation or even deal with it. Denial
is not the best form of defense, however, it is common for Taurus men to use. Taurus men like stability, security, and are very set in
their ways, so when something disrupts that they want nothing to do with it. They are also known for being stubborn, which is why
they choose to deny anything that doesn’t fit the way they want it to be.

21- Taurus Women: Displacement. In its definition, displacement as a defense mechanism is having feelings toward one person but
rather than expressing those feelings towards them, you experience them with someone else. Simplified, displacement is taking
emotions meant for one person and throwing them onto another. For example, when someone enrages you, rather than releasing
your frustration on them, you argue with another, often times safer, individual. As stable and secure a Taurus is, they tend to have
quite the temper. For Taurus women, it takes a lot to really push their temper, and it usually only flares after the build of a lot of
pent-up feelings. However, when their temper is unleashed it can be brutal. Unfortunately for some, a Taurus woman may displace
her anger onto someone else in substitution for the person she is really angered with. Not to worry, once she cools down her logical
side will take hold and she will likely apologize for her misplaced emotions.

20 – Gemini Men: Garrulousness: Simply put, the defense mechanism of garrulousness is when a person talks too much without
actually saying anything circumstantial or even tangential. People who use garrulousness as a defense tend to over talk as a means
of protecting themselves from anxieties that may arise from others invading their self-image, or be getting too close to seeing their
true selves. Gemini men love the social scene and being surrounded by friends. However, just because they are social, doesn’t
mean they necessarily feel the need to be a hundred percent open with people. Being that they are social, Gemini men have no
problem talking to other people. In fact, they enjoy talking to people, including people they just met. However, they can get insecure
and would rather be liked by others than disliked. When those feelings occur, these men can turn to their garrulous defense by
continuously talking in order to avoid the conversation from ever getting too personal.

19- Gemini Women: Reaction Formation: Reaction formation is the urge to do or say something but instead doing the opposite of
that urge. Often reaction formation includes when a person is angry at someone or dislikes a particular person, they won’t act
unfriendly towards them, despite their dislike, opting to be friendly and polite instead. Reaction formation is said to reduce anxieties
by hiding the negatives of how a person really feels, through them doing the opposite of their true emotions. Gemini may say one
thing and then do the opposite. Some may claim that is a case of indecisiveness but with Gemini women, it may actually be their
defense mechanism. Gemini women are very social and don’t particularly like conflict. In order to avoid conflict, they’ll try to be
friendly towards everyone, including people they dislike. They also understand how important this can be professionally, and so they
use this defense mechanism as a means to reduce potential conflicts.

18 – Cancer Men: Introjection: Introjection can work both as a defense mechanism, and as a coping mechanism as well. When
someone uses introjection, they are taking the attributes of another person or environment onto themselves. When introjection
occurs it is because the person had identified specific qualities that they felt necessary to take on as a part of them. However, they
don’t necessarily realize they are doing this, rather they believe the ideas and values were solely their own and not from someplace
else. Cancer men use introjection as their defense mechanism. These sensitive individuals find it easier to identify with someone
and interjecting that person’s attributes onto themselves than to deal with the stress and anxiety that they were feeling. Introjection
works by allowing a person to walk in someone else’s shoes. When Cancer men feel overly stressed by something they will take on
attributes of a person who is not stressed by the same situation in order to better cope.

17- Cancer Women: Undoing: Undoing is a defense mechanism meant to right a wrong. This defense mechanism kicks in when a
person feels bad about either an action they have committed or a thought that passed through their mind. In a way, it is meant to
atone for the bad by doing something good instead. For example, if you hurt someone’s feelings you may feel sorry for it and seek
to make the person feel better by doing an act of kindness for them. Cancer women are very emotional and sensitive individuals. At
times they can be a bit moody, but it is never their intention to ever hurt someone. When these women act in a manner that hurts
someone or simply have a bad thought about them, they will rush to make things right. Undoing works as their defense mechanism
because it allows them to correct something they did that is causing stress in their life as a result.
16 – Leo Men: Compensation: Compensation as a defense mechanism is defined as a means in which a person tries to make up
for one of their weaknesses by building up their strengths instead. The purpose of compensation is to draw attention away from a
weakness by overly and excessively promoting a strength. Rather than feeling inferior, compensation allows a person to obtain
feelings of superiority in another area, ideally one still closely related to the area of weakness. Overall, compensation is a relatively
harmless defense, unless acting out in violence is the compensation. Leo men are prone to having sensitive egos. They do not like
feeling inferior in anything, as they revel in feelings of superiority. When faced with something they see as a flaw or weakness, Leo
men will not rest until they can make up for it, thus tending to find a strength they can compensate it with.

15 – Leo Women: Sublimation: The defense mechanism of sublimation is known as a mature defense mechanism. Sublimation
allows people to act on unacceptable impulses and behaviors by replacing the unacceptable action with a positive and acceptable
one. For example, a person who has violent rage may take up kickboxing in order to release their aggression. Sublimation is all
about finding an alternative route to release negative emotions rather than engaging in a negative action. Leo women commonly
use sublimation as their defense mechanism. Leo women feel emotions intensely and passionately, sometimes becoming over
emotional. In these instances, they often will look for ways to release these feelings. As a sign that has a lot of energy, Leo women
may take up a sport or physical activity in order to work out the energy that pent-up energy. They are also highly creative and may
seek a more artistic approach to dealing with stress in their lives, pouring their energy into a new project.

14 – Virgo Men: Intellectualization: Intellectualization is the attempt to use logic and reason to avoid uncomfortable situations. This
defense mechanism can be as simple as choosing to talk about an interesting book you read instead of engaging in more emotional
based conversations. A common trait of a person who uses intellectualization as a defense mechanism is to use a high level of
vocabulary, known as jargon when conversing with others. As a defense mechanism, intellectualization seeks to avoid anxiety-
inducing situations. Intellectualization is known as an “isolation of effect” as it uses intellect in order to remove emotions from a
specific situation. Virgo men are prone to using intellectualization as their go-to defense mechanism. They often avoid being run by
their emotions, preferring logic and reason instead. That is why when it comes to awkward and uncomfortable situations or even
any problem for that matter, they rely on logic, facts, and intellect to get them through.

13 – Virgo Women: Passive Aggressive: Being passive aggressive as a defense mechanism means indirectly expressing anger. A
passive aggressive person won’t vocalize their anger, rather they choose to remain quiet about it and let their feelings simmer.
However, just because they won’t express what has made them upset doesn’t mean their actions won’t give them away. Passive
aggressive behavior usually includes, a person retaining resentment or negative views about another person or situation, hostile
jokes, silent treatment, and procrastinating out of spite. A passive aggressive person may struggle to express their true feelings.
Virgo women are very hardworking individuals, and for the most part, choose logic over emotion. They fear rejection and not feeling
good enough. For that reason, they may have a hard time expressing their emotions. When feeling intense emotions, especially that
of displeasure, they will try to cope with those feelings on their own, however, while they sit with those negative feelings they end up
showing through as passive aggressive actions.

12 – Libra Men: Rationalization: As a defense mechanism, rationalization is defined as coming up with a logical explanation as to
why something occurred. Generally, when using rationalization, a person will try to come up with an excuse as to why they engaged
in a bad behavior in order to avoid admitting why they really misbehaved. Libra men tend to be a bit self-indulgent, and are
generally always very charming. That being said they are good at talking and do so in a manner that makes what their saying seem
appeasing and logical. When they do something that they know they shouldn’t do, this laid-back sign will simply come up with an
explanation that sounds logical in theory in order to get out of dealing with their decision. They don’t like stress or anything overly
emotional so they lean on logic to rationalize these feelings away.

11 – Libra Women: Altruism: Altruism is a mature defense mechanism that seeks to avoid personal conflicts by focusing on the
problems of others. Altruism as a defense mechanism seeks to help others solve their problems and helping them feel good. By
assisting others, they avoid their own pains as their concentration is on another’s pain. This helps a person cope as helping
someone with a problem, more so if that problem is similar to their own, indirectly allows them to come to terms with or find a
solution to their own problem. Libra women are very caring and unselfish. They will go out of their way to help their friends and
family, without ever asking for anything in return. With their big hearts, Libra women enjoy helping people. Since they are used to
being there for others, altruism is an easy defense mechanism to use. For Libra women, the best defense against their own pain is
to help someone through their own pain.

10 – Scorpio Men: Prevarication: Prevarication is a defense mechanism characterized as lying on purpose for a specific reason.
Prevarication is calculated lying. This is done in order to gain something or to sway a particular situation in one way or another. This
can be as simple as telling a little white lie in order to avoid hurting another person’s feelings, to a means of manipulation. Overall,
prevarication is a common defense mechanism, generally to protect against superego anxiety. Ironically, Scorpio hates liars.
However, when it comes to the defense mechanism that is most common for them to use, Scorpio men most often use
prevarication. Scorpio are very sensitive and can be their own worse enemy. They tend to suffer from superego anxiety, which
makes them very self-critical. As a means to protect themselves from their own superego, Scorpio men will avoid the truth going so
far as to fabricate a lie instead.

9 – Women: Confabulation - Confabulation is a defense mechanism described as an initially accurate perception that somehow
becomes lost within extensive, unrealistic, grandiose, personal elaborations and associations. In more simplistic terms, as a
defense confabulation is unconsciously motivated lying that occurs as an automatic response to low self-esteem when they can’t
accurately recall the details of something. People using confabulation as a defense don’t even realize it. Scorpio is the one sign that
hates lying above all else, which makes it ironic that Scorpio women tend to lean towards confabulation as their defense
mechanism. Scorpio women like to be in charge and have control over everything. For that reason, it becomes easy for Scorpio
women to fabricate a lie in order to explain why something didn’t pan out, even if they have no idea what really occurred. They don’t
mean to lie, and in fact, don’t even realize that they are. They simply believe their version of events is what actually took place.

8 – Sagittarius Men: Humor: Humor is considered to be a mature defense mechanism. When a person uses humor as a defense
mechanism they turn to kidding around in order to avoid any painful or discomforting feelings. People turn to humor in order to not
think about or even to avoid showing how upset they might be. However, humor is not always a defense mechanism as it can
simply just be used for a purpose of producing pleasure with a good laugh. Sagittarius men don’t take things too seriously. They
prefer optimism over pessimism and are very apt to accepting and supporting change. That being said, not much can keep them
upset. So when something does bother them, rather than dwell on it, they are sooner to make a joke about the situation, laugh it off,
and move on. Sagittarius men turn to humor to relieve any stressful situation because it allows them to laugh at something negative
before moving onto life’s next adventure.

7 – Sagittarius Women: Aim Inhibition: Aim inhibition occurs when a task does not go according to plan. Rather than do nothing, aim
inhibition is a defense mechanism that takes action. People that use aim inhibition will modify their original plans in order to reach a
new one if things did not work out for their initial goals. Aim inhibition shows an ability to be flexible and to be adaptable to change.
This is why Sagittarius women tend to use it as their defense mechanism. Sagittarius are very positive and hate pessimism and
negativity. They don’t tend to let things get them down for long and are quick to pick themselves up again when things don’t turn out
the way they planned. They are also very adaptable and love change. For these reasons they find it easy to use aim inhibition when
things don’t go their way, easily altering their plans and goals in order to succeed.

6 – Capricorn Men: Projection: Projection occurs when a person takes his or her own faults or unacceptable attributes and places
them on another person. This allows the person to criticize these negative qualities without directly criticizing themselves. Simply
put, projection is seeing your bad traits in others rather than yourself. This can come across as projective blaming as well, in which
a person places blame for something that is upsetting them, even though it was their fault. Capricorn men tend to use projection as
their defense mechanism without even realizing they are doing it. Capricorn men have sensitive egos and take criticism poorly.
They want to succeed and when faced with conflict, will search for where the blame should be placed. They may recognize that they
are to blame but it is easier for them to project onto someone else in order to find a solution to the conflict rather than to beat
themselves up over it.

5 – Capricorn Women: Compartmentalization: As a defense mechanism, Compartmentalization takes on a “divide and conquer”
mentality. This means compartmentalization is a process of separating conflicting thoughts and actions in order to avoid any
tension, problems, or stress they may create. Simply put, Compartmentalization inhibits a person from making connections by
building up internal walls to separate the different aspects of our lives, behaviors, or even values. A person may behave in a way
that conflicts with their values, however, they are able to do so simply because the compartmentalized the behavior and value as
separate aspects, never integrating the two. Capricorns are all about efficiency. They want to get their work done with as little
hassle as possible and move onto the next task quickly. Capricorn women tend to favor compartmentalization as their defense
mechanism in order to tackle any task with as little if any, conflict arising.

4 – Aquarius Men: Identification: Identification is a defense mechanism that uses the ability to take on the characteristics of
someone else, who is seen as being an important figure. This mechanism is done in order to overcome feelings of inferiority. This
defense mechanism generally occurs unconsciously as a person will view someone they deem great and then begin to model their
life as such. With this defense mechanism, a person tries to avoid their own conflicts by attempting to create a better version of
themselves. Aquarius men are very unique so it doesn’t seem likely that they will try to be someone else. However, using
Identification as a defense mechanism, Pisces men are simply trying to better themselves. They do so by keeping their individuality,
something they are proud of, while only adapting traits that are better behaviors than some of their negative ones. Aquarius men
want to lead successful lives and will identify with successful individuals as their role models.

3 – Aquarius Women: Fantasy: As a defense mechanism, Fantasy can vary in degrees of harmless to delusional. At it’s worst, a
person will completely deny reality and create a falsified world for long-term relief of everyday life. However, at its harmless stage,
Fantasy provides temporary relief from stressors and conflicts by focusing all of your energy on something you want to achieve. For
example, when failure occurs, begin imagining a long-term goal and the next steps that will bring you there, ignoring the current
setback. Aquarius are very inventive, especially women of this sign. They are unique and big dreamers, however, that never deters
them from their goals. Aquarius women tend to use Fantasy as a defense mechanism in order to focus on what is really important to
them. When things go wrong they run to their daydream of what they really want in order to motivate themselves to get right back on
track.

2 – Pisces Men: Temporal Regression: Temporal Regression refers to the focus on an earlier time in order to avoid thinking about a
current conflict in your life. Temporal regression is often associated solely with regression, meaning reverting back to behaviors that
perhaps you would do back at an early stage in your life. Generally, people with temporal regression will focus on their childhood,
and can often get stuck placing too much focus on the past in order to avoid current issues. Pisces men will often use temporal
regression as their defense mechanism. Being a highly sensitive sign, Pisces seeks to avoid conflict above all else. They’ll
frequently try to deny issues and stressors in their life, believing if they ignore it then it will go away. While trying to deny and avoid
the problem they will heavily emphasize their past, getting wrapped up in a time when the current conflict was not an issue and may
even begin acting in such a manner.

1 – Pisces Women: Affiliation: Affiliation can both be considered an adaptive skill and a defense mechanism. However, affiliation is
considered a mature defense mechanism, as a person chooses to seek out the counsel and company of others. As a defense
mechanism, affiliation includes leaning on friends for support and counsel, venting to them, and even planning a day out in order to
provide a distraction for the stressor in your life. Pisces are very emotional. At times, they like to be alone, however, they often find
themselves in the company of a wide variety of friends. Pisces women are especially selfless and will go out of their way to the
people they care about. While they don’t generally seek out anything from people in return, they do seek personal connection.
When faced with a negative situation, Pisces will turn to those closest to them for advice and occasionally for a distraction.

#1 Earth Hand - People of Earth hands have thick palms and thick fingers. The base of their thumbs is also thick and fleshy. They
have large or thick wrists to support their palms and their skin could be coarser than others. People of Earth hands are, by their very
nature, humble, modest, and down to earth. They are deeply attached to their roots and no matter how high they go in life, they
never forget where they came from. They are extremely hard-working, polite, and warm people who like going along with others.
They are jovial, fun-loving, and sweet to meet. People of Earth hands are also known to fall quite easily in love. They are the kind of
people who think from their hearts and may be highly sentimental. They are the ones who love unconditionally and usually go out of
their way to be of service to others. If humility defines the kind of people they are then selflessness defines the way they act.

#2 Fire Hand - People with fire hands have palms which are long and their fingers, too, add to the length of their hands. The nails
can be pointed but their knuckles are not that well-defined. People with fire hands are highly driven, ambitious, and quick thinkers.
They are always alert to their surroundings are their minds are constantly working. They are usually very energetic and their energy
levels can be infectious. Further, they are also very clear about what they want and what they don’t want in their lives which makes
them really clear in their thoughts. They are quick to make decisions since they are highly self-aware but that does not mean that
they are hasty. Their decisions are usually well thought-out and spot-on. This also means that they fall in love selectively and have
very limited people in their lives as they do not like wasting time and energy on those they do not care about.
#3 Water Hand - People with water hands have palms which are smooth but the fingers could be stubby. The nails are usually long
and the knuckles not well-defined. The fingertips of people with water hands are round in shape. People of water hands are highly
talented individuals and are extremely good at adapting to different situations like water taking to its container. They are highly
observant and can be diplomatic when required. They are discreet, cautious, and also highly secretive which means that they are
also good at keeping secrets. People of water hands are industrious and thought-oriented which means that they are usually non-
judgmental and highly accepting of others. They are the kind of people who would accept imperfections (theirs as well as that of
others) without complaints. They cherish the relationships they have in life and may go to extreme lengths to protect what’s theirs.
But when it comes to love, they are protective but never possessive, which is a rare quality to have.

#4 Wood Hand - Wood hands are long, slightly skinny and have the bone structure revealing. The knuckles are usually well-defined
and the thin bones may appear oblong. The features are extremely sharp and distinctly visible. People of wood hands are usually
the creative sorts. Their minds are hard-wired to observe the minute details and they are meant to create things which are
aesthetically pleasing. Being highly creative, they tend to live in a world of their own and like keeping to themselves. This also
means that they do not fall in love easily but if they do, they get extremely attached. Wood hand people are also highly emotional by
nature. Since they tend to be creative, their emotions play a very important role in bringing out their creativity. They may also get
stubborn and temperamental about their creations but are usually kind, warm, and somewhat introverted by nature. They do not let
a lot of people in their lives but the ones that they do let in are extremely special to them.

#5 Metal Hand - Metal hands usually have square-shaped nails, palms, and fingers. The palms are soft, fleshy, and elastic. They
can distinctly be identified by the thick base of the palms and uniform rectangular-shaped elongation towards the nails. People of
metal hands are highly skilled in leadership, are entrepreneurial and highly logical in their approach. They like to reason and then
come to a conclusion. They lead by example and they have a high degree of fairness ingrained in their personalities. They are
usually the ones who do not let their personal bias come in the way of their decisions and they usually remain calm under pressure.
People of metal hands usually fall in love based on the qualities of their partner and are not affected by the superficial things in life.
They know what they are made of, what they like and dislike, and hence they have a high degree of self-awareness. These are the
kind of people who can manage multiple things at the same time and can lead by pulling others along rather than by stepping on
them.

Los avances de las neurociencias los últimos 20 años, son tan asombrosos, que todo lo que creíamos saber del ser humano, de su
funcionamiento y del universo hasta hoy, ya no es como lo pensamos. También está claro que esos avances son difíciles de
comprender ya que de los conceptos originales del cerebro, nos enseñaron bastante poco, tal vez porque se tenía muy poca
información acerca de él o porque no existe el hábito de transformar las investigaciones en información clara y sencilla, para que la
gente común vaya comprendiendo cada vez más sus funciones cerebrales y en general su mundo. Este libro entonces pretende
dar un esbozo de las convicciones originales que la ciencia ha tenido acerca de la realidad fisiológica del cuerpo y de las funciones
cerebrales, de la forma más simple posible, para luego desarrollar las diferencias conceptuales que se han introducido en la
biología a partir de los últimos descubrimientos sobre el cerebro holográfico, explicamos de esa manera que dice la física cuántica
del universo y como nos da eso una nueva perspectiva del cerebro. Una concepción del universo basada en frecuencias,
receptores de frecuencias, creaciones holográficas de una realidad inexistente, hologramas de un ser único llamado humanidad
que nos constituye, explicando así fabulosamente la condición no sólo de los niños Indigo y de sus talentos que, en un universo
concebido bajo las viejas explicaciones, no se llega a comprender, Si no de todas aquellas personas con talentos extraordinarios a
nivel perceptivo, capacidades extraordinarias de nivel intuitivo y creativo y con una extraña comprensión del mundo que hace que
ese ser se sienta como si vieran las cosas con otro prisma, o fuera otra realidad. En este libro consideramos sobre todo, a esos
seres que desde siempre han tenido la extraña sensación de poseer un alma, un alma que actúa como un constante y silencioso
espectador, llevándolos a comprender su existencia desde la certeza que esos estados no ordinarios de conciencia en los cuales
se trasciende a toda noción del espacio y del tiempo, estados contemplativos que nos dejan vislumbrar la eternidad, son lo único
que vale la pena llamar real. De esa eternidad trata este libro, y esa eternidad desde la ciencia, una eternidad que se ha infiltrado
lentamente en los laboratorios de la ciencia, asombrando al ojo que mira el microscopio, es una nueva ciencia que nos hace saber
que hay un universo en total orden que nos contiene, que todo transcurre según un orden establecido y está todo bien, que la
evolución de la humanidad es inminente que la evolución del universo transcurre inexorablemente, sin que podamos hacer nada,
porque no la alcanzamos Algunos seres, nacen con la cualidad de mirar por una ventana, donde esta realidad se muestra patente,
como los Budas en meditación, eso los hace estar ausentes, aparentemente sin concentración o con déficit atencional; Seres
mirando al otro lado casi todo el tiempo, comprendiendo la vida, en su concepto de totalidad, percibiéndola de la forma más
completa y verdadera. El cerebro - Hubo un tiempo que el cerebro humano se diferenciaba del de las otras especies
específicamente por la presencia de una zona que hacía que, además de conciencia individual, el hombre tuviera conciencia social
o al menos eso parecía. Se sabía que el ser humano tenía la capacidad superior de tener esta condición gracias a que se
desarrolló en forma independiente su encéfalo, no como los otros mamíferos que lo tenían unido al cerebro. Eso, se estimó, nos
hacía humanos, estas características físicas que nos permitían tener conciencia del otro. Dentro de este desarrollo del cerebro se
creyó específicamente que gracias al córtex cerebral, que es que es la parte externa del encéfalo que tiene una textura rugosa de
color blanco ligeramente grisáceo, parecido al aspecto de la mitad de una nuez, existía en nosotros el pensamiento abstracto,
creencias y capacidad de previsión de futuro entre otras cosas. Lo confirmaba también el lenguaje, esa facultad presente
únicamente en el hombre que estaría controlado por una serie de centros distribuidos en las periferias del lóbulo temporal del
córtex, por eso entonces estaba claro que era precísamente ese cortex cerebral lo que diferenciaría a la especie humana del resto.
Nuestro cerebro funciona además con destellos, pequeños impulsos de corriente eléctrica de una potencia muy baja. La potencia
de la electricidad que manejan nuestras neuronas (se mide en milivoltios) sin embargo esa es la potencia necesaria y suficiente
para procesar, manejar, distribuir y usar cantidades inmensas de información y generar multiplicidad de respuestas (casi infinitas
en posibilidades). Este cerebro, que es una es una máquina de bajas frecuencias, que además de lo que ya sabemos tiene
conciencia de sí mismo y del entorno, cambia sus frecuencias de funcionamiento según la actividad que necesite realizar. Cada
potencial eléctrico es un diferente estado de conciencia. Para cada actividad que necesitamos realizar, podríamos decir que el
cerebro transforma su actividad convirtiéndose en un cerebro nuevo. Un cerebro que en cada ocasión liberará distintos químicos ya
sean neuro-transmisores u otras hormonas, en fin, una configuración orgánica nueva. Estas ondas eléctricas de distinta frecuencia,
producto de su actividad electroquímica y según la ocasión, pueden ser registradas mediante el electroencefalograma (EEG). Las
ondas Beta (cuyo ritmo oscila entre 14 y 25 ciclos por segundo),se hallan presentes en el estado de vigilia, es decir, cuando nos
encontramos realizando alguna actividad como trabajar, leer, caminar, etc. Las ondas Alfa (de 8 a 13 c/sg.), están relacionadas con
los estados de relajación y meditación profunda y lúcida. Las ondas Theta (de 4 a 7 c/sg.), se relacionan con los estados
emocionales y creativos. Las ondas Delta (de 0,5 a 3 c/sg.), que se activan especialmente durante el sueño profundo. A mediados
de los setenta se detectaron en nuestro cerebro unas sustancias neuroreguladoras que fueron bautizadas con el nombre de
"endorfinas", éstas cumplen un papel similar al de algunos alcaloides derivados del opio, produciendo así mismo una sensación
placentera. Esta droga bioquímica es liberada por el cerebro para aliviarnos un dolor o provocarnos una sensación de agrado, en
realidad es la reguladora del estado de conciencia y de la sensación o percepción de ese estado. Eso en otras palabras, significa
que las endorfinas, son la forma que tiene el cuerpo de dar una respuesta acorde a la situación que experimentamos, si nos
herimos, las libera para apaciguar el dolor y si nuestros ojos asombrados ven la belleza de una puesta de sol, también las produce
para mostrar la satisfacción, con todos sus síntomas: elevar la presión sanguínea, subir la temperatura, estimular la sonrisa, y
hacer brillan los ojos. Los primeros tipos de frecuencia de las que tuvimos conocimiento en el cerebro fueron las ondas "Alpha" y
"Theta". Hay que tener en cuenta, sin embargo, que estas ondas cerebrales son captadas por un amplificador y no pueden ser
registradas directamente, lo que hizo necesario establecer divisiones standard, divisiones que son irreales, fueron consideradas
solo en función de la medición, pero están en constante variación y en la realidad no existe un estado en que funcione solo un tipo
de onda, lo que nos debe dejar claro que no hay división estricta de los estados de conciencia, estamos semi- despiertos, semi -
dormidos, fluctuamos entre un estado y otro influidos por los ruidos del medio, por la luz, por la música Es el caso de la música de
supermercado, que genera inducción hipnótica llevándonos a un estado donde deja de primar la lógica, y accionamos por impulso,
somos mucho más receptivos entonces a la publicidad. La publicidad nos muestra, determinados colores que son más atractivos,
la ubicación estratégica de los productos y todos aquellos elementos que se usan para manipular nuestra decisión de compra,
como nosotros estamos hipnotizados con la música, nos influyen de mejor manera esos factores. Dicho en otras palabras
compramos en trance, ayudados por los químicos de nuestro cerebro que nos tienen las ondas cerebrales fluctuando entre theta y
delta, produciendo una sensación de agrado en la compra. Cada tipo de onda se traduce entonces, en un estado psiconeuro-
fisiológico diferente, nuestra mente, nuestro cuerpo y nuestra actividad física y fisiológica es completamente diferente en cada uno
de estos estados o frecuencias, justamente por el tipo de substancias neuro-químicas y hormonas vertidas al flujo sanguíneo que
se distribuyen en nuestro organismo, para cada ocasión. Tanto la presencia y cantidad de dichas substancias, el entorno, los
estimulantes sensoriales, internos y externos; como la música, el silencio, la luz o la falta de ella, el estado de ánimo y el estado de
percepción interna o sentido propioceptivo que tengamos, interactúan entre sí para producir un estado físico-fisiológico-mental y de
comportamiento, diferente. Estos estados que podríamos considerar como de una respuesta eléctrica del cerebro, son también una
respuesta fisiológica de las hormonas que comienzan a segregarse en cada uno, como asimismo, una respuesta en estados de
sueño o vigilia que producen esos cambios. Estos estados han sido investigados ampliamente por la medicina para encontrar las
implicancias de esas variaciones de potenciales eléctricos y su influencia en el estado de conciencia. Aunque tenemos que tener
en cuenta que la ciencia desde el inicio de sus investigaciones, profundizó su interés en los estados de vigilia, o estado consciente
que habían sido considerados por la sicología emergente en la época de pos- guerra, estado de normalidad, todo lo que
trascendiera a ese estado de vigilia, entraba dentro de la patología. Los estados relacionados con ondas delta y theta fueron
simplemente considerados estados del sueño, y si se encontraba este tipo de ondas durante la vigilia, se estimaba que había un
trastorno funcional, o su sinónimo, una disfunción cerebral. "Disifunción cerebral mínima" le dicen a la aterrada mamá, los
neurólogos, como diagnóstico del niño que esta absorto en la ventana durante la clase, y lo medican con un sicotrópico que
bloquea, la actividad de los neurotransmisores, para que no sienta el medio, y así pueda concentrarse. Solo las últimas décadas, la
Sicología Transpersonal se ha dedicado a estudiar los estados no ordinarios de conciencia y con eso ha dado énfasis al estudio de
frecuencias cerebrales desde otra perspectiva que sirve como precedente para la comprensión del cerebro holográfico y los
estados, de meditación, éxtasis y experiencias cumbre. Ondas Tetha y niños índigo - Como decíamos el patrón que rige al cerebro
humano es una actividad de ondas cerebrales de distinta frecuencia: Delta, Theta, Alpha y Beta. Las ondas Delta son de
oscilaciones lentas y generan en las personas un estado de sueño profundo, deberían estar sí y sólo si en estado de sueño
profundo intercalándose con ondas theta. En relación con el fenómeno de los Niños Indigo y su supuesto déficit atencional, o déficit
en la focalización y retención de la atención, podemos decir que ese estado que parecería ser de "aparente falta de concentración"
es un estado parecido al estado de meditación o más específicamente, un estado de abstracción; en este estado de abstracción
fluctúan en el cerebro, ondas Delta y ondas Theta. A este estado lo llamaremos "percepción global de la realidad", ya que nos da
una visión global de las cosas, un aprendizaje abstracto, rápido y preciso, y además es un estado de gran genialidad en las ideas,
de un aprendizaje acelerado de conceptos en su contexto, asociado a comprensión de estados internos de la gente que le rodea.
Este estado generalmente se acompaña de un movimiento repetitivo de las manos o de los pies, movimiento que hasta hoy no
tenía lógica alguna, este movimiento generalmente hace un ruido repetitivo, (este ruido repetitivo que su hijo hace con el pie,
seguramente es un inductor de trance) y es un movimiento oscilante que disocia la mente lógica, para poder estar en ese bendito
estado que se encuentra. En cierta práctica de artes marciales chino, una técnica de meditación en movimiento llamado tai-Chi. El
objetivo primario de la práctica es lograr a través del tiempo, lograr ese estado de abstracción profunda que nos hace llegar a un
punto de fusión perfecta con el medio. El tai-Chi, usa el movimiento del cuerpo para disociar la mente lógica del estado de
abstracción; poner en sintonía los dos hemisferios cerebrales, y algunas funciones hologómicas, para producir y potenciar la
permanencia de ese estado de integración perceptiva, que a nosotros nos preocupa tanto, como si fuera una enfermedad y que
solíamos llamar déficit atencional. Las artes marciales tienen a exacerbar ese estado y desarrollarlo, en primer término porque
genera unidad, las emociones y la mente se subordina a un estado de unificación con el alma y su percepción y en segundo
término porque en ese estado se produce toda una transformación bioquímica en nuestro cuerpo es un estado de regeneración
celular que produce progresivos y positivos cambios en el estado de salud. Meditación y trance - Las ondas theta tienen una
oscilación mediana y están asociadas a estados de meditación profunda y creatividad, esos estados de creatividad, se producen
por que la comprensión de la realidad es más completa, salimos del más puro estado de análisis lógico, y entramos en un estado
más completo de percepción de las cosas, con los dos hemisferios trabajando en coordinación, podemos percibir las cosas desde
un punto de vista mucho más completo, nos hacemos parte de esa realidad, entramos en ella. Soltamos la mente que controla todo
el tiempo, un estado perceptivo limitado que se subordina a la lógica y nos dejamos ir. Nos dejamos llevar por la sensación del
universo que nos rodea, que nos conforma y apenas nos dejamos ir, comenzamos a palpitar en el océano del universo, lo
percibimos, percibimos sus pulsos, entramos en una dimensión donde no hay tiempo ni espacio. Para evocar ese estado hay que
recordar aquellas veces que mientras hablamos por teléfono, nos ponemos a hacer un dibujo, entonces, podemos percibirnos
abstraídos, no estamos ni aquí ni allá, nos parece que estamos aquí y allá al mismo tiempo, en ese tiempo estamos haciendo una
comprensión de la cosas, que no es exactamente un análisis, estamos sintiendo la realidad, y asociándola con las palabras que
nos dicen. "Estamos estimando la realidad". En la estimulación de ese estado influyeron: la voz de nuestro interlocutor, la emisión
de ondas eléctricas de baja intensidad en el aparato, y sobre todo una disposición hacia el otro, que nos permite, literalmente
abarcarlo. Teniendo la capacidad entonces de registrar esa circunstancia en forma vívida, como si estuviésemos de cuerpo
presente en el lugar donde está el interlocutor. La descripción fehaciente de los sucesos, que ocurren en estas frecuencias
cerebrales, justifica plenamente las características de los niños índigos. En el caso de estos chicos, no es necesaria ningún tipo de
inducción al estado por que se da en forma espontánea, el ritmo preponderante de sus cerebros, no es Beta, como en la mayoría
de las personas, en que predomina el área lógica y la actividad concentrada en una tarea de primacía del hemisferio izquierdo, o
pensamiento lineal. También los fenómenos paranormales descritos en ellos tienen que ver con esto, ya que son decodificadores
de frecuencias holográficas de mejor calidad. Ellos no tienen la capacidad de cerrarse a las sensaciones de su entorno y a
concentrarse y dejar de sentir la influencia del medio. Ellos perciben, todo el tiempo su medio, ellos no pueden abstraerse, de esa
realidad e ignorar ciertos sucesos, esa capacidad sólo se tiene desde la lógica. Nosotros aprendemos con el tiempo, ese
procedimiento de no percibir para no hacernos cargo de lo que les sucede a los otros o de la respuesta que genera el medio
ambiente a nuestro proceder. Ellos decodifican la vibración que reciben y reciben una imagen general de la realidad, un holograma
completo que solo se puede entender cuando se ha tenido la experiencia directa del estado de meditación o de estados de
experiencias cumbres. "LAS COSAS SE SABEN, EN ESTOS ESTADOS NO SE SABE BIEN PORQUÉ...SOLO SE SABEN" - Las
ondas Alpha presentan una oscilación rápida y que da un nivel de atención, creativa. El estado alpha es bastante conocido, por los
métodos que lo estimulan; Este estado hace que nos relajemos y nos sintamos menos tensos. En esa búsqueda constante de
sensaciones de bienestar y de desarrollo de habilidades extraordinarias es que se ha intentado con ahínco encontrar medios
efectivos para lograr este estado, medios que son conocidos como métodos de inducción Alpha, como el "método Silva" y otros
métodos logran una inducción bastante eficiente, como también lo hace el biofeedback que detallaremos más adelante. Es en ese
estado de ondas lentas Theta y Delta, se estimula bastante la creatividad, creemos nosotros que esto es debido a que en ese
estado la intervención emocional y acción del inconsciente están restringidas y entonces se libera la acción de los bloqueos
sicológicos usuales, que son los que no permiten cierto nivel de creación, desechando gran parte de las ideas generadas por el
cerebro calificándolas de aberrantes y con esa sanción las bloquean y les impiden llegar al consciente, esa es una barrera regular
que impide la creatividad por que la mente lógica tiene miedo al caos. En el sistema de lluvia de ideas, que se utiliza en las
agencias de publicidad, se utilizan personas cuyo hemisferio derecho es preponderante y regularmente, personas que tienen un
alto nivel de déficit atencional muchos Indigos, con su visión global, que tiene facilidad para estimular la llegada a ese estado;
tienen una gran capacidad de abstraerse a la lógica lineal y tener una percepción global de las cosas, ellos pueden asociar cosas
en sistemas que no tienen una lógica regular por que se encuentran normalmente sin los reguladores de ritmo beta tan frecuentes.
Neuroterapia - La Neuroterápia o Biofeedback, creada en Estados unidos Es una técnica computarizada que permite monitorear y
autoregular la actividad eléctrica del cerebro, mediante la obtención de un equilibrio regular en la actividad de las ondas cerebrales
delta, theta, alpha y beta. Con los instrumentos de Neuroterapia se puede obtener un registro de la actividad alpha, la cual es
reforzada a través de un tono acompañado de un sonido de olas de mar y caída de agua, cada vez que alpha alcanza la amplitud
deseada. Esto se emplea con la finalidad de incrementar los niveles de relajación. Las ondas beta, las más rápidas que ya
sabemos que son comunes en los estados de vigilia, se ha probado que al estimularlas, las personas mejoran su capacidad de
atención y concentración. Cuando las ondas Beta tienen mucha amplitud están asociadas con los estados de angustia y ansiedad,
de ahí que en el tratamiento de Neuroterapia se concentra en reestructurar la amplitud de estas ondas. Este entrenamiento es
preciso y muy oportuno para los Indigos por las habilidades de autorregulación neurofisiológica que produce, especialmente en las
áreas de la impulsividad y emoción. El tratamiento es interactivo y trabaja con recompensas ante la aparición de la onda cerebral
que esperamos, es un entrenamiento progresivo mediante recompensas que sirve para modificar la onda cerebral según nuestra
necesidad. La persona se sienta frente a la pantalla de una computadora y escoge uno de varios juegos posibles: pac-man,
highway, island, etc. Entonces se le colocan electrodos en el cuero cabelludo, para recoger los impulsos eléctricos de las neuronas
y enviarlos a la computadora, obteniendo así el registro de sus ondas cerebrales a medida que se desarrolla el juego. El programa
capta los impulsos de las neuronas y los traduce en un sonido que acompaña un puntaje que va apareciendo en pantalla, mientras
la persona va jugando. Puntaje y sonido indican cuando las ondas cerebrales funcionan a un nivel óptimo, entonces naturalmente
la persona busca la recompensa óptima durante el juego y para eso modifica sus ondas cerebrales para recibir la recompensa.
Mediante la práctica de la Neuroterapia, el cerebro aprende a reconocer ese nivel óptimo y a autoregularse para alcanzarlo y
mantenerlo constantemente. El cerebro forma redes neuronales con patrones de acción - Nuestro cerebro actúa como un
sofisticado computador holográfico que, a través de un lento y progresivo proceso evolutivo, se ha ido perfeccionando en sus
funciones hasta el punto de diferenciarnos cualitativamente del resto de los seres vivos, esta masa de tejido gelatinoso de color
gris de unos 1.300 gramos de peso, que además de todo lo que no vemos, contiene alrededor de 100.000 millones de células
conocidas con el nombre de "neuronas" y que constituyen las unidades básicas del sistema nervioso, que son células, conectadas
entre sí a través de millones de ramificaciones ("dendritas" y "axones") formando una gran red que cumple una misión muy
específica, la de procesar la información sensorial, tanto la que llega del mundo exterior como del propio cuerpo. En un solo
segundo, estas células son capaces de procesar hasta 200.000 millones de bits de información. Para ello usan sus casi 100
trillones de interconexiones. Aunque las neuronas no se conectan entre sí por una red continua formada por sus prolongaciones,
sino que lo hacen por contactos separados por unos estrechos espacios denominados sinapsis". Neurotransmisores - Los neuro-
transmisores serían los encargados de difundir esas señales a través de las conexiones sinápticas. Cuando hablamos de neuro-
transmisores, estamos hablando de químicos que tienen la capacidad de trasmitir corriente eléctrica. Una emoción viaja a 320 Km
por hora en forma de neurotransmisor, modificando a su paso la estructura del cerebro, de manera que cuando llega al fin de su
recorrido, la estructura del cerebro de esa persona, le hace percibir la realidad de otra manera. El cerebro está constituido por dos
mitades simétricas, divididas por un profundo surco longitudinal, con funciones muy diferentes, aunque interrelacionadas, sin
saberse claramente hasta el día de hoy el patrón de interrelación entre ambos, Aunque se sabe que la unión de ambos
hemisferios, el cuerpo calloso; contiene especie de preceptos que lo hacen inferir que cuando debe hacer conexiones inter-
hemisferios. Clásico es el ejemplo de un cerebro dividido mediante una operación, que al estimular el lado izquierdo del cerebro se
le preguntaba al lado derecho que había sucedido y el cerebro derecho sabía que no tenía la información suficiente para contestar
esa pregunta. Pero cuando se realizaba el experimento inverso, se estimulaba el cerebro derecho, el hemisferio izquierdo
contestaba con un supuesto, daba siempre una respuesta, lo que hizo inferir a los científicos que el nivel de los prejuicios y pre-
conceptos de las cosas esta alojado en la función cerebral izquierda. Entonces tenemos un área que basa sus respuestas al
medio, en juicios y otra que asocia los sucesos y si no puede asociar, no puede pensar. Se sabe que el hemisferio izquierdo rige el
pensamiento lógico, verbal y analítico; el hemisferio derecho, por el contrario, se ocupa de la parte subjetiva, emocional y creativa.
Los niños índigos según estudios de autopsia, tienen preponderantemente, el cuerpo calloso más grueso que el común de la
gente, y una cantidad de conexiones neuronales mayor. La actividad electromagnética del cerebro en el cuerpo calloso es
impresionantemente abundante, durante las pruebas de laboratorio, el niño esta asociando información inter-hemisferios para
procesar, jamas infiere por pre-concepto, siempre por asociación con conocimientos previos. Es decir siempre fabrica su
aprendizaje a partir de la inferencia de lo nuevo y como eso se integra en el contexto de lo ya conocido. Se suponía hasta hoy que,
los hemisferios cerebrales están divididos en cuatro lóbulos: frontal, relacionado con el conocimiento y la inteligencia; temporal, con
el área auditiva; parietal, con el área sensorial; y occipital, con el área visual. Aunque tenemos que tener e cuenta que son
referentes relativos para ubicarnos esquemáticamente, por que ocurren cosas como que en investigaciones se ha descubierto que
el sentido del oído es 75 % percepción y 25 % de origen físico, sin comprenderse aún su interrelación profunda y mucho menos el
lugar físico donde se interrelaciona percepción y sentido. Se ha comprobado también que en estados Alfa y Theta, los hemisferios
cerebrales funcionan en sincronía y se integran uniendo pensamiento concreto y analítico (lóbulo izquierdo del cerebro), con
pensamiento abstracto y creativo (lóbulo derecho). Existen ejercicios de sicomotricidad que estimulan la interacción de las
funciones de ambos hemisferios. Como tejer, ejercicio que se utiliza junto a otros ejercicios de coordinación cerebral, en las
escuelas waldorff. También unen pensamiento racional y discriminatorio (el que distingue unas cosas de otras, analizando lo
concreto y la parte del todo) propio del cortex cerebral, con el pensamiento filosófico e intuitivo (que unifica las partes en un todo y
que tiene visión de perspectiva amplia de las cosas) Como una visión Global de la realidad. Esta es una visión mucho más
completa de la realidad, con estados perceptivos e intuitivos que completan el marco de la visión que se tiene de la realidad. En su
interior, el cerebro posee además dos núcleos, el tálamo y el hipotálamo, centros del sistema nervioso autónomo. Otras partes
esenciales son: el cerebelo, ubicado en la parte posterior del cráneo, que rige el equilibrio y los movimientos musculares; y el bulbo
raquídeo, del que parte la médula espinal, que controla la función respiratoria. El lenguaje, una facultad presente únicamente en el
hombre, como ya habíamos mencionado, estaría controlado por una serie de centros distribuidos en las periferias del lóbulo
temporal del córtex cerebral. Y completaríamos estos conocimientos de la biología del cerebro con una historia relacionada con las
técnicas respiratorias que usan distintas culturas como proceso de cambio de conciencia, y la estimulación que ella genera sobre la
hipófisis que esta detrás de la nariz, al medio del cerebro. También la estimulación que se hace sobre la glándula pineal con el
movimiento de los ojos logrando, así que el nervio óptico estimule esta glándula y genere una descarga de neuro químicos que
provocan cambios en las funciones vitales a una actividad de reposo bajando la frecuencia de onda cerebral y entrando en trance.
Estas son las funciones que dieron curiosidad a los neurofisiólogos, en la asociación alma, biología. La memoria - En cuanto a la
memoria, los neurocientíficos consideran que no se localiza en una zona concreta, sino que estaría distribuida por todo el cerebro
esto ha sido un descubrimiento muy importante, ya que no se comprendían varias cosas de la memoria... y con ello del universo
cerebral. Se había estimulado con electricidad todas las áreas del cerebro y aún no se podía comprender, cuál era el área de la
memoria; porque los recuerdos aparecían en distintas zonas y en forma aleatoria, sin poder encontrarse un patrón. Tampoco se
sabía cómo el cerebro era capaz de guardar millones de bits de información en tan poco espacio. Hasta que se descubrió EL
HOLOGRAMA. La anatomía y la fisiología del cerebro son aspectos muy importantes para conocer la estática o la dinámica del
funcionamiento cerebral, sin embargo, estos datos no nos revelan el misterio de las señales que circulan por las neuronas, ni su
sistema de codificación, y mucho menos su significado. En resumen, creemos conocer muy bien la organización anatómica y
estructural del cerebro, pero con eso sabríamos muy poco sobre la verdadera fisiología del hombre. Influencia de la física cuántica
en el concepto cerebral - Hace unos años, bastantes por cierto, mas de 20, un físico llamado Aspect descubrió que los electrones
también se "comunican" instantáneamente unos con otros a mil millones de Km de distancia. Otro físico, Bohm, sostuvo, (por
suerte para nosotros) que esa asociación de los electrones del experimento de Aspect, es debido al hecho de que la separación es
una ilusión, y que en realidad cada cosa estaría conectada a otra existente ya que conforman parte de un mismo "organismo." En
1982. El físico Aspect, que trabajaba en la universidad de París] descubrió que sometiendo a determinadas condiciones a las
partículas sub-atómicas como a los electrones, ellas son capaces de comunicarse instantáneamente unas con otras
independientemente de la distancia que las separa, sea 10 metros o 10 mil millones de kilómetros. Es como si cada individual
partícula supiera exactamente que cosa están haciendo todas las demás. Esto hasta la llegada de la física cuántica era un
imposible que Einstein se había encargado de recalcar, estimando que nada, puede viajar más rápido que la velocidad de la luz,
por que contravendría la ley del espacio tiempo. Entonces dos partículas que están a miles de kilómetros no puede influir una
sobre la otra por que no puede viajar la energía entre ambas. (Esta energía, disminuiría mientras viaja y quedaría en 0.) De pronto,
entonces la física cuántica nos dio la respuesta a semejante pregunta, o quizás nos dio una nueva pregunta: ¿Y si las dos
partículas fueran parte de una misma entidad llamada humanidad? David Bohm, es un importante físico de la universidad de
Londres, recientemente fallecido, que fue discípulo de Einstein y luego se diferenció hacia la física cuántica, en aspectos que
Einstein solo vislumbró, y de hecho negó. Bohm opinó, que los descubrimientos de Aspect implican que la realidad objetiva no
existe. , Dijo que pesar de su aparente solidez, el universo es en realidad un fantasma, un holograma gigantesco y
espléndidamente detallado. Un holograma es una fotografía tridimensional producida con la ayuda de un láser. Para crear un
holograma el objeto a fotografiar está sumergido en la luz de un rayo láser, luego a un segundo rayo láser se lo hace rebotar sobre
la luz refleja del primero y el esquema resultante de la zona de interferencia (una especie de sombra), (una parte donde no llega la
luz porque está el objeto entremedio) entonces, el punto donde los dos rayos se encuentran es impreso sobre la película
fotográfica. Cuando la película es revelada resulta visible sólo un enredo de líneas claras y oscuras, pero, al iluminar con otro rayo
láser aparece el sujeto original. Estas imágenes tridimensionales resultantes son ciertamente interesantes, pero más interesante
resulta, que en una imagen holográfica, el todo está en cada parte, ese es el tema que nos asombra. El universo entero contenido
en cada partícula. Tomemos como ejemplo, el holograma de una casa, si lo cortamos a la mitad y luego lo iluminamos con un rayo
láser, se descubrirá que cada mitad todavía contiene la entera imagen de la casa. Si seguimos dividiendo las dos mitades,
veremos que cada minúsculo fragmento de película siempre contendrá una versión más pequeña, pero intacta, de toda la imagen.
Una fotografía normal solo contiene una parte por cada pedazo, el holograma contiene millones de imágenes iguales (pequeñitas)
y si las iluminamos con 2 rayos cada una, se convertirán en hologramas tridimensionales de la imagen. Esta característica de los
hologramas nos muestra una manera totalmente nueva de comprender los conceptos de organización y orden del universo, una
visón unificada del universo, como dice Bohm, el universo no lo podemos ver tal cual es, por que tiene una dimensión implicada,
solo podemos ver una parte que es la que se despliega ante nuestros ojos, como si fuese un holograma que lo podemos ver por
qué lo dos rayos láser están iluminando la imagen. En su evolución, siempre la ciencia ha actuado bajo el prejuicio de que el modo
mejor de entender un fenómeno físico, se trate de un animal o de un átomo, fue cortarlo, reducirlo a la más mínima expresión y
estudiar sus partes. Los hologramas nos enseñan que algunos fenómenos pueden exceder a este tipo de aproximación. La
intuición de Bohm nos muestra una percepción global de la realidad que nos permite comprender el descubrimiento Aspect, ya no
desde esa visión reduccionista de la realidad, sino una visión completa, global que hace un análisis del fenómeno del que somos
parte. Él se convenció de que el motivo por el cual las partículas subatómicas quedan en contacto, independientemente de la
distancia que las separa, reside en el hecho de que su separación es una ilusión. En un cierto nivel de realidad más profunda, tales
partículas no son entidades individuales sino extensiones de un mismo "organismo" fundamental. explicar su teoría Bohm, propuso
que imagináramos un acuario, que contiene un pez y también nos dice que imaginemos que el acuario no lo podemos ver
directamente. Sólo podemos verlo por dos cámaras de video, una está al frente del acuario y la otra al costado, una nos da una
visión frontal y la otra una imagen lateral. Al mirar cada monitor veríamos dos peces y podríamos pensar que son dos seres
separados, individuales, los pensaríamos seres diferentes pero de pronto comenzamos advertir que sus movimientos son los
mismos y que hay una aparente unión entre ellos, cuando uno se vuelve, también el otro se volverá; cuando uno mira frente a sí, el
otro mirará lateralmente. Si nos quedáramos completamente en la oscuridad con el objetivo real del experimento, podríamos llegar
a creer que los dos peces se estén comunicando entre sí, instantánea y misteriosamente. Cuando decimos que las partículas
subatómicas se comunican entre sí, es porque solo podemos ver una parte de la realidad (como ver por cámara de video) Esas
partículas son parte de una unidad, el universo, una realidad más profunda que no podemos observar desde afuera, porque somos
parte de ella, una sola realidad profunda y básica llamada humanidad. Es como la imagen holográfica de la casa, en cada parte
está la totalidad, nada está afuera, todo está en la misma imagen, entonces ya que cada cosa en la realidad física es constituida
por estas "imágenes", se comprueba que el universo mismo es una proyección, un holograma. Si la separación entre las partículas
subatómicas es solo aparente, eso significa que, a un nivel más profundo, todas las cosas están infinitamente conectadas. Los
electrones de un átomo de carbono del cerebro humano están conectados a las partículas subatómicas de todas las cosas de la
humanidad. Un solo todo, entonces ya no podemos considerar las cosas divididas, ni al ser humano en partes, cada subdivisión
necesariamente resulta artificial y toda la naturaleza no es otra cosa que una inmensa red un infinito sistema. En un universo
holográfico el tiempo y el espacio no serían más que principios teóricos ya que conceptos como la localidad (ubicación) es
quebrantada en un universo donde nada está realmente separado del resto, no hay aquí o allá porque también el tiempo y el
espacio tridimensionales como así también las imágenes del pez sobre las cámaras de video, deben ser interpretados como
simples proyecciones de un sistema mucho más complejo. A un nivel más profundo, la realidad no es otra que un tipo de
holograma gigante, dónde el pasado, el presente y el futuro coexisten simultáneamente. Si el universo está organizado según
principios holográficos, cada partícula existente contendría en sí misma la imagen entera, como ya habíamos mencionado y eso al
neurofisiólogo Karl Pribram le dio la explicación clara de lo que tanto buscó el verdadero funcionamiento del proceso de la memoria
y la respuesta estaba en la naturaleza holográfica de la realidad, ésta que hace que los recuerdos sean las imágenes pequeñitas
de las cosas que están en todas partes de este gigante súper-holograma. Memoria holográfica - Los recuerdos no son
almacenados en las neuronas, o en pequeños grupos de neuronas, como se solía suponer, sino en los esquemas de los impulsos
nerviosos que se entrecruzan por todo el cerebro. Por lo tanto, el cerebro mismo funciona como un holograma. La teoría de
Pribram también explica de qué manera este órgano logra contener tantos recuerdos, en un espacio tan limitado. Ha sido calculado
que el cerebro de nuestra especie tiene la capacidad de almacenar cerca de 10 mil millones de informaciones, durante el
transcurso de la vida media, más o menos el equivalente a cinco ediciones de la enciclopedia más grande que conocemos. Se ha
descubierto que también los hologramas poseen una inmensa capacidad de memorización, así es que sencillamente cambiando el
ángulo de los dos rayos láser que golpean una película fotográfica, se puede acumular mil millones de informaciones en un
centímetro cúbico de espacio. Y también correlacionar ideas y descodificar frecuencias de distinto tipo. Tenemos una asombrosa
capacidad de recobrar muy rápidamente cualquier información de nuestro cerebro esto se explica más fácilmente, si se supone
funciona según principios holográficos porque entonces no es necesario hojear el gigantesco archivo alfabético cerebral, ya que
cada fragmento de información contiene imágenes pequeñitas de todo, recuerden que esta era la particularidad típica de los
hologramas. El universo entonces está compuesto de infinitos universos. Otra característica del cerebro, explicable hasta hoy y con
base gracias a la hipótesis de Pribram, es la habilidad cerebral de traducir el alud de frecuencias luminosas, sonoras, etcétera, que
recibe por los sentidos, en el mundo concreto de nuestras percepciones. codificar y descodificar frecuencias eso hace el cerebro,
que es precisamente lo que un holograma hace. Un holograma con sus rayos, es capaz de traducir frecuencias y convertirlas en
una imagen, es capaz de convertir un montón de frecuencias faltas de sentido en una imagen coherente, así el cerebro usa los
principios holográficos para matemáticamente convertir las frecuencias recibidas en percepciones interiores. Scheider en 1905,
sugirió que la percepción es forma, y la forma percepción, de la misma manera como nuestro cuerpo es formado según la génesis
del embrión, luego Karl Lashley, planteó que las líneas de fuerza según las que se desarrolla el embrión pueden formar patrones
de interferencia. En realidad lo que dicen estas investigaciones es que el embrión se desarrolla como se forma un holograma, de la
misma forma... SI EL MUNDO CONCRETO NO ES OTRO QUE UNA REALIDAD SECUNDARIA Y, LO QUE EXISTE NO ES
OTRA COSA QUE UN TORBELLINO HOLOGRÁFICO DE FRECUENCIAS Y, SI EL CEREBRO SÓLO ES UN HOLOGRAMA QUE
SELECCIONA ALGUNAS DE ESTAS FRECUENCIAS,TRANSFORMÁNDOLAS EN PERCEPCIONES SENSORIALES... ¿QUÉ ES
LA REALIDAD, ENTONCES? ESO QUE CREÍMOS REALIDAD, EN VERDAD NO EXISTE. EL MUNDO MATERIAL ES UNA
ILUSIÓN. Nosotros mismos creemos ser seres físicos, individuales, independientes que nos movemos en un mundo físico; pero
todo es parte de una ilusión, es la proyección holográfica del universo que no podemos percibir en su realidad objetiva. En realidad
somos un tipo de "receptores" que flotan en un mar de distintos tipos de frecuencias, y lo que comprendemos del universo lo
transformamos en realidad física. La realidad es una ilusión - Este impresionante nuevo concepto de la realidad ha sido bautizado
"paradigma holográfico" y básicamente nos da la posibilidad de comprender los fenómenos que antes se podían decir estados
alterados de conciencia, o fenómenos paranormales o experiencias cumbres. Desde la ciencia entonces, los estados que no
comprendemos son un paso a un nivel holográfico más elevado, que no podemos visualizar en su totalidad. También la medicina la
psicología la neurofisiología y sobretodo nuestra comprensión de lo que son los estados de salud o enfermedad y los procesos de
cambio de la materia, serían transformados por el paradigma holográfico. En efecto, si la estructura física, mental y sicológica del
cuerpo es una proyección holográfica de la conciencia, está en esa conciencia nuestra salud, y lo que antes podía parecer
curaciones milagrosas hoy se explican como un cambio en el estado de esa conciencia que provoca cambios en el holograma
corpóreo. Sin embargo la existencia de esa enfermedad, también se relaciona con la conciencia de una manera que podemos
comprender solo en el concepto de la realidad implicada del universo. Del mismo modo, se explica la efectividad de técnicas de
visualización porque en el dominio holográfico del pensamiento las imágenes son reales. El mundo concreto es una tela blanca que
espera ser pintada. .. Quizás estemos todos de acuerdo que, exista o no exista, lo que consideramos " la realidad" ha sido
formulada y ratificada a un nivel de conciencia humana en el que todas las mentes están ilimitadamente unidas entre sí. Viejos
conceptos en nuestra mente - Aunque no queramos reconocerlo somos producto de una forma de ver las cosas eminentemente
regida por la visión de la ciencia de occidente, donde priman las conceptualizaciones de un universo, concreto, medible y regido
por ciertas reglas inequívocas que rigen el micro cosmos y macrocosmos con impresionante exactitud. Hemos aprendido a ver el
universo desde un punto de vista material, y esa visión está en el trasfondo de nuestra conciencia; nos es muy difícil estar ajenos a
esa tendencia natural de pensar que las cosas son como las vemos y funcionan exactamente por las reglas de la física newtoniana
con que nos educamos. El método científico quedó en nuestro inconsciente, como el concepto que separa la certeza de un hecho
de una simple teoría, En nuestras mentes todo suceso mensurable según las leyes de newton, es verdadero, todas las cosas que
han sido testeadas en un laboratorio, nos dan confianza. (Esa es una regla del premio Nobel, y la razón por la cual a Einstein no se
le pudo dar el premio, por la teoría de la relatividad, porque no podía reproducirse en un laboratorio). El resto, de las cosas que no
pasa la prueba de ser científico, son sólo teorías, no certezas. Se nos enseñó que algo es verdadero si concuerdan los
experimentos y las mediciones, si no es así, las teorías se irán sucediendo una a una hasta que coincidan los experimentos y esas
mediciones puedan probarse. Eso nos da mucha tranquilidad, de que los avances de la ciencia, son... sin lugar a dudas y nos
muestra fehacientemente que este universo está formado por objetos sólidos, denominados átomos, a la vez formados por otros
objetos sólidos llamados protones, electrones y neutrones, girando como los planetas alrededor del sol, tal como lo aprendimos en
la escuela. Así aprendimos a creer que la realidad es un enorme sistema mecánico que funciona con las leyes básicas de la
naturaleza y que gracias a las leyes de newton no había fenómeno que no pudiéramos describir objetivamente. Se consideraba
que todas las reacciones físicas de la naturaleza, tenían una causa física, es importante decir que en nuestro inconsciente aun esto
está vigente, no hay relación alguna entre energía y materia dentro de esta visión mecanicista de nuestro inconsciente colectivo.
Por eso cuando comenzaron a llegar las religiones orientales, con nuevas propuestas acerca de lo que no veíamos, pero que sin
embargo era verdadero; tuvimos que abrir una sección en nuestras mentes que se llamó: "conocimientos alternativos", una mezcla
entre conocimientos improbables y conocimientos poco serios, porque las reglas de la sociedad científica que nos definía lo
verdadero de lo falso, nos hacía sentir cándidos cuando estimábamos la posibilidad que fuesen ciertos. La perspectiva newtoniana
resulta muy buena para quienes prefieren considerar el mundo como algo sólido y en gran medida inmutable, con una serie de
reglas bien definidas que regulan su funcionamiento. Gran parte de nuestras vidas se siguen rigiendo por la mecánica newtoniana
y probablemente continuarán así durante bastante tiempo en el futuro, porque aunque no queramos estamos regidos por el
espacio tiempo y nuestra vida cotidiana se desarrolla de acuerdo a esos patrones que nos dan, predictibilidad y una sensación de
certeza. Sentimos nuestros cuerpos de modo mecánico. Definimos la mayoría de nuestra experiencia en términos de espacio
tridimensional y tiempo lineal. Todos tenemos relojes. Los necesitamos para seguir con nuestras vidas tal como las hemos
estructurado: de forma esencialmente lineal. Si debemos correr cada mañana esforzándonos por llegar "a tiempo", es lógico que
nos consideremos a nosotros mismos como elementos mecánicos e ignorar la experiencia humana interna, más profunda. Si le
preguntamos a alguien ¿De qué está hecho el universo? Lo más probable es que nos describa el modelo newtoniano del átomo
(los electrones girando alrededor de un núcleo de protones y neutrones). Seres sobrenaturales - Toda la descripción que hemos
hecho del universo holográfico, demuestra que el punto de vista científico de la realidad apoya la idea de que estamos compuestos
por campos energéticos y va, de hecho, mucho más allá, hasta alcanzar reinos que justamente estamos empezando a
experimentar, es decir, nos conduce a una visión holográfica del universo. En este universo, todas las cosas están interconectadas,
correspondiendo a una experiencia holística de la realidad. La maravilla que ha ocurrido con estas nuevas teorías es que van
explicando que lo que antes se consideraba sobrenatural hoy forma parte de la naturaleza La teoría, resumida, viene a decir esto:
nuestros cerebros construyen matemáticamente la realidad «concreta» al interpretar frecuencias de otra dimensión, una esfera de
realidad primaria significativa, pautada, que trasciende el espacio y el tiempo. El cerebro es un holograma que interpreta un
universo holográfico. Los distintos estados de la conciencia (que reflejan estados modificados del cerebro) pueden deberse a una
armonización literal con la matriz invisible que genera la realidad «concreta». El cuerpo y nuestra realidad física responden
plásticamente al estado en que nos encontramos inmersos en este todo, según el estado de la conciencia se conforma y funciona
nuestro organismo como si fuera un espejo que muestra lo que no podemos ver, traduciéndose en una nube de químicos que
comienzan a circular por muestro cuerpo, armando un cuerpo nuevo, en una actitud diferente, minuto a minuto. Somos un tipo de
"receptores" que flotan en un mar de distintos tipos de frecuencias, y lo que comprendemos del universo lo transformamos en
realidad física. Esta magnífica danza con el universo, permite que la realidad interactúe entre sí a un nivel primario, generándose la
precognición, el efecto que el tiempo se ha acelerado o distorsión temporal, el aprendizaje rápido... y la experiencia de la «unidad
con el universo» Entonces la realidad nace físicamente, a partir de sucesos no físicos, no sabemos cómo funciona el proceso y por
eso nuestra resistencia salir de la concepción dualista de una causa próxima y un efecto inmediato. No somos capaces de
renunciar a ese preconcepto porque si no sería como aceptar que existe un universo de orden aleatorio y sobretodo, que no
podemos controlar, con nuestra lógica el orden de los sucesos y sus consecuencias. Es extraño, pero cuando aparece la muerte
repentina o un cáncer fulminante si podemos salir del paradigma y atribuirlo a acción del universo o acción divina. Solo propongo
que lleguemos más allá, que seamos capaces de atisbar la relación que existe entre el ejercicio de nuestra conciencia, y la
respuesta del medio, en que nos desenvolvemos. Causalidad de múltiples opciones - La realidad del mundo actual constituye una
gran red unificada de actividades, ordenes, sucesos, y relaciones que vienen a ser como un polígono, de muchas caras y que no
es fácil de comprender para nuestra mente, hay mucha influencia de un suceso sobre otro que no podemos claramente focalizar,
pues no existe una relación lineal en el tiempo que permita inferir causa, y efecto inmediato. Nosotros queremos para cada suceso,
encontrar una causa una causa "física" y cuando decimos física, decimos que podamos ver con los ojos, y que nos quede claro
que esta concatenada lógicamente al hecho que tratamos de comprender. Sin embargo no es así; la visión holográfica del universo
nos dice que para cada circunstancia existen en el universo al mismo tiempo, todas las posibilidades, y es nuestra conciencia,
guiada por nuestras experiencias pasadas y patrones de recuerdos que han construido un preconcepto de lo que "debe" suceder.
Construimos nos solo las circunstancias, de nuestra vida, como cosechándola del universo según nuestras razones sino que
construimos un cuerpo con determinados químicos, y ondas cerebrales y sensaciones y emociones, para cada hecho. Para
comprender esto, debemos hacer un claro esfuerzo para cambiar el aparato conceptual para comprender las nuevas reglas de del
conocimiento y la actitud común de las personas frente a grandes desafíos como éste, La humanidad tiene el hábito de negar los
hechos, ignorarlos y si los hechos son persistentes, y no pueden hacer mas caso omiso, entonces intentan ponerlos dentro de un
molde, que se ajuste a los parámetros conocidos. Como decir que la física cuántica es sólo teorías. que expresa el pensamiento de
algunos, acerca de una realidad, más que vulnerable, una realidad múltiple Desgraciadamente, lo único conocido es causa y efecto
lineal dentro de un espacio tiempo, inexistente con leyes aprendidas que no son verdaderas. Sin embargo la realidad del universo
con diferentes parámetros se nos esta viniendo encima, esta realidad se ha estado presentando desde mediados de los años
sesenta, se nos ha venido introduciendo en todos los ámbitos del conocimiento se nos ha sobrevenido este cambio de parámetros,
de una manera tan radical, que aunque en un principio solo los locos y los soñadores, en un principio han podido hacerse cargo, es
una realidad que ya no la podemos evadir. Un cerebro que crea - Un cerebro que crea, que extraño suena decirlo,. pues si se ha
establecido que el cerebro al pensar, trabaja sobre la base de patrones de acción, cada aprendizaje especializa una cantidad de
neuronas par determinada acción. En este proceso, el cerebro sigue un procedimiento secuencial de administración de las redes
neuronales involucradas, toma un grupo de neuronas y las especializa en una función psico-motriz y va agregando neuronas a
medida que va necesitando, en función de la complejidad de la tarea, llegando al equilibrio justo entre la cantidad de neuronas que
se usarán y la complejidad del ejercicio motriz. Formándose un grupo de neuronas especiales para el ejercicio, (neuronas que se
saben el ejercicio) a este grupo de neuronas le llamamos RED HEBBIANA, en honor a su descubridor, Hebb. Si practicamos el
ejercicio aprendido durante 20 días 20 minutos diarios llega a un nivel profundo de integración en nuestro organismo, como una
función continua y permanente, el organismo asume que es tarea diaria entonces consolida la función neuronal, fijándola, como un
hábito y habilitando las funciones para que se pueda seguir ejerciendo esa actividad, rápidamente cada vez que se necesite. Pero,
la formación de una red neuronal especial robó otra función, generalmente lo primero que se ocupa para un ejercicio motriz son
neuronas de sensibilidad, perdimos sensibilidad en algún lugar perdimos sensibilidad al tacto. ¿Por qué? Por que las neuronas no
se fabrican para cada aprendizaje, se produce lo que se ha llamado por la ciencia, robo hebbiano, es decir que para este ejercicio
fueron utilizadas las neuronas de la sensibilidad de otro lugar, neuronas de tacto se volvieron neuronas sicomotrices. Leyendo el
código de barras del universo - Este funcionamiento de redes hebbianas, nos es particularmente interesante porque es la forma en
que el cerebro manifiesta lo que percibe del universo, es como si tomara apuntes taquigráficos de la matriz invisible que percibe en
su totalidad y que no tiene como describir, entonces toma posiciones dentro de esta matriz, y las anota en el cerebro formando un
patrón, se lo enseña al cerebro y entonces el cuerpo responde a ese nuevo patrón formando los químicos necesarios para que el
humano sienta, determinados estados, de placer, displacer, movimientos, contracciones musculares, dilataciones de la pupila,
regulación de la temperatura, o de la presión sanguínea. Ahora nos sentimos y percibimos de determinada manera, en un marco
situacional concreto, ahora concretamente estamos percibiendo una realidad. El cerebro fue a buscar ondas electromagnéticas al
universo y las decodificó, fabricando a partir de ese patrón una realidad "Física" en el cuerpo, precisa para nuestros sentidos, una
realidad tangible. Un maravilloso aparato lector de frecuencias y un creador de realidad. Eso es el cerebro, como en la Ciencia
ficción, o en nuestros juegos de la niñez donde imaginábamos que tal vez todo fuera una obra de teatro a nuestro alrededor.
¿Quién no, tuvo alguna vez esa sensación? Poetas como Calderón de la Barca, con su " vida es sueño", cineastas con su Matrix o
Truman Show, y gente común, que atisba de pronto esa percepción de la realidad, como un supuesto interesante aunque absurdo.
Pues resulto ser exactamente así, como lo soñamos. La investigación de estos fenómenos que relacionan la actividad
eléctroquímica del cerebro con una interpretación de la realidad, nos sitúa frente afrente con una re concepción de la EDUCACION
DE NUESTRA CONCIENCIA. Más que desde un punto de vista lógico de un punto de vista relacionado con el menor valor de los
contenidos y la revalorización del contexto en que se enseña. Establecemos una Educación cuyo único sentido son los contextos.
Hacen más sentido, el tono de voz, el estado emocional del profesor, el color de la sala, el olor del colegio, y la música ambiental,
como componentes de un estado en que está inmerso el ser. Porque al educarlo estamos realizando sus memorias, memorias que
harán encuadre a su interpretación de la realidad, según la forma en que se inserte en sus estados contemplativos y comprenda
así el universo. De esa manera se conformará su realidad futura, toda su vida. Entonces lo único que en verdad importa es que
tenga un estado de contacto consigo mismo de mucho agrado, para que las percepciones internas sean serenas, sin angustias, sin
esquemas demasiado rígidos, con una buena aceptación de sí mismo. Con buena estima de los seres que le rodean y de su
inserción en este medio común. que los contiene, llamado universo. Debe aprender de la forma más armoniosa posible, ya que de
ello dependerá su conformación física, sus estados de salud, su carácter, su estado emocional y su vida. Así se confirma el
desarrollo de un ser que no choca con los demás componentes de su realidad, que tiene plena conciencia del sentido de unidad de
la humanidad y de ser uno solo con los demás. Ese es el verdadero sentido de tanta investigación científica, que termino por
concluir una de las verdades milenarias de la religión. Somos uno, con nuestro hermano. Conclusión - Educación entonces es
saber quiénes somos, qué somos, cual es el sentido de nuestra vida, que es el universo, que es una galaxia, o un sistema solar, un
planeta y sus características. Las concepciones sociológicas de los seres de la tierra y sus agrupamientos, convicciones, destinos.
La historia de la humanidad, desde una perspectiva de sentido unitario. Debemos enseñar con sentido de cuál es la concepción
actual del universo y sus funciones holográficas, solamente sabiendo que el verdadero sentido de nuestra existencia es en función
de un silencioso y divino espectador, que podemos llamar Alma, Trascendencia, filosofía, realidades ontológicas del ser que
justifiquen nuestro paso por esta realidad tridimensional en cada segundo de nuestra vida. Quienes somos dentro de este universo
cuántico, somos uno y nos configuramos como una realidad sólo ejerciendo el respeto por el resto constituyente de este único ser
llamado humanidad. Las virtudes en formación. Nos dan sentido de vida, la práctica de la caridad, compasión y el aprendizaje de
las virtudes del alma...

Pleroma
By Charles H. Welch

Of all the terms used in dispensational truth, the Pleroma by its very nature and meaning is surely one of the most comprehensive.
Accordingly, we are setting ourselves no restrictions on space in this Analysis, and have introduced into this volume a full-paged
illustration. We commend this theme to every lover of the Word, and particularly to those who have the responsibility of teaching
others.
The Chart is so mounted that it can be left open for reference while the article is read. (See back of book).

THE PLEROMA
(1) INTRODUCTION AND CHART
THE problem of the ages is the problem of the presence of evil, of the apparent necessity for suffering, yet with a baffled feeling of
frustration. Men like Job and Asaph and books like Ecclesiastes, ventilate this feeling, but the consciousness of redeeming love,
enables the believer to trust where he cannot trace. The present study is set forth with an intense desire, to borrow the words of
Milton "to justify the ways of God with men", to show that there is a most gracious purpose in process, and that there are indications
of that purpose in sufficient clearness to enable the tried believer to say with Job "when He hath tried me, I shall come forth as
gold". In the present study, we commence with the primary creation of Genesis 1:1 which is followed by the "rent" or gap of Genesis
1:2, and conc1ude with the creation of the new heavens and new earth of Revelation twenty-one, which, according to Peter, is
ushered in by a convulsion of nature similar to the condition described as "without form and void" at the beginning. By observing the
parallel between the word of Ephesians 1:4 and 2 Timothy 1:9 we are able to show that "the ages" commence with the
reconstruction of the earth in Genesis 1:3. What follows is a series of "fillings" in the persons of men like Adam, Noah, Abraham,
and Nebuchadnezzar, with the economies associated with them, but all such are provisional, failing and typical only, and they carry
the unfolding purpose on to "the fulness of time" when "the Seed should come to Whom the promises were made". Adam was but a
"filling", he was not "the fulness", that title belongs only to the Lord Jesus Christ Himself. The only company of the redeemed who
are themselves called "the fulness" is the Church of the Mystery, the church of "heavenly places", the church which is most closely
associated with the seated Christ. Two words found in Matthew 9:16 must ever be kept together in the course of this study, they are
the words "fulness", and "fuller". We shall see presently that God is preparing during the ages, as it were a piece of "fulled" cloth, so
that at last there may be a perfected universe, the "rent" of Genesis 1:2 healed, and "God all in all". Fulling involves several
processes, most of them drastic and rigorous. "Clooth that cometh fro the wevying is nought comely to were til it be fulled under
foot" (piers Plowman). Nitre, soap, the teasle, scouring and bleaching processes at length make the shrunken c10th "as white as
snow" (Mark 9:3). We can say, therefore, concerning the problem of the purpose of the ages "no fulness without fulling". We do
most earnestly desire that consummation, when the Son of God shall deliver up to the Father a perfected Kingdom with every
vestige of the "rent" of Genesis 1:2 entirely gone. We do most ardently desire to be found in that day, as part of that blessed
pleroma or fulness, but we must remember that every thread that goes to make the "filling" will have passed through the "fuller's"
hands, "fulled under foot" must precede being "far above all". At the beginning of this volume the reader will find a chart, which
endeavours to set forth the way in which the Divine purpose of the Fulness is accomplished. At either end of the chart stand "the
beginning" and "the end", the black division that immediately follows the former representing the catastrophe of Genesis 1:2,
"without form or void"; the black division that immediately precedes the consummation represents the corresponding state of
dissolution indicated in Isaiah 34:4 and 2 Peter three leading up to 1 Corinthians 15 :24-28. Running along the bottom of the chart is
"the deep" that was the vehic1e of judgment in Genesis 1:2 and that which is to pass away at the end, for John says, "and there
was no more sea" (Rev. 21 :1). By comparing Ephesians 1:4, "before the foundation of the world" with 2 Timothy 1 :8-9, "before the
world began (literally, before age times)" we have the start and the finish of the ages indicated. What follows is a series of "fillings"
rather than a fulness. Adam, Noah, Abraham, Nebuchadnezzar are but "stop-gaps", types and shadows, pointing on. The fulness of
time (Gal. 4:4) did not come until4,OOO years after Adam and the fulness of the times (seasons) will not come until the day which is
about to dawn ushers in the glory that will be revealed, when all things in heaven and on earth will be gathered together under the
Headship of Christ. Not until we reach the dispensation of the Mystery do we come to any company of the redeemed which
constitute a "fulness", and there we read of the Church which is His Body, "the FULNESS of Him, that fi1leth all in all" (Eph. 1:23).
The fulness of the Godhead dwells bodily in Christ, and the heavenly places, far above all, with which both the seated Christ, and
His Church are associated, is a sphere untouched by the catastrophe of Genesis 1:2. Those heavenly places are where Christ sits
far above all heavens (Eph. 4:10), that is, far above the temporary heaven called "the firmament" which is likened to a spread-out
curtain. This "tabernac1e", characteristic of the Adamic earth, is of extreme importance; it places the whole purpose of the ages
under a redeeming regis, and the reader is advised to give the artic1e which deals with this aspect careful attention. As these
studies proceed, we shall turn aside to consider various themes that bear upon the main subject, but unless that main subject is
already held before the mind, we may sometimes "not see the wood for the trees". A reference back to the chart at the
commencement of each section might be wise, and to enable the reader to see at the beginning the course we follow, we conc1ude
this introduction with a conspectus of the artic1es that follow:

2. Some lessons taught by the parable of the "patch" with an answer to the question "are there gaps in the outworking of the
"divine purpose?"
3. Creation, its place in "the purpose", in which the purport of the words "in (the) beginning" are considered.
4. The first "gap". "Without form and void".
5. The present creation, a tabernacle.
6. The testimony of Peter to the days of Noah. This is a new approach to a matter of importance involving the true intention of
2 Peter three.
7. Paradise lost and restored.
8. The filling up of the nations (Genesis 48:19. Rotherham).
9. The fulness of the Gentiles (Romans 11 :25).
10. The title "Head", and its relation to the "Fulness".
11. The fulness of the seasons.
12. All the fulness of God.
13. All the fulness of the Godhead. Bodily-wise

(2) SOME LESSONS TAUGHT BY THE PARABLE OF THE "PATCH"

To the reader who has travelled so far, we trust the principle of Right Division needs neither introduction nor commendation. Its
recognition underlies every article that has been printed in these pages, and determines both the Gospel we preach, the Church to
which we belong, and the hope that is before us. Dispensational Truth is not confined to one aspect or phase of the Divine purpose,
for every dealing of God with man, whether under law or grace, whether with saint or sinner, has its own dispensational colouring
which is inherent to its teaching and is in no wise accidental. Much has yet to be written and presented along these suggestive and
attractive lines of study, but the particular application of this principle, now before us, focuses the reader's attention upon one thing,
namely, that while in the mind of God the whole purpose of the ages is seen as one and its end assured, in the outworking of that
purpose, the fact that moral creatures are involved, creatures that can and alas do exercise their liberty to disobey as well as to
obey the revealed will of God, has had an effect upon the manifest unfolding of the purpose of the ages. This is seen as a series of
"gaps" and "postponements" which are filled by new phases and aspects of the purpose until at length He Who was once "All" in a
universe that mechanically and unconsciously obeyed, will at length be "All in all" in a universe of willing and intelligent creatures,
whose standing will not be that of Creation and Nature, but in Redemption and Grace. In this section we can do little else than
indicate the presence of these "gaps" and consider the terms that are employed in the Hebrew of the O.T. and the Greek of the N.T.
and of the LXX. The well-known example of the Saviour's recognition of a "gap" in the prophecy of Isaiah sixty-one must be
repeated for the sake of completeness and for the value of its endorsement. We learn from the fourth chapter of Luke's Gospel, that
the Lord attended the service at the Synagogue at Nazareth, and apparently, after the reading of the law by the official reader of the
Synagogue, He stood up "for to read" the Haphthorah, or the recognized portion from "the Prophets" that was appointed for the day.
He found the place, and commenced to read from Isaiah sixty-one. Now it is laid down by Maimonides that: "He that reads in the
prophets, was to read at least one and twenty verses", but he allowed that if "the sense" be finished in less, the reader was under
no necessity to read so many. Even so, it must have caused a deal of surprise to the congregation then gathered, for Christ to read
but one verse and one sentence of the second verse, shut the book, and sit down. He did so because "the sense" was indeed
finished in less than twenty-one verses. He was about to focus attention upon one aspect of His work, and said: "This day is this
Scripture fulfilled in your ears" (Luke 4:21). The sentence with which the Saviour closed His reading of Isaiah sixty-one was "to
proclaim the acceptable year of the Lord". The next sentence, separated in the A.V. by but a comma reads "and the day of
vengeance of our God" yet that comma represents a "gap" of at least nineteen hundred years, for the days of vengeance are not
referred to until in Luke 21:22 when the Second Coming and the end of the age is at hand. This passage we have examined in the
article DIVISION. The recognition of some such gap is important when reading passages like 1 Peter 1:11, or the quotation of Joel
2:28-32 in Acts two. Peter, who was a minister of the circumcision, refers to the testimony of the prophets, as though "the sufferings
of Christ and the glories that should follow" had no interval of centuries between them. The outpouring of the Spirit on the day of
Pentecost is linked with the blood and fire and vapour of smoke that usher in the great and notable day of the Lord, even though
Pentecost took place nineteen hundred years ago and the day of the Lord has not yet come. (See PENTECOST.) We shall discover
that the whole purpose of the ages is a series of "gaps" each filled by a succeeding dispensation, which in its turn lapses, until the
central dispensation, that of the Mystery, is reached, which, though it has had a central period of darkness and ignorance yet is not
succeeded by any other, as the other dispensations have been. All that follow the Mystery are resumptions of the dispensations
which had come to a temporary halt. This peculiar and central dispensation is occupied by the Church, which alone of all companies
of the redeemed is called "the fulness of Him that filleth all in all" (Eph. 1:23). The word translated fulness is the Greek pleroma, and
its first occurrence in the N.T. places it in contrast with a "rent" or a "gap". The two references are: "No man putteth a piece of new
cloth unto an old garment, for that which is put in to fill it up taketh from the garment, and the rent is made worse" (Matt. 9:16). "No
man also seweth a piece of new cloth on an old garment; else the new piece that filled it up taketh away from the old, and the rent is
made worse" (Mark 2:21). The parallel passage in Luke is Luke 5:36 which must be added, though it does not use the word
pleroma. "No man putteth a piece of a new garment upon an old; if otherwise, then both the new maketh a rent, and the piece that
was taken out of the new agreeth not with the old" (Luke 5 :36). The words that call for attention are: "That which is put in to fill up".
This is the translation of the Greek pleroma a word of extreme importance in the epistles, and there translated "fulness". In contrast
with this "fulness" is the word "rent" which in the Greek is schisma. The word translated "new" in Matthew 9:16, and in Mark 2:21 is
agnaphos, not yet fulled, or dressed, from gnapheus, a fuller. (See NEW.) In place of "put into" or "put upon" used in Matthew 9:16
and Luke 5:36, we find the word "to sew on", epirrhapto employed in Mark 2:21. One other word is suggestive, the word translated
"agree" in Luke 5:36. It is the Greek sumphoneo. Now as these terms will be referred to in the course of the following exposition, we
will take the present opportunity of enlarging a little on their meaning and relationship here, and so prepare the way. Pleroma. This
word which is derived from pleroo "to :fill" occurs seventeen times in the N.T. Three of these occurrences occur in Matthew and
Mark, the remaining fourteen occurrences are found in John's Gospel and in Paul's epistles. It is noteworthy that the word pleroma
"fulness" is never used in the epistles of the Circumcision. When Peter spoke of the problem of the "gap" suggested by the words,
"where is the promise of His coming?" he referred his readers to the epistles of Paul, who, said he, deals with this matter of
longsuffering and apparent postponement and speaks of these things (2 Pet. 3:15,16). The word pleroma is used in the Septuagint
some fifteen times. These we will record for the benefit of the reader who may not have access to that ancient translation. 1
Chronicles 16:32, "Let the sea roar and the fulness thereof". So, Psalm 96:11, 98:7. "The earth is the Lord's and the fulness thereof"
Ps. 24:1, so with slight variations, Psalm 50:12; 89:11. In several passages, the fulness, or "all that is therein" is set over against
flood or famine, as Jeremiah 8:16; 47:2, Ezek. 12:19; 19:7, and 30:12. Some of the words used in the context of these Septuagint
references are too suggestive to be passed over without comment. Instead of a "time of healing" we find "anxiety", the land
"quaking", "deadly serpents" and a "distressed heart" (Jer. 8:15-18). Again, in Jeremiah 47:2 (29:2 in the LXX), we have such words
of prophetic and age-time significance as "an overflowing flood" Greek katakluzomai, kataklusmos and variants, a word used with
dispensational significance in 2 Peter 2:5 and 3:6, and preserved in the English "cataclysm", a word of similar import to that which
we have translated "the overthrow" of the world. The bearing of 2 Peter two on this "gap" in the outworking of the purpose of the
ages, will be given an examination here. In the context of the word "fulness" found in EzekieI12:19, we have such words as "scatter"
diaspeiro, a word used in James 1:1 and in 1 Peter 1:1 of the "dispersed" or "scattered" tribes of Israel, also the word "waste", which
calls up such passages of prophetic import as Isaiah 34:10,11, and Jeremiah 4:23-27 where the actual words employed in Genesis
1:2 are repeated. The pleroma or "fulness" is placed in direct contrast with desolation, waste, flood, fire, scattering, and a condition
that is without form and void. Schisma, the word translated "rent" in Matthew 9: 16, is from schizo which is used of the veil of the
temple and of the rocks that were "rent" at the time of the Saviour's death and resurrection. Agnaphos, translated "new", refers to
the work of a "fuller", who smooths a cloth by carding. The work of a fuller also includes the washing and scouring process in which
fuller's earth or fuller's soap (Mal. 3:2, Mark 9:3) is employed. A piece of cloth thus treated loses its original harshness, and more
readily "agrees with" the cloth that has been more often washed. The whole process of the ages is set forth under the symbol of the
work of a fuller, who by beating and by bleaching at length produces a material which is the acme of human attainment, for when
the Scriptures would describe the excellent glory of the Lord, His garments are said to have been "exceeding white as snow, so as
no fuller on earth can white them" (Mark 9:3). So too, the effect upon Israel of the Second Coming is likened to "a refiner's fire and
like fuller's soap" (Mal. 3 :2). It is this "fulled" cloth that makes the "fulness", although there is no etymological connexion between
these like-sounding words. There is another word translated "new", kainos, which has the meaning of "fresh, as opposed to old",
"new, different from the former", and as a compound, the meaning "to renew". It is this word that is used when speaking of the new
covenant, the new creation, the new man, and the new heaven and earth. We shall have to take this into account when we are
developing the meaning and purpose of the "fulness". The Septuagint version of Job 14:12 reads in place of, "till the heavens be no
more", "till the heavens are unsewn"! The bearing of this upon the argument of 2 Peter three, the present firmament, and the
fulness, will appear more clearly as we proceed. Finally, we have the word sumphoneo "to agree". Sumphonia is translated "music"
in Luke 15:25, and of course is the Greek original of our word Symphony. In Ecclesiastes 7:14, the word is used with a rather
different meaning than "agreement". "In the day of prosperity be joyful, but in the day of adversity consider: God also hath set the
one over against the other, to the end that man should find nothing after him". This God will do when at the end of the ages He sets
His Peace over against the present conflict, and symphony takes the place of discord. The presence of so many terms of age-
importance in the homely parable of the patching of a torn garment is wonderful in itself, but the wonder grows when we remember
that He, in Whom dwells all the pleroma of the Godhead bodily, used this profound and significant term in such a homely and lowly
connexion. However vas the purpose of the ages may be, and however difficult it is for mortal minds to follow, the first use of
pleroma in the N.T. encourages the reader in his search, for does not the purpose of the ages at length lead to a sphere where all
things are new, where that which caused the rent or overthrow is entirely removed, and the Father is at length at home with His
redeemed family?

(3) CREATION, AND ITS PLACE IN THE PURPOSE

In the vision of Ezekiel, recorded in the opening chapters of his prophecy, the prophet saw the living creature which he afterward
identified with the cherubim (Ezek. 10:20). These not only had four faces, namely that of a man, a lion, an ox and an eagle (Ezek. 1:
10), but were associated with dreadful rings and wheels, "as it were a wheel in the middle of a wheel" (Ezek. 1: 16). This element of
complication, one wheel within another, seems to be a reflection of the way in which one dispensation encloses another, so that
between the annunciation of the opening phase of the purpose, and the attainment of its purpose and goal, a great gap intervenes,
which is filled by another and yet another succeeding dispensation until in the "fulness" of time Christ came (Gal. 4:4) born of a
woman, with a view to the fulness of the seasons (Eph. I: 10), when He in Whom all the fulness dwells (Col. 1:19) shall bring this
purpose of the ages to its blessed consummation. In harmony with the fact that this purpose is redemptive in character, various
companies of the redeemed during the ages have been associated with this word "fulness", even the earth itself and its fulness
being linked with the glory of the Lord (Isa. 6:3 margin). The outworking of the purpose of the ages, therefore, can be represented,
very crudely it is true, thus: The purpose of the ages opens with Genesis 1: 1 in the creation of the heavens and the earth, but
between the attainment of the purpose for which heaven and earth were created "in the beginning", and the day when God shall be
"all in all" lies a great gulf, a gulf caused by a moral catastrophe and not merely by a physical land-slide, a gap that is "filled" by a
series of wheels within wheels, Adam and his world, Noah and his world, Israel and their inheritance, and at last that church which
is itself "the fulness of Him that filleth all in all". The two extremes, therefore, of the purpose are found in the following passages
which are themselves separated in the sacred volume by the rest of the Scriptures and by the Age- Times. "In the beginning God
created the heavens and the earth" (Gen. 1:1). "Then cometh the End" (1 Cor. 15:24-28). The "gap" in the outworking of the
purpose is expressed in Genesis 1:2, "The earth was without form and void and darkness was upon the face of the deep", and in
Revelation 21:1 by the added words: "For the first heaven and the first earth were passed away; and there was no more sea." Let
us consider in fuller detail some of the terms that are here employed to set before us this opening and closing feature of the purpose
of the ages. "In the beginning". Hebrew b're-shith, Septuagint Greek en arche. While the fact must not be unduly stressed, it should
be observed that neither in the Hebrew nor in the Greek is the article "the" actually used. Moreover, it is certain that b're-shith
denotes the commencement at a point of time as Jeremiah 26:1, 27:1 and 28:1 will show. But it is also very certain that the
selfsame word denotes something more than a point of departure in time, for it is used by Jeremiah in 2:3 for "the firstfruits", even
as it is used in Leviticus 2:12 and 23:10 which are "beginnings" in that they anticipate the harvest at the end, "the fulness of
seasons" (Eph. 1:10). The "beginning" of Genesis 1:1 purposely looks to the end; it is more than a note of time. The same can be
said of the Greek arche. While it most certainly means "beginning" , it is noteworthy that in Genesis 1: 16 where the next
occurrences are found (in the LXX) it means "rule" even as in Ephesians 1:21, 3:10 and 6:12 arche in the plural is translated
"principalities" while in Philippians 4:15 it is used once again in its ordinary time sense. While God knows the end from the
beginning, and nothing which He has caused to be written for our learning can ever be anything but the truth, we must nevertheless
be prepared to find that much truth is veiled in the O.T. until in the wisdom of God, the time was ripe for fuller teaching. If we leave
Genesis 1 : 1 and go straight over to the last book of Scripture, namely the book of the Revelation, we shall see that the words "in
the beginning" acquire a fuller sense than was possible at the time when they were first written by Moses. Arche occurs in
Revelation four times, as follows: "I am the Alpha and Omega, the beginning and the ending, saith the Lord, which is, and which
was, and which is to come, the Almighty". "These things saith the Amen, the faithful and true witness, the beginning of the creation
of God". "And He said unto me, It is done. I am Alpha and Omega, the beginning and the end. I will give unto him that is athirst of
the fountain of the water of life freely." "I am Alpha and Omega, the beginning and the end, the first and the last" (Rev. 1 :8; 3:14; 21
:6; 22:13). Here, in the last book of the Bible arche ceases to bear a time significance, it is the title of a Person, a Person in Whom
Creation and the purpose of the ages find their meaning and their goal. Paul uses arche eighteen times, the word having the time
sense "beginning" in five occurrences (Phil. 4:15, the only occurrence with this meaning in the Prison Epistles), once in the earlier
epistles (2 Thess. 2:13) and three times in Hebrews (1:10, 2:3; 7:3). The remaining references have the meaning "principalities",
"rule" and "principles" (Rom. 8:38, 1 Cor. 15:24, Eph. 1:21; 3:10; 6:12, Col. 1:16,18; 2:10,15, Tit. 3:1, Heb. 6:1). The Hebrew word
rosh, which gives us the word for "beginning" , is translated "head" in Genesis 3: 15 and both "beginning" and "head" in Exodus 12:2
and 9 respectively. In Colossians 1 :18, Paul uses arche of Christ in a somewhat similar sense to the usage of the word in the
Revelation. "Who is the Image of the Invisib1e God, the firstborn of every creature: for by Him were all things created . . . and He is
the head of the body, the church: Who Is THE BEGINNING, the firstborn from the dead . . . in Him should ALL FULNESS dwell"
(Col. 1:15-19). The two phrases "by Him" all things were created, and "in Him" all fulness dwells, are obviously complementary. It is
a fact, that the preposition en is translated many times "by", but it is difficult to understand how it is that in Colossians 1: 16 en auto
should be translated "By Him" while in Colossians 1 :19 en auto should be translated "IN Him". Moreover the preposition en occurs
in the phrases "in heaven", "in all things". Again, the A.V. reads in verse 17, "By Him all things consist" where the preposition is dia,
which only makes the need more felt that en should not be translated "by" in the same context. There does not appear any
grammatical necessity to depart from the primary meaning of en "in" in Colossians 1:16, and this is the considered opinion of such
exegetes as Bishop Lightfoot and Dean Alford, and the translators of the R.V. "In Him" therefore, all things were created (Col. 1:16);
He Himse1f is "the beginning" in the New Creation (Col. 1:18) even as He is "the beginning of the Creation of God" (Rev. 3:14). We
therefore return to Gen. 1:1 and read with fuller insight and meaning "IN THE BEGINNING God created the heaven and the earth".
When dealing with the word pleroma, this passage in Colossians will naturally come up for a more detailed examination. Christ is
"the Beginning" of Genesis 1:1, although at the time of Moses such a truth was not c1early perceived, just as the significance of the
name Jehovah was not realized before the revelation given in the days of Moses. What was known as the Creation of the Almighty,
is subsequently revealed to have been the work of Jehovah, the God of Redemption. In Genesis 1:1 we learn that Elohim "God"
created the heaven and the earth, and subsequently we learn in John one, Colossians one and Hebrews one that all was the work
of Him Who is "The Word", "The Image", the "One Mediator". Prom the beginning, creation had in view the redemptive purpose of
the ages, but just as it would have been impolitic to have answered the question of the Apostles in Acts 1:6 before the time, so the
true purpose of Creation was not revealed until man had sinned and Christ had died for his redemption. Bara, the word translated
create, must now be given a consideration. Metaphysics, "the science of things transcending what is physical or natural", attempts
to deal with the question of "being" and in that department of thought the question of creating "something out of nothing" naturally
arises. Scripture, however, never discusses this metaphysical problem. Even in Genesis 1: 1 it does NOT say, "in the beginning
God created the basic matter of the Universe", it commences with a highly organized and differentiated universe "heaven and
earth". The Hebrew word bara in its primary meaning of "create" is reserved only for the work of God, not being used of man, except
in a secondary sense, and that in five passages only, out of fifty-four occurrences. (Josh, 17:15,18,1 Sam. 2:29, Ezek. 21
:19and23:47.) Adam is said to be "created", although the "dust of the ground" from which he was made was in existence long
before. God is said to be the Creator of Israel (Isa. 43:1,7,15), yet Israel descended from Abraham. Bara gives us the Chaldaic word
bar "son", which but perpetuates the idea already recognized in bara. The Septuagint translates Joshua 17:15 and 18, "thou shalt
clar it", which the A.V. renders "cut down", thereby revealing, as the lexicographers point out, that bara primarily means "to cut, to
carve out, to form by cutting". When we remember that the word "the world" kosmos is derived from the word kosmeo "to adorn", as
with "goodly stones", with "gold" and "to garnish" as with all manner of precious stones (Luke 21 :5, 1 Tim. 2:9, Rev. 21 :2,19) we
perceive a richer reason for the choice of bara. The words with which revelation opens, "in the beginning God created the heavens
and the earth" begin to bear deeper significance. "In Him Who is the beginning of the Creation of God, Elohim, Who was
subsequently known as Jehovah, the God of Redemption, fashioned as one would a precious stone, the heavens and the earth".
Creation was dual, from the start. Not heaven only, but heaven and earth. Man was created male and female, and before we read of
the generations of Adam, namely of his descendants, we read of the "generations of the heavens and the earth" (Gen. 2:4). Heaven
is intimately concerned with the earth; in the heavens God is "ALL" ("the Heavens do rule", "as it is in heaven") and when at last the
Will of God is done on earth as it is in heaven, the goal of the ages will be attained, and God will not only be "All" but "All in all".
Such are faint shadows of His ways. By searching we shall never find out God unto perfection, but to stand as we have in a cleft of
the Rock while His glory passes before us, and be permitted to behold even the "back part" of His ways is joy unspeakable: "Lo,
these are but the outlines of His ways; A whisper only, that we hear of Him; His wondrous pow'r, who then, can comprehend?" (Job
26:14, Dr. Bullinger's Metrieal Version).

(4) THE FIRST "GAP". "WITHOUT FORM AND VOID"

Whatever the ultimate purpose of creation may prove to be, it is certain that it will not be attained without much sorrow and great
sacrifice; "the Fuller" will be at work, and between the opening announcement of Creation in Genesis I: 1 and the bringing in of the
New Heaven and New Earth (Rev. 21:1, 2 Pet. 3: 13) will roll the eons or the ages with their burden of sin and of redeeming love.
When the new heaven and earth was seen by John in the Apocalypse, he adds the words "and there was no more sea". That is a
most evident reference back to Genesis 1:2, where darkness and the deep are there revealed. "And the earth was without form and
void; and darkness was upon the face of the deep" (Gen. 1:2). Thus the condition that is described in Genesis 1:2 is inc1uded with
the other "no mores" of Revelation 21:1,4 and 22:3. When we read in Genesis that man "became" a living soul, we immediately
gather that he was not a living soul before he breathed the breath of life. When we read that Lot's wife "became" a pillar of salt
(Gen. 19:26), we understand that this was consequent upon her looking back. When Cain said, "And it shall come to pass" (Gen.
4:14) we understand his fears concerning what would happen after others had heard of his deed. So, when we read, "the earth was
without form and void", and realize that the same verb that is here translated "was", is translated "became" or "come to pass" in
these other passages in Genesis, we realize that here in Genesis 1:2, we are looking at the record of the first great gap in the
outworking of the Divine purpose, and must read: "And the earth BECAME without form and void". The translation "was" in Genesis
1:2, however, is perfectly good, for in our usage we often mean "became" when "was" is written. A speaker at a meeting of the
Victoria Institute used the following illustration. If writing on two occasions concerning a friend we should say (1) "He was a man",
and (2) "He was very ill", everyone would understand that in the second case, this friend had "become" ill, and so "was" ill at the
time spoken of, but it would be impossible to think that anyone would understand by the word "he was ill" that he had been created,
or born in that state. Darkness both in the O.T. and in the N.T. is associated with death, judgment and evil, and Paul's use of
Genesis 1:2,3 in the words, "God, Who commanded the light to shine out of darkness" (2 Cor. 4:6) most surely indicates that in his
estimation, the darkness of Genesis 1 :2 is a fit symbol of the spiritual darkness of the unregenerate mind. Two words, however, are
found in Genesis 1:2, which are so used in subsequent Scriptures as to compel every one that realizes what a great place "usage"
has in interpretation, to acknowledge that nothing but catastrophic judgment can be intended by this verse. The two words that
describe the condition of the earth, in verse two are the Hebrew words tohu and bohu, "without form and void". Tohu occurs twenty
times in the O.T. and bohu twice elsewhere. The only occurrence of tohu by itself in the writings of Moses is Deuteronomy 32:10,
where it refers to "the waste howling wilderness". The use which Isaiah makes of this word is highly suggestive and full of
instruction. Isaiah twenty-four. This chapter opens with a judgment that is reminiscent of Genesis 1:2. "Behold the Lord maketh the
earth empty, and maketh it waste, and turneth it upside down, and scattereth abroad the inhabitants thereof . . . the land shall be
utterly emptied, and utterly spoiled" (Isa. 24:1,3). When Isaiah would once again refer to this state of affairs, he sums it up in the
epithet, "the city of confusion (tohu)" Isaiah 24:10, and there can be no doubt but that the desolation here spoken of is the result of
judgment. Another example of its usage is found in Isaiah 45:18, "For thus saith the Lord that created the heavens; God Himself that
formed the earth and made it; He hath established it, He created it not in vain, He formed it to be inhabited". Here the A.V. treats the
word tohu as an adverb "in vain" which the R.V. corrects, reading "a waste". Whatever rendering we may adopt, one thing is certain.
Isaiah 45:18 dec1ares in the name of Him Who created the heavens, who formed the earth and made it, that He did not create it
TOHU, it therefore must have become so. Even more convincing are the two passages other than Gen. 1:2, where bohu is
employed, for in both instances the word is combined with tohu. The first passage is Isaiah 34:11. The context is one of catastrophic
judgment and upheaval. The presence of such terms as "indignation", "fury", "utterly destroy", "sword" and "vengeance" in the first
eight verses are sufficient to prove this, and one verse is so definitely prophetic of the upheaval at the time of the end, as to 1eave
no option in the mind. "And all the host of heaven shall be dissolved, and the heavens shall be rolled together as a scroll: and all
their host shall fall down, as the leaf falleth off from the vine, and as a falling fig from the fig tree" (Isaiah 34:4). This passage is
almost identica1 with the 1anguage employed by Peter when he speaks of the signs that shall precede the coming of the day of
God and the setting up of the new heavens and the new earth, wherein dwelleth righteousness (2 Pet. 3:13). The words tohu and
bohu occur in Isaiah 34:11, to which al1 these symbo1s of judgment point: "He shall stretch out upon it the line of confusion (tohu)
and the stones of emptiness (bohu)", nor is it without significance that unclean birds like the cormorant and the bittern possess this
devoted land, that nettles and brambles appear in the fortresses, and that dragons, wild beasts, screech owls and satyrs gather
there. The whole is a picture in miniature of what the earth became in Genesis 1:2. Isaiah's usage of tohu and bohu is convincing,
but "in the mouth of two or three witnesses every word shall be established", and accordingly we find the prophet Jeremiah using
tohu and bohu in a similar context. In the structure of Jeremiah four, verses 5-7 are in correspondence with verses 19-31: "The lion
is come up from his thicket, and the destroyer of the Gentiles is on his way; he is gone forth from his place to make thy land
desolate; and thy cities shall be laid waste, without an inhabitant" (Jer. 4:7). "Destruction upon destruction is cried". "I beheld the
earth, and lo it was without form, and void; and the heavens, and they had no light. . . 10, there was no man . . . lo, the fruitful place
was a wilderness. . ." ". . . broken down. . . by His fierce anger" (Jer. 4:20-26). Here then are the three inspired occurrences of the
two words tohu and bohu, Genesis 1:2, Isaiah 34:11 and Jeremiah 4:23. If Genesis 1:2 does not refer to a day of "vengeance" or
"fierce anger" should we not have to acknowledge that both Isaiah and Jeremiah by the use of these peculiar words, have misled
us? And if once that be our conclusion, inspiration is invalidated, and it does not matter much what Genesis 1:2 means, for our trust
is shaken, and Moses is evidently wrong: this, however, cannot be. All Scripture is given by Inspiration of God, and Moses, Isaiah
and Jeremiah speak with one voice, because inspired by one Spirit. Nothing is said in Genesis 1:2, concerning the cause of this
primeval judgment, any more than any statement is offered to explain the presence of the serpent in the Garden of Eden, but there
are evidences that can be gathered from various parts of Scripture to make it clear that there was a fall among the angels, that
Satan is a fallen being, and that the catastrophe of Genesis 1:2 is associated with that fall. Into the "gap" thus formed, the present
six-day creation is placed as a temporary "fulness" ("replenish the earth" Genesis 1:28), carrying the Redemptive purpose on to the
threshold of Eternity. It is here also that "age-times" begin. See ANGELS, FALLEN. CHERUBIM. SATAN.

(5) THE PRESENT CREATION, A TABERNACLE

"The things which are seen are temporal" (2 Cor. 4:18). "For by Him were all things created that are in heaven and that are in earth,
visible and invisible" (Col. 1: 16). "And the Spirit of God moved upon the face of the waters, and God said, Let there be light; and
there was light" (Gen. 1:2,3). With these words of Genesis the first movement toward the goal of the ages is recorded. That it
indicates a regenerative, redemptive movement, is made clear by the allegorical use that Paul makes of it when writing to the
Corinthians. "For God, Who commanded the light to shine out of darkness, hath shined in our hearts, to give the light of the
knowledge of the glory of God in the face of Jesus Christ" (2 Cor. 4:6). When we come to consider the place that Israel occupies in
the outworking of the purpose of the ages, we shall find that there will be repeated in their case these allegorical fulfilments of
Genesis 1:2,3. "And He will destroy in this mountain the face of the covering cast over all people, and the vail that is spread over all
nations" (Isa. 25:7). The "veil" plays a big part in the imagery of 2 Corinthians three and four. Like the rising of light in Genesis 1 :3,
Israel's light shall dispel the gross darkness that has engulfed the nations (Isa. 60:1,2), and both in this passage, in 2 Corinthians
4:6 and from such prophetic passages as Isaiah 11:9, "the earth shall be full of the knowledge of the Lord, as the waters cover the
sea", we perceive that "light" symbolizes "knowledge" and prepares us to find in the midst of the garden not only the tree of life, but
the tree of the knowledge of good and evil. These matters, however, are anticipatory of future studies, and the parallel of Israel with
the six days creation will be better seen when we reach the Scriptures that speak of their call and destiny. At present we must
confine ourselves to the consideration of the fact that here, in the calling into existence of the creation of the six days, we meet the
first of a series of "fulnesses" that carry the purpose of the ages on to their glorious goal. When we traverse the gap formed by the
entry of sin and death, and reach the other extreme of this present creation, we find that instead of natural light as in Genesis 1 :3,
"The Lamb is the light thereof", "The Lord God giveth them light", and we read further that the city "had no need of the sun neither of
the moon". Instead of the stars which are spoken of in Genesis 1:16, we have the Lord holding "the seven stars in His right hand",
and He Himself set forth as "the bright and morning star". These are indications that "the former things" are about to pass away.
Perhaps the most suggestive item in the six days' creation, apart from man who was made in the Image of God, is the provision of
the "Firmaments". "And God said, Let there be a firmament in the midst of the waters, and let it divide the waters from the waters. . .
and God called the firmament Heaven" (Gen. 1 :6-8). The first fact that emerges from this passage, whatever for the moment the
word "firmament" may prove to mean, is that this firmament which was "called" heaven must be distinguished from that which was
created "in the beginning" . Here is something peculiar to the present temporary creation, and as we shall discover, destined to pass
away at the time of the end. The margin of the A.V. draws attention to the fact that the Hebrew word raqia translated "firmament"
means, literally, an "expansion", and so indicates the Scriptural anticipation by many thousand years, of the modern scientists'
"expanding universe". Raqah the verb is used by Jeremiah to speak of "silver spread into plates" (Jer. 10:9). Job speaks of Him
"which alone spreadeth out the heavens" (Job 9:8), and who "stretcheth out the north over the empty place" (tohu, "without form" of
Genesis 1:2), (Job 26:7). The stretched-out heavens are likened to a tent or tabernacle. "That stretcheth out the heavens as a
curtain, and spreadeth them out as a tent to dwell in" (Isa. 40:22). "He that created the heavens, and stretched them out" (Isa 42:5).
"That stretched forth the heavens alone" (Isa. 44:24; 51:13; Zech. 12:1) Not only is the firmament spoken of in language that
reminds of the Tabernacle, there is a reference in Job, that suggests that the earth too, is looked upon as the ground upon which
this tabernacle of the sky rests. "Whereupon are the foundations thereof fastened?" (Job 38:6). At first sight there may not appear
much in this passage to link it with the tabernacle, but when it is known that this same word which is translated "foundation" is
translated "socket" fifty-three times, and that fifty-two of the occurrences refer to the sockets on which the Tabernacle rested in the
wilderness, then the reference in Job thirty-eight, takes on a richer and deeper meaning. The firmament of Genesis 1:6 is a lesser
and temporary "heaven", destined like a tent to be folded up and to pass away when the ages come to an end. The "firmament" is
not merely the distant "heaven" of the sun, the moon and stars, it is also the place where birds can fly (Gen. 1:20) consequently we
can understand that when Christ ascended, He is said to have "passed through the heavens", dierchomai not "passed into" (Heb.
4:14). (The student should note that this reference is omitted in Young's Analytical Concordance to the Bible.) In Hebrews 7:26
Christ is said to have been "made higher" than the heavens, while Ephesians declares that He ascended up "far above all heavens"
with the object that He might "fill" all things (Eph. 4:10). Christ is said to have passed through the heavens, to have been made
higher than the heavens, and to have ascended up far above all heavens, consequently it is impossible for Him to be far above all
heavens, and yet be at the same time seated in those very heavens, for even though knowledge of heaven and heavenly things
may be very limited, we can understand the simple import of the language used. Consequently we discover that two words are
employed for "heaven", one ouranos, which includes the highest sphere of all, but nevertheless can be used of that "heaven" which
is to pass away (Matt. 5:18), of the "air" where birds fly (Matt. 6:26), the heaven of the "stars" (Matt. 24:29) and of the "angels" (Mark
13:32), and the other epouranios. We perceive that in many passages ouranos refers to the "firmament" of Genesis 1:6, while
epouranios refers to the heaven of Genesis 1:1 which was unaffected by the overthrow of verse 2, will not be dissolved and pass
away, and is where Christ now sits at the right hand of God "far above all of the heavens". Hebrews 9:24 speaks of this sphere as
"heaven itself". In two passages, the heavens are said to be rolled together or to depart "as a scroll" (Isa. 34:4, Rev. 6:14). The
present heaven and earth is a temporary "tabernacle" (Psa. 19:4) in which the God of Creation can dwell as the God of
Redemption. This creation is to be folded up as a garment (Heb. 1:11,12), the firmament is likened to the curtains of a tabernacle,
which will be "unstitched" at the time of the end (Job 14:12 LXX margin), and pass away as a scroll. The figure is one that appeals
to the imagination. A scroll of parchment stretched out and suddenly released, is a figure employed to indicate the sudden departure
of the "firmament", "the stretched out heavens". The word used in Revelation 6:14 is apochorizomai, which occurs but once
elsewhere, and that of a departure that followed a violent "paroxysm" or "contention" (Acts 15:39). Chorizo which forms part of this
word means "to put asunder" (Matt. 19:6); and "separate" (Rom. 8:35). Isaiah 34:4 which speaks of the heavens being rolled
together as a scroll, and so speaks of the "firmament" of Genesis 1 :6, leads on to the repetition of the condition of Genesis 1 :2, for
in Isaiah 34:11, as we have seen, "confusion" is tohu and "emptiness" is bohu, the two words translated "without form and void".
The position at which the record of the ages has now reached is as follows:

Into the gap caused by the overthrow of Genesis 1:2, is placed the present creation which together with its temporary heaven is to
pass away. This present creation, headed by Adam, constitutes the first of a series of "fulnesses" that follow a series of "gaps" until
we at length arrive at Him, in Whom "All fulness dwells". We read in Genesis 1 :28, "be fruitful and multiply and replenish the earth"
where the word "replenish" is the verb male, a word which as a noun is translated "fulness" in such passages as "the earth is the
Lord's and the fulness thereof" (Psa. 24:1). The Septuagint uses the verb pleroo to translate male in Genesis 1 :28. We are,
therefore, fully Scriptural when we speak of the six days Creation as a part of the "Pleroma" or "Fulness".

(6) THE TESTIMONY OF PETER TO THE DAYS OF NOAH

After the great gap formed by the loss of Paradise, the record divides into two according as the false or the true seed are spoken of,
until we come to the next great crisis, the Deluge. Here history seems to repeat itself. The deep (Heb. tehom) of Genesis 1:2, is not
referred to again until we read the record of the flood (Gen. 7:11; 8:2). The "dry land" (Heb. yabbashah, Gen. 1:9,10), which
appeared on the third day from beneath the waters, finds an echo in the "drying up" of the earth after the flood (Heb. yabesh, Gen.
8:7,14). There are a number of interesting parallel features between Adam and Noah which establish that the relationship is
intentional. For example, both Adam and Noah are commanded to replenish the earth, both have three sons, one of whom becomes
involved in a curse and is either "of that wicked one" or the father of Canaan, who in his turn is seen to be of the evil seed. These
parallels are so close that most commentators have accepted without question that Peter, in 2 Peter three, refers to Genesis 1: 1
and 2, whereas a careful study of his epistles will show that he had, primarily, the days of Noah before his mind. This testimony is
important, and the examination of it will necessitate a fairly intensive study, but the subject matter is of the deepest solemnity and
fully justifies all the time and space which we can devote to its elucidation. Just as the Primal Creation is balanced across the gap of
the ages, by the new heavens and new earth, and just as Paradise lost is balanced by Paradise restored, so the structure persists
and another pair of corresponding members appears.

C The days of Noah a The irruption of the sons of God (Gen. 6)

The nations just before the call of Abraham
b Preservation in the Ark Noah
uncontaminated (Gen. 6:9)

c Punishment by flood (Gen. 7,8)

d Spirits in prison (1 Pet. 3:19-22,

Jude 6)

C As it was in the days of Noah. a Antichrist, and the Son of Perdition

The nations just before Israel are saved and (2 Thess. 2)
blessed
b Preservation, the lamb's book of life.
Uncontaminated (Rev.21)

c Punishment by fire (Rev. 14:9,10)

d Spirits liberated for a season

(Rev.9:14).
Let us now attend to the teaching of Scripture with regard to this great epoch. A very superficial reading of Scripture will convince
the student that there are revealed three great creative movements one past, one present and one future.
1. "In the beginning" (Gen. 1 :1). Primal Creation.
2. "In six days" (Gen. 1 :3-2:3). Present Creation.
3. "In the day of God" (2 Pet. 3:12,13). New Heavens and Earth.
The Primal Creation of Gen. 1: 1 is separated by the chaos of Gen. 1:2 from the Present Creation-while the Present Creation is
again separated from the New Heavens and Earth by the dissolution of 2 Peter 3: 10, and the following diagram visualizes this great
purpose of the ages.
The "first" heaven and earth of Revelation 21:1 is strictly "the former" of two (see Rev. 21:4 where the same Greek word is
translated "former"). This is the sequel to the six days' creation, not to Genesis 1:1. A reference to Isaiah 65:17-20, 7 and to 66:22-
24 will show that in the new heaven and earth (out. side the Holy Mountain), death will still be possible. Not until the end of the
ages, long past the end of the Revelation will the last enemy be destroyed and God be all in all (1 Cor. 15:24-28).
Peter as a minister of the Circumcision, is particularly concerned with that portion of the purpose of the ages that impinges upon the
hope of Israel. There is, however, in the history of Israel much that is typical of vaster things, and we are not surprised, therefore, to
discover much that adumbrates the larger issues dealt with by Paul alone. This vast sweep of the ages which we have suggested in
the diagram given above, finds an echo in the words of Peter, when he speaks of past, present and future heavens and earth, as
they appear in the prophetic view of Israel and its hope.
We may use Peter's language as a guide to the wider purpose of the ages thus:
 For Genesis 1:1 we may use the words, "the world that then was".
 For Genesis 1:3-Revelation 20:13 we may use the words, "the heavens and the earth which are now".
 For Revelation 21:1 the words, "the new heavens and the new earth".
Peter was "a minister of the circumcision" (Gal. 2:7-9), and wrote his epistles to
". . . the strangers scattered throughout Pontus, Galatia, Cappadocia, Asia, and Bithynia" (1 Pet. 1:1).
As 2 Peter three opens with the words, "This second epistle, I now write unto you", it is evident that the chapter before us was
equally addressed to the "circumcision". The term diaspora, "scattered" became a name to designate "the twelve tribes scattered
abroad" (Jas. 1:1), or the "dispersed among the Gentiles" (John 7:35, R.V. margin). This term had become fixed during the two
hundred years before Christ that the Septuagint had been in use, for in such passages as Deuteronomy 30:4, Nehemiah 1 :9,
Psalms 147:2; diaspora is used of the "outcasts of Israel". As we shall have occasion to compare some of the language of Peter
with the Gospel according to Mark, it will be well to make sure that the reader is aware of the close association of these two
servants of the Lord.
From Acts 12:12 we learn that Peter was friendly with Mark's mother and in 1 Pet. 5:13 he speaks of "Marcus my son." Jerome
speaks of both Paul and Peter with their assistants thus:
"Therefore he (Paul) had Titus for a Secretary, as the blessed Peter had Mark, whose Gospel was composed by him after the
dictation of Peter".
To this may be added the testimony of Eusebius:
"After the departure of Peter and Paul, Mark the disciple and secretary (hermeneutes or "interpreter") of Peter, transmitted to us in
writing what Peter had preached".
The four Gospels, therefore, stand related to one another as follows:
A Matthew Independent
B Mark Interpreter of Peter
B Luke Fellow worker with Paul
A John Independent.
We are now free to examine 2 Peter three, and we shall remember as we do it, that Peter, the minister of the circumcision, admits in
that same chapter that the Apostle Paul has many things to say, which were hard to be understood both by himself and his hearers,
and we shal1 not expect to find the sweep backward beyond Gen. 1:2 in Peter's most far-flung statement, that we find in Paul's
great epistles of the Mystery. We must now make a preliminary inquiry into the testimony of 2 Peter 3:1-14 and discover the scope
of Peter's Ministry and epistle.
We note that chapters one and two must be considered as introductory, for it is chapter three that opens with the words, "this
second epistle, beloved, I now write to you", and the burden of the chapter is the denial by "scoffers" of the possibility of the Lord's
return by an appeal to a supposed "Uniformity of Natural Law", and the exposure of the weakness of this objection by the Apostle.
An examination of the first chapter will show that this was prominently in the Apostle's mind all the time. 2 Peter 1: 16-21 is an
anticipation of 2 Peter 3:2,3 and 2 Peter 2:1-22 is an anticipation of2 Peter 3:3-13 and correspond in the structure which will be
given later.
These selfsame scoffers, or their predecessors, had evidently charged the believer who expected the personal return of the Lord,
with following "cunningly devised fables" (2 Peter 1:16), and from this the Apostle proceeds to the nature and trustworthiness of
prophecy, recalling in passing the conviction he himself had received of its truth when upon the Mount of Transfiguration.
The structure of the passage is as follows:

A 2 Pet. I: 16 What the apostle's witness was NOT "Cunningly devised fables"
B 2 Pet. I: 16, 17 What it WAS" Honour and glory"
C 2 Pet. 1:17, 18 How it CAME "The voice from heaven"
B 2 Pet. I: 19 What the Prophetic Word IS "A light, till the day dawn"
A 2 Pet. 1:20 What it is NOT "Not of its own unfolding"
C2 Pet. 1:21 How it CAME "Moved by the Holy Ghost".

In this opening argument we have similar features that are restated or amplified in chapter three.

Chapter One

The Second Coming of Christ.

The charge made "cunningly devised fables".
The testimony of Apostle and Prophet.
The introductory phrase "knowing this first".

Chapter Three

The Second Coming of Christ.

The scoffers' charge "where is the promise of His coming?"
The testimony of the Prophets and Apostles.
The introductory phrase "knowing this first".

To piece together the complete structure in all its details would take us too long, and is not necessary for our present purpose. The
following abridged outline will be all that is required to demonstrate the scope of the epistle and particularly the correspondence that
exists between 2 Peter 1 :16-21 and 2 Peter 3:2,3, and 2 Peter 2:1-22 with 2 Peter 3:3-13. If this be realized, we shall have reached
the first step in our inquiry.
We draw special attention to the two words "overthrow" katastrophe and "overflow" katakluzo, and the correspondence established
between the destruction of Sodom and Gomorrah, with the dissolution of the elements.

THE SECOND EPISTLE OF PETER

A 1 :1-4 Opening Benediction.

Grace, peace, through the knowledge of God.
Called to His own glory
B 1:5-11 Give all diligence-never fall (ptaio)
Give diligence-make sure
C a 1:12-15 "Stir up", "remembrance"

b 1:16-21 The Apostles and Prophets

(details given above)
"Knowing this first"

c 2:1-22 False prophets and False teachers

Reference to fall of angels,the Flood
and the destruction of Sodom and Gomorrha
An overthrow (katastrophe)
Lusts of flesh and uncleanness
C a 3:1 This second epistle beloved.
I now write unto you: in both which I stir up
your pure minds by way of remembrance

b 3:2, 3 The Prophets and the Apostles

"Knowing this first"
 c 3:3-13 Scoffers
Reference to Creation and Flood
Dissolution of elements
Overflow (katakluzo)
Walking after their own lusts
B 3:14-17 Be diligent-fall (ekpipto) stedfastness
A 3:18 Closing Benediction.
Grow in grace and knowledge of our Lord and Saviour
To Him be glory.

In the second chapter, which corresponds with the section dealing with the scoffers and their condemnation, Peter speaks of the
following recorded interventions of the Lord, showing how untrue the scoffers were when they attempted to rule out the future Divine
intervention of the Lord's return by saying, "since the fathers fell asleep all things continue as they were". Pour instances are given
by the apostle of judgments that could not be the mere working of natural law.
 The casting down of the angels that sinned (2 Pet. 2:4).
 The bringing in a flood in the days of Noah (2:5).
 The turning of the cities of Sodom and Gomorrha into ashes, condemning them by an "overthrow" katastrophe (2:6.)
 The rebuking of Balaam by the speaking of a dumb ass (2:15,16).
From these examples the Apostle draws the conclusion:
"The Lord knoweth how to deliver the godly out of temptations, and to reserve the unjust unto the day of judgment to be punished"
(2 Pet. 2:9).
We have now advanced a step in our pursuit of the truth. The fact has been established, that there were three Creative Movements
recorded in Scripture, and that Peter whose reference to Creation is occupying our attention, was a minister of the circumcision,
when he wrote his second epistle. To this we have now added some idea of the general scope of this epistle, and of 2 Peter 3:3-14
in particular. We are, therefore, now ready to give 2 Peter 3:3-14 a fuller and more detailed examination.
Before we can come to any definite conclusion about the intention of the Apostle in 2 Peter 3:3-14, we must arrive at some certain
understanding of the terms he uses. There are few students of Scripture who, when they read the words of 2 Peter 3 :4, "the
BEGINNING of creation", but will go back in mind immediately to Genesis 1:1 and John 1: 1, where the same
word arche "beginning" is found either in the Septuagint or in the original Greek N.T. Yet upon examination, such a reference back
is proved to be untrue. We have already spoken of Mark the "interpreter" of Peter and the present is an opportunity to test his
words. Mark uses the word arche "beginning" four times thus:
A "The beginning of the gospel of Jesus Christ the Son of God" (1:1)
B "From the beginning of the creation" (Mark 10:6)
A "The beginning of sorrows" (Mark 13:8)
B "The beginning of the creation which God created" (13:19)
The two references to creation challenge our attention, and we are sure that the established meaning of these two passages in
Mark's Gospel must influence most profoundly our interpretation of the same words in 2 Peter three. Here, therefore, is the second
passage in full.
"But from the beginning of the creation God made them male and female" (Mark 10:6).
It is not a matter of debate, therefore, that Mark uses the expression, "the beginning of the creation", to refer exclusively to the
creation of Genesis 1:3-2:3, and so by logical necessity cannot include Genesis 1:1. Let us read the second reference:
"For in those days shall be affliction, such as was not from the beginning of the creation which God created unto this time, neither
shall be" (Mark 13:19).
All we need to do to show that the same limitation must be observed is to place beside this reference, two parallel passages.
"For then shall be great tribulation, such as was not since the beginning of the world to this time, no, nor ever shall be" (Matt. 24:21).
"There shall be a time of trouble, such as never was since there was a nation, even to that same time" (Dan. 12:1).
We cannot conceive that any reader with these passages before him, would wish to read into Mark 13:19 a reference back to
Genesis 1: 1. The words "since there was a nation" being the earliest statement, out of which the others have grown.
We are, therefore, certain that the words quoted by Peter "from the beginning of the creation" are limited to the Adamic earth. The
context moreover of any expression has a part to play in deciding its meaning, so we must now ob serve the way in which it is
introduced and with what other terms it is associated.
"Since the fathers fell asleep, all things continue as they were from the beginning of the creation".
It is strange enough to think of linking up the death of Abraham, Isaac and Jacob ("the fathers") with the six days' creation; it is
unthinkable when we attempt to link such events with the remote period of Gen. 1: 1. The argument appears to be that just as the
"fathers" died one after the other, and no interference with "nature" has yet broken the hold of death, so, from the beginning of the
world all things have continued without a break, and ever will, so rendering either the hope of resurrection, the Second Coming or
the Day of Judgment unreasonable.
Peter, however, has already met this argument. Did all things continue as they were, in the days of Noah? Was there no Divine
intervention in the days of Sodom? Is there no import in the use of the two distinctive words katastrophe and katakluzo?
Further, we must not forget that the words in question were spoken by the "scoffers". What did these scoffers know bout the primal
creation? What did they know of the "overthrow of the world"? Not one of them so far as there is any record had ever seen the
skeleton of a brontosaurus or a fossilized ichthyosaurus. The science of their day made creation originate from chaos (see Hislop's
Two Babylons), and these scoffers most certainly did not know more of ancient history than the inspired Apostle.
In his opening rejoinder the Apostle says, "For this they willingly are ignorant of", a sentence that does not do justice to either the
English language or the inspired original. The R.V. reads, "for this they wilfully forget" and Dr. Weymouth renders the passage, "for
they are wilfully blind to the fact". No person can be charged with "wilful forgetfulness" if the matter lies beyond his ken. The heathen
world was without excuse in their idolatry because of the witness of creation around them, but not even the scoffers could "wilfully
neglect" the evidences of the primal creation because they were unrevealed and were unattainable by human search at that time.
These scoffers, however, could be charged with wilful neg1ect of the Divine record of Genesis which shows how the selfsame water
that played so prominent a part in the six days' creation, was actually used to bring about the flood in the days of Noah. This they
could have known, and with its neglect they could be charged.
Lanthano, the word translated "be ignorant" in 2 Peter 3:5 A.V. occurs again in verse 8, "be not ignorant of this one thing". This fact
must not be "ignored" by ourselves, as it is evident that such a recurrence indicates a structural feature, and is of consequence to
true interpretation. The word lanthano seems to demand an English equivalent that lies somewhere between the "ignorance" of the
A.V. and the "forgetting" of the R.V., and Moffatt seems to have chosen wisely here, for he renders the word in both passages
"ignore". Ignorance of any fact modifies the culpability of a person, forgetfulness while serious, nevertheless modifies the guilt of an
act, but to "wilfully ignore" leaves no such margin of excuse, and that is the thought here. Without making too great a diversion by
dealing with the structure of 2 Peter 3: 1-13 as a whole, it will be sufficient for our present purpose to confine ourselves to verses 4-
9.

A 1 Pet. The Promise. Where is this promised Advent?

3:4 False argument derived from
misconception as to time

B 2 Pet. They a Heavens of old and Earth

3:5-7 wilfully
ignore
b The Word
Water
c The World

d Perished

a Present Heaven and Earth

b Same Word
Fire
c Ungodly Men

d Destruction

B 2 Pet. Do you not The argument concerning relative time

3:8 ignore

A 2 Pet. The Promise The apparent "slowness" of the Lord must not be misconstrued
3:9 as "slackness". The day of the Lord will come.

God does not hold man accountable where knowledge is unattainable. Knowledge concerning things that happened during the
Primal Creation of Genesis 1:1 could not be "ignored" by anyone, because no details are given in the Revealed Word. These men,
however, could, and evidently did, wilfully ignore the testimony of Genesis 1:3-8:22, and so were without excuse. The reference to
"the world that then was being overflowed with water perished" must either refer to the chaos of Genesis 1:2 and must exclude the
flood in the days of Noah, or it must refer to the flood of the days of Noah and exclude Genesis 1:2, it cannot refer primarily to both.
We have positive evidence that Peter makes reference to the Deluge of Noah's day as part of his teaching and while this does not
prove anything so far as 2 Peter 3:6 is concerned, it is a weight in the scale. We must continue our study of the terms used by
Peter.
"The heavens were of old". Do these words refer to the primal creation of Genesis 1:1? or do they refer to the creation of the world
for Adam and his race? Ekpalai occurs in but one other passage in the N.T., namely in 2 Peter 2:3.
"Whose judgment now of a long time lingereth not".
There is no need for any argument here. These false prophets must belong to the Adamic creation, and consequently there is
added reason to believe that Peter's second use of the term will be but an expansion of the first, and that 2 Peter 3:6 refers back as
far as Genesis 1:3 but no farther.
Palai simply means "old", palaios, palaiotes and palaioo also occur and should be examined. We give just two examples.
"But he that lacketh these things is blind, and cannot see afar off, and hath forgotten that he was purged from his old sins (2 Pet.
1:9).
"God Who at sundry times and in divers manners, spake in time past" (Heb. 1:1).
The expression, "the heavens were of old", therefore refers quite legitimately to Genesis 1:6. This "firmament" was temporary and is
to pass away, as many passages of Scripture testify. There is no passage, however, that teaches that Heaven Itself, the dwelling
place of the Most High, will ever pass away, and this is an added reason for limiting Peter's words to the present creation.
The earth "standing" out of the water, appears to refer to the way in which the present system was brought into being. Sunistemi is
translated "consist" in Colossians 1:17, and while it would take a scientist to explain the meaning of 2 Peter 3:5, the reference is so
evidently back to Genesis 1:3 onwards that scientific pro of is not necessary to our argument.
The association of the "water" and creation, with the "water" that caused the "overflow" of 2 Peter 3:6, is emphasized when one
observes that after the many references to water in Genesis one, no further mention is made until the ominous words of Genesis 6:
17 are reached, "I do bring a flood of waters upon the earth".
These things the scoffers "wilfully ignored". The future dissolution will involve the heavens as well as the earth (2 Peter 3:10)
whereas it was "the world" not the heaven and the earth that "perished" in the days of Noah. The heavens and the earth remained,
and so could be called by Peter "the heavens and the earth which are now". In the second chapter of his epistle, Peter refers to the
Flood and speaks of "the old world" and "the world of the ungodly" (2 Peter 2:5), similarly in both 2 Peter 2:4 and 2 Peter 3:7 he
uses the word "reserved" in reference to judgment.
Again in 2 Peter 3:6 the Greek word katakluzomai is used where the translation reads "being overflowed with water". In 2 Peter 2:5
he uses the word kataklusmos (which becomes in English "cataclysm") "bringing in the flood upon the world of the ungodly", which
makes the parallel between these two chapters even more obvious. The result of our examination leaves us with the conviction that
Peter refers to the creation that came into being for the habitation of man, and that we are not justified in using his words to cover
the whole of the record of Scripture, except as a type and shadow of the greater event.

(7). PARADISE LOST AND RESTORED

If "before the overthrow of the world" and "before the age times" refer to the same datum line, and, if the "overthrow" be Genesis
1:2, then this must have taken place before the ages began, and consequently we have an indication that the ages are coincident
with the present temporary creation, which together with its "firmament" will pass away when the purpose of the ages shall be
accomplished.
The opening and dosing members of the Purpose of the Ages may be set out as follows:

A The beginning a Christ Firstborn of all Creation.

"Before Age Image of Invisible God times
times"
b Satan Cherub (Ezek. 28:12-19)

c The overthrow (Gen. 1:2)

A The End a Christ Head Every knee shall bow

 Ages b Church In the heavenlies.
Finish Satan destroyed

c Reconciliation achieved.

The space indicated by the * * * is spanned by the ages. The first of the series of fulnesses that fill this gap is, as we have seen, the
"six-day creation" of Genesis 1:3-2:3.
The opening "generation" is NOT that of Adam, as recorded in Genesis 5:1, but of "the heavens and the earth" which occupies
Genesis 2:4-4:26. This is followed by twelve generations, which open with "the book of the generations of Adam" (Gen. 5:1), and
doses with "the book of the generation of Jesus Christ".
The relationship of these generations may be set out as follows:

A The generations of the heavens and the earth (Gen. 2:4-4:26)

A a The BOOK of the generations of Adam (Gen. 5:1, 6:8) Plural
b The generations of Noah (Gen. 6:9-9:29)
c The generations of the Sons of Noah (Gen. 10:1-11 :9)
d "The generations of Shem (Gen. 11: 10-26) The Seed
e The generations of Terah (Gen. 11 :27-25:11) Mesopotamia
f The generations of Ishmael (Gen. 25:12-18) Bondwoman
f The generations of Isaac (Gen. 25: 19-35 :29) Free woman
e The generations of Esau (Gen. 36: 1-43) Canaan
d The generations of Jacob (Gen. 37:2-50:26) The Seed
c The generations of Aaron and Moses (Num. 3:1-4)
b The generations of Pharez (Ruth 4: 18-22) The Seed
a The BOOK of the generation of Jesus Christ (Matt. 1 :1-17) Singular.

It will be observed that the word "generation" is used in the plural of each except the last. The generations refer to the descendants,
as may be seen by an isolated generation like that of Ruth 4:18-22, the generation of Jesus Christ however, refers to His human
ancestry not to His descendants, for He had none. In the generations of the heaven and the earth, are recorded the following
features:
1. The forming of man from the dust, and his becoming a living soul.
2. The planting of the garden eastward in Eden.
3. The prohibition concerning the tree of the knowledge of good and evil.
4. The naming of the animals and Adam's conscious loneliness.
5. The formation of the woman as a help meet for him.
6. The temptation and the fall, the curse and sorrow.
7. The promise of the seed of the woman and ultimate victory.
8. The return of man to the dust from whence he had been taken.
9. The expulsion from Eden and the placing of the Sword and Cherubim.
10. The two seeds as manifested in Abel and Cain.
11. The appointment of Seth "instead" of Abel.

Fuller details could, of course, be included, and the reader must remember that there is no significance in the number that we have
indicated. In view of the balancing feature in the book of the Revelation we can write over this period the words "Paradise Lost",
without borrowing any ideas from Milton, even as we can write over the closing chapter of the Revelation "Paradise Restored".
Two main themes commence in Genesis three, that continue to the end of time, and which constitute the conflict of the ages. These
are (1) the promise of the woman's seed, (2) the continuous enmity between the two seeds until ultimate victory is achieved. (See
booklet on "Job".) The loss sustained as a consequence of the fall is symbolized in the expulsion from the garden, with the
consequent loss of access to the tree of life, but restoration is pledged by the placing of the Cherubim together with a flaming sword
"to keep" the way of the tree of life. (See CHERUBIM.) In the sequel, when the intervening gap is fi1led by the fruits of redemption,
we are taken by a series of steps back to Eden and its blessedness, as is made manifest by the following extract from the close of
Revelation.
"And God shall wipe away all tears from their eyes; and there shall be no more death, neither sorrow, nor crying, neither shall there
be any more pain: for the former things are passed away . . . and he shewed me a pure river of water of life, dear as crystal,
proceeding out of the throne of God and of the Lamb. In the midst of the street of it, and on either side of the river, was there the
tree of life . . . and there shall be no more curse . . . that they may have right to the tree of life, and may enter in through the gates
into the city" (Rev. 21:4; 22:1-3,14).
Here is the complete reversal of the consequence of the fall of man in Eden, and we have surveyed yet another "fulness", the
fulness of Redemption that spans the ages and their burden of sin and death. The creation of the universe, being the act of the
infinitely wise God, brought into being a definite purpose, and that purpose can be perceived at least in some measure by reading
what the Scriptures indicate will be the condition of things at the end. The Tabernacle of God will then be with men and He will dwell
with them, God will be all in all. Two things are linked with the Cherubim in the Scriptures, "dwelling" (1 Sam. 4:4), and "speaking"
(Num. 7:89).
Where the word is used in the singular, we read, "He rode upon a Cherub and did fly", but this has to do with deliverance from
enemies. While we read both in Exodus and Ezekiel of a "Cherub" in the singular, it always has reference to "one" of the Cherubim,
but in Ezekiel 28: 14 and 16 "the anointed Cherub" seems to be associated with "the overthrow of the world". The change from the
singular to the plural takes place after the fall of man, and the Cherubim with their four faces, the lion, the ox, the man and the
eagle, symbolize Adam and the dominion put in subjection under his feet, who in turn is the figure of Him that was to come. While
the purpose of God to dwell with His creatures was temporarily checked by the failure of the first creation, it was reintroduced at the
creation of man, for we have the homely words of Genesis three, that speaks of the "voice of God" in the garden at the cool of the
day" and the call, "Adam, where art thou?" Once again the fall of the creature hindered the attainment of the Divine purpose, yet
Love found a way; the purpose was not abandoned but the whole purpose was placed upon a redemptive basis, consequently the
Cherubim are seen to be an integral part of the Mercy Seat. Some idea of the way the purpose is pursued through the ages may be
visualized by the following graph:

ORIGINAL PURPOSE THE "GAP" FILLED THE GOAL REACHED

Purpose to dwell. Cherubim. "The Tabernacle of God is with
The Cherub. Man and his dominion, sin men and He will dwell with
"Cover" enters and Cherubim now them".
(Ez. 28: 14, 16, part of the Mercy seat
Ex. 26:14).

THE OVERTHROW DISSOLUTION

OF THE WORLD OF HEAVEN

From the "Anointed" that failed, on via the cross to the glory of the "Anointed" Who gloriously succeeded, the purpose of love is
carried to its goal on the wings of the Cherubim, or rather on the grace that these strange creatures set forth. Thus the outstretched
firmament coincides with the outstretched wing of t4e Cherubim, the whole span of the ages being Under the Redeeming AEgis.
"The term aegis', really a Latin word, means 'a goat skin', and later a shield. . . . This redeeming conception took on a primeval form
in the cherubim set up, together with the sword of flame, at the gate of the lost Eden. . . the idea of atonement, therefore is as old as
the Bible, nay as redemption itse1f. . . . This 'day of Atonement' itse1fwas called 'Yom Kippur', i.e. the 'Day of Covering'. . . . Ours is
at bottom an evangelica1 universe, no other form was ever conceived for it in the mind of God". (Under the Redeeming AEgis, by H.
C. Mabie, D.D., LL.D.).
We can, therefore, set out the steps of the goal of the ages, thus:

B The Ages begin Earth Remade and blessed (Gen. 1:2-2:4)

Subjected to curse.
Paradise lost Thorns and thistles (Gen. 3)

Man For a little lower than angels (Psa. 8)

The First Adam.
living Soul.
The image of God
Dominion over the earth
 Usurper The Serpent.
The Shining one
Nachash (Gen. 3)
Ye shall not surely die
Ye shall be as God

Hope The seed of the woman

************

8 The Consummation of the Earth Restored and blessed (Hos. 2: 18-23)

ages Curse removed (Rev. 22:3, Isa. 55:13)

Paradise Restored Man Christ, made much better than angels (Heb. 1:4)
last Adam.
Quickening Spirit.
Image

Heir Lamb is the light, brightness of glory

Immortality conferred (1 Cor. 15)
Every knee shall bow

Hope Creation's groan hushed (Rom. 8:21, 16:20).

(8) THE FILLING UP OF THE NATIONS (Gen. 48:19, Rotherham)

The family of Noah after the flood were told to "replenish" the earth, which would have consisted a fulness, had this replenishing
been accompanied by grace and righteousness. Alas, by the time we reach the eleventh chapter of Genesis, the evil character of
the world was made manifest, and Babel, and the scattering of the people, brought another movement in the purpose of the ages to
a close. Babel in Genesis eleven, will yet find its corresponding member when great Babylon comes up for judgment, but the gap
formed by the rebellion of Nimrod and the introduction of idolatry which is so closely associated with this mighty hunter before the
Lord, was filled by the calling of Abraham and the promises made to him concerning the great nation Israel.
In Genesis 48:19 we read, "his seed shall become a multitude of nations". It so happens that the word "multitude" occurs earlier in
this same chapter, namely in verse 4, where we read:
"Behold I will make thee fruitful and multiply thee, and I will make of thee a multitude of people" (Gen. 48:4).
Two words are found in the Hebrew original which are here translated "multitude" and these must be distinguished.
The word translated "multitude" in verse 4 is the Hebrew word qahal "to call" or "to assemble" , but the word translated "multitude" in
verse 19 is entirely different, it is the Hebrew word melo "fulness". Readers who use The Companion Bible (early editions) should
observe that the note against "multitude" in verse 19 should be transferred to the margin of verse 4 in the same chapter.
Let us bring together three more passages which make the promise that Israel shall be a multitude or company of people or nations.
"And GOD ALMIGHTY bless thee, and make thee fruitful, and multiply thee, that thou mayest be a multitude of people" (Gen. 28:3).
"And God said unto him, I am GOD ALMIGHTY; be fruitful and multiply; a nation and a company of nations shall be of thee" (Gen.
35:11).
"Behold I will make thee fruitful and multiply thee, and I will make of thee a multitude of people" (Gen. 48:4).
In these passages "multitude" translates the Hebrew word qahal. When Jacob blessed Joseph's younger son Ephraim, putting his
right hand upon his head, instead of upon the head of Manasseh his elder brother, Joseph said:
"Not so, my father," Jacob answered, "I know it, my son, I know it: he also shall become a people, and he also shall be great: but
truly his younger brother shall be greater than he, and his seed shall become a multitude of nations" (Gen. 48:19).
Here, as we have already observed, the Hebrew word translated "multitude" is melo, "fulness".
We must, therefore, become acquainted with the usage and meaning of these two words which are translated "multitude" before we
can proceed with our study. Qahal, means "to call together", "to assemble", and the noun form is translated "congregation",
"assembly" and "company". In seventy passages, the Septuagint renders the Hebrew qahal by ekklesia, and Stephen speaks of
"the church in the wilderness" (Acts 7:38). In the three passages quoted from Genesis, "multitude" and "company" are represented
by "synagogue" in the Septuagint. In Genesis 48:19 melo which is translated "multitude" is rendered in the Septuagint plethos,
which in the N. T. is rendered by the A.V. "multitude" thirty times, "company" once and "bundle" once. Unfortunately the English
word "multitude" has to stand for two very different conceptions. Plethos, is from the same root as pleroma and retains the idea of
fulness or filling, but there is another Greek word translated multitude, namely ochlos which means rather "a crowd" or "a mob", the
unruly nature of which is reflected in the verbal forms which mean "to vex" or "to trouble" (Acts 5:16; 15:19; 17:5, Heb. 12:15).
While, therefore, we are compelled to use the English word multitude in these passages of Genesis, we must dismiss the thought of
a "mob" or of an unruly "crowd", and retain the idea of a properly assembled gathering and a filling.
Returning to the usage of the word qahal, we ob serve that from Exodus 12:6 where we read "the whole assembly", the word is
used of Israel as a nation, but in Genesis, before Israel as a nation existed, it is used prophetically, looking down the ages to the
day when the seed of Abraham shall indeed become "a filling of the nations" (Rotherham). The four occurrences of qahal fall into
their place in the structure, which can be seen set out in full in The Companion Bible.
The following extract will be sufficient to demonstrate this fitness here.

Gen. 27:42-28:5. Departure. Jacob to Padan-aram

"that thou mayest be a multitude of people"
********
Gen. 35:1-15. Return. Jacob from Padan-aram
"a nation and a company of nations"

Gen. 48:1-20. Blessing of Joseph and his sons

"I will make of thee a multitude of people"
********
Gen. 49:1-28. Blessing of all his sons
"unto their assembly, mine honour, be not thou united",

It will be remembered that in the endeavour to obtain the birthright and the Abrahamic blessing, Jacob, at the instigation of his
mother who knew that "the elder shall serve the younger" (Gen. 25:23), attempted by fraud to make the prophecy sure, but failed.
When Jacob as a consequence was obliged to leave home, the coveted blessing for which both he and his mother had schemed
was given to him freely:
"And GOD ALMIGHTY bless thee, and make thee fruitful, and multiply thee, that thou mayest be a multitude of people; and give
thee the blessing of Abraham, to thee, and to thy seed with thee; that thou mayest inherit the land wherein thou art a stranger,
which God gave unto Abraham" (Gen. 28:3,4).
Not only is "the land" a definite feature of this promise, but a peculiar character attaches to it, it is called "the land wherein thou art a
stranger". This is repeated in Genesis 37:1 and in 47:9 Jacob uses the same word where it is translated "pilgrimage", The margin of
Genesis 28 :4, reads, "the land of thy sojournings". This term is used seven times in the law and is repeated in Hebrews 11:9,13.
After the formation ofIsrae1 and the giving of the law, the nation is not again reminded that they were strangers and sojourners
except in one passage, namely in Leviticus 25:23, where the laws governing the sale of land showed that the Lord Himself was the
true Owner, Israel only holding the land as it were on a lease. One further note is necessary before we attempt a conc1usion, and
that concerns the word translated "nation". An attempt has been made, in order that a certain popular theory might be supported, to
show that Ephraim was to become "Gentilized". The Hebrew word translated "nations" is goyim, the plural of goi. This word is
translated in the A.V. as follows: "Gentile" thirty times, "heathen" 142 times, "nation" 373 times, "people" eleven times. It is easy,
when we are reading the passages where "Gentile" and "heathen" occur, to jump to the conc1usion that the word means, "all
nations of the world, excepting the Jews", but this is an error.
The first six occurrences of goyim occur in Genesis ten, and as Israel was not in existence at the time, it is evident that the word can
only mean "nations"; the inclusion of the word "Gentiles" in the A.V. of Genesis 10:5, being an anticipation and having no immediate
meaning until placed over against the word "Jew". The R.V. has recognized this, and inserted "nations" instead. In Genesis 12:2 we
read the words of the great prophetic promise to Abraham concerning his seed, Israel, "I will make of thee a great nation", while in
Genesis 17:4,5,6 this promise is expanded to include "many nations", returning in 18:18 once more to the "great nation". So in
Genesis 35:11 we read, "a nation and a company of nations", the only distinction between Jew and Gentile being, not in the use of a
different word, but in the use of the singular for the Jew, and the plural for the Gentile. So again in Deuteronomy four, we have
interchangeably "this great nation" , "what nation is so great", "the heathen" , "a nation from the midst of another nation" and "the
nations" , that were to be driven out of Canaan, all being translations of the one Hebrew word. Even in the Greek N.T. when the
distinction between Jew and Gentile is acute, we still find ethnos used both of the Gentiles and of Israel (Acts 22:21; 26:4,17;
28:19,28). (SeeGENTILE.)
While, therefore, goyim means at times Gentile or heathen, it always means "nation" whether the nations outside the covenant, or
the great nation of promise. The promise that Israel should be "great" must not be misunderstood. With us, "greatness" is
associated with nobility of mind, but originally the word gadol translated "great" means "growth" or "augmentation", So we read of
"great lights", "great whales", a "great city" in Genesis. The word, moreover, is used to indicate "the elder" son (Gen. 10:21; 27:1;
29:16) who may not necessarily have been "greater".
Israel today are indeed at the present day "minished and brought low through oppression" (Psa. 107:39), but it is an integral part of
the promise to Abraham, that Israel should not only be great in spiritual qualities, but great in numbers. The promise reads, "I will
make thy seed as the dust of the earth: so that if a man can number the dust of the earth, then shall thy seed also be numbered"
(Gen. 13:16).
The figure is changed in Genesis 15:5 to the innumerable stars of heaven, with the added words, "so shall thy seed be". Yet once
again the figure is changed to "the sand upon the sea shore" (Gen. 22:17).
"Sir Arthur Eddington is of the opinion that one hundred thousand million stars make one galaxy, and one hundred thousand million
galaxies, make one universe. The number of stars in a universe therefore would be ten thousand trillion, or expressed in figures,
10,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,
that is equal to the number of drops of water in all the oceans of the world, or grains of fine sand sufficient to cover the whole of
England and Wales, to a depth of a foot, and each one of them comparable in size to our sun". (The Endless Quest, Westaway.)
While it is not intended that Israel are ever to reach such astronomical figures, the contemplation of the possible number of the
stars, compels us to admit that an extraordinary increase in number constitutes an essential feature of the Divine purpose for this
"great nation". According to Deuteronomy 1:10 these promises were on the way to fulfilment even when Israel stood upon the
borders of the promised land, and the present drop in their numbers is coincident with their being in disfavour. "If ye walk contrary to
Me, I will make you few in number" (Lev. 26:21,22).
When at length the Lord causes the captivity of both Judah and of Israel to return "as at the first", when He performs that good thing
which He has promised unto the house of Israel and of Judah, then "as the host of heaven cannot be numbered, neither the sand of
the sea measured: so will I multiply the seed of David My servant, and the Levites that minister unto Me saith the Lord" (Jer.
33:7,14,22).
At the time of the end of this age the world will be so ravaged and desolated by the destructive method of atomic or other
superscientific weapons that the prophet Zechariah speaks of "every one that is left of all the nations which came against
Jerusalem" (Zech. 14:16), words that suggest a terrible depletion in the number of the inhabitants of the earth at that day. In
Zechariah 13:8 the prophet's meaning is made very c1ear, when he says, "and it shall come to pass, that in all the land, saith the
Lord, two parts therein shall be cut off and die; but the third shall be left therein". Something of what may be expected when atomic
warfare breaks out over this devoted earth can be sensed by the words of the Apocalypse:
 "The third part of trees was burnt up".
 "The third part of the sea became blood".
 "The third part of the ships were destroyed".
 "The third part of men, slain (Rev. 8:7,8,9; 9:15).
The day is passed when these catastrophic times could be brushed aside as mere figures of speech, we have lived through days
when "a third part of the ships" were well nigh literally destroyed. We have seen that following the desolation of Genesis 1:2 came
the creation of man and the command, "replenish the earth". We have seen that the same command was given to Noah after the
catac1ysm of the flood. This same command will be fulfilled in Israel when they, too, shall "blossom and bud, and fill the face of the
world with fruit" (Isa. 27 :6). Ephraim, as the "firstborn" will indeed be great, and his seed "shall become a FILLING UP of the
nations" (Gen. 48:19).
Once again we see the principle of the pleroma at work, with its promise of a better day, when sorrow and sighing shall have fled
away, when the true seed shall flourish, and the seed of the serpent be no more.

(9) THE FULNESS OF THE GENTILES (Rom. 11 :25)

We have seen that the promise to Abraham concerning his seed, has followed the same pattern that has characterized the earlier
moves in the outworking of the purpose. Their failure came to a head just before the Babylonian captivity and, with
Nebuchadnezzar, "the times of the Gentiles" began.
"In the third year of the reign of Jehoiakim king of Judah came Nebuchadnezzar king of Babylon unto Jerusalem, and beseiged it.
And the Lord gave Jehoiakim king of Judah into his hand, with part of the vessels of the house of God: which he carried into the
land of Shinar to the house of his god" Dan. 1:1,2).
With these words the book of Daniel opens, and it may not be too much to say that they are only paralleled by the words of Acts
twenty-eight in their burden of crisis and dispensational change. With such vast issues hanging upon these momentous words, vast
because they cover the whole sweep of Gentile dominion, and vaster still because they lead steadily on to that kingdom of Christ
which is to last for ever, with such issues and such a burden, no pains should be spared in acquainting ourselves with all that God
has written for our learning in relation to this crisis in the history of man. Space will not permit of the full quotation of Jeremiah 25:1-
26. We can but point out one or two features that connect this passage with the opening words of Daniel.
The reader will be struck by the fact that whereas Dan. 1: 1 speaks of the "third" year of Jehoiakim, Jeremiah 25: 1 speaks of the
"fourth" year of that same king in connexion with the coming of Nebuchadnezzar against Jerusalem. This apparent discrepancy has
not passed unnoticed by the critic, being one of his many "proofs" of the untrustworthiness of the book of Daniel.
The Hebrew word translated "came" in Dan. 1: 1 is bo, and it frequently has the sense of "went" or "marched". This, however, has
been denied. Dr. Samuel Davidson says, "the verb bo does not mean to set out. . . but to arrive at" . . . (Introduction to the O.T., Vol.
ID, p. 181), and, when men of such standing and authority speak thus, who are we to oppose them? Humility is indeed a grace to
seek and preserve, but while Galatians two remains for our encouragement, we may still dare to bring all statements to the
touchstone of the Word. Dr. Davidson's statement but illustrates the uncritical character of so-called "higher criticism" for it has been
computed that the Hebrew word bo is used in the sense of "to set out" in each of the five books of Moses, in Joshua, Judges, Ruth,
Samuel, Kings, Chronic1es, Ezra, Nehemiah, Esther, Job, Psalms, Proverbs, Isaiah, Jeremiah, Ezekiel, and in six out of the twelve
minor prophets !
Let us look at Jonah 1:3 and translate it as Dr. Davidson would have it: "And Jonah . . . sent down to Joppa, and he found a
ship arriving at Tarshish"! If this could be sense, then in some miraculous way Jonah would have no sooner set foot on board at
Joppa than he would have "arrived" at Tarshish.
Doubtless this would have made the journey far more pleasant than it actually was, but the simple fact is that the Hebrew word bo
does mean that the ship was "going" or "setting out" for Tarshish. The plain fact of Daniel one and Jeremiah twenty-five is that the
former writer tells us the year in which Nebuchadnezzar "set out" from Babylon, while the latter tells us when he "arrived". Moreover,
Jeremiah tells us what occupied Nebuchadnezzar on his journey from one capital to the other.
"Against Egypt, against the army of Pharaoh-necho king of Egypt, which was by the river Euphrates in Carchemish, which
Nebuchadnezzar king of Babylon smote in the fourth year of Jehoiakim the son of Josiah king of Judah" (Jer. 46:2).
Instead therefore of discovering a discrepancy in the narrative of Scripture, we have the obvious fact that Nebuchadnezzar took
time to accomplish this march from Babylon to Jerusalem, and was obliged to meet and overcome Pharaoh at Carchemish by the
Euphrates before he could arrive.
In Jeremiah 25:3 the prophet reminded Israel that since the thirteenth year of Josiah (see Jeremiah 1:1,2), the word of the Lord had
come urging them to turn from their evil, and because they had not turned He said:
"Behold, I will send and take all the families of the north, saith the Lord, and Nebuchadnezzar the king of Babylon, my servant, and
will bring them against this land. . . and this whole land shall be a desolation, and an astonishment; and these nations shall serve
the king of Babylon seventy years" (Jer. 25:9-11).
What God therefore had threatened, He brought to pass in the fourth year of Jehoiakim, and the historic record of the captivity of
Jehoiakim is found in 2 Chronicles thirty-six, the last chapter of the Hebrew Bible!
Yet with all this apparent on the surf ace of Scripture, and needing no more scholarship than ability to read in one's mother tongue,
Kuenen in his historic Critique de I' Ancien Testament has the audacity to say:
"We know by the book of Jeremiah that no such event (as the siege of Jerusalem, Dan. 1: I) took place in the reign of Jehoiakim".
"We know"! We also know that it is written, "professing themselves to be wise they became fools", and by such statements they
demonstrate that they are but "blind leaders of the blind".
Jehoiakim was appointed king of Judah by Pharaoh-nechoh in the place of Jehoahaz (2 Kings 23:34). He did evil in the sight of the
Lord, and filled Jerusalem with innocent blood. He was succeeded by Jehoiachin. In the reign of the latter, Nebuchadnezzar carried
out thence all the treasures of the house of the Lord, whereas Daniel 1: 1,2 tells us that at the first he only carried away a part.
Jehoiachin or Jeconiah is deprived of the Jehovah element in his name, and under the name Coniah is utterly rejected by the Lord:
"Thus saith the Lord, Write ye this man childless, a man that shall not prosper in his days: for no man of his seed shall prosper,
sitting upon the throne of David, and ruling any more in Judah" (Jer. 22:30).
It is evident that Israel is passing; dominion is leaving them and is being transferred for the time being to the Gentiles. This is
emphasized by such statements as Daniel l :2; "And the Lord gave. . . into his hand", or Jeremiah 25:1: "The fourth year of
Jehoiakim . . . that was the first year of Nebuchadnezzar". The times of the Gentiles had therefore begun. And so with Zedekiah the
glory departs, and Ezekiel twenty-one reveals the condition of things that will obtain "until He come":
"And thou, profane wicked prince of Israel, whose day is come, when iniquity shall have an end, thus saith the Lord God; Remove
the diadem, and take off the crown: this shall not be the same: exalt him that is low, and abase him that is high. I will overturn,
overturn, overturn it: and it shall be no more, until He come Whose right it is, and I will give it Him" (21:25-27).
"Until He come"; Gentile dominion obtains on the earth until the coming of the Son of Man. No interim "Kingdom" is to be found
here. Daniel's prophecies are occupied with this period of overturning, of the exalting of the base and abasing of the high. "This
shall not be the same", saith the Lord, "this shall not be this", as the Hebrew reads, i.e. Nebuchadnezzar's dominion and dynasty
would not be a real continuance of the throne of David. It wou1d be in character rather a rule and dominion of wild beasts. The
words, "it shall be no more, until He come", leave us in no doubt that the throne thus vacated shall be occupied by none other than
the Lord Jesus Christ Himself.
The times of the Gentiles are characterized by one great feature, marked by the Lord in Luke 21:24, "and Jerusalem shall be
trodden down of the Gentiles, until the times of the Gentiles be fulfilled". The kingdoms that succeeded Babylon may have been
larger or smaller, more powerful or weaker, more autocratic or less so, but the one essential characteristic of Babylon, Persia,
Greece, Rome, Turkey and any succeeding mandatory power is the Gentile domination of Jerusalem. That is the great
distinguishing feature, and will only be removed when "He comes Whose right it is".
We have, therefore, a period of time which fills the "gap" caused by Israel's failure, which gap is filled by the dynasty started with
Nebuchadnezzar and which will persist until, in the Day of the Lord, "the stone cut out without hands" strikes this colossus, and "the
kingdoms of this world become the kingdom of our Lord and of His Christ".
It is characteristic of the times of the Gentiles that this Jerusalem should be "trodden down". Those times will not end until
Jerusalem is free from the yoke of Gentile dominion, surveillance or protection. Each succeeding ruler of the Gentiles has
dominated Jerusalem-Babylon, Medo-Persia, Greece, Rome, Turkey, the League of Nations, the British Mandate, the United
Nations, and so on to the last great Dictator and his ten subsequent kings at the time of the end.
When Jerusalem is at length free, the times of the Gentiles will be "fulfilled" (pleroo), and "the fulness (pleroma) of the Gentiles" will
have come (Luke 21 :24, Rom. 11 :25). Immediately following this statement concerning the times of the Gentiles, the epistle to the
Romans goes on to say "and so" or "thus" "all Israel shall be saved" (Rom. 11:26). The "gap" in the outworking of the Divine
purpose in Israel is stressed in Romans 9-11, because of their failure, but a "remnant" shall be saved at the beginning, for had the
Lord not left them a "seed" they would have been like Sodom and Gomorrah.
Throughout the period covered by the Acts, "all day long" the Lord stretched out his hands "to a disobedient and gainsaying people"
(Rom. 10:21). However low Israel may have fallen during this period, the answer of God to Elijah has a parallel, "I have reserved to
Myself seven thousand men, who have not bowed the knee to the image of Baal" (Rom. 11:4). Yet such is the grace of God, the
very diminishing of them" led to the enriching of the Gentiles, and leads the Apostle to ask, "how much more their fulness?"
The figure of the olive tree, with its broken branches but emphasizes the "gap" that is in view, and the fulness of the Gentiles
occupies the interval occasioned by Israel's blindness (Rom. 11:25). Israe1's failure, in the days of Nebuchadnezzar led to the times
of the Gentiles, speaking nationally, but Israel's spiritual failure registered in Acts twenty-eight led to the present dispensation of
Gentile blessing, the Church which is called by the wondrous title, "the fulness of Him that :filleth all in all". This, however, is so great
a theme that it must be considered in a separate study.

(10) THE TITLE HEAD, AND ITS RELATION TO "THE FULNESS"

The highest title ascribed to Christ in any dispensation other than that of the Mystery is that of "a Priest for ever after the order of
Melchisedec". This priesthood is superior to that of Aaron, it functions at the right hand of God, its sphere is the true tabernacle
which God pitched and not man, namely "heaven itself", and it combines the two offices of King and Priest. Just as water cannot
rise above its own level, so no calling can rise above the position set by Christ, and the calling that recognizes Him as King-Priest is
itself "a Kingdom of Priests", "a holy nation and a royal priesthood".
It is significant that throughout the Prison Epistles, Christ is never called either "King" or "Priest", even as it is equally true that the
church of that calling is never called a kingdom or a priesthood, but is called "the Body" of Christ. Argument from the absence of
terms, like arguing from a negative is in most cases suspect, but in this particular instance it cannot be said that a "kingdom" is
never mentioned in the Prison Epistles. We read in Ephesians 5:5 of "the Kingdom of Christ and of God"; in Colossians 1:13 and 4:
11 of "the kingdom of His dear Son" and of "the kingdom of God", and in 2 Timothy 4:1 and 18, "His appearing and His kingdom",
and "His heavenly kingdom". In the epistles of Paul other than the four great Prison Epistles, a "kingdom" is mentioned nine times,
but the only passage where Christ can be said to have the title King is in 1 Timothy 6:15, where however the exhibition of the title is
spoken of as a future event "which in His times He shall show, Who is the blessed and only Potentate the King of kings, and Lord of
lords".
The epistles to the Ephesians and the Colossians contain terms that seem to demand the work of a priest, such as "acceptance",
"access", "made nigh", "offer", yet there is not a single reference outside of Hebrews to Christ as a priest. In epistles before and
after Acts twenty-eight, Christ is represented as "seated at the right hand of God", yet never, outside of Hebrews, is the office of
priest mentioned. If a "dominion" and a "coronation" are indications of the presence of a king, then Adam was a king. The
"dominion" given to him is the translation of the Hebrew radah, a word translated elsewhere "reign" and "rule" and used of Christ
"the King's Son" in Psalm 72:8. The word translated "crowned" in Psalm 8:5 is the Hebrew atar, which is the verb form of atarah "the
king's crown" (2 Sam. 12:30). Adam, however, is never once spoken of as a king. He was a figure of Him that was to come, and can
be spoken of with propriety as HEAD of the human race, and as such he embraced all that kingship can mean, but much more.
Noah not only had dominion in his degree (Gen. 9:2) but he offered sacrifices with acceptance (Gen. 8:20,21). The word "sweet"
which is used of the savour of the sacrifice offered is employed throughout the O.T. to indicate the "savour" or "odour" of sacrifice.
We should, therefore, not be surprised to find that Noah was a "priest". Yet he is never so called. He can be, however, designated
as Adam was before him HEAD of the race of which those delivered from the flood were the progenitors.
Abraham was the father of "kings" (Gen. 17:6), and even of THE KING, the Lord Himself, Who was according to the flesh both son
of Abraham and son of David, yet Abraham himself is never called a king. Abraham not only built an altar, at the beginning of his
pilgrimage upon which the only sacrifices permitted would have been those taken from the herd and the flock, he came nearer to
the heart of all true sacrifice when he was called upon to offer his only begotten son Isaac, yet Abraham is never called a priest.
Like Adam and Noah, Abraham is more than king, more than priest, he is the father of Israel, to which he stands without
contradiction as HEAD.
Even when we leave the chosen people, and turn our attention to the first great king whose reign commenced the times of the
Gentiles -Nebuchadnezzar, he too is spoken of by Daniel as "This HEAD of gold" (Dan. 2:38). Each one of the great outstanding
figures that have foreshadowed the pleroma, or fulness, were "Heads" and in this they foreshadowed all that the office of King,
Priest and Prophet alone could set forth. Even though Christ be never called either Prophet, Priest or King in the epistles of the
Mystery, the Church of the One Body loses nothing if Christ is its Head; He is more than King and Priest and Prophet to the Church,
for headship covers all.
With this preparation, let us turn to the epistles of the Fulness, the Prison Epistles of Paul, and observe the way in which this title
"head" is employed. The Greek word kephale is used of Christ in the Prison Epistles seven times, and the
verb anakephalaioomai once. Let us look at the usage of this verb, which means "to head up". It occurs in Ephesians I: 10 where it
is translated "to gather together in one" in the A.V., "to sum up" in the R.V. and in Weymouth's translation "of restoring the whole
creation to find its one Head in Christ", and by J. N. Darby "to head up all things in Christ". It is in connexion with the "pleroma" of
the seasons that this figure of "heading up" is used, no other term being so appropriate or so complete. When the "fulness" arrives,
Christ will be infinitely more than King, or Priest, He will be "Head". The references to Christ as "Head" in the Prison Epistles are
limited to the epistles to the Ephesians and to the Colossians (Eph.1:22; 4:15; 5:23, Col.1:18; 2:10, 2:19).
These six references to kephale, expand the promise of Ephesians 1:10, the Church of the present dispensation being the most
complete foreshadowing of the goal of the ages that the Scriptures contain. To turn back to the types and shadows employed in
earlier Scriptures is to turn by comparison from sub stance to shadow, although the "substance" here in its turn must necessarily be
but a "shadow" of the reality yet to come. The first passage brings us back from the day when all things in heaven and earth shall be
headed up in Christ, to the present period when in a day of rejection, confusion and darkness, an elect company find that Christ is to
them what He will be universally in the future.

Kephale "Head" in Ephesians and Colossians

A Eph. 1:22 Head over all things to the Church which is His Body.
In the context Christ is seen raised and seated "far above all principality
and power". The word pleroma being used as a title of the Church

B a Eph.4:15 Grow up.. . which is the Head, even Christ.

In the context is seen the body "fitly joined" together, every "joint"
working toward the "increase" of the Body. The word pleroma being
used in verse 13 as the goal of the Church "the measure of the
stature of the fulness of Christ"

b Eph. Christ is the Head of the Church

5
:23

A Col. 1:18 He is the head of the Body the Church In the context principalities and
powers are seen to be His creation, and the word pleroma is used in
verse 19 "It pleased the Father that in Him should all fulness dwell "

B b Col. Christ is the head of all principality and power. The

2:10 word pleroma being found in verse 9

a Col. 2:19 Holding the head, from which all the Body by "joints and bands"
being "knit together" "increaseth with the increase of God".
"And gave Him to be Head over all things Ta THE CHURCH" (Eph. 1:22). Christ is not yet recognized as "Head over all things", the
day is future when "every knee shall bow and every tongue confess" but what will be true then, in its widest sense, is true now of
"the Church which is His Body". In the glorious future "God" will be all in all (1 Cor. 15:28), but that day has not yet come. In the
Church which is His Body "Christ is all, and in all" (Col. 3:11). In the glorious future "all things are put under His feet" (1 Cor. 15:27),
but as in Hebrews, we say today, "we see not yet all things put under Him" (Heb. 2:8); we can see His Ascension "far above all
principality and power, and might, and dominion, and every name that is named, not only in this world, but also in that which is to
come" and the fact that He is already Head over all things to the church, is a most glorious anticipation of this universal subjection of
all to Him, and this Ephesians 1 :22 indicates, by joining together the two themes:
1. "And hath put all things under His feet".
2. "And gave Him to be Head over all things to the Church".
This Church then is in a unique position. It anticipates as no other calling and company has or can, the goal of the ages. It is meet,
therefore, that this should be set forth, and the Apostle follows the passage already quoted by revealing that this Church, which is
His Body, is something more, it is "the fulness" of Him, Who in His turn is the One that "filleth all in all" (Eph. 1 :23). All the fulness of
the Godhead dwells in Him "bodily", the Church which is His "Body" and in whom He dwells (Eph. 2:22, 3:17) is His fulness. What
Christ is to the invisible God, the Church is to Christ. What Christ is to the whole purpose of the ages, the Church of the One Body is
in the heavenly realm.
Ephesians 1:10 is here illustrated, foreshadowed, and anticipated and this of itself is a glorious position to occupy, quite apart from
all the other wonders of grace and glory that are associated with this high calling. Rotherham translates Ephesians 1:23:
"Which indeed is His Body. The fulness of Him Who the all things in all is for Himself filling up".
Moffatt reads: "Filled by Him Who fills the universe entirely". Possibly the rendering given by Cunnington is nearest the truth:
"The fulness of Him Who all in all is receiving His fulness",
to which he appends a footnote, "Cf. Philippians 2:7, process of cancelling the Emptying". "Cancelling the Emptying". What a
thought! A.T. writing in The Differentiator of August 1955 comments:
"Here we have a most beautiful thought. When Christ Jesus (note the term) emptied Himself, He must have emptied Himself of His
fulness. But after His resurrection He got back His fulness-"in Him delights the entire fulness to dwell" (Col. 1 :19) -"in Him is
dwelling the entire fulness of the Deity bodily" (Col. 2:9).
Dr. Robinson gives a new thought from Colossians 2:9:
"For in Him dwelleth aU the fulness of the Deity in a bodily way, and ye are filled (or fulfilled) in Him". This is usually taken to refer to
the Godhead residing in the Lord's body in all its completeness. But Dr. Robinson says this would be to neglect Paul's special use of
the terms "fulness" and "body" in his epistles. The empty deceit of the philosophical despoiler can only give tradition and world
elements in place of the heavenly Christ. . . . Thus St. Paul looks forward to the ultimate issue of the Divine purpose for the universe
. . . this is found in Christ 'by way of a body'; that is to say; in Christ as a whole in which the head and the body are inseparably one".
The Saviour had a glory "before the world was" (John 17:5); He emptied Himself (Phil. 2:7), and has been subsequently highly
exalted. THAT GLORY He can and will share with the redeemed.
"And the glory which Thou gavest Me I have given them, that they may be one, even as We are one" (John 17:22).
The fulness of Him that filleth all in all is the most blessed anticipation of the day when God shall be all in all (1 Cor. 15:28).
We have seen that the title "Head" gathers up into itself all that the separate titles "King", "Priest" and "Prophet" imply, with ever so
much more than any of these titles taken separately, or all together can ever teach or contain. That Church of which Christ is "Head"
not only lacks nothing, but is infinitely more blessed, is in a closer relationship with Christ, and anticipates the goal of the ages in a
way that no other company could ever do. We have seen that Ephesians 1:10 finds its expansion and anticipation in Ephesians
1:22,23, and we now pass on to the other references to Christ as the Head as they occur in the epistles of the Mystery. The next
reference to Christ as "Head" occurs in the practical section of Ephesians:
"But speaking the truth in love, may grow up into Him in all things, which is the head, even Christ" (Eph. 4:15).
Practice grows out of doctrine, and doctrine deals with calling, sphere of blessing, and standing in grace. What is stated as a fact
before God in the revelation of the doctrine of Ephesians, awaits experimental realization in the practical section. Let us see this in
the large, before concentrating our attention upon the detail.
As a consequence of the Saviour's exaltation, "far above all", in Ephesians 1:20-22, He is seen as Head over all things to the
Church, which church is called "the fulness of Him that filleth all in all". Turning to Ephesians four, we find that the Ascension "far
above all" is restated, and the "fulness" indicated as a goal.
"He that descended is the same also that ascended up FAR ABOVE ALL heavens, that He might FILL ALL THINGS" (Eph. 4:10).
The gift of Apostles, etc., from this Ascended One has as its goal "the perfect man", and its measure the stature of "the fulness" of
Christ (Eph. 4:13). It is evident from this language of Ephesians 4:8-13, that we are here presented with the outworking of the truth
set out in chapter one.
Coming now to Ephesians 4:15, we observe that the words of the A.V., "speaking the truth in love", are somewhat free, there being
no equivalent in the Greek, for the word "speaking". The A.V. margin puts as an alternative "being sincere" and the R.V. margin
reads "dealing truly". The Greek word under consideration is aletheuein, of which Alford, in his commentary, says "it is almost
impossible to express it satisfactorily in English", and suggests the translation "being followers of truth" but says of this "the
objection to 'followers of truth' is that it may be mistaken for 'searchers after truth', but I can find no expression which does not lie
open to equal objection" . The only other occurrence of aletheuein is Galatians 4:16, where the A.V. renders it, "because I tell (you)
the truth".
It is not possible in English to say "truthing in love", we must say, "being sincere", "being true or truthful" or "speaking the truth".
None of these expressions, however, exactly present to the mind what the verb aletheuein does. The LXX of Genesis 42:16
employs this word where we read, "ye shall be kept in prison, that your words may be proved, whether there be any truth in you; or
else by the life of Pharaoh surely ye are spies".
In Isaiah 44:26, the LXX employs aletheuein to translate the word shalam "perform", but when the same Hebrew word occurs again
in verse 28, it is there translated by the Greek poiein "to make or to do". If we can imagine a word in English that conjures up to the
mind a person whose whole life is truth, whose very breath and atmosphere is truth, whose desires, will, plans and activities are
truth, we may perhaps approach the meaning of Ephesians 4:15. This utter regard for "truth", however, is balanced, for it must be
held "in love"; without that, such zeal in present circumstances would lead to fanaticism and a persecuting spirit.
This utter regard for truth held in love is the great accessory to "growth", "may grow up into Him in all things". Growing up into Christ
in all things is the practical echo of the basic doctrinal fact that has already been revealed concerning the constitution of the Church
of the One Body in Ephesians 1:22,23. Not only so, but it is the practical and experimental echo of the truth revealed in Ephesians
2:21.
"In Whom all the building FITLY FRAMED TOGETHER (sunarmologomai) GROWETH (auxano) unto an holy temple in the Lord" .
The word sunarmologomai is repeated in Ephesians 4:16 where it is translated "FITLY JOINED TOGETHER", and the
words auxano and auxesis are found in Ephesians 4:15,16, "may GROW (auxano) UP unto Him"; "maketh INCREASE (auxesis) of
the Body" .
Not only do these words recur, but just as the Church of the One Body is the fulness of Him that filleth ALL (ta panta "all these") in
all, so this growth of Ephesians 4:15 is unto Him in ALL (these) THINGS (ta panta). Most translators supply the preposition "in"
before "all things" in order to make easy reading, and this reading may give the intention of the Apostle, namely, that the Church
should grow up into Christ in every particular, in all ways, in all things. Nevertheless, the mind returns to the fact that what the
Apostle actually wrote was auxesomen eis auton ta panta, which rendered literally reads, "we may grow into Him the all things".
This rendering, while it does not "read" and is not good English, leaves in the mind a different conception from that of the A.V. Can it
be the Apostle intends us to understand him to mean, that by holding the truth inviolate in love, we shall be encouraging that growth
into Him, which the N.T. speaks of as ta panta, some specific, blessed totality of glory, in which Christ is now the summary ta
panta Himself, "the all things" in all? (Col. 3:11), anticipating the goal of God, when God Himself shall be ta panta en pasin, "the all
things in all"? Before, however, such words can have their true effect, it becomes necessary that we pause here, in order to place
before the reader, the peculiar usage of the phrase ta panta, for the phrase "the all things" sounds strange to our ears.
Pas is an adjective, translated either "all" or “every” in the majority of cases. The plural panta "all things" is used with or without the
article, and these two forms must be distinguished. We cannot very well translate ta panta "the all things" for that has an un-English
sound, but a survey of the usage of these two forms panta and ta panta, may enable us to reach some agreed rendering that will
satisfy every claim, and present a fair translation of the inspired original. The two forms are found in Romans eight and their fitness
is easily recognized by reason of the context of each form.
There is a good deal of suffering in Romans eight, induced both by the failure and frailty of the believer himself, and coming upon
him by reason of his fellowship with Christ, his place in a groaning creation, and the attack of enemies. In consequence, he is
sometimes at a loss to know "what to pray for" as he ought, but he does know, in the midst of all life's uncertainty, that "all things
work together for good to them that love God" (Rom. 8:28). Here "all things" is panta without the article "the" ta, all things
whether good or evil. Later in the chapter the Apostle says:
"He that spared not His own Son, but delivered Him up for us all, how shall He not with Him also freely give us all things?" (8:32).
Here "all things" is ta panta, some specific "all things" namely those things which come under the heading of Redemption, and
which constitute the goal and consummation of the ages. Panta without the article is unlimited, panta with the article is restricted to
the realm of redeeming grace. "All these" is the translation of ta panta in Colossians 3:8 which is a good example of its restricted
meaning.
Romans eleven does not teach that "all things" without limit or restriction owe their origin, persistence and final blessing to the Lord:
"For of Him, and through Him, and to Him are ta panta" (11:36), namely that conception of the universe that embraces all in heaven
and in earth that come under the grace and power of the Redeemer. The advocates of universal reconciliation, while recognizing
the presence of the article in Romans 11:32, use this verse to support their doctrine and omit the articles in their translation. It is not
the teaching here that "God hath concluded ALL in unbelief, that He might have mercy upon ALL", but the whole verse should be
rendered
"For God had concluded THEM ML in unbelief, that He might have mercy on THEM ALL" (11 :32).
Where universality is intended in Romans 9:5, the article is omitted, God is over ALL, without limitation or reserve. In the verses that
follow, Paul uses ALL without the article with this same discrimination, "for they are not all Israel (pantes without the article) which
are of Israel" the "seed" were called "in Isaac" (Rom. 9:6,7). We must therefore read the words, "and so all Israel shall be saved"
(Rom. 11:26) in the light of Romans 9:6,7. The "all" that are to be saved being those who were "in Isaac", a type and shadow of the
greater company of the saved at the end. In case the reader should expect to find the article here we point out that the word "all"
does not here stand alone and without qualification, pas Israel "all Israel" is already limited and does not need the article "the".
Let us note the use of panta and ta panta in Ephesians, and by this we do not intend every single occurrence, for such phrases as
"all spiritual blessings" do not come within the scope of this inquiry.
That which is to be "gathered together in one" is ta panta (Eph. 1: 10) not panta without the article. That which is "put in subjection
under His feet" is panta all things including enemies (Eph. 1:22). He is also head over all things, panta, good as well as evil, to the
Church which is His Body (Eph.1 :22), and He is the One who fills ta panta, that special company, without limit or reserve. The
second reference to "all" is without the article, and en pasin has been rendered "everywhere", "in every way" and "in every case".
The creation of "all things" ta panta of Ephesians 3:9 is limited, because it is directly associated with the Mystery which had been
hid in God.
Where the words "One God and Father of ALL, Who is above ALL, and through ALL and in (you) ALL" (Eph. 4:6) occur, the word
used is panton and pasin without the article. The subject is already limited to "the Unity of the Spirit", and the insertion
of humin "you" in the text followed by the A.V. shows that this sense was clearly understood. J. N. Darby adopts the
reading hemin "in us all", which has been rendered by some "and in all To You", making the passage balance Ephesians 1 :22,
where Christ is not revealed as Head over all in the fullest sense yet, but as Head over all To THE CHURCH.
One passage in Colossians must be inc1uded. Paul speaks of the new creation "where there is neither Greek nor Jew . . . but (ta
panta kai en pasin Christos) the all things and in all Christ" (Col. 3: 11). Here "Christ" is put in apposition to "the all things", He
Himself sums up in Himself the entire new creation. Of this He is the Head, it is in His image that all will be renewed, all other
categories of worth and privilege are lost and put aside.
So also in Ephesians 4: 15 ta panta "the all things" is in apposition with the "Head, even Christ". The "Fulness" that embraces this
"all things" is Christ and His Church, not Christ alone, and certainly not the Church alone. Of both Christ and His Church is
"Fulness" predicated, but only as Head and Body making one blessed company. True growth presses to "the measure of the stature
of the fulness of Christ", and in this dispensation, the growth of the One Body up into Him Who is the Head is the great example and
exhibition of what the day of glory will reveal in its perfection.
Christ as "Head" , that is our theme, and here we see the first unfolding which is in germ in Ephesians 1 :22,23.
As we prosecute our studies we shall learn that other phases of this growth and perfecting are associated with Christ the Head until,
we hope, when the survey is completed, every reader will concur with our proposition, set out earlier in this exposition, that
whatever blessings are to be associated with the great title of King, Priest and Prophet, they are all absorbed, filled and taken to
their true end, in the one great title given to Christ in the epistles of the Mystery, "The Head".

(11) "THE FULNESS OF THE SEASONS"

The failure of Israel at the time of Nebuchadnezzar was answered by the times of the Gentiles, which commenced in the third year
of Jehoiakim, King of Judah (Dan.1:1), but, although earthly dominion passed from Israel at that time, they did not become lo-
ammi in the full sense of the term until a fuller and deeper apostasy opened a deeper gulf, that could only be spanned by a greater
and more spiritual fulness among the Gentiles. In the fulness of time, God sent forth His Son, and His birth at Bethlehem and His
genealogy constitute the opening chapter of the book of the New Covenant (Matt. 1). The earthly ministry of the Saviour opened
with a proclamation concerning the kingdom of heaven (Matt. 4:17), and as "The King of the Jews" He was crucified (Matt. 27:37).
The earlier stages of the culmination of rejection is revealed in chapters eleven to thirteen:

Matt. 11:20,26 "They repented not". "Even so Father".

Matt. 12:6,41,42 "A greater than the temple, than Jonah and than Solomon" rejected
(priest, Prophet and King).

Matt. 13 The MYSTERY of the kingdom of heaven.

In these three chapters the gap and its antidote is anticipated. The mirac1es which the Saviour wrought, had as their primary
purpose the repentance of Israel, and so to lead to the setting up of the kingdom (Matt. 11:20-24). Christ stood in their midst as
Prophet, Priest and King, but they knew Him not.
In Matthew twelve we meet the first favourable use of the word "Gentile". In Matthew 10:5 the disciples were told "go not into the
way of the Gentiles" but upon it becoming manifest in Matthew eleven, that Israel were not going to repent, a change is indicated.
"That it might be fulfilled which was spoken by Esaias the prophet, saying . . . He shall shew judgment to the Gentiles . . . And in His
name shall the Gentiles trust" (Matt. 12:17-21).
The next chapter, Matthew thirteen, supplies the third keyword namely "mystery". Summing up these momentous chapters we have:
1. No repentance of Israel, in spite of evidence of miracles.
2. The inclusion of the Gentiles for the first time, consequent upon Israel's failure.
3. The kingdom of heaven passes into its "mystery" stage, and the parable form of speech is introduced.
The introduction of the Parable, contrary to popular interpretation, was NOT in order that the common people should be enabled to
understand the message of the Gospel, but to veil the new aspect of truth from the eyes of those who were non-repentant. As this
point of view is so contrary to that which is considered "orthodox" let us consider what the Lord actually said in answer to His
disciples' question, "Why speakest Thou unto them in parables?" (Matt. 13:10). The very fact that the disciples were moved to ask
such a question suggests that the parable form of speech was new to the Saviour's method hitherto. His answer is unambiguous
and conclusive.
"He answered and said unto them, Because it is given unto you to know THE MYSTERIES of the kingdom of heaven, but to them it
is not given" (Matt. 13:11).
The second part of the Lord's answer indicates that a great dispensational change was imminent.
"Therefore speak I to them in parables: because they seeing see not; and hearing they hear not, neither do they understand. And in
them is fulfi11ed the prophecy of Esaias . . . but blessed are your eyes, for they see, and your ears, for they hear" (Matt. 13:13-16).
The people ofIsrae1 had reached the point when the blindness prophesied by Isaiah had begun to take effect. It is a matter of
importance to note the peculiar word used by the Lord here, that is translated "fulfilled". Up to Matthew 13:14 the accepted formula
"that it might be fulfilled" or "then was fulfilled'~ translates the verb pleroo, and this on seven occasions (Matt. 1 :22, 2:15,17,23;
4:14; 8:17 and 12:17). Once only in the whole record of the Saviour's utterances, is there a departure from this rule, and that is
made at Matthew 13: 14, where the intensive form anapleroo is employed. There is an element of completion about this word, as 1
Thessalonians 2:16 will show.
Even though the long suffering of God waited throughout the whole period covered by the Acts of the Apostles, and there was
granted a stay of execution consequent upon the Saviour's prayer and the witness of Pentecost, it is not without significance, that
when the Apostle in his turn quotes Isaiah 6:9,10 in a similar context, namely, upon the rejection of Israel, the favourable mention of
the Gentile, and the bringing in of the dispensation of the Mystery, he does not say, "in them is fulfilled" but instead says, "well
spake the Holy Ghost by Esaias the prophet unto our fathers" (Acts 28 :25). What was de jure in Matthew twelve is de facto in Acts
twenty-eight.
At the failure of Israel, the Apostle Paul became the Prisoner of the Lord, and as such received the dispensation of the grace of God
for the Gentiles, the dispensation of the Mystery (Eph.3:1-9 R.V.), and while the church of this new dispensation is usually referred
to by its title, "the Church which is His Body" or "the One Body", there is an extension of this title that is of vast importance. The full
passage reads:
"And hath put all things under His feet, and gave Him to be Head over all things to the Church which is His body, THE FULNESS of
Him that FILLETH ALL in all" (Eph. 1 :22,23).
When the dispensation of the Mystery comes to an end, the successive dispensations that have suffered a rupture will be resumed,
and the signs of the times thicken around us, that tell us plainly that the lo-ammi ("not My people") condition is nearing its close.
Already believing Jews who accept Jesus as their Messiah are gathering and witnessing in complete independence of Gentile
Christianity, and the claim of Israel for national recognition, made at Pentecost 1948, while not to be confused with the day when
they shall be restored by the Lord Himself, is certainly an indication that the great epoch is upon us. The Church of the Mystery fills
the last gap in the outworking of the ages, and in this dispensation of the Mystery, the conception of "Fulness" receives its fullest
exposition. The following are the references in the Prison Epistles that must be given attention before our study of this subject can
be considered at all complete.

Pleroma in the Prison Epistles

 "The dispensation of the fulness of times" (Eph. 1:10).
 "The fulness of Him that filleth all in all" (Eph. 1:23).
 "That ye may be filled unto all the fulness of God" (Eph. 3:19).
 "The measure of the stature of the fulness of Christ" (Eph.4:13).
 "It pleased the Father that in Him should all fulness dwell" (Col. 1:19).
 "For in Him dwelleth all the fulness of the Godhead bodily" (Col. 2:9).
These references fall into two groups:
1. The one reference that speaks of the fulness of times.
2. The five references that speak of the Church and the Lord.
In this study we will deal with the first reference, Ephesians 1:10.
"That in the dispensation of the fulness of times He might gather together in one all things in Christ both which are in heaven, and
which are on earth; even in Him".
It is evident that the passages flow out of something stated earlier. In verse 9 we read of "the mystery of His will" which He hath
purposed in Himself, and this leads to the opening word of verse 10, eis "unto". This preposition eis variously translated "into",
"unto", "in", "to", "for", "towards", "until", "throughout", "concerning", "that", "with" and "on" in this one epistle to the Ephesians, has
one underlying meaning however varied the translation; it indicates a goal "unto" which something tends. We could freely
translate eis here in Ephesians 1:10 by the words "with a view to". The secret of His will and its revelation at this time is with a view
to a dispensation.
What is in view is "a dispensation of the fulness of times". When the Son of God came into the world it was "when the fulness of the
TIME was come" (Gal. 4:4), here in Ephesians we look forward to a dispensation of the fulness of TIMES. What is the difference
between these two expressions "time" and "times"?
"Time" is from the same root as "tide", and Aristotle observes "our conception of time originates in that of motion". Time is the
measure of movement. To say that a motor-car was travelling at sixty miles, says nothing, the complete statement must be "sixty
miles per hour", or day as the case may be. "Season" on the other hand derives from the Latin sationem, "a sowing", and looks not
so much at the time but at the fitness and suitableness of the period under review.
"How many things by season season'd are" (Shakespeare).
We therefore shou1d revise Ephesians 1:10 and read:
"A dispensation of the fulness of the seasons".
Gap after gap has been succeeded by fu1ness after fulness, as we have already seen in the outworking of the age purpose, and at
last we have arrived at the fulness of these seasons, the many sowings are past, the harvest is in view. The outstanding
characteristic of the dispensation of the fulness of the seasons is that therein
"He might gather together in one all things in Christ, both which are in heaven and which are on earth; even in Him".
Where universality is intended, "things under the earth" are added, as in Philippians 2:10. Here the all things headed up in Christ is
limited to the redeemed.
Strictly speaking there is no Greek word for "gather together", and no Greek word for "in" or "one", this is a free rendering of the one
word anakephalaioomai. Had the Apostle meant to say "gather together" he had the word sunago ready to his hand.
The Greek word kephale means the "head" and this both in the literal sense (Matt. 14:11) and in the spiritual (Eph.
4:15): Kephalaion means the "sum" either a sum of money (Acts 22:28), or a summary or summing up (Heb. 8:1). It must be
remembered that the ancients placed the sum of a column of figures at the head, and not at the foot as we do now. Kephalis (Heb.
10:7) may refer to the brief "contents" that was written on the outside of a scroll, rather than the complete "volume". The word used
by Paul in Ephesians 1:10 therefore means something more than "to gather together in one", it means "to head up" or "to sum up" in
Himself all that compose "the all things" before the great day of glory dawns. In Ephesians 1:22,23 this glorious "summing up" is
foreshadowed and anticipated in the present position of Christ, and His relation with the Church of the present calling.
"And hath put all things under His feet (this is quoted again in 1 Cor. 15:27 and Heb. 2:8 with age-purpose associations), and gave
Him to be Head (kephale) over all things (panta, all things without exception, whereas in Eph. 1:10 ta panta refers to the redeemed)
to the Church which is His Body, the fulness of Him, that filleth all in all (ta panta, not the wider term).

(12) "ALL THE FULNESS OF GOD"

The Church of the One Body is the great outstanding anticipation of the goal of the ages. It is associated with Him, under Whose
feet are all things, it is associated with a dispensation of the fulness of the seasons, when all things are to be summed up in Him,
and it is itself called:
"The fulness of Him that filleth all in all" (Eph. 1 :23).
How are we to understand this statement? It falls into line with the last occurrence of pleroma in Colossians, and as for that, the last,
in the N.T.
"For in Him dwelleth all the fulness of the Godhead bodily" (Col. 2:9).
The first occurrence of pleroma in Ephesians, stands by itself (Eph. 1:10); the remainder form a group that expand the theme, thus:

A "The Church which is His Body, the fulness of Him that filleth all in all" (Eph. 1:22,23). Head. Body. Filleth all
B "The whole family in heaven and earth . . . that Christ may dwell in your hearts by faith . . . filled unto all the fulness of God" (Eph.
3:14-19). Whole family. Heaven and Earth. Dwell
C "He ascended up far above all heavens, that He might fill all things. . ., Unto a perfect man, unto the measure of the stature of the
fulness of the Christ" (Eph. 4:8-13). Fill all things
B "For in Him were all things created . . . all things were created by Him and for Him . . . He is the Head of the body the church . . .
for it pleased the Father that in Him should all fulness dwell. . . to reconcile all things . . . in earth or things in heaven" (Col. I: 16-20).
All things. Dwell. Heaven and Earth
A "For in Him dwelleth all the fulness of the Godhead bodily, and ye . are filled to the full in Him, Which is the Head of all principality
and power" (Col. 2:9, 10). Head. Principality. Filled.

Here is a very complete conspectus of this mighty theme, point answering point with such precision, that no approach to one
corresponding member can be undertaken without due consideration of the other. This, the reader will perceive is fraught with
immediate consequences. It forces a comparison between Ephesians 1:22,23 and Colossians 2:9,10.
The passage in Colossians 2:9 has been taken as one of the proof texts of the Deity of Christ. The doctrine of the Deity of Christ
constitutes one of the four tenets of the Trust of the Berean Forward Movement, yet we believe it to be a mistake to use Colossians
2:9 as a proof of that wondrous doctrine. The Church of the One Body is "the fulness of Him that filleth all in all", but such a
revelation does not justify the thought that the Church is "Divine". The prayer of Ephesians three is that the believer may be "filled
with all the fulness of God" and if to be filled with all the fulness of the Godhead bodily teaches the Deity of Christ in Colossians 2:9,
what does Ephesians 3:19 teach of the believer? Identical language, pan to pleroma "all the fulness", is found in Ephesians 3:19,
Colossians 1:19 and 2:9, and these passages cannot be separated and interpreted independently of each other.
The "fulness" of Christ dwells "bodily" in the Church, even as the "fulness" of the Godhead dwells "bodily" in Him. There are,
moreover, many contextual links that bind these references together as one whole. In Ephesians 1:21-23, the stress is upon the
Headship of Christ as the Risen and Ascended One, with all things under His feet, the Church which is His Body, being the fulness
of Him, Who in turn filleth all in all. In Colossians 1:15-20 the two creations are brought together, with Christ as "Firstborn" in each
(Col. 1: 15, 18), with Christ as preeminent in each (Col. 1:17,18). Things in heaven and earth were His creation (Col. 1:16) and they
are to be the objects of reconciliation (Col. 1:20).
When we come to Colossians 2:4-23, we have left the positive revelation of truth, and have entered into the sphere of conflict with
error. The complete structure of this passage has been set out on page eighty-four of Volume XXIII of The Berean Expositor, but for
our present purpose we will give the opening and dosing members of this great correspondence :

A a 4-8 Plausible speech. Philosophy (sophos)

b 8 Traditions of men

c 8 Rudiments of the world

CORRECTIVE. 8 Not after Christ. Fulness pleroma

9 10 Ye are filled full in Him pleroo

********

A c 20-22 Rudiments of the world

b 22 Teaching of men

a 23 Wordy show of wisdom (sophos)

CORRECTIVE. 23 Not in any honour

23 Filling of the flesh plesmone.

Whatever is intended by Colossians 2:9, "all the fulness of the Godhead bodily", is c10sely and intentionally carried forward into
verse 10, for the word translated "complete" is pepleromenoi, even as conversely, the title of the Church as "the fulness" is carried
upward to Christ, as the One Who is filling (pleroumenou) the all things in all. Colossians 2:4-23 combats the invasion of a vain and
deceitful philosophy, supported by tradition and the rudiments of the world, but "not after Christ", and later in the same argument,
not only intruding philosophies and traditions, but even Divinely appointed "new moons and sabbath days" are alike set aside as
"shadows of things to come" because "the body (sub stance here) is of Christ". The whole fulness toward which every age and
dispensation has pointed since the overthrow of the world, is at last seen to be Christ Himself. AU types and shadows that once
filled the gap caused by sin, are now seen to be but transient, or of value only as they point the way to Him, and then disappear. He
is Head, He is Pre-eminent, He is Creator and Redeemer, He is the Firstborn of all creation, and Firstborn from the dead. He is the
beginning of the Creation of God (Rev. 3: 14, Col. 1: 18), the Alpha and Omega, the First and the Last, in deed and in fact "Christ is
all, and in all" (Col. 3:11) in the Church of the One Body, as He wilt yet be in the whole redeemed Universe. No more glorious
position for the redeemed is conceivable than that revealed in Ephesians 1:23. To be one of a kingdom of priests on the earth is a
dignity so great, that Old Testament prophets have piled imagery upon imagery in setting it forth. Yet when we come to the Bride of
the Lamb, and the description of the heavenly Jerusalem, we realize how much more glorious is that calling to the highest calling on
earth. What shall be said then of that company of the redeemed, blessed neither on earth nor in the New Jerusalem, blessed
neither as a kingdom nor as Bride, but blessed "with Christ" where He now sits "far above all", blessed not only as the members of
His Body which is dignity indeed, but actually destined to be "the fulness of Him" in Whom dwells all the fulness of the Godhead
bodily. Consequently we can the better hope to appreciate the climax prayer of Ephesians 3:14-21 and the three steps which the
prayer takes upward to the goal of the ages. The three stages in the progress of this prayer are indicated by the Greek word hina, "a
conjunction of mental direction and intention", translated three times in Ephesians 3:14-21 "that" and which could be translated "in
order that". The first step reaches out toward the spiritual condition that makes it possible for Christ "to dwell in your hearts by faith".
The second stage is directed to comprehending what is breadth, length, depth and height, and the third, the climax of the prayer
leads on by way of the knowledge of the love which "passeth knowledge" to being "filled with all the fulness of God". The dwelling of
Christ in the heart by faith, is a personal experimental anticipation of the fulness of God yet to be known in heaven and on earth.
The four-fold comprehension, breadth, length, depth, and height encompass all time and space, even as in order that He might fill
all things, Christ descended to the lower parts, that is to say the earth, and ascended up far above all heavens, "that he might fill all
things". Unfathomable love is seen to be the all sufficient cause for this glorious effect, and the prayer of the Apostle for the Church
of the One Body is that it may be filled with all the fulness of God. This preposition "with" is the translation of the Greek
preposition eis, which, though it occurs over 1,400 times in the N.T., is nowhere else translated "with", and the R.V. corrects the
translation and reads "unto". The Septuagint uses the simple verb pleroo without a preposition for the idea "to fill with" or "to be filled
with" (Gen. 6:11, Num. 14:21), which rule is followed in Philippians 1:11. We cannot say "to be filled with, unto all the fulness of
God" however, for this does not make sense. The believer is to be filled up to all the fulness of God, which implies the attainment of
a goal, and the reaching of standard. This can be illustrated by a reference to the passage in Ephesians four which contains the last
occurrence of pleroma in the epistle: "Till we all come in the unity of the faith (namely that unity which is comprehended by the "one
faith" of the unity of the Spirit), and of the knowledge (better "acknowledgment" epignosis) of the Son of God, unto a perfect man,
unto the measure of the stature (or "full age" helikia, John 9:21, Heb. 11:11) of the fulness of the Christ" (Eph. 4:13). Just as the
fulness of Ephesians 1:23 flows from the exaltation of Christ "far above a", so does it here (Eph. 4:10-13). What was the goal of the
ministry of Ephesians four is the goal of prayer in Ephesians three, just as in Colossians Pau1's "teaching" and Epaphras' "praying"
had the presenting and the standing "perfect" of every man. The purpose of the original creation of heaven and earth, the
subsequent "fillings" of the creation of the six days, the planting of Paradise, the provision of the Ark, the promise to Abraham, and
the promotion of the Gentile upon the failure of Israel, and the perfect man of the present dispensation-Purpose, Planting, Provision,
Promise, Promotion and Perfection-are all successive "fillings" foreshadowing "all the fulness of God" that could be contained alone
in the Lord Himself. We sincerely hope that enough has been brought to light to quicken the interest of the earnest student, supply
him with much food for thought, theme for ministry, and above all to lead him to the place of praise, so fitly expressed in the
doxology of the prayer concerning the pleroma. "Now unto Him that is able to do exceeding abundantly above all that we ask or
think, according to the power that worketh in us, Unto Him be glory in the Church by Christ Jesus throughout all ages, world without
end (literally "unto all the generations of the ages of the ages"). (A description of the pleroma when at last it is complete) (Eph.
3:20,21). Such a lengthy article as this upon one subject may appear out of place in this analysis, but it had to be considered at
some length or not considered at all. In many ways it contains in germ all that we have endeavoured to teach these many years,
and if taken together with the article on the "Seed" will provide much to help in the due appreciation of Dispensational Truth and the
Purpose of the Ages.

(13) "ALL THE FULNESS OF THE GODHEAD BODILY-WISE"

Three Greek words are translated "Godhead" in the N.T., namely to theion that which is Divine, the thing pertaining to
theos; theiotes, Divinity, the characteristic property of theos, that which is discernible from the works of creation, thereby making
idolatry "without excuse" (Rom. 1:20). Theotes, Deity, the being in Whom theiotes of the highest order resides (Col. 2:9). The above
is partly quoted from Dr.Bullinger's Lexicon, and it agrees with the definitions given by Trench, Cremer, Lightfoot and most
commentators. Those of us who believe the doctrine of the Deity of Christ, naturally turn to Colossians 2:9 as to a proof text, but this
may not be the right attitude of heart and mind when dealing with the Sacred Scriptures. We do no honour to the Lord, if we misuse
a portion of Scripture, even to "prove" or to enforce the glorious doctrine of His Deity. Truth needs no bolster. One of the reasons
that caused us to hesitate about this use of Colossians 2:9 is that when we apply the principle given in 1 Corinthians 2:13 namely,
that we speak not in the words of man's wisdom, "but which the Holy Ghost teacheth", and that we then go on to compare spiritual
things with spiritual, we come up against a doctrinal difficulty. If the words "all the fulness" of the Godhead prove the Deity of Christ,
what do they prove in Ephesians 3:19? There, the prayer of the Apostle is for the believer, that Christ may dwell, katoikeo, in their
hearts by faith, and as a consequence, that they may be "filled with (eis unto, with a view to) all the fulness of God". If "all the
fulness of theotes" proves the Deity of Christ, should not "all the fulness of theos" prove the Deity of the Church? To express the
thought is to refute it. Such cannot be the meaning. In Colossians 1:19 we meet the expression "all the fulness", but there it is not
followed, either by "God" or "Godhead", yet this first reference must have a definite bearing upon the second reference found in
Colossians 2:9. "For it pleased the Father that in Him should all the fulness dwell" (pan to pleroma katoikesai) (Col. 1:19). We
cannot expect to understand the reference in Colossians 2:9 if we ignore the earlier reference in Colossians 1:19. They go together
and constitute a united testimony. The first passage opens with Redemption "through the blood" (Col. 1:14) and doses with "peace
through the blood of His cross" (Col. 1:20). He Who created "all things, that are in heaven and that are in earth" (Col. 1:16)
reconciled "all things, whether they be things in earth, or things in heaven" (Col. 1:20). We move from Creation to
Reconciliation via the headship of the Church which is His Body and the blessed fact that He Who was in the beginning "the
firstborn of every creature" is revealed as being Himself "the beginning, the firstborn from the dead". While the triumph of His
resurrection is the feature that is stressed here, "the blood of His cross" reminds us of His deep humiliation, and we believe we shall
never understand the reference to "fulness" in Colossians 2:9 if we do not know the corresponding "emptying" of Philippians two. In
order to illustrate this approach we use the figure of Jacob's ladder, being fully justified so to do by the reference made to it by the
Lord Himself. In Genesis twenty-eight we have the record of Jacob's dream, wherein he saw a ladder set up on earth, and the top of
it reached to heaven, "and behold the angels of God ascending and descending on it" (Gen. 28:12). In John one, Nathanael is
referred to by the Lord as "an Israelite indeed, in whom is no guile" (1:47). The word translated "guile" is dolos and is used in the
LXX of Genesis 27:35, where Isaac tells Esau, "thy brother came with subtilty (dolos guile), and hath taken away thy blessing". One
cannot avoid seeing an oblique reference in John 1:47 to Jacob, an Israelite who was most certainly not without "guile". However,
that is by the way, our interest is more directly concerned with verse 51. "Hereafter ye shall see heaven open, and the ANGELS of
God ASCENDING and DESCENDING upon the Son of Man" (John. 1:51). Now observe, "fulness" is associated with Christ in the
fact that in order that He might FILL ALL THINGS, He that descended is the same also that ascended far above all heavens (Eph.
4:10). Returning to John one, we observe the following sequence of thought:
 "In the beginning was the Word. . . the Word was God".
 "All things were made by Him".
 "The Word was made flesh and dwelt (tabernacled, skenoo, not the permanent "dwelling" katoikeo of Col. 2:9) among us."
 "Of His FULNESS have all we received".
 "The angels of God ascending and descending upon the Son of Man".
So in Colossians 1:15-20, He Who was the "Image of the Invisible God" (compare John 1:1 and 18), Who created all things (see 1
:3) Who became also the Firstborn from the dead, Who is before all things (even as John the Baptist acknowledged, John 1 :30), in
Him, in that capacity, not only as Creator but as the Firstborn from the dead (thereby assuming the death of the cross), in that
capacity and in no other way, was it pleasing to the Father that "in Him should all the fulness dwell". It is for this reason, we find the
word somatikos "bodily" in Colossians 2:9. This word has been translated by several commentators "bodily-wise", as though the
fulness could not dwell in Him in any other way. Earlier we spoke about the fact that if Colossians speaks of the Saviour's "Fulness",
Philippians speaks of His voluntary self-emptying. Philippians 2:6-11 has been given a fairly full exposition in the book entitled The
Prize of the High Calling and the reader would be advised to consult pages 75-111 of that volume. Here, we can deal with one item
only, the meaning of the words, "He made Himself of no reputation" (Phil. 2:7). First of alll we give the structure of verses 6-11.

*Philippians 2:6-11
Example of Christ
K 2:6 EQUALITY WITH GOD ORIGINALL Y (huparchon)

L 2:7, 8 r 7 He emptied Himself

Sevenfold s 7 A bond servant
Humiliation t 7 likeness as a man
u 8 Fashioned as a man
r 8 He humbled Himself
s 8 Obedient unto death
t 8 The death of the cross

K 2:9 EXALTATION THE NAME (inherited, see Heb. 1:4)

L 2:9-11 v 9 The Name above every name

Sevenfold w 10 Every knee shall bow
Exaltation x 10 Things in heaven
y 10 Things in earth
x 10 Things under earth
w 11 Every tongue confess
v 11 Jesus Christ is Lord.

* This structure is part of a complete outline extracted from "The Testimony of the Lord's Prisoner". Here it will be observed "things
in heaven, and things in earth" occur as in Colossians 1:16. "He made Himself of no reputation". The Authorized Version has used
the word "reputation" twice in Philippians, the second occurrence being at 2:29, "hold such in reputation". The Revised Version has
wisely omitted the word "reputation" in both passages, reading in 2:7, "but emptied Himself," and in 2:29, "hold such in honour", for
two different Greek words are used. The change, however, while it makes some aspects of the truth clearer, introduces other
problems for, to a modern mind, there is something strange about the idea of anyone "emptying himself". In modern usage "empty"
places foremost in the mind the idea of a "jug without water", "a room without furniture" and "empty vessels" (2 Kings 4:3); these
come naturally to mind. In order to avoid too crude an application of the figure of "emptying a vessel" when speaking of the
Saviour's humiliation, most of us slip into paraphrase and say, "He divested Himself" of His dignity and insignia of Deity", but this is
confessedly an attempt to avoid a problem. The verb kenoo is cognate with kenos "vain" and means "empty". That the word has a
wider application than that of emptying a vessel, such expressions as "seven empty ears" (Gen. 41:27), "the sword of Saul returned
not empty" (2 Sam. 1:22) will show. Where kenos is translated "empty" in the Authorized Version of the New Testament it refers in
the parable to the treatment of the servant by the wicked husbandmen, who sent him "empty away" (Mark 12:3, Luke 20:10,11), and
to "the rich" who were "sent empty away" (Luke 1:53); in most cases, however, kenos is translated "vain", as for example, in
Philippians itself "run in vain" and "labour in vain", where it is evident that "empty" would have no meaning (Phil. 2:16). The
verb kenoo translated "to make of no reputation" , occurs five times in the Greek New Testament and the four occurrences other
than that of Philippians 2:7, render the word "make void", "make none effect" and "be in vain" (Rom. 4:14, 1 Cor. 1:17; 9:15, 2 Cor.
9:3). In Philippians 2:3 we find the word kenodoxia "vain glory". We remember with adoring wonder that in the Psalm of the Cross,
we read, "I am poured out like water" (Psa. 22:14). He did indeed "empty Himself". The word translated "offer" in Philippians 2:17 is
found in the LXX of Genesis 35:14, where Jacob revisited the scene of the "ladder", which he re-named “Bethel", and this time "he
poured out a drink offering thereon". Paul, following in His Master's footsteps faintly adumbrates that awful condescension which for
our sakes left behind the glory of heaven, for the deep, deep humiliation of "the death of the cross". The Saviour "emptied" Himself.
The Apostle was willing to be made "a drink offering" (Phil. 2:7,17). Above the ladder, in our illustration given elsewhere
(see RECKONING and REALITY), is intimated "the glory that He had" before the world was. This must not be confused with the
glory that was "given" Him, as the Man Christ Jesus, the One Mediator. We may, in resurrection "behold" the one, but "the glory
which Thou gavest Me" the Saviour said, "I have given them, that they may be one, EVEN As we are one" (John 17:22). We do not
pretend to understand this profound revelation, we would add not one syllable of our own lest we spoil and corrupt such unearthly
beauty; but we can bow our heads and our hearts in adoring wonder, as we perceive that this is implied in the word "fulness", for the
Church of the One Body is revealed to be "The fulness of Him, that filleth all in all" (Eph. 1:23). Here the Church is "one" with the
Lord. On the left hand of the ladder, we see the wondrous descent, seven steps down to the death of the cross. Here at the foot, on
the earth He is seen as Emmanuel "God with us". Here, it was fulfilled "He was numbered with the transgressors". And by virtue of
that most wondrous "reckoning", He became our Surety. The word translated "surety" in the O.T. is the Hebrew word arab, which in
the form arabon is brought over into N.T. Greek, occurring in Ephesians 1:14 as "earnest". This word corresponds with "pledge" in
Genesis 38:17,18, "wilt thou give me a pledge till thou send it?" The root idea appears to be that of mixing or mingling:
 "A mixed multitude" (margin: a great mixture) (Exod. 12:38).
 "The holy seed have mingled themselves" (Ezra 9:2).
 "A stranger doth not intermeddle with his joy" (prov. 14:10).
 "In the warp or woof" (Lev. 13:48).
Arising out of the idea of this mixing and interweaving comes that of surety, who is so intimately associated with the obligations laid
upon the one for whom he acts that he can be treated in his stead. So we get:
 "Thy servant became surety for the lad" (Gen. 44:32).
 "He that is surety for a stranger shall smart for it" (Prov. 11:15).
 "We have mortgaged our lands" (Neh. 5:3).
 "Give pledges to my lord the king" (2 Kings 18:23).
In Ezekiel 27:9,27 we find the word translated "occupy" in the sense of exchange or bartering. In a way, we understand the
expression, "occupy, till I come", and still speak of a man's trade as his "occupation". Such is the underlying meaning of the word
"surety", one who identifies himself with another in order to bring about deliverance from obligations. This is c1early seen in
Proverbs 22:26,27: "Be not thou one of those that strike hands, or of them that are sureties for debts. If thou hast nothing to pay,
why should he take away thy bed from under thee?" It is evident from this passage that the surety was held liable for the debts of
the one whose cause he had espoused, even to the loss of his bed, and this meant practically his all, as may be seen by consulting
Exodus 22:26,27. "If thou at all take thy neighbour's raiment to pledge, thou shall deliver it unto him by that the sun goeth down; for
that is his covering only, it is his raiment for his skin: wherein shall he sleep?" Judah, who became surety for his brother Benjamin
gives us a picture of Christ's Suretyship, saying to Joseph: "How shall I go up (ascend) to my father, and the lad be not WITH ME?"
(Gen. 44:34). If poor erring Judah could enter like this into the meaning of Suretyship, how much more must our Saviour have done
so. At the foot of the ladder, the transfer is made, and the first of the seven steps up to the glory of the right hand of God is made.
Elsewhere in this analysis, these seven steps "with Christ" have been treated of (see Doc: Analysis). We but draw attention to them
here. The self-emptying on the one hand is compensated by all the fulness on the other, but that fulness would never have been
attained had the Saviour not become man, a man of flesh and blood, all the fulness dwells in Him "bodilywise". The church is the
fulness of Him that filleth all in all. The goal and standard of that church is the measure of the stature of the fulness of Christ. The
personal experimental climax of the faith is that each member shall be filled with (or unto) all the fulness of God. It is difficult, with
these features so clearly set forth in Ephesians, to think that the same word "fulness" when dealt with in Colossians, a confessedly
parallel epistle, should suddenly swing over to the doctrine of the deity of Christ. It may be that our attempt to explain Colossians 2:9
is so defective that the gleam of truth we saw at the commencement of this article has already become dimmed by our very effort to
explain it. Shall we then, writer and reader, pause-put aside our lexicons, our concordances, our interpretations and follow in the
footsteps of Asaph, who tell s us that not until he went into the Sanctuary of God, did he understand. In conclusion, the following
structure of the word "Pleroma" in the N.T. may stimulate a fuller examination of the subject than we have been able to include in
this Analysis.

PLEROMA
A John All things made by Him
1:16 GOD INVISIBLE The Word
Only Begotten

B Gal. 4:4 Observance of days, moons, times, years

Weak and beggarly elements (9, 10)

Israel C a Rom. 11:12 Provoke to jealousy (11,14)

and the b Rom. 11:25 Fulness of Gentiles
Gentile c Rom. 13:10 Law fulfilled
b Rom. 15:29 Fulness of Gospel
a 1 Cor. 10:26 Provoke to jealousy (22)

Christ C a Eph. 1:10 Fulness of seasons Head up

and the b Eph. 1:23 Fulness of Him
Church b Eph. 3.19 Fulness of God
a Eph. 4: 13 Fulness of Christ Till we come

A Col. All things created by Him

1:19 GOD INVISIBLE THE IMAGE
Firstborn

B Col.2:9 Observance of Meat, Drink, Feast, New Moon, Sabbath, Philosophy and
vain deceit. Elements (8. 20).

¿Que es la Vibración? El movimiento interno que tiene cada ser o cuerpo que ocurre por el movimiento del electrón alrededor del
átomo, todo cuerpo lo contiene, desde el corpúsculo y la célula, hasta el astro y los universos todos están en vibración constante.
La vibración de todo cuerpo puede ser captada y en especial la humana, la de las plantas, piedras y animales por el aura, el Aura
que sería: Un campo electromagnético que rodea a cada ser, está compuesto por numerosas líneas de fuerzas, crece y decrece,
emite y recibe ondas como todo lo que existe, su sustancia es de la naturaleza de la Luz, es decir a la vez corpuscular y
ondulatoria. Su volumen es variable, así como también lo es su color... El termino tan famoso hoy en día Vibración ya era conocido
por las culturas antiguas y famosas como lo es la Egipcia y la de Grecia, de dónde se dio a conocer por medio del gran sabio y
maestro ” HERMES TRIMEGISTRO ” , en sus enseñanzas del KYBALION sobre los 7 principios de verdad del Universo, en el
tercer principio de estos: EL principio de Vibración que dice ” Nada está inmóvil ; todo se mueve; todo vibra “; Este principio
encierra la verdad y explica las diferencias entre las diversas manifestaciones de la materia, de las fuerzas, de la mente y aun del
mismo espíritu, las que no son sino el resultado de los varios estados vibratorios . Desde el Todo, que es puro espíritu, hasta la
más grosera forma de materia, todo está en vibración... En la actualidad el ser humano está en un estado de vibración de 35.000
átomos ciclo por segundo que depende de su frecuencia de vibración que seria la velocidad de rotación y amplitud del electrón
alrededor del átomo, o sea, a mayor velocidad y amplitud del electrón alrededor del átomo, mayor frecuencia vibratoria y a menor
velocidad y amplitud del electrón alrededor del átomo, menor frecuencia vibratoria, la menor frecuencia vibratoria podría
representarse con el color negro y al mayor por el color blanco, que representa la máxima pureza, el estado del espíritu... Por los
actuales cambios tanto físicos como internos que esta experimentando el hombre, ya todos aprobados por la ciencia , queriendo
decir que estamos en una época donde estamos subiendo la vibración y estamos pasando de tener una conciencia tridimensional
de captación de la forma a una cuatri y quintudimensional ;estamos despertando una conciencia cósmica, es imperativo realizar
una preparación tanto física como espiritual , en la cual se suba la frecuencia vibratoria de 35.000 ciclos a 50.0000 o 70.000 ciclos
átomo por segundo, para ayudar al despertar del hombre de esa conciencia cósmica y para adecuarse a los cambios que se están
sucediendo que son inevitables e imparables, no son ni malos ni buenos , solo forman parte de la evolución del hombre y del
planeta... Para subir nuestra actual frecuencia vibratoria a una mayor , se nos han comunicado por medio de los hermanos
mayores 9 puntos a seguir que se irán desglosando uno por uno a continuación, estos 9 puntos también son utilizados cuando se
va a realizar algún trabajo cósmico especial o se va a tener un contacto físico o de cualquier tipo con los hermanos mayores, pues
se tiene que subir la vibración para que se de el contacto con ellos , si no se pueden generar trastornos y alteraciones en nuestros
cuerpos físicos y cualquiera de nuestros otros cuerpos , por que la vibración de ellos es muy alta, oscila entre 1.000 ciclos átomo
por segundo , 1`000.0000 y hasta más , por lo tanto es imperativo equipararse a ellos subiendo la vibración para que se de lo mejor
y no vaya a ver problemas y se de el contacto deseado y programado por ellos... Tenga en cuenta que solo se sube la vibración
practicándolos juiciosamente y constantemente, no espere cambios de hoy a mañana , y tenga cuidado de no caer en excesos ni
fanatismos, practíquelos muy suavemente y cuando los sienta, y si es posible investigue y amplíelos y asesore de alguien idóneo
en los temas que se van a tratar. Los 9 pasos a seguir son: 1. Ayuno (Purificación) 2. Alimentación (Sana y equilibrada) 3.
Coherencia (Pensar, Decir y Actuar) 4. Respiración (Revitalización) 5. Oración (Hablar con DIOS) 6. Meditación (Escuchar a DIOS)
7. Manejo Energía Sexual (Ternura y Amor) 8. Mantralización (Canto a la Creación) 9. Vivir en el Eterno Presente (Aquí y Ahora)..

1. AYUNO ( PURIFICACIÓN ) - El AYUNO es un acto de la perdida de la necesidad de comida que se realiza voluntariamente y la
abstención de probar alimentos por un determinado lapso de tiempo, especialmente de alimentos sólidos , permite que el
organismo descanse de la función de digestión y actúe en las funciones de eliminación y desintoxicación activando las
capacidades de regeneración y renovación de todo el organismo, es el método de purificación mas natural y efectivo que se
conoce, los animales lo realizan cuando se sienten enfermos, se abstienen de comer hasta que se mejoren y la Fuerza Vital de la
naturaleza les devuelve la salud ; al ayunar se le permite a la naturaleza obrar en el cuerpo físico y los otros cuerpos, y ella se
encarga de restablecer la armonía y el equilibrio orgánico... El ayuno limpia el cuerpo de podredumbre y lo mantiene sano
eliminando todo lo indeseable acumulado en el cuerpo durante años de alimentación inadecuada, también en el ayuno se elimina
la materia astral inferior del hombre, provenientes de la alimentación carnívora y del consumo del café, tabaco y alcohol; si bien un
proceso de completa purificación de los cuerpos puede llevar años, según el grado de envenenamiento del cuerpo... En la
Medicina AYURVEDA, que es la medicina que se practica en India por las enseñanzas que dejaron los VEDAS, esa gran cultura y
civilización especial, se aconseja que se Ayune un día a al semana para tener una muy buena salud... La mayoría de las religiones
tienen como bien el de ayunar , cada una lo practica y lo dispone de un modo diferente y hasta tienen propósitos un poco
diferentes , pero lo importante es ayunar, en la Iglesia Cristiana se tiene como bien Ayunar antes de cualquier evento de carácter
Espiritual , como: antes del miércoles Santo de ceniza y la comunión, en el Islam se realiza un mes entero de Ayuno que se conoce
como RAMADÁN, También el Nuevo y Antiguo Testamento consideran al Ayuno como señal de Humildad y penitencia ante DIOS,
en los mensajes Marianos siempre la Virgen María lo aconseja como preparación para la segunda venida de su hijo Jesucristo, en
las culturas indígenas los Chamanes lo utilizan tanto para ellos como para sus adeptos antes de realizarse un rito de iniciación
sagrado o para la toma de alguna sustancia entero gena como el YAGHE... QUE OCURRE CUAN DO AYUNAMOS ?... Las
reacciones que provoca el ayuno son fisiológicas y completamente normales. Lo que le ocurre es que el organismo moviliza sus
propias reservas de calorías para conseguir la energía que necesita. Por lo tanto ayunar voluntariamente no es pasar hambre, ya
que durante el Ayuno desaparece el apetito. Y tampoco supone entrar en un estado de debilitamiento o desnutrición, pues esta
situación sólo se produce cuando no se dispone de reservas. Tampoco se producen carencias de elementos esenciales, ya que
nuestro cuerpo tiene reservas... Esta movilización de las reservas que hemos acumulado permite una regeneración o limpieza
interna. Por eso, el Ayuno tiene un efecto depurativo sobre el organismo. Además, al verse liberado del trabajo de la digestión,
dispone de un aporte de energía extra que puede utilizar para otras funciones con mayor eficacia... El primer hecho que se
constata es que el organismo tiene reservas. Estás se acumulan en el organismo en forma de glucosa, grasas o proteínas... EL
PROPÓSITO DEL AYUNO :.. Los propósitos del ayuno son muchos : por salud, de higiene, a nivel anímico, sociales y espirituales ,
y cada uno de ellos no se puede separar del otro, van interrelacionados, pero los principales son 2: por Salud y Espiritual , de
hecho el espiritual fue el mas usado antiguamente, ahora las medicinas alternativas y naturistas lo aconsejan y utilizan mucho pues
han encontrado en el un método eficaz para la desintoxicación del organismo y para curar y ayudar a mejorar un sin fin de
enfermedades... El propósito del Ayuno en la parte Espiritual: Es el de sacar todo lo venenoso, podredumbre, vibraciones astrales
inferiores y energías negativas, y la Fuerza Vital de la naturaleza echará del cuerpo todo lo indeseable para que teniendo un
cuerpo mas sano y purificado, el SER se manifieste mas claro y profundo y así el cuerpo sea digna morada del Espíritu Santo, así
como el hombre que construye una casa nueva , y hecha primero los cimientos de la casa vieja y levanta nuevamente sólidos
cimientos para construir con materiales nuevos una morada nueva digna donde vivir, así el Ayuno hecha todo lo que no sirve y
estorba y construye un nuevo templo con materiales nobles al Espíritu para que pueda vivir en el cuerpo y se manifieste mas
claramente... El propósito del Ayuno en la parte Física: Es el de por medio de al acción de abstenerse de alimentos permitir que el
organismo descanse de la labor diaria de alimentación activando las capacidades de desintoxicación, eliminación y renovación y
así mejorar la salud y ayudar al proceso de algunas enfermedades y curar otras...
* Beneficios del AYUNO Físicos:
* Ayuda al organismo a vencer las infecciones
* Elimina la materia astral inferior y vibraciones negativas
* Purifica los cuerpos sutiles
* Limpia el cuerpo
* Clarifica y fortifica la mente y los sentidos
*Saca los venenos del organismo por años de alimentación inadecuada..
* Quema la basura que estorba el flujo de la sangre
* Normaliza y purifica al sangre
* Revitaliza el cuerpo por el ahorro de energía que se hace
* Se experimenta modificaciones hormonales que estimulan los mecanismos de desintoxicación hepática
* Variaciones en el nivel de acetona actúan sobre el cerebro, produciendo sustancias que estimulan la capacidad curativa del
cuerpo
* Activa eliminaciones en general y en especial las de las materias morbosas del organismo
* Da un reposo completo a los órganos vitales
* Para la absorción de alimentos que se descomponen en los intestinos e intoxican después el cuerpo
* Vacía las vías digestivas y elimina las bacterias de putrefacción
* Da a los órganos de eliminación la oportunidad de poner al día su trabajo y facilitar la eliminación
* Restablece la química fisiológica normal y las secreciones normales
* Rejuvenece las células y tejidos y regenera el cuerpo
* Permite la conservación de la energía y la canaliza de una forma mas adecuada
* Aumenta los poderes de digestión y asimilación
* Mejora le funcionamiento general del cuerpo
* Beneficios del AYUNO Espirituales:
* Limpia el Templo del Espíritu Santo
* Aumenta la fuerza de voluntad
* Por la fuerza de voluntad necesaria para resistir los embates del apetito aumenta la estabilidad psicológica y la auto confianza
*Puesto que las cadenas que atan al espíritu con el cuerpo son mas frágiles es mas fácil conseguir el éxtasis y gozo espiritual
* Se consigue una visión interior mas aguda y profunda
* Aumenta la devoción personal y la Fé
* Se establece una comunicación mas directa con DIOS, puesto se puede oír mas fácil
* Una llave al poder de DIOS
* Hacernos mas humildes
* Clarifica la visión interior
* Poder oír con mas claridad la voz interior
* Es un tiempo propicio para entregarse mas a la Meditación y Oración
* Hace del hambre una virtud
* Ayuda al despertar de la Conciencia Cósmica
* Se canaliza la energía mas fácil, puesto que es una época propicia para la sanación
* Puesto que se esta mas limpio interiormente se puede realizar ejercicios de Perdón mas fáciles y efectivos
* El Ayuno es algo sobrenatural, por que aplastamos lo carnal , para entrar en lo sobrenatural de DIOS.
* Ayuda al domino propio
* Nos pone en lugar de sensibilidad al Espíritu
* Como realizar el AYUNO..

Lo más importante que se tiene que tener en cuenta para cualquier tipo de ayuno es la salida y entrada de este, tiene que ser lenta
, suave y paulatinamente, tiene que hacerse con jugos de frutas o frutas frescas, si se prefiere y es muy aconsejable al día anterior
antes de hacerse el Ayuno , comer lo mas ligero posible para ir preparando el cuerpo para el otro día en el que vamos a Ayunar, y
en el momento de la comida tomar solo un jugo de alguna fruta o comer alguna fruta y tomar mucho agua, también es importante
no comer nada después de las 10:00 pm para una mejor preparación , pero si se puede tomar agua, y entre más ,mejor... Si lo vas
a realizar por vez primera es mejor que antes te vayas preparando suprimiendo una o 2 comidas en el día por semana , y ve
aumentando poco a poco con el fin de que no se resienta el estómago, hasta que puedas llegar a suprimir el alimento por un día,
comenzando lo puedes realizar una vez por mes y luego , cada 20 días, 15 días y si lo prefieres una vez por semana, los Ayunos
prolongados son mejor realizarlos en épocas de vacaciones donde se le va a dedicar todo el tiempo al proceso y para el trabajo
espiritual en Semana Santa o antes como previa preparación, pues es una época muy especial al igual que el 25 de Diciembre
donde ciertas Energías Cósmicas llegan al planeta y al estar en estado de purificación se canalizan y se captan mejor... El mejor
Ayuno de todos es solo el de agua, pero para muchas personas no es aconsejable por su salud y es muy difícil, se aconseja
entonces el de frutas o jugo de frutas pero sin dulce, de pronto un poco de miel , se tiene que tener en cuenta que las frutas tienen
que ser dulces , no se pueden ácidas : naranja, mandarina , limón, etc.., estas pueden resentir el estómago. El Ayuno tiene que ir
acompañado de Oración, Contemplación , Meditación y Reflexión , para obtener mejores resultados y esta es una época muy
propicia para reflexionar y mirar la vida que llevamos, para mirar que no nos llena y no nos tiene contentos, aceptarlo y perdonarlo
sin juzgarlo , y seguir adelante... Por la mañana antes de comenzar el día recién nos levantemos se realiza una oración donde
ofrecemos ese Ayuno para la Gloria de DIOS y el bien nuestro y pedimos su protección para que no valla a ver inconvenientes y
todo salga muy bien, y nuevamente cuando vallamos a tomar el primer vaso de agua lo ofrecemos a DIOS para que lo recargué de
su luz y ese sea nuestro alimento, cerramos los ojos y visualizamos como la luz de DIOS baja sobre el agua y lo llena y no lo
tomamos sintiendo como nos estamos alimentando de la Energía de DIOS, es muy aconsejable realizar este pedido y visualización
en cada baso que nos tomemos, o si lo estamos realizando con frutas o algún zumo de frutas también se puede hacer, al final de la
noche cuando se rompe el Ayuno se agradece a DIOS por este Ayuno y todo lo que nos ayudó en el. El Ayuno se puede romper al
otro día, es mejor o si no por la noche y se consume algo muy ligero como caldos, jugos o alguna fruta, y al otro día ya podemos ir
aumentando en comer sólidos poco a poco... Cuando se realiza con frutas , se escoge una sola fruta durante el día , y la vamos a
consumir en 3 tiempos, al desayuno , un poco, al almuerzo un poco más de cantidad, pues es el momento más importante, es
donde le estomago está totalmente abierto, y es donde se le tiene que dar más cantidad y a la comida la misma cantidad del
desayuno o un poco menos, durante todo el día se puede ir acompañado de agua, y si es en cantidades mejor, este tipo de Ayuno
es muy bueno como preparación antes del de solo agua, y si se prefiere se puede realizar de solo agua y al almuerzo nos
tomamos un jugo o comemos alguna fruta...

Los filósofos antiguos atisbaron una serie de correspondencias entre el cuerpo humano y el universo. Esta relación está en el
origen de todo conocimiento esotérico y es en cierta forma un mapa de reconexión o un esquema anagógico (a la vez que
analógico), que permite al hombre unirse con la divinidad entrando en ritmo y consonancia con este orden. La idea que se deriva
del sistema de correspondencias es que el hombre contiene en su interior el mismo arquetipo que el universo entero y por lo tanto
si logra conocerse a sí mismo podrá conocer a Dios, como los místicos han dicho, parafraseando la famosa frase inscrita en el
oráculo de Delfos. Decía Paracelso que habían tres libros sagrados: la Biblia, el cuerpo del hombre y el cosmos. El origen de las
correspondencias, esa madeja de hebras luminosas que todo lo abarcan, según la tradición hermética viene de Egipto, donde se
dice que existían dos columna o pilares en los que Thot (Hermes, egipcio) había escrito esta sabiduría primordial, antediluviana, la
cual habría sido custodiada por los sacerdotes. Según Jámblico en sus Misterios egipcios, Pitágoras y Platón estudiaron las estelas
egipcias en el templo de Sais (posiblemente Seth). La fuente principal que la tradición recoge es el texto atribuido a Maneto, el
Libro de Sothis (o Libro de Sirio). Maneto fue un sacerdote egipcio, y el texto en cuestión fue citado por el monje Jorge Sincelo,
pero ha desaparecido. La mayoría de los investigadores modernos consideran que es apócrifo, algunos investigadores esotéricos,
como G. S. Mead, sin embargo, consideran que tiene bases sustanciales. Se dice ahí que Thot (el primer Hermes) inscribió una
estela con sus conocimientos en jeroglíficos –para preservar la tradición ante un cataclismo– que luego fueron traducidos. Este
sería también el origen remoto de la famosa Tabla Esmeralda delCorpus Hermeticum. Las expresiones más detalladas, y por
momentos abrumadoras, de las correspondencias, seguramente las podemos encontrar en la India de los Vedas, con sus
elaborados sacrificios en los que cada elemento corresponde a otro en una red vertiginosa de analogías. El fuego, el soma, el
ghee, el poste central, el caballo, todos estos elementos no sólo están conectados con partes del cuerpo, planetas y con
divinidades sino que son también un teatro vivo de memoria que narra acciones distantes en los mundos celestes. La otra gran
demostración de una intrincada manifestación de correspondencias la podemos encontrar entre los cabalistas y los alquimistas.
Los primeros, al buscar la creación del golem, crean un monumental edificio de correspondencias siguiendo el principio de que el
universo entero fue construido con las 22 letras hebreas: las permutaciones de estas letras en correspondencia con los días de la
semana, las 10 emanaciones, las partes del cuerpo, los astros y otros elementos, constituyen un sistema de meditación que es a la
vez una especie de plano arquitectónico para construir un templo invisible. Los segundos, para conseguir la piedra filosofal,
vinculan los siete metales con los siete planetas y con las siete etapas de la gran obra y de aquí se desprende una serie de
correspondencias también con toda la fauna y flora conocida e imaginaria, haciendo una medicina espagírica de la naturaleza,
también llamada agricultura celestial. Ambos, el golem y la piedra filosofal, son símbolos de un cuerpo espiritual, de una nave
psíquica para alcanzar un nuevo estadio de conciencia y acercarse a la divinidad. Tanto la alquimia como la cábala utilizan el
sistema astrológico, cuyos orígenes algunos sitúan en Babilonia, pero que su verdadera raíz es desconocida y seguramente más
antigua. Dice Borges sobre la cábala: La idea del Ser eterno que siempre ha tenido esas 10 emanaciones es de difícil
comprensión. Esas 10 emanaciones emanan una de otra. El texto nos dice que corresponden a los dedos de la mano. La primera
emanación se llama la Corona y es comparable a un rayo de luz que surge del Ein Sof, un rayo de luz que no lo disminuye, un ser
ilimitado al que no se puede disminuir. De la Corona surge otra emanación, de ésa, otra, de ésa, otra, y así hasta completar 10.
Cada emanación es tripartita. Una de las tres partes es aquella por la cual se comunica con el Ser Superior; otra, la central, es la
esencial; otra, la que le sirve para comunicarse con la emanación inferior. Las 10 emanaciones forman un hombre que se llama el
Adam Kadmon, el Hombre Arquetipo. Ese hombre está en el cielo y nosotros somos su reflejo. Ese hombre, de esas 10
emanaciones, emana un mundo, emana otro, hasta cuatro… Aryeh Kaplan en su traducción del Sefer Yetzirah (p.193) nos dice
que existen 1021 posibles permutaciones de las letras del alfabeto hebreo, “un número cercano al número total de estrellas totales
en el universo… así que a partir de las permutaciones del alfabeto, un nombre puede ser formado para cada estrella del universo.
Esto en concordancia con la enseñanza de que cada estrella tiene un nombre individual”. Kaplan también menciona: “los
comentarios señalan que los ángeles son como almas para las estrellas… y esto también significa que las estrellas y los planetas
son como los ‘cuerpos’ de estos planetas’”. Así tenemos esta idea de la correspondencia entre el hombre y las estrellas y los
ángeles; Platón en el Timeo menciona también que cada alma está asociada a una estrella. Manly P. Hall en su libro La filosofía de
la astrología nos introduce a la visión del microcosmos de Paracelso: En palabras de Paracelso: “Hay una estrella en el hombre por
cada estrella en el cielo”. Y porque hay una estrella en su interior, el hombre puede encontrar su contraparte en el universo; y
porque tiene esta estrella en su propia alma, el hombre puede entender y fusionar sus energías racionales y emocionales con las
más distantes en los cielos. No puede haber entendimiento entre disímiles. El hombre sólo puede entender lo que él mismo es. Es
porque él es todas las cosas que a fin de cuentas puede entender todas las cosas. Este es el gran misterio que enseñaban en los
antiguos templos. Es por esta sublime verdad que el ser humano tiene un potencial ilimitado, y contiene en sí mismo la posibilidad
de crecer y saber todo. En el budismo podemos encontrar una interpretación distinta de las correspondencias en el concepto de
pattica samuppada (la originación dependiente) y en la metáfora del collar de Indra, utilizada en el budismo hua-yen para explicar
este mismo concepto. Se dice que quien percibe la originación dependiente ve el Dharma (la ley, la verdad). La idea de la
originación dependiente es un tanto compleja pero en resumidas cuentas sostiene que todas las cosas y todos los fenómenos
dependen el uno del otro y por lo tanto no tienen una realidad independiente. Todas las cosas dependen la una de la otra y si
siguiéramos esta cadena hasta su última causa arribaríamos a la nada o al vacío. La realidad es entonces el vacío mismo o el
cuerpo del Dharma, el dharmakaya, que está ligado a su vez con el estado de nirvana y aquello que no ha nacido ni morirá, aquello
que es perpetuo devenir. El santo budista Nagarjuna dice que este cuerpo iluminado, también llamado dharmadatu, emerge
cuando se purifican todas las aflicciones y los compuestos: es como la mantequilla en la leche que no vemos hasta que no se
purifica. Podemos agregar, con una licencia poética que podría ser imprecisa dogmáticamente, que ese cuerpo purificado, ese
ghee medular, es la totalidad del universo integrada en la unidad de la conciencia. Así se describe el famoso collar de Indra: Lejos
en la mansión celestial del gran dios Indra hay una fabulosa red que ha sido colgada por un astuto artífice de tal manera que se
extiende infinitamente en todas direcciones. En sintonía con los gustos extravagantes de las deidades, el artífice ha colgado una
joya resplandeciente en cada “ojo” de la red, y como la red es en sí misma infinita en dimensión, las joyas son infinitas en número.
Ahí cuelgan las joyas brillando como estrellas de primera magnitud, una suprema visión que sostener. Si seleccionamos
arbitrariamente una de estas joyas para inspeccionar y la analizamos de cerca, descubriremos que en su superficie azogada se
reflejan todas las demás joyas de la red, infinitas en número. No sólo eso, sino que cada una de las joyas reflejadas en esta joya
también está reflejando todas las otras joyas, así que hay un número infinito de procesos de reflejo ocurriendo. Por último tenemos
a la física moderna, que ha encontrado una extraña propiedad en la naturaleza básica de la materia: el entrelazamiento cuántico.
Esta propiedad, considerada como una aberración fantasmagórica por Einstein, describe la conexión instantánea que existe entre
dos partículas que han entrado en contacto entre sí, no obstante la distancia (una definición muy parecida a la de la magia
simpática de James Frazer). El entrelazamiento cuántico sugiere que el universo es no-local, es decir todas las regiones del
espacio dependen la una de la otra, lo cual significa un principio intrínseco de inseparabilidad. Según el físico Mark Van
Raamsdonk: “El espacio-tiempo es sólo una imagen geométrica de cómo un sistema cuántico se entrelaza”. Todas estas ideas,
uno conjetura, apuntan desde distintos frentes a la unidad indivisible de la realidad, todas revelan que la multiplicidad y la
inconexión son meros juegos de apariencias e ilusiones. Como si observáramos el resplandor de una vela en una casa de espejos
multiplicada en miles de reflejos y, sin embargo, es una única luz la que produce todos los reflejos.

Kabbalah: los senderos de la rayuela cósmica - Cuando nuestros bienamados hermanos en la Búsqueda de la Verdad se adentren
por el incierto sendero que los logre exiliar definitivamente de la confinación física, deberán proveerse no sólo de la luz del
conocimiento, sino de un mapa que los guíe hacia la Vía Sublime distinguiéndola de las rutas accesorias del Laberinto del
Aprendizaje. Bajo este mapa místico, existen tres tentaciones las que debieran ser sopesadas a la luz del balance: La Kabbalah
como una exégesis del microsmos humano - La influencia biológica nos conmina a perpetuar la especie, cuando en realidad
esconde el hecho de seguir nutriendo de esclavos a los directores del plano físico; pocos humanos, aun aquellos en los que
pareciera arder el fuego de la rebeldía e independencia, logran superar esta valla astutamente introyectada. El condicionamiento
social y religioso junto a la manipulación psíquica son los obstáculos más comunes en los que se trastabilla emocionalmente: la
egrégora humana desvía la independencia y anquilosa las posibilidades, simulando la seguridad que emana de la multitud y la
costumbre secular; pero cuando se logra asomar la cabeza por encima de estos mecanismos sociales, surge sin demora el control
hiperdimensional, en un marco de ataque bajo la apariencia onírica; el Buscador sólo tendrá vagos recuerdos del incidente, pero su
cuerpo se lo recordará cada noche subsiguiente; finalmente, el aspecto que nos compete ahora analizar, es la orientación espiritual
que luego de sortear las duras pruebas anteriores pueda distorsionarse hacia el desbalance, ya sea del sendero siniestro de
servicio al ego (considerándose superior a los demás) o del sendero diestro, sirviendo indiscriminadamente a los demás
(desconsiderándose a uno mismo); la senda media es aquella que aplica discernimiento, balanceando el servicio de ayudar a otros
sin perjudicarse a uno mismo. Para aquellos Buscadores que han comenzado a despabilarse y entender que la vida en el plano
físico no es más que una artera invención de reingeniería hiperdimensional, diseñada para obtener velados réditos de una
descomposición orgánica controlada, entenderán que tal cuadro boschiano puede acarrear más de una disonancia cognitiva.
Nuestra visión, empero, contempla que el plano físico es tan sólo el lúgubre sótano de un Cosmos con pisos superiores menos
restringidos y más iluminados, en donde otras formas de vida basadas en materia no corpuscular —o, desde nuestra perspectiva,
en estados energéticos o plásmicos— pueden elegir con más facilidad orientarse hacia un sendero no predatorio que los encamine
hacia la omnisciencia espiritual; en Secret of the Saucers se le informa a Orfeo Angelucci: “Es todo una cuestión de la escala
vibratoria en la que se esté operando,” explicó. “La frecuencia de vibración de la materia densa, que constituye el sustrato del
planeta Tierra, es extremadamente baja, por lo tanto, los cuerpos terrenales son lentos, densos y pesados. La tasa vibratoria aquí
es bastante más alta y la materia tan tenue que parece, desde un medio físico denso como el vuestro, inexistente; pero como
ahora te encuentras en un cuerpo con una escala vibratoria acorde, los fenómenos de este mundo te son tan reales como en tu
mundo: la Tierra.” En cierto sentido, deseando comunicar cierta paz de espíritu con vehemencia pero sin exageración, es el
Buscador quien ha resuelto someterse a los desasosegados fuegos de la inclemencia corpórea para convertirse —de contar con el
conocimiento, la disciplina interna y la pericia externa, y la irreemplazable actitud— en su conquistador y vencedor. La fuente
Cassiopaea ha brindado una estratificada visión del Cosmos en siete densidades: (1) la primera, la más material y entrópica; la
séptima, la consciencia pura creativa. Si fusionamos esta visión con el modelo provisto por el magisterio taoísta, observamos una
compartimentación de tres “reinos,” donde las dualidades del Yin-Yang actúan articuladas en diferentes graduaciones: el plano
físico, con la más marcada influencia de la energía Yin; el plano etéreo, con una dualidad en balance; y el plano espiritual con la
supremacía de la energía Yang. Síntesis de las enseñanzas místicas - orientales y occidentales. En la literatura mística judía,
hallamos en El Zohar una resplandeciente exégesis que se podría resumir con la frase: “Los seres que viven Debajo, dicen que
Dios está en las Alturas; mientras que los Ángeles en el Cielo, dicen que Dios habita en la Tierra.” Y desde la colegiatura occidental
rosacruz vemos algo semejante: Robert Fludd, médico, filósofo y reconocido cabalista de la época isabelina, nos brinda una
explicación del Cosmos que es a la vez el Aleph Luminoso y el Aleph Tenebroso, fragmentado en tres grandes reinos: el mundo
empíreo (el Cielo), donde la luz excede a las tinieblas; el mundo etéreo, donde la luz y las tinieblas se equilibran en forma de éter;
el mundo elemental, donde las tinieblas dominan sobre la luz y producen los cuatro elementos. Desde este enriquecido punto de
vista, podemos entender mejor al arte-facto de 22 aristas y 10 vértices que es el árbol cabalístico, observándolo como un grafo de
dependencias cognitivas de una academia cósmica: cada escalón sefirótico representaría un nivel de consciencia, donde las
entidades necesitan encarnar para obtener, una vez trascendido, el título correspondiente de la respectiva orientación espiritual;
Thomas Minderle, en su tratado sobre Principios para la Evolución Espiritual, explica: Dentro de la jerarquía negativa, los seres se
obligan mutuamente a evolucionar a través de la competencia constante, la manipulación, el engaño, la extorsión y la violencia.
Dentro de la red positiva, los seres se ayudan entre sí y evolucionan a través de la creatividad, la compasión, la enseñanza, el
intercambio y el aprendizaje. Lograr la integración consiste en dos cualidades: obtener las lecciones necesarias para interactuar
armónicamente dentro de la polaridad intrínsecamente propia, y posteriormente haber ganado las lecciones necesarias para
interactuar conscientemente con la polaridad opuesta. Entendida nuestra concepción, el objetivo que pretendemos no será
abrumar con otra exégesis teñida de misticismo sobre el Arbol del Cosmos; tan sólo nos permitimos brindar un panorama que
integre la Kabbalah con las orientaciones espirituales, ya sea que se elijan los senderos iterativos de la piedad (sefirótica) o
severidad (klifótica), o se opte por la integración inteligente de ambas que nos exonera de la necesidad de reencarnar, y sobre la
que toda entidad orgánica deberá polarizarse para abandonar con “vida” la realidad física. Los senderos del Árbol Cósmico: el
siniestro de la severidad klifótica, el recto de la piedad sefirótica, y la trascendencia a través de la integración En este sentido, el
centro mental de la humanidad terrestre reside en la sefira siniestra del tercer nivel de consciencia, y en la enorme mayoría de los
casos, se encuentra desconectado de las emanaciones en los niveles superiores. Empero, esto no la aisla de comunicaciones
esporádicas: ciertas sefiras pueden actuar como resortes y contrapesos que la afecten ya sea para influenciarla en una u otra
dirección. Una abducción extraterrestre podría verse como una sefira siniestra superior que desconsidera el libre albedrío de una
sefira inferior, afectando la línea de continuidad en la experiencia humana e inyectando patrones psíquicos para amoldarla a sus
designios. Del mismo modo, una intervención divina sería la respuesta de una sefira trascendente a una solicitud que respeta y
honra la libertad de una sefira inferior. Asimismo, el fenómeno de la canalización —ya sea que el médium permanezca en trance
inconsciente, o por el contrario, cuando efectúe una comunicación iatromántica, por medio de los centros psíquicos superiores en
los opera el discernimiento— puede verse como el intercambio de información entre sefiras, aunque, y sobre todo en el caso de la
primera, no necesariamente en su orientación más trascendente. Pero enfocándonos en la canalización iatromántica, es decir
cuando la consciencia ordinaria sube a niveles superiores, es enriquecedor lo que Warren Kenton (Z'ev ben Shimon Halevi) tiene
para ofrecernos en su libro La Obra del Cabalista: La idea de un maestro interior no es ajena a la Cábala. Muchos cabalistas han
hablado a lo largo de los siglos de su maggid o instructor celestial. [...] Con frecuencia, el que dirige al cabalista es un instructor
interior —cuando es necesario,— y lo aconseja sobre cuestiones de las que no puede leer o tener acceso en la Tierra. Afirman las
leyendas que a los más grandes cabalistas les enseñó el mismo Elías, que es el responsable de la dirección espiritual de la
Tradición. Otras historias nos cuentan que Elías no sólo se presenta con muchos disfraces en ayuda de los que han emprendido el
camino interior, sino que se manifiesta como el Khidr o “el Verde,” en la tradición sufí, en la que desempeña el mismo papel. De
acuerdo con el folklore, Elías no tenía padre ni madre, como Melquisedec, que inició a Abraham a principios de la tradición. Todo
esto sugiere que otros personajes extraños como Hermes Trismegistro o Thoth no eran otro que Enoc, el Iniciado, el primer ser
humano plenamente realizado, aunque en diferentes formas. Pero no desconsideremos otorgar cierta licencia a esta posibilidad de
un daemon interno que desde una sefira trascendente ofrezca una guía discreta para elevar nuestra consciencia a las regiones
empíreas del Cosmos; parafraseando a Fulcanelli, esta “élite” humana —descendiente de Elías— en verdad pertenece al Pueblo
de Guachos: es “guacha,” en palabras del psicólogo argentino Roberto Torres, de padre y madre terrena. Ahora bien, el profeta
Elías —en griego «Ηλίας»: Solar—, que en las Escrituras dice ser arrebatado hacia el Cielo, como un espíritu puro, en un carro de
luz y fuego, nos hace recordar al catedrático Peter Kingsley quien, en su obra En los Oscuros Lugares del Saber, estudia a los
iatromantis: los sanadores seguidores de Apolo Oulios, (4) aquellos que incuban al infans solaris: Así pues, Parménides viaja a los
infiernos, a las regiones del Hades y del Tártaro, allí de donde no regresa casi nadie. [...] Parménides viajaba en dirección a su
propia muerte de manera consciente y voluntaria: Las yeguas que me llevan tan lejos como el anhelo alcanza avanzaron, después
de venir a recogerme, hacia el legendario camino de la divinidad que lleva al hombre que sabe a través de lo desconocido vasto y
oscuro. Y adelante me llevaron, mientras las yeguas, que sabían dónde ir, me llevaban y tiraban del carro; y unas jóvenes
indicaban el camino. Y el eje de los cubos de las ruedas silbaba, ardiendo con la presión de los dos ruedas bien redondas, una a
cada lado, que veloces avanzaban; las doncellas, hijas del Sol, que habían abandonado las moradas de la Noche hacia la luz, se
apartaron los velos de la cara con las manos. [...]

Y la diosa me dio la bienvenida amablemente, me cogió la mano derecha entre las suyas y me dijo estas palabras: “Seas
bienvenido, joven, compañero de inmortales aurigas, que llegas a nuestra casa con las yeguas que te llevan. Porque no ha sido
hado funesto el que te ha hecho recorrer este camino, tan alejado del transitado sendero de los hombres, sino el derecho y la
justicia. Y es necesario que te enteres de todo: tanto del inalterado corazón de la persuasiva Verdad como de las opiniones de los
mortales, en las que no hay nada en que confiar. Pero aprenderás también esto: cómo las creencias basadas en apariencias
deben ser verosímiles mientras recorren todo lo que es.” Para concluir, deseamos enfatizar que el macrocosmos del árbol
cabalístico, por el principio de correspondencia, es una representación del microcosmos en el ser humano; en un contexto
ecuménico, la famosa frase “hagamos al hombre a Nuestra imagen, conforme a Nuestra semejanza,” cobra un sentido bastante
práctico: los tres dan-tiens —los recintos del cinabrio o campos del elíxir— poseen una relación unívoca con las tres regiones
cósmicas: el dan-tien inferior con el reino físico: el centro motriz e instintivo; el dan-tien medio con el reino psíquico: el centro
emocional, y el dan-tien superior con el reino espiritual: el centro intelectual. Esta desconexión de las emanaciones superiores
puede religarse, esto es, reintegrarse: este es el olvidado objetivo trascendental de las religiones (del latín religare: volver a unir).
Pero para respetar, al menos de cierta manera, el gesto de silencio harpocrático que nos exige el argot, sólo diremos, en vista de
ayudar a nuestros bienamados hermanos en la Búsqueda de la Verdad, que el arte consiste en hacer ciclar dentro del árbol
microcósmico la energía de la vida, evitando que ésta se disperse del dan-tien falso inferior, en la búsqueda del placer para el
ego... y no hemos de olvidar que durante las horas de reposo, habrá salteadores emboscados en los linderos de los caminos
oníricos que intentarán arrebatarlo con nefastas promesas lujuriosas.

OUR SEPTENARY SYSTEM - “The Principles of Truth are Seven; he who knows these, understandingly, possesses the Magic Key
before whose touch all the Doors of the Temple fly open.” –The Kybalion
"There is a chain of Earth globes. One of the Earth globes is called Earth and is the outermost, or surface World, in the chain. Each
of the globes is within its own harmonic range or bandwidth consisting of specific natural dimensional laws particular to the realm
that the globe is occupying. This chain of 7 Earth globes are concentric spheres, one surrounding the other, culminating at the
Center Point within. It is this Center Point that all 7 Earth globes (or spheres, or worlds, or planes) emanate from, in a standing wave
form structure. These spheres are composed of different gradients of consciousness substance, but interpenetrate each other to a
degree, and form a unified group. Our own globe is the most material of the globes and exists on the outermost, and lowest, of the 7
planes. The higher, more inner, globes are increasingly more subtle in form and are non-physical, and beyond our range of physical
senses. Gottfried de Purucker said, "Our Solar system is septenary, that it is composed of 7 planes, or worlds, and hence that there
are 7 Suns in it, of which we see [with our physical senses] but one Sun, the lowest in degree". The model proposed here
addresses the Inner Earth Theory, that there is not just one Inner Earth, but rather six Inner Earths beyond our surface world, one
within the other moving inwards towards the Center Point. There are Inner Suns within the Sun as well. There are 7 planes or
spheres comprising the Galactic body, the Solar bodies, the Planetary bodies, the Human bodies and the Atomic bodies. Our 7
chakras anchor us into each of the 7 spheres. The macro 7 Spheres of Creation are synonymous with the micro Auric Field of the
human body--the "Coat of Many Colors" comprised of the 7 color Rays. This model also addresses the Atlantis and Lemurea
question. Atlantis occupies the next sphere moving inward from us. Lemurea occupies the next sphere moving inward from Atlantis.
Hyperborea occupies the next sphere moving inward from Lemurea. And so on to the Source Point at the center. We exit the
Formless Un-namable Infinite Source at the Center Point and enter into etherealization, moving out through Spheres of increasing
density and onward into physicality. Along the way (in early Lemurea) we split from our androgynous form into separate Male and
Female bodies. This action of moving out from the Source Point and into physicality is the out-breath and is synonymous with the
biblical "descent into flesh"--the arc of descent--and addresses the "Adam and Eve" allegory in the process. We then move back in
through the spheres and into etherealization again before re-entering the Source Point. This is the in-breath and is synonymous with
the biblical "crucifixion and resurrection"--the arc of ascent." -- Scott Maurer

7's IN THE HUMAN EXPERIENCE

7 Notes of the musical scale.
7 Systems of Symbolism - symbolism of numbers, symbolism of geometrical figures, symbolism of letters, symbolism of words,
symbolism of magic, symbolism of alchemy, symbolism of astrology.
7 Rays - Red, Orange, Yellow, Green, Blue, Purple, Violet.
7 Planets of the Ancients - Moon, Mercury, Venus, Sun, Mars, Jupiter, and Saturn.
7 Personality Types - Solar, Lunar, Martial, Mercurial, Jovial, Venusian, Saturnine.
7 Days of Week - Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday.
7 Arch Angels - Michael, Gabriel, Raphael, Uriel, Chamuel, Jophiel, and Zadkiel.
7 Metals - Lead, Tin, Iron, Copper, Mercury, Silver, Gold.
7 Chakras - Muladhara, Svadhisthana, Manipura, Anahata, Vishuddha, Ajna, Sahasrara.
7 Stages of Alchemy - Calcination, Dissolution, Separation, Conjunction, Fermentation, Distillation, Coagulation.
7 Hermetic principles - Mentalism, Correspondence, Vibration, Polarity, Rhythm, Cause and Effect, Gender.
7 Spheres
7 Root Races
7 Days of creation
7 Seals in the Book of Revelations.
7 Virtues in Christianity - Faith, Hope, Charity, Fortitude, Justice, Prudence, Temperance.
7 Vices in Christianity - Pride, Envy, Anger, Sloth/dejection, Avarice, Gluttony, Lust.
7 Stages of Man - the infant, the school-boy, the lover, the soldier, the judge, the elderly man, the senile one.
7 Sciences - grammar, rhetoric, logic, arithmetic, music, geometry, and astronomy - the first three in the Trivium, the remaining four
in the Quadrivium.
7 Wonders of the Ancient World - Pyramids of Egypt, Hanging Gardens of Babylon, Statue of Zeus at Olympia, Temple of Artemis
at Ephesus, Mausoleum of King Mausolus at Halicarnassus, Colossus of Rhodes, Pharos Lighthouse at Alexandria.
7 Seas - Arctic, Antarctic, North and South Pacific, North and South Atlantic and the Indian Ocean.
7 Continents - North America, South America, Africa, Europe, Asia, Australia and Antarctica.
7 Seven Sisters of the Pleiades star system.
7 Parts to the embryo - Amnion, Chorionic Villi, Spinal Cord, Heart, Brain, Umbilical Cord, Yolk Sac.
7 Parts of the body - Head, Thorax, Abdomen, Two Arms, Two Legs.
7 Glands - Pineal, Pituitary, Thyroid, Thymus, Adrenal, Lyden and Gonad.
7 Divisions to the brain - Cerebrum, Cerebellum, Pons Varolii, Medulla Oblongatta, Corpus Callosum, Spinal Cord, Meninges.
7 Parts to the inner ear - Vestibule, Auditory Canal, Tympanic Membrane, Ossicles, Semi-circular Canal, Cochlea, Membranous
Labyrinth.
7 Parts to the retina - Cornea, Aqueous Humor, Lens, Vitreous Humor, Retina, Sclera, Iris.
7 Cavities to the heart - Right and Left Ventricle, Right and Left Atrium, Tricuspid Valve, Mitral Valve, Septum.
7 Body systems - Muscular, Skeletal, Nervous, Digestive, Respiratory, Excretory, Circulatory.
7 Bodily functions - Respiration, Circulation, Assimilation, Excretion, Reproduction, Sensation, Reaction.
7 Levels in the Periodic Table of the Elements.
“The Principles of Truth are Seven; he who knows these, understandingly, possesses the Magic Key before whose touch all the
Doors of the Temple fly open.” –The Kybalion
"And God created seven Heavens and seven Earths, and through them all, descends His Command." -- scriptural translation
SOUND AND LIGHT - "On the Fifteenth Octave there are 768 Oscillations in 1 Second--the Highest Audible Note is created--and
the power of our ears to cognize further such Energy, ceases. Lift up your right hand to try this experiment; wave your wrist one way
and another; wave it 16,384 times in 1 Second--that is what a little insect does, which you with all of civilization behind you cannot
do. Up to the Fifteenth Octave, there is no trouble noticeable, but, right afterwards, the experimenter’s miseries start. The
atmosphere resents the terrific tremor and, as it were, refuses to obey it to produce the Oscillatory Frequency. The only way to
circumvent it would be to decrease this Resistance, which can be done by making a partial vacuum and injecting the Energy onto
the rarefied gas. Promptly comes the response. Such rarefied medium may then be motioned up to the Nineteenth Octave, making
524,- 288 Oscillations in 1 Second. The resultant Energy is still a mode of Sound; it is an Inaudible Rarefied Medium Sound, which
is incapable of appealing to the human ears. However, such Sound as an Oscillatory Frequency, has a tremendous potency for
DISINTEGRATION OF OBJECTS, and it is good that outside of certain research laboratories, its existence or method of production
is not generally known. I call it Ethereal Sound. On the Twentieth Octave, with 1,048,576 Oscillations in a Second, all Sound, even
the inaudible, vanishes and to make more Oscillations it is vital to change the Medium of Conduction or Transportation. At the Forty-
Fifth Octave, the Oscillatory Frequency increases to 35,184,372,088,832 in a Second and the sense of Touch tells that a new kind
of Energy is born; it is called Heat; I cognize it as Invisible Light or Dark Light. We commence here to slide into the Invisible Thermal
Spectrum of the Sunlight which has the Oscillatory Frequencies from the Forty-Sixth to the Forty-Eighth Octave. Heat evolves at the
45th; the addition of all the numerals, 1 + 2 + 3 + 4+ 5 + 6 + 7 + 8 + 9 is 45; therein lies an occult fact. On the Forty-Ninth, as the
Oscillatory Frequency per Second jumps to the high mark of 562,949,953,421,- 312, the middle of the Spectrum of Colors has come
into existence, the first Visible Light starting around 318 Trillion Oscillations per Second, with a faint Red Color. While the range of
the ear for hearing is from the Fourth to the Fifteenth Octave, a span of 11 or 12 Octaves, the eye can sense only 1 Octave—the
Forty-Ninth. As soon as the Fiftieth is reached, with its 1,125,899,906,842,624 Oscillations, the faint Violet of the Spectrum vanishes
and for Seven more Octaves, the potent, but invisible Ultra-Violet Range of Radiations is entered. In the Bible, in Genesis, the First
Book of Moses, in Chapter 1, verses 3 and 4 is written, “And God said, Let there be Light and there was Light. And God saw the
Light, that it was good: and God divided the Light from the darkness.” God spoke to make Light; thus, Sound preceded Light. On the
Oscillatory Frequency principle, this is very correct, because, Sound is an Energy acting on a lower Scale. The fact of Light
appearing on the Forty-Ninth Octave, explains its Divine origin and relation; God is represented symbolically by the Circle and only
7 Circles can produce the Cosmos; the Number 49 is made by 7 X 7 and stands for each Circle having been traversed 7 times in
Cosmogenesis, before Light came into being, with its Seven Spectral Colors. This beauteous Energy was preceded by Sound with
its Seven Musical Notes, the Number 7 keeping pace with the Scales of Evolution."